Documente Academic
Documente Profesional
Documente Cultură
PHONE
888-252-2832 (Canada/US)
or
613-784-6100 (World)
The ALCATEL call center (888) 252-2832 is available 24 hours per day, seven days
per week (including holidays) for helping the customer. This single-point contact for
assistance reaches out to all areas of customer support, including:
After-hour emergencies
Phone Technical support. Click here for details.
On-site Technical support
Module repair
Installation and test
Software and hardware upgrades
Technical training
Registration for Update Notification by e-mail
Registered customers have access to online support documentation (i.e., product
bulletins and documentation update notifications) at the following Website:
http://www.usa.alcatel.com
For registration information, contact your Alcatel representative.
CTAC
Telephone Technical Support
Telephone Assistance, Normal Working Hours (CST 8am 5pm M-F)
TAC supports all Alcatel North America Microwave products. This includes routine questions and
emergency service.
Telephone Assistance, Emergency After-Hours
Defined as loss of traffic, standby equipment, or network visibility on traffic-bearing systems.
Available through our Customer Service Agents (CSA).
Call (888) 252-2832. Ask for the Microwave (MW) or the Network Management for Radio (NMR)
emergency duty engineer.
Company name
First and last name (Please spell it for us!!)
Telephone number
City and state. Street address if applicable
Equipment type number
A brief description of the problem affecting their equipment
TL-9000 Severity (see table below).
Priority: High, Medium, or Low.
TL-9000 Severity
Critical
Major
Minor
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Introduction
3EM20188AAAA
Introduction
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Appendix C Alarm and Control Reference Guide: This appendix describes the MCS-11 alarms,
statuses, and controls given in Appendix B.
Appendix D Addressing Guidelines: Instructions are included to install an MDR-8000 rack.
Appendix E MDR-8000 SNMP Alarms: This appendix describes the contents of the SNMP trap/
notification messages.
Appendix F Modem Provisioning: This appendix provides procedures to provision a modem (if
required) to communicate with the USI computer.
Appendix G Over-The-Hop Test Procedures: These procedures provide support for preventive
and corrective maintenance on operational system.
Appendix H COMPACT Indoor Shelf: This appendix describes the differences between the
MDR-8000 hot-standby shelf and the Compact indoor shelf.
Appendix I Compact Outdoor Unit: The MDR-8000 Compact outdoor unit is an outdoor enclosure configuration that allows operators to setup a non-standby terminal or repeater by
attaching the enclosures to a wall, pole, or tower. The Compact outdoor unit consists of the
Compact indoor shelf mounted inside the outdoor enclosure.
Appendix J Ring Radio Troubleshooting: This appendix provides the information to troubleshoot an MDR-8000 radio configured as a ring radio.
Appendix K Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 4 DS1: This appendix provides the procedure to
upgrade an 8 or 16 DS1, DS3, and/or OC3 MDR-8000 radio to Ethernet with up to 4 DS1.
Upgrade kits, containing the modules, subboards, and assemblies required to upgrade, are
available.
Appendix L Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 32 DS1: This appendix provides the procedure to
upgrade DS1, DS3, and/or OC3 MDR-8000 radio to Ethernet with up to 32 DS1. Upgrade kits,
containing the modules, subboards, and assemblies required to upgrade, are available.
Intro-2
3EM20188AAAA
Front Matter
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
While the manufacturer has attempted to detail in this manual all areas of possible danger
to personnel in connection with the use of this equipment, personnel should use caution
when installing, checking out, operating, and servicing this equipment. As with all electronic
equipment, care should be taken to avoid electrical shock in all circuits where substantial
currents or voltages may be present, either through design or short circuit.
Definitions of Danger, Warnings, Cautions, and Notes used throughout this manual are
described below:
DANGER
Possibility of
Injury
to Personnel
An operating procedure, practice, etc., which, if not correctly followed could
result in personal injury or loss of life.
WARNING
Possibility of
Damage
to Equipment
An operating procedure, practice, etc., which, if not strictly observed, could
result in damage to equipment.
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
Note
An operating procedure, condition, etc., which is essential to highlight.
FM-1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Front Matter
ELECTRICAL SAFETY: GENERAL RULES
Carefully observe the specific procedures for installation, turnup, and maintenance where ac
or dc power is present and observe the following general information/rules.
a. Short circuits in low-voltage, low-impedance dc circuits can cause severe arcing that may
result in burns or eye injury. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry while
working with primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.
b. This equipment is intended for installation in a RESTRICTED ACCESS LOCATION.
LASER PRECAUTIONS
NOTICE:
FM-2
3EM20188AAAA
Front Matter
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
DANGER
Possibility of
Injury
to Personnel
FM-3
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Front Matter
STATIC ELECTRICITY
CAUTION
ESS
UNIT CONTAINS
ELECTROSTATIC-SENSITIVE ITEMS
MAINTAIN ANTISTATIC PROTECTION
When the above symbol or letters are displayed, observe special precautions.
The discharge of static electricity experienced when taking off a nylon shirt, or upon touching a door handle after sliding across an automobiles synthetic seat cover, produces only a
minor discomfort. However, the voltage discharged in these instances can be 20000 or 30000
volts. Because the energy involved in such discharge is extremely low, the human body experiences only a minor discomfort. An electrostatic-sensitive device can withstand voltage
spikes of 10 to 100 volts only and can be damaged or effectively destroyed by a discharge
that might go unnoticed by a technician. MOS and CMOS have some built-in protection; consequently, a false sense of security often prevails. Unfortunately, the protection is effective
only against the lower levels of static charges.
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
Common plastics (synthetic insulating materials), clothing, and paper or cardboard are the
most common sources of static charges.
The following ESS devices fall into this category:
MOS (Metal Oxide Semiconductor) capacitors, transistors, ICs
CMOS (Complementary MOS) transistors, ICs
JFET (Junction Field Effect Transistors) transistors
IGFET (Insulated Gate FET) transistors
FM-4
3EM20188AAAA
Front Matter
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
MODULE HANDLING
The risk of damage to an ESS device is reduced considerably after assembly into a
circuit designed to protect sensitive components; however, certain basic precautions should
be taken to reduce static charges to harmless levels.
a. All modules should be handled as static sensitive devices unless they are known not to
contain static sensitive parts.
Heel straps are only effective while standing on conductive or static dissipative surfaces.
b. Ground straps, either wrist (PN 055-9357-010) or heel (PN 055-9357-020), should be
worn prior to and while touching or handling modules containing ESS devices.
c. Surfaces with resistance to ground in excess of 100 megohms, such as ordinary tile,
should be covered with properly grounded static dissipative runners or waxed with a
static dissipative wax (PN 057-4000-006).
d. Modules should be stored (even temporarily), packed, and shipped in antistatic bags or
containers.
e. Do not handle the circuit board or components unnecessarily. Use plastic handle.
f.
Optical connectors are used in lightwave transmission systems to connect, disconnect, and
reconnect fiber-optic cables with a minimum of loss. The optical connection is made by physically aligning two optical fibers so that one fiber illuminates the other. Loss in the connection is determined by:
a. Separation (Optimum coupling occurs when the two fibers just touch.)
b. Lateral alignment (Lateral misalignment of the optical fibers is the greatest contributor
to connector loss.)
c. Angular alignment (Optical loss due to angular misalignment is minimal in biconic connectors. Nominal angular misalignment is less than 0.2 degrees.)
d. Facing surface condition (The facing surfaces of the optical fibers are highly polished to
prevent reflection and refraction. Scratches on the facing surfaces and/or contamination
of these surfaces by dust, oil from the operators finger, or other foreign matter can cause
excessive loss.)
To maintain the integrity of the system, the polished optical surfaces must be protected from
physical damage and contamination.
CAUTIONS
Observe the precautions described in the general care of optical connectors on the following
sheets.
FM-5
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Front Matter
PROTECTIVE COVERS
The connectors, both plugs and sleeves, are provided with protective covers that should always be used
when the plugs and sleeves are disconnected for any purpose. After installation, these protective covers
should be stored in a clean plastic bag at the site. This ensures that the covers are available when a cable is
disconnected for maintenance.
CLEANING
Prior to installation, use a pressurized optical duster to blow away dust particles that may
have settled on the connectors. If connectors require a more thorough cleaning, 95% pure
isopropyl alcohol may be applied from a wash bottle and wiped away using lint-free wipes or
swabs.
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
The polished surfaces can be scratched when the connectors are mated if the optical fibers
rotate after they touch or if a foreign particle is on one of the optical fibers. To avoid damaging the polished surfaces, always clean the connectors with pressurized optical duster before
mating, and prevent the optical fiber from rotating while the connectors are being mated.
SUMMARY
To preserve the integrity of the optical connectors, always observe the following precautions:
a. Clean optical connectors in accordance with the instructions outlined in the paragraph,
Cleaning Instructions.
b. Never touch the polished optical surface of a connector. Oil from your finger can
degrade the performance of the connector and attract dust particles.
c. Never allow an optical fiber to rotate when optical connectors are being mated. Allowing
the plug on biconic connectors to rotate can scratch the polished surface of the optical
fiber.
d. Always protect optical connectors with protective covers when they are disconnected for
any reason. Before the protective covers are installed, they should be cleaned with optical duster.
e. Store protective covers in a clean container when not in use. Never store the protective
covers in your pocket.
FM-6
3EM20188AAAA
Front Matter
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
This document establishes a procedure for the cleaning of optical connectors. Connections
between the modules and the fiber patchcords that interconnect these types of equipment
must be clean to maintain maximum performance and to prevent damage to the delicate
glass core of the optical fiber.
The purpose of the cleaning steps is to remove any foreign material that might get caught
between the mating fibers. Foreign material, such as dust, can shatter the glass fiber. Any
film coating, such as oil from your finger, can attenuate the transmitted signal. To clean connectors, use the following materials:
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
DANGER
Possibility of
Injury
to Personnel
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Front Matter
WARRANTY/REPAIR INFORMATION
NOTICE Where the contents of this information conflict with the contract of purchase, the requirements of the contract of purchase shall govern.
GENERAL WARRANTY PROVISIONS
Company name, billing and shipping address, phone number, and name of person(s)
to contact in case of questions
Emergency Orders
Advance Replacement
Return Address.
The RA number must be prominently marked on shipping label, the packing list, and any
correspondence regarding the order.
FM-8
glossary
0:1
Pronounced zero for one indicating that the channel tributary interface has no hardware protection. This is used to indicate a single nonstandby radio in a rack.
0:2
1+1
Pronounced one plus one indicating that the channel tributary interface has hardware backup.
1:N
10BASE-T
IEEE physical layer specification for 10 Mbps over two pairs of Category 5 or 5E wire.
100BASE-T
IEEE physical layer specification for 100 Mbps over two pairs of Category 5 or 5E wire.
1000BASE-T
IEEE physical layer specification for 1000 Mbps over four pairs of
Category 5 or 5E wire.
A
ACO
Alarm cutoff.
ACK
Acknowledge.
Address
Adapter
Printed circuit board that plugs into a PC to add to capabilities or connectivity to a PC. In a network environment, a network interface card
is the typical adapter that allows the PC or server to connect to the
intranet and/or Internet.
Ad-Hoc Network
ADR
Address.
AIS
Glossary - 1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Glossary
Alarm
ALC
Alias Signal
A false signal in telecommunication links from beats between the signal frequency and sampling frequency.
Ancillary Equipment
APC
Apple Talk
An Apple Computer networking system that support Apples proprietary local talk.
APS
ASCII
ASE
ASIC
Asynchronous
(General)
Asynchronous
(MCS-11)
Radio is providing RCV or outgoing clock and data and incoming XMT
clock and data is being provided by an outside source.
ATPC
Attenuator
Device or passive network that absorbs or reduces the power of an applied signal.
Auto-negotiate
Auto-Negotiation
The function that allows two devices at either end of a link segment
to negotiate common data service functions, such as data speed and
networking modes (FD and HD). The auto-negotiation function automatically connects to the highest technology available without any intervention from a user, manager, or management software.
AUX
Auxiliary
Auxiliary Channel
Glossary-2
3EM20188AAAA
Glossary
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
B
Backbone
The part of a network that connects most of the systems and networks
together and handles the most data. The major transmission path of
a network used to connect subnetworks.
Backhaul
The part of a network that sends data back to a central data collection
center. An example of would be the transmission path between an end
user and a central office.
Balanced line
Two-wire line where the signal potential is the difference between the
two lines, neither of which is ground.
Balun
Bandwidth
Baseband
Battery
Baud
Unit of signaling speed (symbols per second). Also called Symbol Rate
in baseband transmission and Modulation Rate in broadband transmission. Baud Rate (Mb/s) x 7 (nominal number of bits per symbol) =
Bit Rate (Mb/s).
Beacon Interval
A beacon is a packet broadcast by the Access Point to keep the network synchronized. A beacon includes the wireless LAN service area,
the AP address, the Broadcast destination address, a time stamp, Delivery Traffic Indicator Maps, and the Traffic Indicator Message
(TIM).
BER
Binary
Bipolar
Bit
A measure of data integrity, given as the number of bit errors in a digital transmission divided by the number of bits transmitted. Expressed as a power of 10, as in 10-6 or E-6 (a rate of one error in every
one million bits).
Bit interval
Bit stuffing
Process that adds extra bits to a signal to bring all signals up to the
same common level.
Glossary-3
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Glossary
Boot
BOOTP
Bootstrap Protocol. An Internet protocol that enables a diskless workstation to discover its own IP address, the IP address of a BOOTP
server on the network, and a file to be loaded into memory to boot the
machine. This enables the workstation to boot without requiring a
hard or floppy disk drive. The protocol is defined by RFC 951.
B3ZS
B8ZS
Bridge
Broadband
Browser
B/S
BSS
Basic Service Set. An infrastructure network connecting wireless devices to a wired network using a single access point.
Buffer
A buffer is a shared or assigned memory area used by hardware devices or program processes that operate at different speeds or with
different sets of priorities. The buffer allows each device or process to
operate without being held up by the other. A buffer is a midpoint
holding place and exists not so much to accelerate the speed of an activity but to support the coordination of separate activities.
BW
Bandwidth
Byte
A collection of bits (typically 8) operated upon as a unit. Most character sets use one byte per character. The capacity of storage devices is
frequently given in bytes or in K bytes (K meaning 1024 bytes).
Glossary-4
3EM20188AAAA
Glossary
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
C
Cable Modem
Card Cage
Carrier Equipment
(carr)
CAT 5
CAT 5e
CEPT
Channel
(CHAN, CH)
Channel Density
Checksum
CIDR
Circulator Function
Device that directs RF power between RF components. Example: circulator to antenna; circulator between XMTRs.
CLA
CLK
Clock.
Glossary-5
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Glossary
CNTR, CNTRL
Control, controller.
CONFIG
Configuration.
COS
Change Of State.
COM
Communication.
Command Path
CPM
CPU
CRC
CSMA/CA
Carrier Sense Multiple Access /Collision Avoidance. In local area networking, this is the CSMA technique that combines slotted time-division multiplexing with carrier sense multiple access/collision
detection (CSMA/CD) to avoid having collisions occur a second time.
This works best if the time allocated is short compared to packet
length and if the number of situations is small.
C-Sourced
Powered from a common point of two isolated sources, thereby providing uninterrupted service in the event of one power failure.
CTRL
Control.
CV
Coding Violations
D
DAC
Digital-to-analog converter
DADE
Daisy-chained
Data Packet
Data Stream
Data word
dB
dBm
Glossary-6
3EM20188AAAA
Glossary
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
1 milliwatt.
DCC
DCCIF
DCE
Decibel
See dB.
Default Gateway
The routing device used to forward all traffic that is not addressed to
a station within the local subnet.
Delay
Demultiplexer
(DEMUX, DX)
(1) A device that separates two or more signals previously combined
by a compatible multiplexer and transmitted over a single channel.
(2) A circuit that directs information from a single input to one of several outputs at a time, in a sequence that depends on the information
applied to the control inputs.
DGPIO
DHCP
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Glossary
DIAG
Diagnostics.
Dispersive Fade
Margin
DMA
DMZ
Demilitarized Zone. Allows one IP address (or computer) to be exposed to the Internet. Some applications require multiple TCP/IP
ports to be open. It is recommended that you set your computer with
a static IP address if you want to use DMZ hosting.
DNS
Domain Name System. DNS is the way that Internet domain names
are located and translated into Internet Protocol (IP) addresses. A domain name is a meaningful and easy-to-remember handle for an Internet address.
Domain
Download
DSL
Downstream
DRAM
DRO
Drop
DS1,2,3
Bell System compatible digital signal formats: 1.544 Mb/s for DS1;
6.312 Mb/s for DS2; and, 44.736 Mb/s signal for DS3.
DSX-1,2,3
DSL
DSSS
Glossary-8
3EM20188AAAA
Glossary
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
is rejected (ignored) by most narrowband receivers. However to an intended receiver (i.e. another wireless LAN end point), the DSSS signal is recognized as the only valid signal, and interference in
inherently rejected (ignored).
DTE
Data Terminal Equipment. Devices that are either the source or the
destination of data frames. DTEs are typically devices such as PCs,
workstations, file servers, or print servers, that, as a group, are all often referred to as end stations.
DTIM
Dynamic IP Address
DTMF
Duplex
Dynamic Routing
The ability for a router to forward data via a different route based on
current conditions of the communications circuits. For example, it can
adjust for overloaded traffic or failing lines and is much more flexible
than static routing, which uses a fixed forwarding path.
E
E1
CEPT digital signal format (2.048 Mb/s) per CCITT specification G.704.
E2A
E3
E&M Signaling
Ear and mouth signaling, controlled by the application of ground or bat tery to leads so labeled. The ground/battery condition normally results
from receiver off-hook and/or an activated CALL pushbutton.
East-West; E-W
ECL
Emitter-coupled logic
EEPROM
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Glossary
ENC
Encryption
End-to-End
ENO
EPLD
Errored Seconds
An errored second is a second during which at least one of the following has occurred: coding violations, slips, and/or out-of-frame alarm.
An important reason for counting errored seconds is the quality of
statements in data service tariffs are generally given in terms of percent error free seconds. In addition, by combining the count of errored
seconds and the effective BER, a measure of the error distribution can
be obtained. Distinguishing between bursty and randomly distributed errors can be important in diagnosing a facility problem. An errored second may commence with the detection of a coding violation
and end one second later (synchronous errored second) or the one second interval may be timed independ-ently of the errors (asynchronous
errored second). Errored seconds are measured only when service is
available.
Equalizer
Network which corrects amplitude response and group delay distortions in a transmission path.
ETH
Ethernet.
Ethernet
The local area network technology that transports information between computers at speeds of 10, 100, and 1000 million bits per second (Mb/s). Currently the most widely used version of Ethernet
technology is the 10 Mb/s twisted-pair variety. The most recent ethernet standard defines the 100 Mb/s Fast ethernet system which operates over twisted-pair and fiber optic media.
ES
Errored seconds
ESCC
ESS
Extended Service Set. A set of more than two or more BSSs (multiple
access points) forming a single network.
Express Orderwire
F
Fade
Fade Margin
Fast Ethernet
Glossary-10
3EM20188AAAA
Glossary
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
FD
Full Duplex. A type of networking which supports simultaneous reception and transmission
FEC
FET
Field-effect transistor
FHSS
Finger
Firewall
Firmware
Four-Wire Line
Four wires; two are used for transmission and two are used for reception in voice-operated equipment.
FPGA
Fragmentation
Breaking a packet into smaller units when transporting over a network medium that cannot support the original size of the packet.
Frame
One cycle of a recurring number of pulses that includes a single synchronizing signal; an array of binary digits.
Frequency Diversity
(FD)
FTP
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Glossary
copy files. It can also convert between the ASCII and EBCDIC character codes. FTP operations can be performed by typing commands at
a command prompt or via an FTP utility running under a graphical
interface such as Windows. FTP transfers can also be initiated from
within a Web browser by entering the URL preceded with ftp://.
Unlike e-mail programs in which graphics and program files have to
be attached, FTP is designed to handle binary files directly and does
not add the overhead of encoding and decoding the data.
Full Duplex
G
Gateway
GFP
GigE
1000BASE-T
Gnd
Ground.
GUI
H
Half Duplex
Hardware
HCI
HD
HDB3
HDLC
Hitless Switch
Hop
Hot-Standby
Glossary-12
3EM20188AAAA
Glossary
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
HTTP
Hub
The device that serves as the central location for attaching wires from
workstations. Can be passive, where there is no amplification of the
signals; or active where the hubs are used like repeaters to provide an
extension of the cable that connects to a workstation.
I
ICQ
IDMA
IEEE
IIC
Infrastructure
Network
ILAN
Increments
In-Service
Instruction set
Designation for equipment/channel that is carrying traffic. A predetermined sequence of logic functions performed in response to a given
command or set of commands.
Interface
I2 C
Glossary-13
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Glossary
I/O
Input/output.
IP Address
In the most widely installed level of the Internet protocol, an IP address is a 32-binary digit number that identifies each sender or receiver of information that is sent in packet across the Internet. When
you request an HTML page or send e-mail, the Internet Protocol part
of TCP/IP includes your IP address in the message (actually, in each
of the packets if more than one is required) and sends it to the IP address that is obtained by looking up the domain name in the Uniform
Resource Locator (URL) you requested or in the e-mail address youre
sending a note to. At the other end, the recipient can see the IP address of the web page requester or the e-mail sender and can respond
by sending another message using the IP address it received.
IPSec
IPCONFIG
IPX
IS
In service (state)
ISM Band
Industrial, Scientific, and Medical Band. The FCC and their counterparts outside the US have set aside bandwidth for unlicensed use in
the ISM band. Spectrum in the vicinity of 2.4 GHz, in particular, is
being made available worldwide. This presents a truly revolutionary
opportunity to place convenient high-speed wireless capabilities in
the hands of users around the globe.
ISP
Isolator
J
Jitter
Junction Station
Glossary-14
3EM20188AAAA
Glossary
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
K
Kbyte
Kilo
L
LAN
Latency
LBO
LC3
LCN
LDCC
LED
Light-emitting diode.
An analog signal detected by using set thresholds and limited by amplification. This produces a quasi-digital signal with no associated
clock.
LIM
Line
Line-of-Sight
LLMan
LNA
Low-noise amplifier
LO
Local oscillator
Local Orderwire
LOF
Loss of frame
LOS
Loss of signal
LSB
LSB
Lower sideband
Glossary-15
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Glossary
M
MA
Manual (state)
MAC
Master Station
Mbps
Megabits per second. One million bits per second ; unit of measurement for data transmission.
MCS
Monitor-control system.
MDI
MDI-X
MIB
mIRC
A program that runs under Windows and provides a graphical interface for logging onto IRC servers and listing, joining, and leaving
channels.
Modem
Modulator-demodulator.
Module
An electrical assembly mechanically mounted to form a single detachable unit. A plug-in module has connectors that mate with connectors,
usually at the rear of a module shelf or card cage.
MON
Monitor.
MPU
Microprocessor unit.
MSB
MT
Maintenance (state)
Muldem
Multiplexer-demultiplexer.
12 Muldem
E12 Muldem
Multicasting
Multiline
Multimode
Related to multiple paths a light beam may travel down an optical fiber cable.
Glossary-16
3EM20188AAAA
Glossary
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Multiplex (MUX,
MX)
N
NAT
NE
Network element
Network
Nibble
The first or last half (4-bits) of an 8-bit byte. Also called a quartet.
NLT
NMT
NNTP
Node
NRZ data
Nonreturn-to-zero. A serial sequence of data bits in which the represented logic level is constant for the entire bit interval.
O
OC-N
OCM
Off-Hook
Office Alarm
Orderwire
Orderwire, Express
Orderwire, Local
OSI
OSPF
OSS
Out-of-Lock
(OOL) Implies phase-locked loop is not in phase with the input signal.
Glossary-17
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Glossary
Out-of-Service
Overhead
A signal or series of signals assigned and transported with the payload until the payload is demultiplexed. It is used for functions that
are necessary to transport the payload.
Overhead bit
a non-data bit used in addressing, control, error detection, error control, or synchronization; contrast with information bit.
OWDT
Orderwire data
P
Packet
Parity
A method of checking the accuracy of digital data transmission. A parity bit is transmitted as either a logic 1 or a logic 0, indicating whether
the total number of logic 1s in the transmission is odd or even.
Passphrase
Used much like a password, a passphrase simplifies the WEP encryption process by automatically generating WEP encryption keys.
Payload
Data to be transmitted.
Payload Envelope
PC
Personal computer
PCA
PCB
PC Card
PCS
PDU
PECL
PERF
Performance
Phase Lock
Relation between two signals, whereby one signal frequency is an exact integral multiple of the other signal frequency, and the phase angle between the two signals does not vary.
Ping
Packet internet grouper. An Internet utility used to determine whether a particular IP address is online. It is used to test and debug a network by sending out a packet and waiting for a response.
PLL
Phase-locked loop
Plug-and-Play
Poll Word
A predefined sequence of bits transmitted from an MCS master station to all remote stations.
Glossary-18
3EM20188AAAA
Glossary
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Port
PPP
PPPoE
Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet. PPPoE is a method for the encapsulation of Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) packets over Ethernet
frames from the user to the ISP over the Internet. One reason PPPoE
is preferred by ISPs is because it provides authentication (user name
and password) in addition to data transport. A PPPoE session can be
initiated by either a client application residing on a PC or by a client
firmware residing on a modem or router.
PPTP
Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol. A protocol that allows corporations to extend their own corporate network through private tunnels over the public Internet. Effectively, a corporation uses a widearea network (WAN) as a single large local area network (LAN). A
company no longer needs to lease its own lines for wide-area communication, but can securely use the public networks. This kind of interconnection is known as the Virtual Private Network (VPN).
PQ/ECRC
Power Quick/Equipment Controller Radio Controller. Subboard attached to main board on AE-37AA TMN Interface module.
PRBS
PREV
Previous.
Protection Channel
Protocol
Set of communication rules. In the context of data networking, a protocol is a formal set of rules and conventions that governs how computers exchange information over a network medium.
PROV
Provision, provisioning.
Q
QAM
QUICC
R
Rack
RAM
Random Noise
A signal having a random (and therefore unpredictable) instantaneous amplitude. It contains no periodic frequency components, and
its spectrum is continuous.
Glossary-19
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Glossary
RAS
RCP
RCV, RCVR
Receive, receiver.
RCVR Threshold
RDS
Regulator
Repeater
RF
RIP
RJ-45
Roaming
Router
Protocol dependent device that connects subnetworks together. Routers are useful in breaking down a very large network into smaller
subnetworks. However, routers typically introduce longer delays and
typically have much lower throughput rates than bridges.
RSC
RSL
RSS
RTS
Glossary-20
3EM20188AAAA
Glossary
RZ
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
S
SAW
Shelf assembly, wired. A rack mounted card cage, with backplane and
connectors in place and wired.
SBF
Scanner
A remote MCS station unit which accepts several parallel inputs, and
generates a serial data word which includes information regarding
the status or condition of each input.
SCC
SCI
SDCC
Server
Service channel
Orderwire plus supervisory signals; nonrevenue-bearing channel provided as part of a transmission system for operation, maintenance,
monitoring, and control of the system.
SES
Severely Errored
Second
Severely errored second is a second which contains more than N coding violations. The value of N will vary with frame size and bit rate
and is chosen to correspond to a bit error ratio of approximately 103, assuming errors are randomly distributed. This count may be
used to determine problems for particular types of services. It may
be used as a measure of facility outage duration. In conjunction with
errored seconds and effective BER, the severely errored second
count yields additional information on error distribution. Like errored second, severely errored seconds should be measured only
when service is available.
SF
Superframe
SFP
SIBDL
SICA
Simplex
Single Mode
Related to the single path a light beam may travel down an optical fiber cable.
SMC
SMCRA
Glossary-21
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Glossary
SMTP
SNMP
SOCA
Software
SOH
Section Overhead
SONET
Space Diversity
A method of reception that uses two receivers receiving the same information on the same frequency, but by different paths, by means of
two (usually vertically) spaced antennas. The better of the two outputs is selected by switching for application to associated equipment.
Spare
SPE
SPI
Glossary-22
3EM20188AAAA
Glossary
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
by the recipient computer and are taking place only with resources
that are known and trusted from previous transactions. In addition to
being a more rigorous inspection, stateful packet inspection closes off
ports until connection to the specific port is requested. This allows an
added layer of protection from the threat of port scanning.
SPI
Splitter
Spread Spectrum
SSID
Standby
A powered-up, operating, monitored system available for service either on an automatic switch or manual patch basis.
Static IP Address
Static Routing
Station
STM-N
Subnet Mask
The method used for splitting IP networks into a series of subgroups, or subnets. The mask is a binary pattern that is matched up
with the IP address to turn part of the host ID address field into a
field for subnets.
Switch (data)
Synchronous
(General)
Timed to a clock.
Synchronous
(MCS-11)
Radio is providing RCV clock and data and XMT clock and data.
Glossary-23
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Glossary
T
T&R
TCM
TBOS
TCA
TCM
TCP
TCP/IP
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. Developed specifically for the Internet, TCP/IP is the basic communication language or
set of protocols for communications over a network. TCP/IP defines a
suite or group of protocols and not only TCP/IP.
TDE
TEO
Telnet
Terminal
TFTP
Throughput
TID
Target identification
Tilt
TMN
TOH
Transport overhead
Traminer
Trap
Tributary
Glossary-24
3EM20188AAAA
Glossary
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
TTL
Transistor-to-transistor logic
TWT
Traveling-wave tube
TX Rate
Transmission Rate.
U
UAS
Unassigned (state)
UDP
Upgrade
Uplink
Upload
Upstream
URL
Uniform Resource Locator. The address that defines the route to a file
on the Web or any other Internet facility. URLs are typed into the
browser to access Web pages, and URLs are embedded within the
pages themselves to provide the hypertext link to other pages.
USB
Upper sideband
USC
USI
UTP
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Glossary
V
VCO
Voltage-controlled oscillator
VCXO
Virtual Ethernet
Adapter
VLSM
VPN
W
WAN
Wide Area Network. A communications Network that covers a relatively large geographic area, consisting of two or more LAN. Broadband communication over the WAN is often through public networks,
such as the telephone (DSL) or cable systems, or through leased lines
or satellites. In its most basic definition, the Internet could be considered a WAN.
WEP
Wired Equivalent Privacy. A data privacy mechanism base on a 64bit or 128-bit shared key algorithm, as described in the IEEE 802.11
standard.
WINIPCFG
X
XMT, XMTR
Transmit, transmitter.
X,Y
Glossary-26
CONNECTION SCENARIO 1
3
PWR IN
PWR OUT
PWR OUT
CONNECTION SCENARIO 2
PWR IN
2
1
PWR OUT
CONNECTION SCENARIO 3
3
CONNECTION SCENARIO 2
1
Typical
Application
TYPICAL APPLICATION
3
XMT
RCV
2
XMT
Filter
F1
XMT
Filter
F3
XMT
Filter
F4
F1 F4
Energy Bounces
off Filter
XMT
Filter
F2
XMT
Filter
F1
XMT
Filter
F2
XMT
Filter
F3
XMT
Filter
F4
TERM
TERM
FIG B
10/01/06
ZERO
INSERTION
LOSS
IN
OUT
OUT
IN
SIGNAL
ABSORBED
Figure C
10/04/06
Typical Application
TERM
3
2
RF FROM
B XMTR
CIRCULATOR
RF
SWITCH
XMT
PORT
ON DIPLEXER
RF
FROM
A XMTR
(ON LINE)
ISOLATOR
3
TERM
3EM20188AAAA
General Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
GENERAL
INTRODUCTION
The MDR-8000 series Microwave Digital Radios consists of:
1.1
Solid-state, licensed and unlicensed, digital radios that provide transport for DS1, E1,
DS3, OC3, STM-1, and Ethernet in 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, and 11 GHz RF bands.
Low Capacity 8, 12, 16, 24 Mb/s data at 32 TCM; 12 and 24 Mb/s data at 128 TCM
High Capacity 50 and 150 Mb/s data at 128 TCM
MDR-8000i 2, 4, 8, 12, or 16 CCITT E1 channels at either 32 or 128 TCM
MDR-8000s OC3/STM-1 (3 North American Standard STS1 channels with 3 wayside
DS1 channels) or 1 STS1 channel with one wayside DS1 at 128 TCM
MDR-8000u 2, 4, 8, or 16 North American Standard DS1 channels at 32 TCM
or 1 North American Standard DS3 channel with 1 wayside DS1 channel at 64 QAM.
SHELF CONFIGURATIONS
The MDR-8000 is available in two shelf configurations: hot-standby shelf and Compact indoor
shelf. The hot-standby shelf mounts in a rack. The Compact indoor shelf can be mounted in a
rack or in an outdoor enclosure to form the Compact outdoor unit.
1.2
1-1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
General Section
3EM20188AAAA
General Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
General Section
MCS-11, Telemetry Byte Oriented Serial (TBOS), and TMN (SNMP) Alarm/Control
Interface
Two independent PCM audio channels
NAMING CONVENTION
The MDR-8000 series radio naming conventions are as follows:
1.4
LINE CAPACITY:
MDR-8XXXX-XXX
8
12
(ETHERNET/DATA)
16
24
50
150
=
=
=
=
=
=
8 Mb/s
12 Mb/s
16 Mb/s
24 Mb/s
50 Mb/s
150 Mb/s
LINE CAPACITY:
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
2 DS1/E1s
4 DS1/E1s
8 DS1/E1s
12 DS1/E1s
16 DS1/E1s
1 DS3
OC3/STM-1 (1 STS1)
2 DS3
3 DS3
OC3/STM-1 (3 STS1)
(DS1/E1/DS3/OC3/
STM-1 DATA)
E=
i =
s=
u=
2
4
8
12
16
45
52
90
135
155
ETHERNET
INTERNATIONAL DATA RATE
SONET
UNLICENSED
FREQUENCY BAND: 02
04
05
06
07
08
10
11
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
2 GHz*
4 GHx
5 GHz
6 GHz
7 GHz
8 GHz
10 GHz
11 GHz
GENERATION
* Extra naming convention is required for the equipment identifier labels in the 2 GHz band.
See System Application Rules drawing 3EM142470000BGZZA for details.
LMW-3121F
12/14/06
1-4
3EM20188AAAA
General Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
ORDERING INFORMATION
The radio is shipped as a complete unit; therefore, ordering information must specify the
following:
1.5
System capacity:
2, 4, 8, 12, or 16 DS1
2, 4, 8, 12, or 16 E1
1, 2, or 3 DS3 with/without wayside DS1
OC3/STM-1 (1 or 3 STS-1 channels with/without wayside DS1)
Ethernet DS1 capacity
Ethernet data capacity
System configuration: non-standby, non-standby/space diversity, hot-standby, hotstandby/space diversity, frequency diversity
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS
The MDR-8000 radio can be provisioned as a terminal, synchronous repeater, ring terminal, or
ring repeater.
1.6
1.7
RADIO CONFIGURATIONS
Basic Configurations
The MDR-8000 supports the three basic configurations:
1.7.1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
General Section
Ring
Non-standby radios are typically used in ring systems where the radios are protected by the
ring architecture.
1.7.2
Optical Configurations
Two configurations are available: 2 or 4 fiber configuration and 2 x 4 fiber configuration. The 2
or 4 fiber configuration provides direct connection on a non-standby shelf with customers 2fiber equipment or on a hot-standby shelf with customers 4-fiber equipment. The 2 x 4 fiber
configuration provides connection between the four fibers on a hot-standby shelf and customers 2-fiber equipment.
1.7.4
Primary Power
The MDR-8000 series radios operate from 20.5 to 60 Vdc primary power with positive or negative ground.
1.8.1
1-6
3EM20188AAAA
General Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
TMN Interface
The AE-37AA Telecommunications Management Network (TMN) Interface module, Alcatel
part number 3EM13462AA provides Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) support for the MDR-8000 family of radios along with a low speed general TCP/IP Transport
intended for network management traffic. The TMN Interface module provides data, service
channel interfaces, runs SNMP Agent Code, and collects alarm information from the MDR8000 controller (reference Functional Description Section). The TMN interface module provides a built-in five-port router, an internal 10BASE-T Ethernet repeating HUB supplying
three Local Area Network (LAN) ports, provides a Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) port, and a
craft interface port. Transport of TCP/IP traffic is provided via one of the radio overhead service channels.
1.8.7
1.8.7.1
Features
Optional remote provisioning and downloading capability is provided via an ELMC option key
that is mounted on the controller module.
1-7
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
General Section
Automatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) is a standard feature that can be enabled or
disabled using the USI provisioning screens. When ATPC is disabled, transmitter power is
fixed at the recommended maximum level. When ATPC is enabled, transmitter power may
be reduced up to 10 dB from the maximum power level when the far end RSL is above a minimum level. When ATPC is enabled with timeout, transmitter ATPC activity is limited to a
maximum time without returning to minimum transmit power. After five minutes of activity, the transmit power is forced to minimum until the far end RSL returns to normal levels.
1.8.11 Service Channels Provisioning Options
The MDR-8000 provides a 256 kb/s auxiliary channel for servicing the radio. This is an overhead channel and is independent of the traffic channels. The 256 kb/s service channel contains four 64 kb/s service channels. Three of the four 64 kb/s channels (Service Channel 1, 2,
and 3) can be provisioned on the USI for a specific use. Service channel 0 is dedicated to radio
commands and ELMC. Service channel 0 is not provisionable. Only 16 kb/s out of the 64 kb/s
in this channel are used.
Note
Service channels at both ends of a hop (and end-to-end in a link) must be
provisioned the same. One service channel must be provisioned Audio 1
in order to use the 2 wire audio handset.
Service channel provisioning is interactive. When an option is selected for any service channel,
that option is excluded from selections on the other applicable service channels. Provisioning
options for Service Channels 1, 2, and 3 are listed:
Service Channel 1 (64 kb/s channel) can be used to carry 4-wire audio, RS-232 data, or
MCS-11/SNMP fault alarm information.
AUDIO 1 and 2 Two audio provisioning options (AUDIO 1 and AUDIO 2) are provided for Service Channel 1. Each audio channel is a 4-wire audio channel that provides off-hook detection, level control, and E and M-lead signaling. AUDIO 1 also has
DTMF decoding that allows a specific station to be dialed. External connection to
AUDIO 1 is J316. External connection to AUDIO 2 is J317.
AUDIO 1 also contains the circuits to support the 2-wire audio handset. One of the
three service channels must be provisioned Audio 1 in order for the handset to be operational.
RS-232-1 RS-232 Channel 1 is an RS-232 formatted data channel that can provide
interface to an external computer/modem. External connection to RS-232-1 is J312.
MCS-11 The MCS-11 channel is an RS-422 formatted data that provides an interface
to an external MCS-11 Monitor Control System or TSM system, used to control multiple MCS-11 systems. External connections to the MCS-11 include J307, J308, J309
and J310.
1-8
3EM20188AAAA
General Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Service channel 2 (64 kb/s channel) - can be used to carry 4-wire audio, RS-232 data, or
MCS-11 fault alarm information.
Two PDUs are available for use with the MDR-8000: Power Distribution Unit PN 695-6200001/002 and Power Distribution Unit PN 3EM13317AA (Fuse Panel).
1.8.13.1 PDU PN 695-6200-001/002
This PDU is currently used for MDR-4000 series radios and has been replaced by PDU
PN 3EM13317AA. This PDU requires two rack increments. It provides enough power for
two MDR-8000 shelves at 24 vdc battery and three MDR-8000 shelves at 48 vdc battery.
1.8.13.2 PDU PN 3EM13317AA (Fuse Panel)
This is the preferred PDU for MDR-8000 applications. This PDU requires three rack increments. The unit itself requires two increments. One increment above the PDU is required
for heat dissipation. The fuse panel provides fuses for up to four MDR-8000 shelves (sixteen
20 Amp fuses; two A and B + and two A and B - per shelf) and two AUX shelves (eight 10
Amp fuses). Battery input voltage can be 20.5 to 60 Vdc. An optional relay card is available
that provides eight Form-C relay outputs for radio major and minor alarms. A front panel
alarm LED is provided to indicate a blown fuse. No rack or shelf alarms are provided on the
fuse panel.
1.8.14 Capacity Upgrade
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
General Section
Assuming no frequency or band change, DS1 to DS3 conversion can be accomplished by changing out the I/O interface modules, LBO board, and capacity keys and installing DS3 software.
Electrical DS3 to optical OC3/STM-1 conversion can be accomplished by changing out the I/O
interface modules, exchanging the LBO board with the OC3/STM-1 AUX Interface, and changing capacity keys and installing OC3/STM-1 software. Changing out the LBO or AUX board
requires interrupting traffic for the duration of the procedure.
1.8.16 Conversion to Ethernet
Note
Refer to System Document Mapping drawing in Diagrams Section for
software compatibility information.
Table 1 - 1 Software
CD ROM
PART NUMBER
DS1/E1
695-9406-021*
DS3
695-9406-022*
OC3/STM-1
695-9406-023*
695-9406-030
Ethernet
695-9406-024
3EM19579AAAA
TMN
3EM14629AAAA
1-10
3EM20188AAAA
General Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Table 1 - 2 PC Guidelines
ITEM
MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS
CPU
Pentium
Speed
RAM
Graphics
VGA
Display
Color
Hard Disk
Required
100 Mbytes
CD ROM Drive
Required
Mouse
Optional
Operating System
Serial Port
2400 b/s
Internet USI
The universal User System Interface (USI) with Internet feature allows USI clients to monitor
and control remote MDR-8000 radios anywhere in the world using Internet Protocol (IP). See
Figure 1 - 4. The USI server connects to a radio in the network via an RS-232 cable and communicates with one or more remote USI clients through the Internet. The client polls the
server for radio status and alarms. The radio connected to the server polls other radios in the
network using the Extended Link Monitor control (ELMC).
1.9.1
R-232 Cable
Alcatel MDR-8000
USI Server
USI Client
USI server communicates with MDR-8000 through R-232 and forwards the data to USI Client
what it requests through Internet Protocol (IP).
MDR-1176F
06/27/06
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
1.9.1.1
3EM20188AAAA
General Section
The client must know the IP address of the server in order to communicate with the server.
1.9.1.2
See Figure 1 - 5. The USI with Internet requires an administrator password and a regular
user password to operate. The administrator has access to any and all USI functions and
controls the regular users access. The admin user can also modify client and server configurations. The regular user has access to all USI screens and functions except downloading
software. The regular user is not allowed to modify server configuration.
Client
Password
Password
Server
MDR-1175F
06/27/06
06/13/05-orig
3EM20188AAAA
General Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
RADIO CHARACTERISTICS
Physical, environmental, and electrical characteristics are provided for each radio listed.
1.10
Radio List
MDR-8X02 1755-1850 MHz Licensed Microwave Transport
MDR-8X02 2.4 GHz Licensed and Unlicensed Microwave Transport
MDR-8X02 WCS Band 2.305 2.360 GHz Licensed Microwave Transport
MDR-8X04 4.400-5.000 GHz Radios
MDR-8X05u 5.8 GHz Unlicensed Radios
MDR-8X05ui 5.8 GHz Unlicensed Radios
MDR-8X06 6 GHz Low-Capacity Radios
MDR-8X08 7/8 GHz Low-Capacity Radios
MDR-8X10 10 GHz Low-Capacity Radios
MDR-8000 CommPak Low-Profile Shelf with Outdoor Enclosure
MDR-8000 Ethernet Radio
SNMP Management for Alcatel MDR-8000
MDR-8606-45, Alcatel MDR-8506-90
MDR-8606 6 GHz High-Capacity Radios
MDR-8608 7/8 GHz High-Capacity Radios
MDR-8611 11 GHz High-Capacity Radios
MDR-8706s 6 GHz High-Capacity Synchronous Radio
MDR-8708s 7/8 GHz High-Capacity Synchronous Radio
MDR-8711s 11 GHz High-Capacity Synchronous Radio
1-13
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
General Section
CHARACTERISTICS
TMN INTERFACE
Type
Signals
Logic Levels
Clock Rates
Internal
External
Termination
Front panel Craft interface Port
Input Signals
TTL
Logic 1
Logic 0
RS-422
Logic 1
Logic 0
Difference Voltage
RS-232
Logic 1
Logic 0
Output Signals
TTL
Logic 1
Logic 0
Differential RS-422
Voc
Difference Voltage
Load Impedance
RS-232
Logic 1
Logic 0
Output Impedance
1-14
3EM20188AAAA
General Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
CHARACTERISTICS
MCS-11
Type
RS-422-compatible on backplane. Interfaces to 15pin D-style connectors (J307 and J310 terminated
only). Interfaces to 15-pin D-style ribbon connectors
J308 and J309 (mode dependent).
Receiver
Logic 1
Logic 0
Input Impedance
NMT 68 kHz
Transmitter
Driver Differential Output Voltage
Output Impedance
Type
Receiver
Logic 1
Logic 0
Input Impedance
2400 Hz 120 Hz
Transmitter
Driver Differential Output Voltage
Output Impedance
2400 Hz 10 Hz
1-15
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
General Section
CHARACTERISTICS
AUDIO HANDSET
Type
Frequency
300-3400 Hz
Level
Impedance
220 ohms
Off-hook
Type
Data Rate
14.4 kb/s
Input Levels
Logic 0
Logic 1
Output Levels
Logic 0
Logic 1
Type Connector
Levels
Input
Output
E-lead
M-lead
Interface
Connector
1-16
3EM20188AAAA
General Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
CHARACTERISTICS
CONTROL INPUTS
Number of Inputs
Input Voltage
10 kohm
Pull-Up Resistor
100 kohm
ALARM/STATUS INPUTS
Number of Inputs
Input Voltage
10 kohm
Pull-Up Resistor
100 kohm
Alarm State
Logic 0
Non-Alarm State
Logic 1
RELAY ALARM/STATUS OUTPUTS
Note: All relays default to open if card power is lost, except power supply alarms, which default to ground.
Number of Alarm Outputs
Activated State
Closure to ground
0.5 A, 100 V
Number of Outputs
Activated State
Closure to ground
0.5 A, 100 V
CONTROL STATUS INPUTS
Number of Inputs
Input Voltage
10 kohm
Pull-Up Resistor
100 kohm
1-17
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
General Section
EQUIPMENT LISTING
The following paragraphs and tables describe and list equipment supplied and optional equipment for the MDR-8000 series radio.
1.12
Parts required to order a fully functional MDR-8000 hot-standby shelf are separated into kits
for manufacturing. Separate kits are provided for the hot-standby shelf, the Compact indoor
shelf, and the unlicensed band radio. Kit contents, indented to indicate referral/hierarchy, are
listed on engineering drawings in volumes 2 and 3 of this instruction book as follows:
Hot-Standby Shelf:
Refer to Equipping Option Drawing 3DH031770000BJZZA (Crystal Oscillator crystals are
listed on drawing 3DH031770000BHZZA).
Common Radio Kits 3DH041220000UDZZA
Common Shelf Kits 3EM135950000UDZZA
Compact Indoor Shelf:
Refer to Equipping Option Drawing 3EM142470000BJZZA, 3DH031770000BJZZA (Crystal
Oscillator crystals are listed on drawing 3DH031770000BHZZA).
Common Shelf Kits 3EM150450000UDZZA
Unlicensed Band Radio
Refer to Equipping Option Drawing 3EM142470001BJZZA
Common Shelf Kits 3EM116970000UDZZA
Sub-level Shelf Kits 3EM135950000UDZZA
Frequency Agility Kits 3EM115760000UDZZA
1-18
3EM20188AAAA
General Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Part Number
Remarks
AE-37Y( ) Controller:
AE-37Y-1 5v Controller
AE-37Y-2 3v Controller
Software Dependent
3DH03155AA
3DH03155AB
Application Dependent
Power Supply
3DH03164AA
Hot-Standby Shelf
Power Supply
3DH03164AB
Fuse
264-0928-130
Capacity and
Application Dependent
Refer to Table 1 - 6
UD-35( ) Transmitter:
Application and
Frequency Dependent
Refer to Table 1 - 7
3DH04123AX
Frequency Dependent
One supplied per XMTR. The crystal oscillator subboard and crystal part numbers define this unit. The
crystal is soldered to the oscillator subboard and
factory tuned to the customers requirements.
See drawing 3DH031770000BJZZA in the Diagrams Section.
Capacity Key
Modulation and
Capacity Dependent
Refer to Table 1 - 10
1-19
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
General Section
Part Number
Remarks
Configuration Dependent
Refer to Para 1.14.
Heat Deflector
3EM03390AA
3EM14510AB or AC
3EM11901AB
Power Out
+31 dBm
+30 dBm
+27 and +29 dBm
UD-36( ) Receiver
3DH04123AX
Frequency Dependent
One supplied per RCVR. The crystal oscillator subboard and crystal part numbers define this unit. The
crystal is soldered to the oscillator subboard and
factory tuned to the customers requirements.
See drawing 3DH031770000BJZZA in the Diagrams section.
1-20
3EM20188AAAA
General Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Part Number
Remarks
Capacity Key
3EM13462AA
3DH03219AA
Optional.
Configuration dependent.
Refer to Para 1.16
Optional.
Single-mode Splitter/
Combiner
1AB123320023
Multi-mode Splitter/
Combiner
1AB123320022
Handset Kit
3EM11996AA
Frequency Dependent
Waveguide Iso-Adapters
Frequency, Waveguide,
and Configuration Dependent
Optional.
Refer to drawing 3DH031770000BJZZA in the Diagrams section.
NOTE: Refer to System Document Mapping drawing in Diagrams Section for module forward and backward compatibility.
1-21
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
General Section
SELECT A3 AND B3
I/O INTFC MODULES
BY DATA RATE
AE-37AA
TMN INTFC
I/O INTFC
I/O INTFC
OR BLANK C3
AE37Y
A3
B3
UD51( )
UD51( )
UD36A( )
CONTROLLER
PWR AMP
PWR AMP
RCVR
C1
B5
A5
B2
AE27AF
CE16BB
CE16BB
RELAY
UD36A( )
POWER
POWER
UD35A( )
UD35A( )
INTFC
RCVR
SUPPLY
SUPPLY
XMTR
XMTR
OR BLANK
A2
A1
B1
A4
B4
C2
ALM
INSVC
WYSD
ON
XMT
AUX
SC
ALM
RCVR
ON
RAD
LOF
ALM
WYSD
DS1
ON
LINE
WYSD
ALM
WYSD
ALM
OC3
IN
OC3
ALM
OC3
OUT
SYNC
ALM
ALM
ALM
INSVC
WYSD
ON
ON
LINE
COMMON
LOSS
ALM
WYSD
ALM
ETH
IN
ETH
ALM
ETH
OUT
DS1/E1 LBO
DS3 LBO
DX-35P
OC3/STM-1
DX-35N
DS3
DX-35R/S
Ethernet
Figure 1 - 6 Typical MDR-8000 Hot-Standby Shelf Component Locations and Options (Sheet 1 of 3)
1-22
3EM20188AAAA
General Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
)
AE37Y
CONTROLLER
C1
CE16BB
POWER
SUPPLY
A1
I/O INTFC
B3
UD51( )
UD51( )
UD36A( )
PWR AMP
PWR AMP
RCVR
A5
B5
B2
AE27AF
CE16BB
RELAY
POWER
UD35A( )
UD35A( )
INTFC
SUPPLY
XMTR
XMTR
C2
B1
A4
B4
I/O INTFC
A3
UD36A( )
RCVR
A2
SELECT XTAL
OSCILLATOR
SUBBOARD BY
CRYSTAL
FREQUENCY.
SELECT CAPACITY
KEY BY DATA RATE.
OC3/
S T M- 1
DS3
DS1/E1
LMW-9051-SM
02/15/04
Figure 1 - 6 Typical MDR-8000 Hot-Standby Shelf Component Locations and Options (Sheet 2 of 3)
1-23
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
General Section
HEAT
SINK
RF
SWITCH
ISOLATORS
A
RCV
ANT
XMT
B
RCV
B-SIDE
POWER
RF SWITCH
DIPLEXER
FILTER
A-SIDE
POWER
DIPLEXER
FILTER
MOUNTING
BRACKET
ISOLATOR
REAR VIEW
(TYPICAL HOT-STANDBY 1:10 COUPLER
SINGLE ANTENNA CONFIGURATION)
Note
Location of A and B RCV ports on diplexer filter varies,
depending on RF frequency. For some frequencies, A and
B ports reverse location.
LMW-7211-SM
06/08/04
Figure 1 - 6 Typical MDR-8000 Hot-Standby Shelf Component Locations, and Options (Sheet 3 of 3)
1-24
3EM20188AAAA
General Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Radio Type
Capacity
Wayside
DS1
Remote Provisioning
Downloading
695-5647-018
DS1/E1
DS3
OC3/STM-1
ETH
2, 4, 8, 12, 16 DS1
1, 2, 3 DS3
1
10/100/1000Mb
N/A
No
No
N/A
Yes
695-5647-019
DS1/E1
DS3
OC3/STM-1
ETH
2, 4, 8, 12, 16 DS1
1, 2, 3 DS3
1
10/100/1000Mb
N/A
Yes
Yes
N/A
No
695-5647-020
DS1/E1
DS3
OC3/STM-1
ETH
2, 4, 8, 12, 16 DS1
1, 2, 3 DS3
1
10/100/1000Mb
N/A
Yes
Yes
N/A
Yes
695-5647-021
DS1
N/A
Yes
695-5647-022
ETH/T1
10/100/1000Mb
+ 1-16 T1
N/A
Yes
695-5647-023
ETH/T1
10/100/1000Mb
+ 1-32 T1
N/A
Yes
2, 4, 8, 12, 16 DS1
1-25
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
General Section
PART NUMBER
CAPACITY/APPLICATIONS
DX-35M-1
3DH03131AA
DS1/Domestic
DX-35M-2
3DH03131AB
E1/International
DX-35N-1
3DH03169AA
DX-35N-2
3DH03169AB
DX-35N-3
3DH03169AG
DX-35N-4
3DH03169AH
DX-35N-5
3DH03169AJ
DX-35N-6
3DH03169AK
DS3 (1 or 3 DS3 Lines 64 QAM + DS1 Wayside per DS3, Auto Line
DADE, With Front Panel Controls) Replaced by DX-35N-10 3DH03169AP
DX-35N-7
3DH03169AL
DS3 (2 DS3 Lines 32 TCM + DS1 Wayside per DS3, Auto Line DADE,
With Front Panel Controls) Replaced by DX-35N-11 3DH03169AQ
DX-35N-8
3DH03169AM
DS3 (1 or 3 DS3 Lines 64 QAM + DS1 Wayside per DS3, Auto Line
DADE, No Front Panel Controls) Replaced by DX-35N-12 3DH03169AR
DX-35N-9
3DH03169AN
DS3 (2 DS3 Lines 32 TCM + DS1 Wayside per DS3, Auto Line DADE, No
Front Panel Controls) Replaced by DX-35N-13 3DH03169AS
DX-35N-10
3DH03169AP
DS3 (1 or 3 DS3 Lines 64 QAM + DS1 Wayside per DS3, Auto Line
DADE With DS3 Line Loopback, With Front Panel Controls)
DX-35N-11
3DH03169AQ
DS3 (2 DS3 Lines 32 TCM + DS1 Wayside per DS3, Auto Line DADE
With DS3 Line Loopback, With Front Panel Controls)
DX-35N-12
3DH03169AR
DS3 (1 or 3 DS3 Lines 64 QAM + DS1 Wayside per DS3, Auto Line
DADE With DS3 Line Loopback, No Front Panel Controls)
DX-35N-13
3DH03169AS
DS3 (2 DS3 Lines 32 TCM + DS1 Wayside per DS3, Auto Line DADE,
With DS3 Line Loopback, Front Panel Controls)
DX-35P-1
3EM03134AA
OC3/STM-1 (3 STS1 Lines + DS1 Wayside per STS1, Multi-mode and Single Mode) Replaced by DX-35P-2 3EM03134AC (future)
DX-35P-2
3EM03134AB
DX-35P-3
3EM03134AC
DX-35R-1
3EM16610AA
DX-35R-2
3EM16610AB
DX-35S-1
3EM16169AA
1-26
3EM20188AAAA
General Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
XMTR Crystals are soldered and tuned up on an oscillator assembly board at the factory.
Table 1 - 7 XMTR Options
Type No.
Part Number
Applications/Frequency/Remarks
UD-35AN-1*
3DH03137AA
UD-35AN-2*
3DH03137AB
UD-35AN-3*
3DH03137AC
UD-35AN-4**
3DH03137AD
UD-35AN-5**
3DH03137AE
UD-35AN-6**
3DH03137AF
UD-35AN-7
3DH03137AG
UD-35AN-8
3DH03137AH
UD-35AN-9
3DH03137AJ
UD-35AQ-1*
3DH03236AA
UD-35AQ-2*
3DH03236AB
UD-35AQ-3**
3DH03236AC
1-27
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
General Section
Part Number
Applications/Frequency/Remarks
UD-35AQ-4**
3DH03236AD
UD-35AQ-5**
3DH03236AE
UD-35AQ-6**
3DH03236AF
UD-35AP-1*
3DH03228AA
UD-35AP-2*
3DH03228AB
UD-35AP-3*
3DH03228AC
UD-35AP-4
3DH03228AD
UD-35AP-5
3DH03228AE
UD-35AP-6
3DH03228AF
UD-35AP-6
3DH03228AF
UD-35AP-7
3DH03228AG
1-28
3EM20188AAAA
General Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Part Number
Applications/Frequency/Remarks
UD-35AP-8
3DH03228AH
UD-35AP-9
3DH03228AJ
UD-35AR-1**
3DH04170AA
UD-35AR-2**
3DH04170AB
UD-35AR-3
3DH04170AC
DS1/E1/DS3/OC3/STM-1 7125-7750
MHz***
UD-35AR-4
3DH04170AD
DS1/E1/DS3/OC3/STM-1*** 7700-8500
MHz
UD-35AS-1**
3EM09626AA
UD-35AS-2
3EM09626AB
UD-35AS-3
3EM09626AC
UD-35AS-4
3EM09626AD
UD-35AS-5
3EM09626AE
UD-35AS-6
3EM09626AF
UD-35AS-7
3EM09626AG
UD-35AT-1
3EM15365AA
UD-35AT-2
3EM15365AB
*
Obsolete. Have been replaced with DS1/E1/DS3/OC3/STM-1 XMTR.
** Obsolete.
*** Modules have a digital filter with different time delay characteristics that affects frequency diversity configurations. A mix of old and new modules in the same shelf is acceptable for configurations other than
frequency diversity.
1-29
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
General Section
Table 1 - 8 PA Options
TYPE NO.
PART NUMBER
FREQUENCY/TOP OF STACK
POWER
CONFIGURATION
USED ON
UD-51Z-1
3DH03218AA
UD-51Z-2
3DH03218AB
UD-51Z-3
3DH03218AC
UD-51Z-4
3DH03218AD
UD-51Z-5
3DH03218AE
UD-51Z-6
3DH03218AF
UD-51Z-7
3DH03218AG
HSS
UD-51Z-8
3DH03218AH
HSS
UD-51AA-1
3DH04136AA
UD-51AA-2
3DH04136AB
UD-51AA-3
3DH04136AC
UD-51AA-4
3DH04136AD
UD-51AA-5
3DH04136AE
UD-51AA-6
3DH04136AF
UD-51AA-7
3DH04136AG
UD-51AA-8
3DH04136AH
UD-51AA-9
3DH04136AJ
UD-51AA-10
3DH04136AK
UD-51AB-1
3EM04070AA
UD-51AB-2
3EM04070AB
UD-51AB-3
3EM04070AC
UD-51AB-4
3EM04070AD
UD-51AB-5
3EM04070AE
UD-51AB-6
3EM04070AF
UD-51AC-1
3EM09037AA
HSS
UD-51AC-2
3EM09037AB
HSS
UD-51AC-3
3EM09037AC
HSS
UD-51AC-4
3EM09037AD
HSS
UD-51AD-1
3EM15140AA
HSS
UD-51AD-2
3EM15140AB
Legend:
HSS - Hot_Standby Shelf
CIS - Compact Indoor Shelf
COU - Compact Outdoor Unit
1-30
3EM20188AAAA
General Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
RCVR Crystals are soldered and tuned up on an oscillator assembly board at the factory.
Table 1 - 9 RCVR Options
TYPE NO.
PART NUMBER
APPLICATIONS/FREQUENCY/REMARKS
UD-36AN-1*
3DH03132AA
UD-36AN-2*
3DH03132AB
UD-36AN-3*
3DH03132AC
UD-36AN-4*
3DH03132AD
UD-36AN-5*
3DH03132AE
UD-36AN-6*
3DH03132AF
UD-36AN-7*
3DH03132AG
UD-36AN-8*
3DH03132AH
UD-36AN-9*
3DH03132AJ
UD-36AN-10*
3DH03132AK
UD-36AN-11*
3DH03132AL
UD-36AN-12*
3DH03132AM
UD-36AN-13
3DH03132AN
UD-36AN-14
3DH03132AP
DS1/E1/DS3/OC3/STM-1 6400-6525
1-31
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
General Section
PART NUMBER
APPLICATIONS/FREQUENCY/REMARKS
UD-36AN-15
3DH03132AQ
DS1/E1/DS3/OC3/STM-1 6525-6875
UD-36AN-16
3DH03132AR
DS1/E1/DS3/OC3/STM-1 6875-7125
UD-36AP-1*
3DH03231AA
UD-36AP-2*
3DH03231AB
UD-36AP-3*
3DH03231AC
UD-36AP-4*
3DH03231AD
UD-36AP-5*
3DH03231AE
UD-36AP-6*
3DH03231AF
UD-36AP-7**
DH03231AG
UD-36AP-8**
3DH03231AH
UD-36AP-9**
3DH03231AJ
UD-36AP-10*
3DH03231AK
UD-36AP-11*
3DH03231AL
UD-36AP-12*
3DH03231AM
UD-36AP-13
3DH03231AN
UD-36AP-14
3DH03231AP
UD-36AP-15
3DH03231AQ
UD-36AQ-1*
3DH03239AA
1-32
3EM20188AAAA
General Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
PART NUMBER
APPLICATIONS/FREQUENCY/REMARKS
UD-36AQ-2*
3DH03239AB
UD-36AQ-3*
3DH03239AC
UD-36AQ-4*
3DH03239AD
UD-36AQ-5*
3DH03239AE
UD-36AQ-6*
3DH03239AF
UD-36AQ-7*
3DH03239AG
UD-36AQ-8*
3DH03239AH
UD-36AQ-9**
3DH03239AJ
UD-36AQ-10**
3DH03239AK
UD-36AQ-11
3DH03239AL
UD-36AQ-12
3DH03239AM
UD-36AR-1**
3DH04175AA
UD-36AR-2**
3DH04175AB
UD-36AR-3*
3DH04175AC
UD-36AR-5**
3DH04175AE
UD-36AR-6**
3DH04175AF
UD-36AR-7**
3DH04175AG
1-33
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
General Section
PART NUMBER
APPLICATIONS/FREQUENCY/REMARKS
UD-36AR-8**
3DH04175AH
UD-36AR-9
3DH04175AJ
UD-36AR-10
3DH04175AK
UD-36AS-1*
3EM09628AA
UD-36AS-2*
3EM09628AB
UD-36AS-3
3EM09628AC
UD-36AS-4
3EM09628AD
UD-36AS-5
3EM09628AE
UD-36AS-6
3EM09628AF
UD-36AS-7
3EM09628AG
UD-36AS-8
3EM09628AH
UD-36AS-9
3EM09628AJ
UD-36AT-1
3EM06561AA
UD-36AU-1
3EM14046AA
UD-36AU-2
3EM14046AB
UD-36AU-3
3EM14046AC
UD-36AW-1
3EM15056AA
UD-36AY-1
3EM15057AA
UD-36AZ-1
3EM15366AA
UD-36AZ-2
3EM15366AB
UD-36BA-1
3EM17800AA
*
Obsolete. Have been replaced with DS1/DS3/OC3/STM-1 Integrated RCVR.
** Obsolete.
1-34
3EM20188AAAA
General Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
TCM/QAM
RADIO TYPE
CONFIGURATION
967-1609-001
32 TCM
MDR-85XX-2
2 DS1
967-1609-002
32 TCM
MDR-85XX-4
4 DS1
967-1609-003
32 TCM
MDR-85XX-8
967-1609-004
32 TCM
MDR-85XX-12
2 DS1
967-1609-005
32 TCM
MDR-85XX-16
967-1609-006
128 TCM
MDR-87XX-2
2 DS1
967-1609-007
128 TCM
MDR-87XX-4
4 DS1
967-1609-008
128 TCM
MDR-87XX-8
967-1609-009
128 TCM
MDR-87XX-12
2 DS1
967-1609-010
128 TCM
MDR-87XX-16
967-1609-011
32 TCM
MDR-85XXi-2
2 E1
967-1609-012
32 TCM
MDR-85XXi-4
4 E1
967-1609-013
32 TCM
MDR-85XXi-8
8 E1
967-1609-014
32 TCM
MDR-85XXi-12
12 E1
967-1609-015
32 TCM
MDR-85XXi-16
16 E1
967-1609-016
128 TCM
MDR-87XXi-2
2 E1
967-1609-017
128 TCM
MDR-87XXi-4
4 E1
967-1609-018
128 TCM
MDR-87XXi-8
8 E1
967-1609-019
128 TCM
MDR-87XXi-12
2 E1
967-1609-020
128 TCM
MDR-87XXi-16
16 E1
3EM01583AA
64 QAM
MDR-86XX-45
1 DS3
3EM12115AB
32 TCM
MDR-85XX-90
2 DS3
3EM01583AB
64 QAM
MDR-86XX-135
3 DS3
3EM04177AA
128 TCM
MDR-87XX-52
OC3/STM-1 (1 STS1)
& Ethernet 50 Mb/s
3EM04177AB
128 TCM
MDR-87XX-155
OC3/STM-1 (3 STS1)
& Ethernet 150 Mb/s
3EM1609-023
32 TCM
MDR-85XXE-8
Ethernet 8 Mb/s
3EM1609-025
32 TCM
MDR-85XXE-16
Ethernet 16 Mb/s
*One capacity key is required for each UD-35( ) Transmitter and for each UD-36( ) Receiver.
1-35
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
General Section
PART NUMBER
APPLICATIONS
3DH03144AA
Linear/Ring
3DH03144AB
Linear/Ring
E1 LBO (International)
3DH03144AC
Linear/Ring
DS3 LBO
3DH03173AK
3EM03367AA
3EM13662AB
Compact, Linear/Ring
3EM13693AA
Compact, Linear/Ring
OC3 and Ethernet (4 DS1)
3EM16300AA
PART NUMBER
REMARKS
Fan Assy
3EM14098AA
Fan Assy
967-0500-001
967-0500-002
3EM11901AB
Laptop Tray
967-0500-003
3EM11901AB
1-36
3EM20188AAAA
General Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Each kit contains diplexer, RF switch assembly, and cables for a specific configuration.
The RF switch assembly (PN 978-0490-001, 002, 003 consist of isolators/circulators that are
frequency dependent. For DS1 diplexer kit options, refer to Integral LM drawing
(3DH041220000UDZZA) in the Diagrams Section. For DS3 and OC3/STM-1 diplexer kit
options, refer to Integral LM drawing (3DH041580000UDZZA) in the Diagrams Section.
1.13.2 Standard Filter Kits
Each standard filter kit contains filter, isolators, circulators, and cables for a specific configuration. See Equipping Option Drawing (3DH031770000BJZZA) in the Diagrams Section for
information.
1.13.3 Cable Drop Kit Option
The cable drop kit option is available for all radio configurations. This option replaces
waveguide with coaxial cable. Refer to engineering drawing 967-1665-XXX in the
Diagrams Section for list of kit parts.
FAN ASSEMBLY
See Figure 1-7 and Figure 1-8. The Fan Assembly fits into a standard 19 in. (483 mm) rack
and occupies two vertical rack increments. Four options are available for hot standby shelf and
1 option for Compact shelf. Refer to Table 1-12 for details.
1.14
FAN (4 EA)
FRONT
OF FAN ASSEMBLY
LAPTOP TRAY
ALM LED
LMW-7031-sm
07/28/02
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
General Section
When equipped with fans, the fan assembly mounts directly below the radio and plugs into
connector J302 on the MDR-8000 backplane. The four fans provide air flow to help dissipate
heat. Power is provided by the backplane. When not equipped with fans, the assembly can be
mounted in any rack location.
LAPTOP TRAY
EXTENDED
LMW-7032-sm
07/28/02
FAN (4 EA)
SLOTS AVAILABLE
FOR 8 FANS
(4 UNUSED)
FRONT
OF FAN ASSEMBLY
ALM LED
LMW-9077-sm
02/15/04
3EM20188AAAA
General Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
MDR-1025
06/12/04
TONE/PULSE (FV/DC)
MODE SWITCH SET
TO FV FOR TONES
HANDSET
HANDSET
HOLDER
LMW-7034-sm
07/28/02
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
General Section
See Figure 1 - 12. The 2 or 4 fiber management panel provides a direct interface with customers 2 or 4 fiber equipment. The two fibers on a non-standby radio or four fibers on a hotstandby radio connect to the two or four fibers from the customers equipment. The 2 or 4 fiber
configuration requires the duplex adapter panel to route the fiber to/from the I/O interface
modules. One duplex adapter panel can accommodate two radio shelves. Customer fiber must
have SC type connectors.
FIBER CLIP
SC DUPLEX
ADAPTER BRACKET
FIBER CLIP
FIBER CLIP
LMW-6040-SM
07/28/02
FIBER CLIP
BEND RADIUS CLIP
3EM20188AAAA
General Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
See Figure 1 - 13. The 2x4 fiber management panel interfaces the four fibers on a hot-standby
shelf with customers 2-fiber equipment. The 2x4 fiber configuration requires combiner splitter
units to route the fiber to/from the I/O interface modules. One combiner/splitter unit per radio
shelf is required. The 2x4-fiber management panel has cutouts for two combiner/splitter units
and can accommodate two radio shelves.
SPLITTER/COMBINER
UNIT 1
BEND RADIUS
CLIP
FIBER CLIP
SPLITTER/COMBINER
UNIT 2
FIBER CLIP
FIBER CLIP
BEND RADIUS
CLIP
LMW-6041-SM
07/28/02
1-42
SFP XCVR
Options
(With LC Connector)
P/N
3EM20277AA
850 NM Multimode
550 Meter
3EM20277AB
1310 NM Singlemode
10 Kilometers
3EM20277AC
1310 NM Singlemode
40 Kilometer
3EM20277AD
1550 NM Singlemode
80 Kilometer
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Applications Section
APPLICATIONS
2.1
INTRODUCTION
The MDR-8000 family of microwave radios is specifically designed to satisfy the evolving
needs of public, private, government, and international networks. Each DS1/E1 radio offers
the flexibility of 2, 4, 8, 12, 16 DS1s or E1s to meet the need for low capacity domestic or international systems. Each DS3 radio offers up to three DS3s with equal number of wayside DS1s
to meet domestic high capacity system requirements. Each OC3/STM-1 radio offers one or
three STS1s with equal number of wayside DS1s or E1s to meet domestic or international
Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) system requirements. The MDR-8000E Ethernet
radio provides transport for IP/packet data in licensed and unlicensed frequency bands. The
radio supports 10baseT, 100baseT, and 1000baseT interface rates with auto-negotiation and
can be configured to transport low and high capacity data at RF frequencies in the 2, 4, 5, 6, 7/
8, and 10/11 GHz bands.
The number of channels transmitted and the RF channel bandwidth depend on the capacity
keys installed in the transmitter and receiver modules. The modulation formats are 32 or 128
TCM (DS1/E1), 64 QAM (DS3), and 128 TCM (OC3/STM-1). Growth in DS1/E1 system capacity can be performed in service and requires only exchanging capacity keys. Growth from DS1/
E1 to DS3 system capacity is an out-of-service procedure and requires exchanging modules
and capacity keys. Changing to OC3/STM-1 system capacity is performed out-of-service and
requires exchanging modules, and capacity keys.
All radios are available in 1:0 non-standby (NS) and 1:1 hot-standby (HS) and frequency diversity (FD). The HS version allows for troubleshooting and module replacement, on an in-service
basis. Space diversity can be added to any of the three basic configurations. In addition to the
three basic configurations, the OC3/STM-1 radio is available with a 0:2 dual channel (no protection) equipment configuration and the protected OC3/STM-1 radio is also available in a 2 X
4-fiber or 4-fiber cable configuration.
2.2
TYPICAL USERS
Because of unique flexibility in both frequency and capacity, the MDR-8000/i/s can be used for
a variety of voice, data, and video applications, for many types of users, some of which are
listed as follows:
Personal Communication Systems (PCS)
Cellular Operators
Common Carriers
Alternate Access and Competitive Access Providers (CAP)
Private Networks
Educational Institutions
State, Local, and Federal Government Systems
International Users.
2-1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Applications Section
3EM20188AAAA
2.3
UNLICENSED RADIO
The MDR-8X05u/8X02u (unlicensed) radio provides fast deployment of service with microwave
radio No license and small antennas (no FCC requirements) allow immediate turnup. After the
license is received, the unlicensed radio can be easily converted to the lower 6 GHz licensed
band.
Refer to drawing 3DH031770001BJZZA for configurations and equipping options.
The MDR-8X05u radio operates in the 5725-5850 and 2400-2483.5 Information, Scientific, and Medical (ISM) band in accordance with FCC Part 15.247. This unlicensed radio, although operating in
the same band as a spread spectrum radio, operates using narrower bandwidths than spread spectrum. Advantages, disadvantages, and antenna recommendations for the unlicensed radio follow:
2.3.1
Advantages
Fast installation and turnup
2, 4, 8, 16 DS1, DS3, and OC3/STM-1 capacities
Field convertible to lower 6 GHz licensed band
Field expandable to higher capacities.
Common network management with licensed radios.
Common spares and training with licensed radios
2.3.2
Disadvantages
No interference protection
Operating restrictions
5.725 to 5.850 GHz band/2.4 to 2.4835 GHz
Performance could deteriorate due to interference as the frequency band becomes
congested.
2.3.3
Antenna Recommendations
Frequency 5.8 GHz/2.4 GHz
Size and Type 2, 4, 6, 8, or 10 foot parabolic; 1 or 2 foot flat panel.
Gain and Beamwidth (3 dB)
2-2
5.8 GHz
2.4 GHz
2 ft parabolic 29 dB/6
2 ft parabolic 20 dB/13.8
4 ft parabolic 35 dB/3
4 ft parabolic 27 dB/6.9
6 ft parabolic 38 dB/2
8 ft parabolic 41 dB/1.5
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Applications Section
Note
When using a 1 ft flat panel antenna with a 1 watt (+30 dBm) output power,
the antenna must be located in an area that does not allow the general population access to within 5 feet (5.8 Ghz) or 6.5 feet (2.4 Ghz) of the antenna.
5.8 GHz
2.4 GHz
2.4
Compact RADIO
The MDR-8000 Compact radio extends the applicability of the MDR-8000 radio product line
and provides a means of quick and efficient deployment using one of two configurations; the
Compact Indoor Shelf or the Compact Outdoor Unit.
2.4.1
Features
Space efficient chassis for non-standby configurations
Indoor shelf = 4 rack increments tall
Supports entire range of capacities and frequency bands for MDR-8000 family
Capacity:2-16 DS11-3 DS3 with 1-3 wayside DS1OC3/STM-1 with 3 wayside DS1
Frequency Bands:
Same RF performance
USI craft interface with ELMC
SNMP, MCS-11, and TBOS telemetry
Module interchangeability with entire MDR-8000 product line
Configurations supported:
Non-standby
Non-standby with space diversity
Ring or loop terminal
2-3
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Applications Section
3EM20188AAAA
2.4.2.2
Same USI
Physical size
Different backplane
Non-standby only
2.4.3.2
2-4
Same USI
Same cardcage
Same backplane
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
2.4.3.3
Same modules
Same connectors
3EM20188AAAA
Applications Section
Physical size
Physical configuration
Mounting
2.5
ETHERNET RADIO
Ethernet is a Local Area Network (LAN) technology that transmits information between computers at speeds of 10, 100, and 1000 million bits per second (Mbps).
2.5.1 Ethernet Standards
IEEE 802.3 is the hardware standard for Ethernet cards and cables. All Ethernet equipment
manufacturers after 1985 conform to this standard. The IEEE standard has been adopted by
the International Organization for Standardization (ISO), making it a world-wide networking standard.
2.5.2 Ethernet Protocol
Ethernet uses Carrier Sense, Multiple Access, Collision Detect (CSMACD) protocol. The Multiple Access part means that every station is connected to a single copper wire or single data
path (multiple wires connected to form a single data path). The Carrier Sense port checks the
wire to see if any other station is transmitting data before starting transmission. The Collision
Detect part shuts down communication between stations when a collision (caused by two stations transmitting at the same time) is detected.
2.5.3 Ethernet Media
The MDR-8000E Ethernet radio uses the 10/100/1000BaseT Ethernet media. The IEEE short
hand identifier 10/100/1000BaseT includes three pieces of information. The first item 10/100/
1000 stands for the media speed in Mbps. The word Base stands for baseband, meaning only
Ethernet signals are carried over the media. The third part of the identifier T indicates
twisted pair is used for the segment type.
2.6
TYPICAL APPLICATIONS
See Figure 2 - 1 for a typical application diagram. In this typical application, the MDR-8000E
Ethernet radio replaces the DS3 leased line.
2-5
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Applications Section
3EM20188AAAA
TIER 1
ISP
LAN
TIER 2
ISP
LEASED
LINE
OR
ETHERNET
LAN
ETHERNET
10/100/1000Base T
MDR-8000E
RADIO
MDR-8000E
RADIO
10/100/1000Base T
MDR-1079F
05/24/05
2.7
EXPANDING NETWORKS
Each port of a repeater hub inks individual Ethernet media segments together to create a
larger network that operates as a single Ethernet LAN.
Each part of a packet switching hub provides a connection to an Ethernet media system that
operates as a separate Ethernet LAN.
2.8
TRANSMISSION GUIDELINES
Ease of implementation and operation are key elements for communication systems of this
type. The basic requirements of MDR-8000/i/s systems are:
A line of sight must exist between the two antenna locations points
The path length must meet the generally acceptable guideline for applicable 6, 7,
8, 10, and 11 GHz application.
Path lengths can vary significantly between geographic areas. Parameters such as signal
availability requirements, antenna sizes, length of waveguide runs, climatic conditions, and so
on, must be considered to determine acceptable path lengths. Figure 2 - 2 illustrates the typical
achievable path lengths as a function of radio transmitter power and Figure 2 - 3 shows the
Crane Rain model which defines the seven different Rain regions of the United States and
Canada.
2-6
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Applications Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Applications Section
3EM20188AAAA
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Applications Section
2.9
FEATURES
MDR-8000/i/s features include the following:
Trellis Coded Modulation and Digital Filtering (DS1/E1 and OC3/STM-1)
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM) and Digital Filtering (DS3)
Frequency agility
Capacity agility
Wayside DS1 availability (DS3 and OC3/STM-1)
Configuration agility
System gain agility
In-service capacity upgrade capability
Forward error correction and adaptive time domain equalization
Errorless receiver switching
Extended link monitor channel
Automatic transmit power control (enable/disable)
Monitor-control interfaces:
Relay contact closures (parallel) (optional)
MCS-11 high-speed serial performance monitoring
E2A/TBOS serial
Three 64 kb/s service channels
Two audio service channels
Seamless interface with the MDR-8000/i and existing MDR-4000e/i, 5606,
6000/i, and 7000 digital radio product lines.
Seamless interface with the MDR-8000s and existing MDR-4000s SONET
radio.
Easy installation and turnup
These features are described in the following paragraphs.
2-9
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
2.10
Applications Section
3EM20188AAAA
2-10
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Applications Section
CAPACITY (MBPS)
MDR-85xx-2
MDR-85xx-4
MDR-85xx-8
MDR-85xx-12
MDR-85xx-16
2
4
8
12
16
X
X
X
X
X
1.544
1.544
1.544
1.544
1.544
MODULATION
32
32
32
32
32
TCM
TCM
TCM
TCM
TCM
RF BANDWIDTH
REQUIREMENT
1.25
2.50
3.75
5.50
7.50
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
MDR-8505u-2
MDR-8505u-4
MDR-8505u-8
MDR-8505u-16
2
4
8
16
X
X
X
X
1.544
1.544
1.544
1.544
32
32
32
32
TCM
TCM
TCM
TCM
1.25
2.50
3.75
7.00
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
(1)
MDR-87xx-2
MDR-87xx-4
MDR-87xx-8
MDR-87xx-12
MDR-87xx-16
2
4
8
12
16
X
X
X
X
X
1.544
1.544
1.544
1.544
1.544
128
128
128
128
128
TCM
TCM
TCM
TCM
TCM
0.80
1.25
2.50
3.75
5.00
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
(1)
1.25
2.50
5.00
7.00
9.00
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
(2)
0.80
1.50
3.00
5.00
7.00
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
(2)
MDR-85xxi-2
MDR-85xxi-4
MDR-85xxi-8
MDR-85xxi-12
MDR-85xxi-16
MDR-87xxi-2
MDR-87xxi-4
MDR-87xxi-8
MDR-87xxi-12
MDR-87xxi-16
2
4
8
12
16
2
4
8
12
16
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
2.048
2.048
2.048
2.048
2.048
2.048
2.048
2.048
2.048
2.048
32
32
32
32
32
128
128
128
128
128
TCM
TCM
TCM
TCM
TCM
TCM
TCM
TCM
TCM
TCM
MDR-86xx-45
MDR-86xx-135
1 X 44.736
3 X 44.736
64 QAM
64 QAM
10 MHz
30 MHz
MDR-8605u-45
1 X 44.736
64 QAM
10 MHz
MDR-87xx-52
MDR-87xx-155
1 X 51.840
3 X 51.840
MDR-85XXE-8
MDR-85XXE-16
MDR-87XXE-12
MDR-87XXE-24
MDR-87XXE-50
MDR-87XXE-150
128 TCM
128 TCM
10 MHz
30 MHz
Up to 8 Mb/s
Up to 16 Mb/s
32 TCM
32 TCM
2.5 MHz
5.0 MHz
Up
Up
Up
Up
128
128
128
128
2.5 MHz
5.0 MHz
10.0 MHz
30.0 MHz
to
to
to
to
12 Mb/s
24 Mb/s
50 Mb/s
150 Mb/s
(1)
(2)
TCM
TCM
TCM
TCM
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
2-11
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Applications Section
3EM20188AAAA
GO CHANNELS
5
02
0
2.5
MH
MH
20
A1
20
A2
B1
B3
C3
C8
MH
B7
C9
20
MH
C12
MH
10
21
B10
C13
C14
MH
10 MHz
(A)
A8
B9
C11
0
2.5
21
A7
B8
C10
0
2.5
A6
B6
C7
0
2.5
20
A5
B5
C6
MH
20
A4
C5
0
2.5
MH
20
B4
C4
0
2.5
C15
B11
7.5 MHz
(B)
C16
5.0 MHz
(C)
2.5 MHz
(D)
1.25 MHz
(E)
E1
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 C16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30 D31D32 D33
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
E10
E11
E12
E13
E14
E15
E16
E17
E18
E19
E20
E21
E22
E23
E24
E25
E26
E27
E28
E29
E30
E31
E32
E33
E34
E35
E36
E37
E38
E39
E40
E41
E42
E43
E44
E45
E46
E47
E48
E49
E50
E51
E52
E53
E54
E55
E56
E57
E58
E59
E60
E61
E62
E63
E64
E65
E66
C2
MH
A3
B2
C1
0
2.5
20
0
2.5
MH
RETURN CHANNELS
22
H
0M
17
H
0M
27
H
0M
37
47
H
0M
H
0M
67
77
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
A1'
A2'
A3'
A4'
A5'
A6'
A7'
A8'
B1'
C2'
B3'
C3'
C4'
B4'
C5'
B5'
C6'
C7'
B6'
C8'
B7'
C9'
C10'
B8'
C11'
C12'
B9'
C13'
B10'
C14'
C15'
MH
22
10 MHz
(A')
B11'
7.5 MHz
(B')
C16'
5.0 MHz
(C')
2.5 MHz
(D')
1.25 MHz
(E')
E1'
D1' D2' D3' D4' D5' D6' D7' D8' D9' D10' D11' D12' D13' D14' D15' C16' D17' D18' D19' D20' D21' D22' D23' D24' D25' D26' D27' D28' D29' D30' D31' D32' D33'
LMW-7081
08/02/02
NOTE
FREQUENCY SEPARATION BETWEEN GO
AND RETURN RF CHANNELS IS 175 MHz
0
5.5
E2'
E3'
E4'
E5'
E6'
E7'
E8'
E9'
E10'
E11'
E12'
E13'
E14'
E15'
E16'
E17'
E18'
E19'
E20'
E21'
E22'
E23'
E24'
E25'
E26'
E27'
E28'
E29'
E30'
E31'
E32'
E33'
E34'
E35'
E36'
E37'
E38'
E39'
E40'
E41'
E42'
E43'
E44'
E45'
E46'
E47'
E48'
E49'
E50'
E51'
E52'
E53'
E54'
E55'
E56'
E57'
E58'
E59'
E60'
E61'
E62'
E63'
E64'
E65'
E66'
C1'
B2'
H
0M
.5
.5
.5
57
H
0M
.5
.5
.5
.5
.5
07
H
0M
H
0M
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
5725
3EM20188AAAA
Applications Section
5755
5785 5790
5820
5850
Frequency (MHz)
(LOWER)
5725
5755
5790
5820
5850
(UPPER)
5725
5755
5785
5820
5850
LMW-7074
07/30/02
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Applications Section
3EM20188AAAA
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Applications Section
6525 MHz
6710 MHz
LOW BAND
10 MHz (D)
5.0 MHz (E)
3.75 MHz (F)
2.5 MHz (G)
1.25 MHz (H)
J1
J2
D17
12 34
J3
J4
D1
D2
D3
D18
J6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
D5
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
5 6 7 89 1 111 1 1 11 1 1 222 2 22 2 2 2
0 123 4 5 67 8 9 012 3 45 6 7 8
J5
D4
D6
D7
D15
E9 E10 E11 E
F9
F10
F11
D16
F31
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
60 61 62 63 64 65 66
2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 45 55 5 5 555
9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 90 12 3 4 567
111 1111 11 11 1 1 1
122 2222 22 22 33 3
901 2345 6 7 89 01 2
6710 MHz
6875 MHz
HIGH BAND
D1
D2
E1 E31 E3
F1
66 4
F31
D3
D5
E2
E5
E4
E6
E7
E8
F2
F5
F4
F6
F7
F8
F3
3 14 8 9
D4
D6
D7
E9 E10 E11 E
F9
F10
F11
7 12 13 10 11 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
1 17 8 9 1 5 6 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 23 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 55 5 5 555
3 3
0
7 8 5 6 7 8 1 23 4 3 4 5 6 9 0 1 21 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 12 3 4 567
1 2
D16
10 MHz (D)
D14
D15
54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 15 1 2
1 1 1 11 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 11 1 1 1 2 3 12 3 4
0 0 0 11 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 2 2 22 2 2 22 2 2 3 9 0
7 8 9 01 2 3 45 6 7 8 9 0 1 23 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
J1
J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Applications Section
3EM20188AAAA
LOW BAND
10550 MHz
10615 MHz
E1
5 MHz (E)
3.75 MHz (F)
E2
F1
G1
E3
F2
G2
G3
E4
F3
G4
E5
F4
G5 G6
G7
E6
F5
E7
F6
E8
F7
E9
F8
E10
F9
E11
F10
F11
G8 G9 G10 G11 G12 G13 G14 G15 G16 G17 G18 G19 G20 G21 G22 G23 G24 G25 G26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4
4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5
5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2
NARROW BAND
J1
J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
J7
J8
J9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4
HIGH BAND
10615 MHz
E1
E2
F1
G1
G2
F2
G3
G4
E3
E4
F3
G5 G6
F4
G7
E5
F5
E6
E7
F6
10680 MHz
E8
F7
E9
F8
E10
F9
E11
F10
5 MHz (E)
3.75 MHz (F)
F11
G8 G9 G10 G11 G12 G13 G14 G15 G16 G17 G18 G19 G20 G21 G22 G23 G24 G25 G26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4
4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5
5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2
NARROW BAND
J1
J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
J7
J8
J9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4
MW21100491
052098
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Applications Section
LOW BAND
10700 MHz
A1
40 MHz (A)
30 MHz (B)
10 MHz (D)
B1
A3
A2
B2
B3
A5
A4
B4
A7
A6
B5
B6
A8
B7
B8
A10
A9
B9
B10
11200 MHz
A11
B11
A12
B12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4
B13
4 4 4 4 4 5
5 6 7 8 9 0
NARROW BAND
11200 MHz
40 MHz (A)
30 MHz (B)
10 MHz (D)
A1
B1
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F10
F11
F12 F13
F14
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
HIGH BAND
A3
A2
B2
B3
A5
A4
B4
B5
A7
A6
B6
11700 MHz
A8
B7
B8
A10
A9
B9
B10
A11
B11
A12
B12
B13
1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 3 4 5
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 0
NARROW BAND
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F10
F11
F12 F13
F14
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
MW21100501
052098
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
2.12
Applications Section
3EM20188AAAA
CAPACITY AGILITY
2-18
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Applications Section
I
RPTR
CH
RPTR
CH
I/O
INTERFACE
A
LBO
DS1/E1
1-16
DS1/E1
1-16
XMTR
A
RF
PA
DIPLEXER
RF
IN/OUT
(OPTIONAL)
RX
RS
RF
RCVR
A
LMW-5051
07/24/01
I
RPTR
CH
XMTR
PA
DIPLEXER
RF
IN/OUT
(OPTIONAL)
DS3
1 OR 3
I/O
INTFC
LBO
I
WAYSIDE DS1
1 OR 3
RCVR
Q
LMW-3124
04/14/00
I
OC3/ETHERNET
Q
XMTR
PA
RF
DIPLEXER
RF
IN/OUT
(OPTIONAL)
WAYSIDE
DS1/E1
RPTR
CH
OC3/
STM-1
AUX
INTFC
WAYSIDE
DS1/E1
I/O
INTFC
RX
RPTR
CH
RCVR
RF
RS
LMW-3158F
07/07/06
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Applications Section
3EM20188AAAA
1 OR 3
DS3
1 OR 3
DS3
FROM
X-CONN
1 OR 3
WAYSIDE DS1
1 OR 3
LBO
WAYSIDE DS1
I
I/O
INTFC
XMTR
RF
PA
FILTER
RF
IN/OUT
Q
(OPTIONAL)
LMW-5058
08/02/01
1 OR 3
DS3
1 OR 3
DS3
TO
X-CONN
LBO
1 OR 3
WAYSIDE DS1
1 OR 3
WAYSIDE DS1
I
I/O
INTFC
RCVR
RF
FILTER
RF
IN/OUT
LMW-5057F
08/08/01
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Applications Section
2.13
NON-STANDBY TRANSMITTER/SPACE DIVERSITY RECEIVERS
See Figure 2 - 15, Figure 2 - 16, and Figure 2 - 17. This configuration consists of one nonprotected transmitter and one receiver on the main antenna, and one receiver on the diversity
antenna. The non-standby transmitter with space diversity receivers configuration provides
both equipment and path (space diversity) protection with errorless receiver switching.
I
RPTR
CH
RPTR
CH
I/O
INTERFACE
A
LBO
DS1/E1
1-16
DS1/E1
1-16
RF
PA
(OPTIONAL)
XMT
SW
DIPLEXER
RF
IN/OUT
RX
RS
I/O
INTERFACE
B
XMTR
A
RF
RCVR
A
RX
RS
RF
IN
RCV
FILTER
RF
RCVR
B
FROM
SECOND
ANTENNA
LMW-5050F
07/24/01
LBO
2ND MDR-8000
SHELF (RPTR)
X-CONN (TERM)
OR
2ND MDR-8000
SHELF (RPTR)
SC/SYNC
XMTR
A
WAYSIDE DS1
DIPLEXER
RF
IN/OUT
(OPTIONAL)
I/O
INTFC
A
DS3
PA
RF
I
Q
SC
RCVR
A
SYNC
SPLITTER (XMT)
COMBINER (RCV)
I/O
INTFC
B
I
Q
RCVR
B
RF
RCV
FILTER
RF
IN
FROM
DIVERSITY
ANTENNA LMW-3125F
08/10/01
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Applications Section
3EM20188AAAA
I
OC3/STM-1/ETHERNET
WAYSIDE
DS1/E1
RPTR
CH
OC3/
STM-1
AUX
INTFC
XMTR
A
PA
RF
DIPLEXER
RF
IN/OUT
(OPTIONAL)
I/O
INTFC
A
RX
RS
RF
RCVR
A
SONET
I/O
INTFC
B
RX
OC3/STM-1/ETHERNET
RS
RCVR
B
RF
RCV
FILTER
RF
IN
FROM
SECOND
ANTENNA
LMW-5014F
07/24/01
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Applications Section
2 DS1
2 DS1
DS1 SW
2 DS1
2 DS1
RING
RADIO
0
RF
4 DS1
4 DS1
6 DS1
6 DS1
RING
RADIO
3
DS1
SW
4 DS1
RF
RING
RADIO
1
4 DS1
DS1
SW
6 DS1
RF
6 DS1
RF
RING
RADIO
2
4 DS1
4 DS1
DS1 SW
4 DS1
4 DS1
MW21100461
052298
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Applications Section
3EM20188AAAA
2 DS1
2 DS1
RDI-3100e
RPTR D & I MUX
DS3
DS3
RING
RADIO
0
RF
4 DS1
RING
RADIO
3
RDI-3100e
RPTR D & I MUX
DS3
DS3
RDI-3100e
RPTR D & I MUX
4 DS1
RF
RING
RADIO
1
DS3
DS3
RF
6 DS1
6 DS1
RF
RING
RADIO
2
DS3
DS3
RDI-3100e
RPTR D & I MUX
4 DS1
4 DS1
LMW-5012
05/10/01
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Applications Section
2 DS1
2 DS1
1603
ADD/DROP
MUX
OC3
RING
RADIO
0
RF
4 DS1
4 DS1
1603
ADD/
DROP
MUX
OC3
RF
RING
RADIO
3
RING
RADIO
1
RF
OC3
1603
ADD/
DROP
MUX
6 DS1
6 DS1
RF
RING
RADIO
2
OC3
1603
ADD/DROP
MUX
4 DS1
4 DS1
LMW-3152
04/26/00
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Applications Section
3EM20188AAAA
2-26
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Applications Section
WEST
EAST
RPTR
CABLE
J314
J314
X/Y RAIL 1*
X/Y RAIL 2
X/Y RAIL 3
X/Y RAIL 4
RPTR SYNC
SHELF 1
SHELF 2
ASYNCHRONOUS
SC CONNECTORS
ON BACKPLANE
ASYNCHRONOUS
SC CONNECTORS
ON BACKPLANE
*SC DATA & CLOCKS ARE CARRIED ACROSS RPTR CABLE ON X/Y RAIL 1.
LMW-9092F
09/13/03
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Applications Section
3EM20188AAAA
WEST
EAST
J21/22
J23/24
J25/26
DS3 LINE 1
J21/22
DS3 LINE 2
J23/24
DS3 LINE 3
J25/26
J201/J202
J401
SC 2K SYNC
RPTR SYNC
SHELF 1
SHELF 2
ASYNCHRONOUS
CONNECTORS
ON BACKPLANE
ASYNCHRONOUS
CONNECTORS
ON BACKPLANE
LMW-9093F
09/13/03
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Applications Section
WEST
EAST
OUT
IN
OC3/STM-1 XMT
IN
OC3/STM-1 RCV
OUT
J201/J202
J201/J202
J203
SHELF 1
SHELF 2
ASYNCHRONOUS
SC CONNECTORS
ON BACKPLANE
ASYNCHRONOUS
SC CONNECTORS
ON BACKPLANE
*SVCE CHANNEL IS CARRIED ACROSS RPTR CABLE ON DS1 LINE AT 1.544 Mb/s
LMW-9094F
09/13/03
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Applications Section
3EM20188AAAA
I
RPTR
CH
RPTR
CH
I/O
INTERFACE
A
LBO
DS1/E1
1-16
DS1/E1
1-16
XMTR
A
RF
PA
(OPTIONAL)
XMT
SW
RF
DIPLEXER
RF
IN/OUT
RX
RS
RF
RCVR
A
I/O
INTERFACE
B
XMTR
B
PA
(OPTIONAL)
RX
RS
RCVR
B
RF
LMW-5049F
07/24/01
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Applications Section
I
RPTR
CH
DS3
1 OR 3
XMTR
A
LBO
PA
(OPTIONAL)
I/O
INTFC
A
XMT
SW
DIPLEXER
RF
IN/OUT
I
WAYSIDE DS1
1 OR 3
RCVR
A
I
XMTR
B
PA
(OPTIONAL)
I/O
INTFC
B
I
Q
RCVR
B
LMW-3126F
04/14/00
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Applications Section
3EM20188AAAA
I
OC3/STM-1/ETHERNET
WAYSIDE
DS1/E1
RPTR
CH
OC3/
STM-1
AUX
INTFC
XMTR
A
PA
RF
(OPTIONAL)
I/O
INTFC
A
XMT
SW
RF
DIPLEXER
RF
IN/OUT
RX
RS
RCVR
A
RF
SONET
I
Q
XMTR
B
PA
RF
(OPTIONAL)
I/O
INTFC
B
RX
OC3/STM-1/ETHERNET
RS
RCVR
B
RF
LMW-3159F
05/23/01
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Applications Section
I
RPTR
CH
RPTR
CH
I/O
INTERFACE
A
LBO
DS1/E1
1-16
DS1/E1
1-16
XMTR
A
PA
RF
(OPTIONAL)
XMT
SW
RF
IN/OUT
DIPLEXER
RX
RS
RCVR
A
RF
I/O
INTERFACE
B
XMTR
B
PA
RF
(OPTIONAL)
RX
RS
RCVR
B
RF
RCV
FILTER
RF
IN
FROM
SECOND
ANTENNA
LMW-5048F
07/24/01
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Applications Section
3EM20188AAAA
I
RPTR
CH
XMTR
A
DS3
1 OR 3
LBO
PA
(OPTIONAL)
I/O
INTFC
A
XMT
SW
DIPLEXER
RF
IN/OUT
I
WAYSIDE DS1
1 OR 3
RCVR
A
I
XMTR
B
PA
(OPTIONAL)
I/O
INTFC
B
RF
IN
I
Q
RCV
FILTER
RCVR
B
FROM
SECOND
ANTENNA
LMW-3127F
04/14/00
I
OC3/STM-1/ETHERNET
WAYSIDE
DS1/E1
RPTR
CH
OC3/
STM-1
AUX
INTFC
XMTR
A
PA
RF
(OPTIONAL)
I/O
INTFC
A
XMT
SW
RF
DIPLEXER
RF
IN/OUT
RX
RS
RCVR
A
RF
I
Q
XMTR
B
PA
RF
(OPTIONAL)
I/O
INTFC
B
RX
OC3/STM-1/ETHERNET
RS
RCVR
B
RF
RCV
FILTER
RF
IN
FROM
SECOND
ANTENNA
LMW-5013F
07/24/01
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Applications Section
I
LBO
TO/FROM
X-CONN
3
DS3
3
DS3
3
WAYSIDE
DS1
3
WAYSIDE
DS1
PA
RF
(OPTIONAL)
I/O
INTFC
A
XMT
SW
RF
DIPLEXER
RF
IN/OUT
I
Q
SC
XMTR
A
RF
RCVR
A
SYNC
I
I/O
INTFC
B
SPLITTER (XMT)
COMBINER (RCV)
XMTR
B
PA
RF
(OPTIONAL)
LMW-5061F
08/02/01
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Applications Section
3EM20188AAAA
FROM
X-CONN
1 OR 3
DS3
1 OR 3
DS3
1 OR 3
WAYSIDE
DS1
1 OR 3
WAYSIDE
DS1
LBO
I
I/O
INTFC
A
XMTR
A
PA
RF
(OPTIONAL)
XMT
SW
I/O
INTFC
B
RF
FILTER
RF
IN/OUT
I
Q
XMTR
B
PA
RF
(OPTIONAL)
LMW-5060F
08/02/01
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Applications Section
1 OR 3
DS3
TO
X-CONN
1 OR 3
WAYSIDE
DS1
1 OR 3
DS3
LBO
1 OR 3
WAYSIDE
DS1
I
I/O
INTFC
A
RCVR
A
RF
RF
IN/OUT
DIPLEXER
I/O
INTFC
B
I
Q
RCVR
B
RF
LMW-5059F
08/08/01
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Applications Section
3EM20188AAAA
I
RPTR
CH
RPTR
CH
I/O
INTERFACE
A
LBO
DS1/E1
1-16
XMTR
A
RF
PA
XMTR
A
CIRCULATOR
CIRCULATOR
RF
IN/OUT
(OPTIONAL)
RX
DS1/E1
1-16
RS
RCVR
A
RCV
FILTER
RF
RF
CIRCULATOR
I/O
INTERFACE
B
XMTR
B
RF
PA
XMT
FILTER
CIRCULATOR
(OPTIONAL)
RX
RS
RCVR
B
RF
RCV
FILTER
RF
CIRCULATOR
LMW-5047F
01/25/02
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Applications Section
I
RPTR
CH
DS3
1 OR 3
XMTR
A
LBO
PA
XMT
FILTER
CIRCULATOR
CIRCULATOR
(OPTIONAL)
I/O
INTFC
A
RF
IN/OUT
I
WAYSIDE DS1
1 OR 3
RCVR
A
CIRCULATOR
RCV
FILTER
I
XMTR
B
PA
XMT
FILTER
CIRCULATOR
(OPTIONAL)
I/O
INTFC
B
I
Q
RCVR
B
RCV
FILTER
CIRCULATOR
LMW-3128F
04/14/00
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Applications Section
3EM20188AAAA
OC3/STM-1/ETHERNET
MAIN
ANTENNA
I
RPTR
CH
I/O
INTERFACE
A
RPTR
CH
AUX
INTFC
BOARD
F1
XMTR
A
XMTR
A
CIRCULATOR
CIRCULATOR
RCV
FILTER
RF
CIRCULATOR
XMT
FILTER
CIRCULATOR
RCV
FILTER
RF
RF
IN/OUT
(OPTIONAL)
RF
RX
WAYSIDE
DS1
PA
RF
DS1
RS
F3
RCVR
A
F2
XMTR
B
PA
RF
(OPTIONAL)
I/O
INTERFACE
B
RF
RX
OC3/STM-1/ETHERNET
RS
F4
RCVR
B
CIRCULATOR
LMW-9035F
07/10/06
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Applications Section
OC3/STM-1/ETHERNET
MAIN
ANTENNA
I
RPTR
CH
RPTR
CH
AUX
INTFC
BOARD
I/O
INTERFACE
A
PA
RF
XMTR
A
CIRCULATOR
CIRCU- IN/OUT
LATOR
(OPTIONAL)
F3
RX
WAYSIDE
DS1
RF
F1
XMTR
A
DS1
RS
DUAL
RCVR
A
RCV
FILTER
RF
F3
F2
XMTR
B
RF
CIRCULATOR
RCV
FILTER
PA
RF
CIRCULATOR
XMT
FILTER
CIRCULATOR
RCV
FILTER
RF
DIVERSITY
ANTENNA
RF
IN
(OPTIONAL)
I/O
INTERFACE
B
F4
RX
OC3/STM-1/ETHERNET
RS
DUAL
RCVR
B
F4
RF
CIRCULATOR
RCV
FILTER
CIRCULATOR
LMW-9035A
07/07/06
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Applications Section
3EM20188AAAA
2.14
SYSTEM GAIN AGILITY
System gain is by far the most important factor when designing a microwave link, defined as
the margin between the transmit power and receiver sensitivity of the desired radio terminal.
System gain can be calculated using the following formula: System Gain = Transmit Power
(dB) - Receiver Sensitivity (dBm)
Example:
Transmit Power = 30 dB;
Receiver sensitivity (RCVR Threshold) = -70 dBm
System Gain = 30 dB - (-70 dBm) = 100 dB
The larger the system gain, the better the performance of the system will be. The MDR-8000
provides the agility to configure to system gain requirements.
2.14.1 Forward Error Correction
The MDR-8000 series radios contain FEC for low-level errors which result in receive threshold
improvement yielding higher system gain. The FEC system for low capacity radios uses the
Single-Lee-Error Correcting (SLEC) method. The high capacity radios use trellis modulation
and Reed-Solomon coding for FEC. A coding gain of approximately 2 dB at 10-6 error rate is
obtained.
2.14.2 Modulation/Capacity
The capacity key provides not only the ability to easily change to/from 32 from/to 128 TCM
(DS1/E1) or 64 QAM (DS3). By choosing either 32 or 128 TCM or 64 QAM the system gain is
affected for the radio. For lower capacity applications, 32 TCM provides 4 dB in additional system gain over 128 TCM through a lower receiver threshold. 128 TCM provides for maximum
spectral efficiency. For high capacity applications, 64 QAM provides optimum system gain
with maximum spectral efficiency.
2.14.3 Automatic Transmitter Power Control
Automatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) improves the ability to coordinate in frequency
congested areas and extends the life of the power amplifier by reducing the current. ATPC
can be enabled or disabled through the USI computer as follows:
Disabled Transmitter power is fixed at the recommended maximum level.
Enabled Transmitter power may be reduced up to 10 db from the maximum power level
when the far end Receive Signal Level (RSL) is above a minimum level.
Enabled T/O ATPC activity is limited to a maximum time without returning to
minimum transmit power. After 5 minutes of activity, the transmit power is forced to
minimum until the far end RSL returns to normal levels.
2.14.4 Optional Power Amplifier
The terminal can be equipped without a Power Amplifier (PA) for low power applications or
with a PA for medium/high-power applications. Refer to the General section for levels.
2-42
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Applications Section
2.15
ERROR CORRECTION AND TIME DOMAIN EQUALIZATION
The MDR-8000 features encoding/decoding for error correction and Time Domain Equalization (TDE) to ensure that even with the most severe multipath, only the correct digital data
is demodulated. Multipath distortion due to atmospheric conditions is the limiting performance factor for digital radios operating in frequency bands below 11 GHz. Under similar
multipath conditions, a wider spectrum is more severely affected than a narrower spectrum.
The narrow MDR-8000 spectrum is, therefore, less susceptible to multipath distortion than
other less efficient radios with the same capacity but wider spectrum. Additionally, the
MDR-8000 employs an 11-tap digital Time Domain Equalizer (TDE) to further reduce any
disruptive effects. The resulting dispersive fade margins virtually eliminate multipath distortion as a concern. Longer paths, better availability, dense system architectures, smaller
antennas, and lower long-term costs are all benefits of the MDR-8000 design.
2.16
ERRORLESS RECEIVER SWITCHING
On a protected system, the MDR-8000 switches between receivers without generating any bit
errors. This preserves the integrity of the data being carried regardless of any path propagation anomalies that might occur on the system.
2.17
MONITOR/CONTROL INTERFACES
The Office Support System (OSS) function can be configured to use the following alarm reporting systems:
MCS-11 This option allows the radios to interface with an alarm system that is based
on the MCS-11 protocol. The relay interface module provides relay closure indications of
radio alarms and status. This unit also provides 16 station alarm inputs and 6 relay closure control outputs for MCS-11 applications.
TBOS This option provides serial alarm/status reporting for the TBOS protocol.
ELMC This standard feature allows the radio to provide alarm/status reporting
through a proprietary protocol.
TMN The TMN Interface module provides Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
support along with a low speed general TCP/IP transport for network management traffic.
2.17.1 MCS-11
See Figure 2 - 37. Connectors J314 (DS1/E1) and J401 (DS3) provide synchronous connections
between racks 1 and 2 for MCS repeater applications. Connectors J308 and J309 provide asynchronous connections between racks 2 through N in a daisy chain application, such as in a
multiline system. Connector J307 is used to connect various TSM equipment for MCS-11 master station applications. Connector J310 provides an asynchronous port for MCS-11 connections between backbone and spur at junctions.
2.17.1.1 Daisy Chain Considerations
See Figure 2 - 37. Connector J308 on the first radio in the daisy chain must be connected to J308
on the second radio in the chain via a crosswired cable. Crosswired cable part number 695-7837001 through -005 connects XMT and RCV data and clocks on one end to RCV and XMT data and
clocks on the other end. The first radio in the chain must be provisioned J308 Output Clock
under FAULT ALARM provisioning. All other radios in the daisy chain must be connected via a
cable from J309 on one radio to J308 on the following radio using cable part number 695-7837021 through -025. The J309 to J308 cable is wired 1:1. All other radios in the daisy chain must be
provisioned J308 Input Clock under FAULT ALARM provisioning.
2-43
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Applications Section
3EM20188AAAA
2.17.2 TBOS
TBOS interface is provided by connector J305. Connector J305 accepts wire-wrap adapter kit
(PN 695-4171-002) and the TBOS lines are designed to be wire wrapped to the adapter.
2.17.3 Extended Link Monitor Channel
See Figure 2 - 38. The Extended Link Monitor Channel (ELMC) provides the convenience of monitoring and controlling both ends of a hop from one location as well as any terminal or contiguous
MDR-7000, 4000e, 5606, or 6000 network. The optional ELMC option key on the controller module adds remote provisioning and downloading capability to the monitor and control functions
SITE C
SITE D
MDR-8000
MDR-8000
B1
TERM.
DS307
B2
RPTR
DS308
J307
J401
MDR-8000
B3
RPTR
DS309
J401
695-4126-007/009/012
REPEATER CABLE
695-7836-001 THRU -005
POLLING ENGINE
MDR-8000
B4
TERM 4
DS310
J308
J310
695-7837-001
THRU -005
CROSSWIRE
STRAIGHT
CABLE
695-7837-025
SITE B
A10
SITE E
J308
B5
TERM
J309 DS303
B6
TERM
DS304
MDR-8000
MDR-8000
A9
TERM
TERM J306
J309
MDR-4000e
J311
MDR-4000e
695-7837-021
THRU -025
SITE F
J308
695-7801-001
J202
MUX
STRAIGHT
CABLE
695-7837-025
B7
TERM
J309 DS301
B8
TERM
DS302
MDR-8000
MDR-8000
SITE G
DMX-3003N
E1A
J310
E2A
RPTR
G7572
J314
TERM
P7572
MDR-6000
MDR-6000
RPTR
CABLE
372-0546-020/050/070
SITE H
E3A
E4A
RPTR
J314
S7341
TERM
T7341
MDR-6000
LEGEND:
XXXX
MCS-11 ADDRESS
YYYY
CONFIGURATION
ZZZZ
ELMC ADDRESS
SITE A
MDR-8000 J308/J309
PROVISIONING NOTES
MDR-6000
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Applications Section
SITE A
SITE C
MDR-8000
MDR-8000
B1
TERM.
DS307
B2
RPTR
DS308
J401
SITE G
MDR-8000
B4
TERM 4
DS310
J318
J401
REPEATER CABLE
695-7836-001 THRU -005
SITE B
MDR-8000
B3
RPTR
DS309
SITE H
695-4125-006/013
CROSSWIRE
J315
SITE D
B5
TERM
DS303
J318
MDR-8000
A10
A9
TERM
TERM
MDR-4000E
J102
MDR-4000E
B7
TERM
DS301
PIGTAIL
CABLE
695-4125-008
MDR-8000
SITE E
J314
RPTR
T7572
MDR-6000
MDR-8000
695-4125-006/013
CROSSWIRE
J318
E2A
B6
TERM
DS304
B8 J318
TERM
DS302
MDR-8000
695-4125-006/013
CROSSWIRE
MDR-6000
MDR-8000
MDR-8000
E1A
TERM
G7572
TERM
DS105
TERM
DS106
J309
J318
SITE I
J318
695-4125-006/013
CROSSWIRE
REPEATER
CABLE
372-0456
020/050/070
SITE F
J314
E4A
E3A
RPTR
J309
T7341
TERM
S7341
MDR-6000
MDR-6000
Note
When connecting MDR-8000 radios with Windows USI to radios with DOS USI, check the
DOS USI ELMC address for space, dash, slash, asterisk, or underscore. The Windows USI
cannot recognize a space, dash, slash, asterisk, or underscore. Change the DOS ELMC
address to a 5-character alphanumeric address without the prohibited characters.
MDR-1026F
06/12/04
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Applications Section
3EM20188AAAA
2.18
TMN
See Figure 2 - 39 for typical application drawings.
2.19
TMN ETHERNET INTERFACE
There are three front access Ethernet interfaces: ETH1 J1, ETH2 J2, and ETH3 J3, and one
internal Ethernet interface to the PQ/ECRC board. All Ethernet interfaces are interconnected
using the internal Ethernet HUB. The interface standard is 10BaseT. There is also a Point-topoint Protocol (PPP) front panel interface and a Craft front panel interface. See Figure 2 - 39
Sheet 1.
2.19.1 ETH1-Uplink
A typical application is shown that uses the Ethernet 1 uplink port to attach the TMN Interface to an external hub/switch. Since the port is wired as an uplink interface, a standard CAT
5 patch cord may be used.
2.19.2 ETH2 and ETH3
In the application shown, the Ethernet 2 and Ethernet 3 ports are used to interface external
TCP/IP based SNMP equipment. Standard CAT 5 patch cords may be used.
2.19.3 PPP Interface
The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) interface provides an attachment point for the transport of
the TCP/IP management channel through external equipment. The PPP interface connects
between two and only two devices. Although this interface of the TMN Interface card is not
ethernet, a direct interface to another TMN Interface card can be achieved using a standard
CAT5 Ethernet patch cord.
2.19.4 Craft Interface
The Craft port on each TMN Interface is an RS-232 serial interface primarily used for local
provisioning and maintenance. Communication through this port uses TCP/IP over a PPP
link, and can be used to access remote sites through the radio network. Interfacing from a
Windows PC to the TMN Interface requires the use of the Lower Layers Management
(LLMan) application.
2-46
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Applications Section
SNMP
MGR
DEVICE
I/O
INTFC
MODULE
U
EP
TL
HI
1N
K
256Kb/s
OVERHEAD
10 BASE T
HUB/
SW
ROUTER
LAN
LAPTOP
CONTROLLER
MODULE
PARALLEL
BUS
TMN
INTFC
MODULE
E
T
H
2
E
T
H
3
P
P
P
C
R
A
F
T
SNMP
MGR
DEVICE
10 BASE T
10 BASE T
RS422
CLK/DATA
RS232
USI
MUX
EQUIP
TO/FROM
EXT EQUIP
LAPTOP
LMW-8046F
12/09/02
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Applications Section
3EM20188AAAA
Figure 2 - 39, Sheet 2 depicts a typical network connection scheme with MDR-9000, MDR8000, MDR-4000s, and MDR-6000 radios. Only the MDR-8000 radios are equipped with the
AE-37AA TMN Interface module. The MDR-9000 radios are equipped with other SNMP circuitry and therefore the MDR-8000 and MDR-9000 radios are the only radios with SNMP
capability. All radios shown, except the MDR-9000 radios are equipped with MCS-11.
SNMP MUX
MDR-8000
MDR-6000
MDR-8000
MCS-11
OTHER
DRY CONTACT
MDR-9000
MDR-8000
MDR-9000
MDR-8000
SNMP
MANAGER
ETH
MDR-8000
RPTR*
MDR-8000
RPTR*
MDR-8000
ETH
MDR-8000
MDR-8000
MCS-11
MDR-8000
MCS-11
MANAGER
MDR-6000
ETH
ROUTER
OR
HUB
CORPORATE
LAN/WAN
ETH
SNMP MUX
MDR-9000
MDR-4000s
CORPORATE
FIREWALL
MCS-11
MANAGER
MDR-9000
MDR-4000s
SNMP EQPT
HUB
INTERNET
SNMP
MANAGER
SNMP
MANAGER
LMW-8048F
07/19/05
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Applications Section
2.20
TCP/IP WAN AND LAN NETWORKING OVERVIEW
A network of MDR-8000 Radios equipped with TMN Interface cards comprises a Wide Area
Network (WAN). In this presentation, radios equipped with TMN Interface cards are collectively referred to as radios.
The TMN Interface card contains a 5-port router (four PPP ports and one Ethernet port). From
a high level perspective, a network of radios can be considered a collection of routers, each
with an optional attached subnet where the routers are interconnected via Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) links. All connections between radios are routed at OSI Layer 3. See Figure D - 1
and Figure D-2 in Appendix D. A radio service channel provides the transport for the PPP
links between routers. The result is a general purpose TCP/IP network intended for the transport of relatively low bandwidth Network Management and control traffic. This network is
referred to as the radio WAN.
The one Ethernet port of the router is referred to as the LAN interface. It can be used to attach
the radio to existing external networks, or can be used by the router to define an Ethernet subnet at a remote site for the attachment of external TCP/IP equipment. All other ports to the
router are PPP interfaces. These are all defined as WAN interfaces. Access to the radio WAN is
obtained through the LAN or Craft interface by using the radio as a gateway. All TCP/IP traffic between Ethernet subnets is routed at Layer 3 across the PPP links of the WAN. The router
in the radio does not support Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) forwarding.
2.21
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Applications Section
3EM20188AAAA
When a radio is configured as a Terminal, the Repeater interface is disabled, thereby disabling the Repeater PPP link.
2.21.1.3 PPP Signal Transport Latency
The network planner should be aware of signal delays that will be encountered throughout
the WAN when using the PPP links in the overhead service channel or through the Front
Access PPP port. The delays result from the store and forward behavior of the transport
layer at each radio, as each packet will be completely received before the router forwards it
out the next link. The following information provides a means for calculating approximate
delay times.
Since the size of a typical trap varies, but averages around 300 bytes, assume a 300 byte IP
packet (~2400 bits) and a 64 kb/s link. The time required to transfer this packet across a
PPP link is (approximately) 2400/64000 = 37.5 ms. The time required to transfer packets of
other sizes is directly proportional to the size of the packet.
For packets that are forwarded out either an RF or Repeater PPP link, there is an additional
fixed delay of approximately 20ms for the Radio Controller to queue the packet from the
router for insertion into the radio service channel. This makes the total delay for the transfer of a 300 Byte packet between radios across an RF or Repeater link about 58ms. Packets
forwarded out the Front Access PPP port do not experience the additional queuing delay.
For example, the number of PPP links end-to-end along any given path is N-1, where N is
the number of T/Rs. For a 10 hop linear system with 20 T/Rs, the total number of RF and
Repeater PPP links is 19, and the one way end-to-end latency, assuming all packets take the
RF to Repeater links, will be 19 x 58 ms or approximately 1.1 seconds.
2.21.2 Operational Modes
The TMN Interface enhances the MCS-11 Service Channel to support the transport of PPP
traffic between TMN Interface modules. Since this Service Channel is no longer MCS-11 specific, but carries multiple network management protocols, the Service Channel is referred to as
the TMN Service Channel
The TMN Service Channel can be configured in several modes: Traditional MCS-11 Mode and
two PPP compatible modes (Insert and Pass-Through). In the PPP compatible modes all packets are HDLC framed. This allows both PPP and MCS-11 data to be interleaved on the same
channel.
2.21.2.1 Traditional MCS-11 Mode
The Service Channel passes directly through the I/O module while the Radio Controller
monitors the data. When the Radio Controller has MCS-11 data to input onto the Service
Channel, the I/O is placed in the off-hook mode and the local MCS-11 data is inserted into
the channel. After the data has been inserted, the I/O reverts to the on-hook mode. For further details, refer to MCS-11 Monitor and Control System Functional Description in Section
3 of this manual.
2.21.2.2 Insert Mode
This is the most common mode of operation with a TMN Interface module installed. In this
mode, the TMN Service Channel in the I/O module is always off-hook, and all TMN Service
Channel data terminates in either the Radio Controller or the TMN Interface. MCS-11 data
2-50
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Applications Section
is dropped and reinserted into the Service Channel using a forwarding buffer in the Radio
Controller, while the TMN Interface module recovers PPP data. The routing tables in the
TMN Interface determine if the PPP packet will be sent to the radio controller for re-insertion into the service Channel or forwarded out through one of the other TMN Interface ports.
In Insert Mode, all PPP data passing through a radio repeater must pass through two routers, one in each radio. See Figure 2 - 40.
REPEATER
CABLE
SERVICE CHANNEL
ACCESS ENABLED
A
SERVICE CHANNEL
ACCESS ENABLED
LMW-9025F
07/19/05
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Applications Section
3EM20188AAAA
REPEATER
CABLE
SERVICE CHANNEL
INSERT ENABLED
MCS-11 CABLE
SERVICE CHANNEL
INSERT DISABLED
P
ETHERNET or PPP CABLE
R
= PRIMARY
= SECONDARY
LMW-9026F
07/22/06
Figure 2 - 41 PPP With Some TMN Service Channels Disabled (Pass-Through Mode)
2.21.3 The Ethernet LAN
The Ethernet interface of the router is connected to one port of the TMN Interface card internal four-port hub. The other three ports of the hub are available through front access RJ-45
connectors on the TMN Interface card. One of these three ports is wired as an uplink port. The
hub facilitates the attachment of a small amount of local IP equipment or other radios to the
WAN without requiring an external hub. In most cases, the only types of Ethernet cabling
required are standard CAT-5 patch cords. The internal hub is a 10BASE-T repeating type as
opposed to the switching type. This makes all devices attached to the built-in hub members of
a single collision domain. For devices connected within a single collision domain, there are limits to the number of segments and repeaters in the longest path. Refer to CONNECTING
MDR-8000 RADIO TMN INTERFACE IN AN ETHERNET LAN later in this section for how
these limits may apply when interconnecting radios and external equipment using Ethernet
at a site.
Connecting to the 10BASE-T hub in the radio is normally not an issue since many LAN
devices that support 100BASE-T are actually 10/100BASE-T devices. To connect the radio
with external equipment that supports only 100BASE-T, an external 10/100BASE-T switch is
required.
2.21.4 The Craft Interface
The Craft Interface is an RS-232 interface providing a direct PPP connection to the router.
Interfacing to the Craft port from a Windows PC requires the use of the LLMan software.
LLMan presents a Virtual Ethernet interface to the PC, but uses the PPP protocol to establish
communications with the TMN Interface through a COM port. The LLMan Virtual Ethernet
interface is configured just like any other Network Card, using an IP address, Netmask, and
default gateway. Once an LLMan connecting link to a TMN Interface Craft port is established,
any TCP/IP application can use the link.
2.22
ROUTING
The radio supports both dynamic and static routing.
2-52
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Applications Section
Supports redundant WAN paths, allowing linear, tree, ring, mesh and other
WAN topologies. If redundant paths are available, OSPF can reconfigure routes
to work around a failed link.
To minimize the number of static route entries required, the radio network
addressing plan should allow for maximum route aggregation.
Static routes directed out the PPP interfaces use the interface name as the
route destination; rf, rptr, or (front) ppp
2-53
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Applications Section
3EM20188AAAA
2.23
ADDRESSING
Refer to Appendix D, Addressing Guidelines.
2.24
CONNECTING MDR-8000 RADIO TMN INTERFACE IN AN ETHERNET LAN
For more detailed information regarding connection of Ethernet radios in complex LAN configurations, refer to IEEE 802.3, ISO 8802.3, and the publication Ethernet: The Definitive
Guide, by Charles E. Spurgeon. Also refer to Interconnect Section, Para. 5.20.2, Typical Interconnect Scenarios.
2.24.1 Local Area Network
A Local Area Network (LAN) is a network that spans a relatively small area. Most LANs are
confined to a single building or group of buildings. However, one LAN can be connected to
other LANs over any distance via telephone lines and radio waves. A system of LANs connected in this way is called a wide area network (WAN). Our LANs connect Ethernet equipment within the same site. Each node (individual device) in the LAN is able to access data and
devices anywhere on the LAN. There are many different types of LANs, Ethernet being the
most common for Alcatel radios.
The following characteristics differentiate one LAN from another:
Topology: The geometric arrangement of devices on the network. All XBASE-T
LANS are considered to be STAR topology.
Protocols: The rules and encoding specifications for sending data. The protocols
also determine whether the network uses a peer-to-peer or client/server architecture.
Media: Devices can be connected by twisted-pair wire, coaxial cables, or fiber optic
cables.
LANs are capable of transmitting data at very fast rates but the distances are limited, and
there is also a limit on the number of devices that can be attached to a single LAN.
2-54
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Applications Section
The CSMA/CD method is internationally standardized in IEEE 802.3 and ISO 8802.3.
2.24.3 Basic Terms, Definitions, and Descriptions For Following Paragraphs.
MAU (Media Attachment Unit): Device used in the Ethernet network to provide
the interface between the port of the device and the common medium of the
Ethernet. MAUs are built into the hubs and also into the PQ/ECRC sub-boards
and perform the conversion of digital data from the Ethernet interface and collision detection
Repeater HUB: This hub is a form of multiple-port repeater for an Ethernet LAN.
When a packet arrives at one port, it is copied to the other ports so that all segments of the LAN can see all packets. When using a hub, all hosts compete for the
same bandwidth. The TMN card hub has three Ethernet ports each of which have
RJ-45 connectors able to accept Ethernet patch cables to connect to other devices.
The RJ-45 connectors are wired in through the hub and connected back to the PQ/
ECRC sub-board (Network Interface Card/NIC). The hubs also have MAU connectors used to connect Ethernet Media. A single hub is only able to connect a group
of devices operating at the same speed (i.e. all equipment connected to a 10BASET hub must operate at 10 Mbps).
Switching HUB or Multiport Switch: A type of hub that forwards packets to the
appropriate port based on the packet's address as opposed to copying packets to
all ports. Switching hubs can be used to break up or isolate collision domains.
Repeater Segment: Repeater segments are the links between MAUs. Any link
between two MAUs is considered a segment. Five segments are the maximum
recommended number to assure optimum performance and reliability on any
path through the LAN.
2-55
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Applications Section
3EM20188AAAA
Collision Domain: A group of Ethernet devices in a CSMA/CD LAN that are connected by repeaters (hubs) and compete for access on the network. Only one device
in the collision domain may transmit at any one time, and the other devices in the
domain listen to the network in order to avoid data collisions. Excessive collisions
can result in undetected loss of data and/or long delays in data transmission. All
hosts within a collision domain must compete for the same bandwidth.
2-56
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Applications Section
Radio 2
Internal Segment between PQ/RCRC
Subboard and Repeater Hub only
counted if longest path includes this
radio. Otherwise continue to next
radio.
Total of 3 segments
Radio 1
Internal Segment between PQ/ECRC
Subboard and Repeater Hub
TMN
TMN
Uplink
ETH 1
PQ/ECRC
Uplink
ETH 1
RJMAU 45
MAU
Internal
Segment
(Segment 1)
MAU
ETH 2
RJMAU 45
ETH 3
RJMAU 45
PQ/ECRC
RJ45 MAU
External
Segment
(Segment 2)
ETH 2
RJ45 MAU
MAU
ETH 3
RJ45 MAU
Internal
MAU
Segment
(Segment 3)
Radio 3
Internal segment between PQ/RCRC
Subboard and Repeater Hub only
counted if longest path includes this
radio.
Total of 4 segments
(Segment 3)
TMN
Uplink
ETH 1
RPTR HUB
PQ/ECRC
RJ45 MAU
ETH 2
RJ45 MAU
MAU
ETH 3
RJ45 MAU
Internal
MAU
Segment
(Segment 4)
TMN-1069F
06/29/05
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Applications Section
3EM20188AAAA
RH
RH
RH
Uplink
ETH 1
Uplink
ETH 1
ETH 2
ETH 2
ETH 3
ETH 3
Uplink
ETH 1
Uplink
ETH 1
ETH 2
ETH 2
ETH 3
ETH 3
RH
RH
Uplink
ETH 1
Uplink
ETH 1
ETH 2
OD = Other IP Device
RH = Repeater Hub
RH
ETH 2
ETH 3
OD
ETH 3
OD
RH
RH
Uplink
ETH 1
RH
Uplink
ETH 1
Uplink
ETH 1
ETH 2
ETH 2
ETH 3
ETH 3
RH
Uplink
ETH 1
ETH 2
ETH 2
ETH 3
OD
RH
ETH 3
RH
ETH 2
ETH 3
ETH 3
RH
ETH 2
ETH 3
ETH 3
RH
Uplink
ETH 1
ETH 2
ETH 2
ETH 3
ETH 3
Uplink
ETH 1
ETH 2
Uplink
ETH 1
OD
RH
Uplink
ETH 1
RH
OD = Other IP Device
RH = Repeater Hub
SH = Switch Hub
OD
Uplink
ETH 1
Uplink
ETH 1
ETH 2
ETH 3
RH
Uplink
ETH 1
SH
Uplink
ETH 1
ETH 2
ETH 2
ETH 3
RH
OD
TMN-1070F
06/28/05
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Applications Section
RH
RH
RH
Uplink
ETH 1
Uplink
ETH 1
ETH 2
ETH 2
ETH 3
ETH 3
RH
Uplink
ETH 1
Uplink
ETH 1
ETH 2
ETH 2
ETH 3
ETH 3
RH
OD
Uplink
ETH 1
ETH 2
ETH 3
RH
RH
Uplink
ETH 1
SH
RH
Uplink
ETH 1
Uplink
ETH 1
ETH 2
ETH 2
ETH 2
ETH 3
ETH 3
ETH 3
RH
RH
OD
Uplink
ETH 1
Uplink
ETH 1
ETH 2
ETH 2
ETH 3
ETH 3
RH
RH
RH
ETH 2
ETH 3
ETH 3
ETH 2
ETH 3
RH
Uplink
ETH 1
Uplink
ETH 1
ETH 2
OD = Other IP Device
RH = Repeater Hub (Internal)
SH = Switch Hub (External)
OD
RH
Uplink
ETH 1
Uplink
ETH 1
OD
ETH 2
Uplink
ETH 1
ETH 2
ETH 3
OD
ETH 3
OD
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
2.25
Applications Section
3EM20188AAAA
PPP
REPEATER CABLE
MDR-8000
RADIO
OTHER RADIOS,
LEASED LINE, OTHER
PPP
MDR-8000
RADIO
ETHERNET
CABLE
ETHERNET CABLE
OTHER TMN
INTFC MODULE/
MODEM/DATA
CKT
REPEATER CABLE
MDR-8000
RADIO
ETHERNET CABLE
MDR-8000
RADIO
LMW-8052F
07/18/06
ETHERNET CABLE
MDR-8000
RADIO
TERMINAL
ETHERNET CABLE
MDR-8000
RADIO
TERMINAL
ETHERNET
CABLE
MDR-8000
RADIO
TERMINAL
MDR-8000
RADIO
TERMINAL
TMN-1065F
07/18/06
3EM20188AAAA
Applications Section
PPP
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
OTHER TMN
INTFC MODULE/
MODEM/DATA
CKT
OTHER RADIOS,
LEASED LINE, OTHER
PPP
REPEATER CABLE
MDR-8000
RADIO
REPEATER CABLE
MDR-8000
RADIO
PPP
MDR-8000
RADIO
MDR-8000
RADIO
LMW-8052A-F
06/21/06
PPP
MDR-8000
RADIO
TERMINAL
PPP
MDR-8000
RADIO
TERMINAL
ETHERNET
MDR-8000
RADIO
TERMINAL
MDR-8000
RADIO
TERMINAL
TMN-1065A-F
07/21/06
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Applications Section
3EM20188AAAA
2.26
EFFECTIVE AND PROBLEMATIC ROUTING CONNECTIONS
When dealing with OSPF, and adding cables between radios to create protection by redundancy, route costs to a given destination must be considered. Anytime there are two routes
with identical cost to a given destination, OSPF may periodically switch between the two
routes, causing momentary glitches in communication. See Figure 2-48 for examples of effective and problematic connections between radios within a site.
EFFECTIVE
CONNECTIONS
PROBLEMATIC
CONNECTIONS
RPTR
RPTR
ETH
PPP
RPTR
RPTR
ETH
RPTR
PPP
PPP
PPP
ETH
ETH
RPTR
PPP
RPTR
RPTR
ETH
ETH
ETH
ETH
ETH
ETH
ETH
TMN-1074F
07/19/05
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Applications Section
2.27
SERVICE CHANNEL
The service channel is defined as a non-revenue bearing channel provided as part of a transmission system for operation, maintenance, monitoring, and control of the system. The MDR8000 provides three 64 kb/s service channels and one 16 kb/s supervisory channel. Each service channel can carry audio (orderwire), RS-232 data, or MCS-11 data. The 16 kb/s supervisory channel is converted to 64 kb/s to produce a fourth 64 kb/s channel. The four channels are
multiplexed and shifted in and out of registers on the controller using a 256 kHz clock. Refer
to the functional description section for details.
See Figure 2 - 49. There are eight connectors on the MDR-8000 backplane to interface with the
three service channels. The connectors on the backplane interface three functions: audio, RS232, and MCS-11. Each service channel is provisioned for a specific function. Audio and MCS
can be put on any open service channel. RS-232 data can be put on service channel 1 or 2 but
cannot be put on service channel 3.
2.27.1 4-Wire Audio
Two 4-wire ports are provided to interface external 4-wire audio equipment. The Audio 1 and 2
ports (J316 and J317) are provisionable. Refer to the Initial Turnup section for details. These
4-wire audio ports should not be confused with the non-provisionable 2-wire handset.
2.27.1.1 Audio 1
Audio 1 (J316) is a 4-wire function port on the backplane that provides off-hook detection,
level control, E and M lead signaling, and DTMF decoding capabilities. Audio 1 circuitry is
also used to transport audio over the 2-wire audio handset.
2.27.1.2 Audio 2
Audio 2 (J317) is a 4-wire function port on the backplane that provides off-hook detection,
level control, and E and M lead signaling. Audio 2 has no DTMF decoding capabilities. Audio 2
circuitry does not support the 2-wire audio handset.
2.27.2 Handset Jack
The 2-wire port at the TEL connector on AE-37Y Controller accepts the optional handset,
listed under equipment supplied in the General section, or a standard telephone. The 2-wire
port is not provisionable and should not be confused with the 4-wire provisionable ports (Audio
1 and Audio 2), however only Audio 1 circuitry supports the 2-wire audio handset. To use the
handset, the radio must be provisioned for Audio 1.
2-63
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Applications Section
3EM20188AAAA
J316
J316
RADIO
AUDIO
1
TELEPHONE
(4-WIRE)
RADIO
CONTROLLER
J317
AUDIO
1
CONTROLLER
SC1
AUDIO
2
SC
MULDEM
TSM2500
SC
MULDEM
SC2
SC2
OVERHEAD
CHANNELS
MCS
OVERHEAD
CHANNELS
SC3
J307, J310
(BRIDGED)
TSM2500
MCS
SC3
TEL
TEL
J315, J318
(BRIDGED)
J315, J318
(BRIDGED)
SC4
ELMC
J317
SC1
AUDIO
2
J307, J310
(BRIDGED)
TELEPHONE
(4-WIRE)
SC4
ELMC
J312
J312
RS2321
LAPTOP
HANDSET
(2-WIRE)
RS2321
LAPTOP
J313
J313
RS2322
RS2322
LMW-3138F
04/21/04
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Applications Section
2-65
2-66
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
This section presents a functional description of the MDR-8000 series radios. The descriptive
information covers the main functions of the radio, followed by a description of the modules.
Module descriptions are to the functional block level to meet maintenance philosophy requirements. Engineering drawings referenced throughout the text are located in the Diagrams section of this manual. Prior to describing the radio itself, information about a typical MDR
network is described.
3.1
MICROWAVE DIGITAL RADIO NETWORK DESCRIPTION
See Figure 3 - 1. Communication between microwave radio sites is by microwave links. These
links are called hops and numbered sequentially. The link between the first and second site
would be identified as Hop 1. The link between the second and third site would be identified as
Hop 2, and so on. The following description deals with three sites identified as sites. The third
site, site C, is also a terminal radio site comprised of one MDR.
At site A, the MDR comprises one transmitter (XMTR) and one receiver (RCVR). Site A can
communicate with site B via a common RF XMT and RCV antenna in two directions commonly identified as eastbound and westbound traffic (arbitrary directions chosen to distinguish between two different but not necessarily opposite directions of transmission or
reception of radio signals). The RF communication path between site A and site B is Hop 1.
At site B, there are two MDRs each comprising one XMTR and one RCVR. These radios can be
located in the same rack on separate shelves or in separate racks. The radios communicate
with each other, internal to the site, over connecting cable rather than by RF antenna. This
configuration is called a repeater. In a repeater configuration, one MDR communicates with
site A and the other MDR communicates with site C by means of RF XMT and RCV antennas.
Again, the directions of communication are identified as eastbound and westbound traffic. The
RF communication path between site B and site C is Hop 2.
At site C, the MDR comprises one transmitter (XMTR) and one receiver (RCVR). Site C can
communicate with site B over a common RF XMT and RCV antenna in both eastbound and
westbound traffic directions.
It should be noted that input and output to and from site B can also be Drop and/or Insert traffic via customer furnished equipment (CFE) in addition to the normal eastbound/westbound
payload traffic. Drop is the process and/or point at which transmitted information is removed
or diverted from the normal channel path by CFE prior to reaching the terminal site. Insert: is
the process and/or point at which desired information is inserted by CFE as opposed to the
normal XMT or RCV modules for transmission to the next site.
F1, F2, F3, and F4 represent the frequencies transmitted and received by the specific radio
transmitters and receivers.
3.2
MDR-8000 MAIN FUNCTIONS
See Figure 3 - 2 through Figure 3 - 12.
3.2.1 Transmit
In the transmit direction, the MDR-8000 uses a modulation structure where the I and Q baseband signals modulate the in-phase and quadrature phase components of the transmitter.
3-1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3.2.1.1
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
3.2.2.1
3-2
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Hop 1
Eastbound
Hop 2
Eastbound
Westbound
RF
Radio
Westbound
RF
Site B
(Repeater)
Radio
Site A
Terminal
Radio
Radio
Site B
(Repeater)
Site C
Terminal
Hop
1
XMTR
F1
RCVR
F2
Hop
2
Eastbound
RF
Westbound
RF
Site A
(Terminal)
RCVR
F3
XMTR
F2
XMTR
F4
Westbound
RF
XMTR
F1
Eastbound
RF
RCVR
F2
Site B
(Repeater)
Traffic Channel
(Payload)
Aux Channel
RCVR
F1
Site C
(Terminal)
Payload &
Aux Channel
XMTR
F1
XMTR
F2
CFE
Insert
Traffic Channel
(Payload)
Aux Channel
Payload &
Aux Channel
RCVR
F2
Site A
RCVR
F1
P/O Site B
CFE
Drop
MDR-1251
06/20/06
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
3.3
MDR-8000 MAIN FUNCTIONS
See Figure 3 - 2 through Figure 3 - 8. In the transmit direction, the MDR-8000 uses a modulation structure where the I and Q baseband signals modulate the in-phase and quadrature
phase components of the transmitter.
The DS1/E1 I/O interface converts the format of the incoming DS1/E1 data streams to I, Q,
data, and clock. The DS1/E1 I/O interface module uses the DS1/E1 signals to generate 32 or
128 trellis code amplitude modulated (TCM) baseband signals The transmitter processes the
TCM baseband signals to generate the modulated TCM RF signal. The RF signal is then
amplified and applied directly to the antenna branching or further amplified by a solid-state
amplifier (optional) and applied to the antenna branching.
The DS3 I/O interface converts the format of the incoming DS3 and Wayside (WS) DS1 data
streams to I, Q, data, and clock. The I/O interface module uses the DS3 signals to generate 64
Quadrature Amplitude Modulated (QAM) baseband signals. The transmitter processes the
QAM baseband signals to generate the modulated QAM RF signal. The RF signal is then
amplified and applied directly to the antenna branching or further amplified by a solid-state
amplifier (optional) and applied to the antenna branching.
In the receive direction, the MDR-8000 uses a demodulation conversion structure. The
received TCM or QAM RF signal is fed into a filter followed by a receiver module. The receiver
module directly converts the RF signal to I and Q baseband signals and provides all of the
acquisition loops. The receiver also provides countermeasures to dynamic path distortions.
Clock and digital data are extracted from the analog channels and passed on to the I/O interface. The digital data is processed by the I/O interface module and converted to a DS1/E1 or
DS3 format.
The MDR-8000 consists of I/O, transmit, receive, control and monitor, and power distribution
subsystems. An overview of these functions followed by detailed functional descriptions of the
modules that comprise each subsystem follows.
3-4
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
MCS11
USI
RELAY
MODULE
LMC
ASYNC
CONTROL/
STATUS
DS1
116
AE37( )
CONTROLLER
CONTROL/
STATUS
TO/FROM
XCONNECT
LBO
X/Y DATA
BUS 14
DATA/RS232/AUDIO
SYNC
CHANS
116
X/Y DATA
BUS 14
OVHD
DX-35M
DS1/E1
I/O
INTFC
I/Q
DATA
CONTROL/
STATUS
UD-35( )
XMTR
RF
STATUS
UD-51( )
POWER
AMPL
(OPTION)
RF
TO/FROM
ANT W/G
BRANCHING
RAIL
DATA
UD-36( )
RCVR
RF
TO/FROM
RPTR INTFC
POWER
SUPPLY
LMW-3142-SM
04/14/00
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
MCS11
USI
LMC
CONTROL/
STATUS
RELAY
MODULE
SYNC
LBO
DATA/RS232/AUDIO
AE37( )
CONTROLLER
CONTROL/
STATUS
TO/FROM
XCONNECT
DS3
ASYNC
DS3
WAYSIDE
DS1
WAYSIDE
DS1
P/N DATA
P/N DATA
OVHD
DX-35N
DS3
I/O
INTFC
I/Q
DATA
CONTROL/
STATUS
UD-35( )
XMTR
RF
STATUS
UD-51( )
POWER
AMPL
(OPTION)
RF
TO/FROM
ANT W/G
BRANCHING
I/Q
DATA
UD-36( )
RCVR
RF
TO/FROM
RPTR INTFC
POWER
SUPPLY
LMW-3100
04/14/00
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
MCS11
USI
RELAY
MODULE
TO/FROM
X-CONNECT
WAYSIDE
DS1
LMC
ASYNC
CONTROL/
STATUS
AE37( )
CONTROLLER
CONTROL/
STATUS
OVHD
WAYSIDE
DS1
DX-35P
OC3
I/O
INTFC
CONTROL/
STATUS
OC3
OC3
AUX
INTFC
SVCE
CHAN
RPTR
DS1
DATA/RS232/AUDIO
SYNC
I/Q
DATA
UD-35( )
XMTR
RF
STATUS
UD-51( )
POWER
AMPL
(OPTION)
RF
TO/FROM
ANT W/G
BRANCHING
I/Q
DATA
UD-36( )
RCVR
RF
TO/FROM
RPTR INTFC
POWER
SUPPLY
LMW-5029-SM
01/07/04
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
MCS11
USI
LMC
DATA/RS232/AUDIO
ASYNC
CONTROL/
STATUS
RELAY
MODULE
SYNC
AE37( )
CONTROLLER
CONTROL/
STATUS
OVHD
CONTROL/
STATUS
10/100/1000 BASE T
ETHERNET
STATUS
ETHERNET DATA
AUX
INTFC
DS1
DS1
DX-35R
I/Q
ETHERNET DATA
I/O
INTFC
UD-35( )
XMTR
RF
UD-51( )
POWER
AMPL
(OPTION)
RF
TO/FROM
ANT W/G
BRANCHING
SVCE
CHAN
RPTR
DS1
RX/RS
DATA
UD-36( )
RCVR
RF
TO/FROM
RPTR INTFC
POWER
SUPPLY
Note
Ethernet interface can be electrical or optical.
MDR-1074F
07/23/06
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
MCS11
USI
LMC
DATA/RS232/AUDIO
ASYNC
SYNC
CONTROL/
STATUS
RELAY
MODULE
AE37( )
CONTROLLER
CONTROL/
STATUS
TO/FROM
XCONNECT
DS1
116
CHANS
116
LBO
OVHD
I/Q
DATA
DX-35M
DS1/E1
I/O
INTFC
CONTROL/
STATUS
STATUS
UD-51( )
POWER
AMPL
(OPTION)
RF
UD-35( )
XMTR
A
X/Y DATA
BUS 14
RAIL
DATA
X/Y DATA
BUS 14
A
TO/FROM
RPTR INTFC
RF
TO/FROM
ANT W/G
BRANCHING
RF
UD-36( )
RCVR
A
POWER
SUPPLY
A
B
LMW-3144F
01/07/04
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
MCS11
USI
RELAY
MODULE
DATA/RS232/AUDIO
ASYNC
SYNC
CONTROL/
STATUS
AE37( )
CONTROLLER
CONTROL/
STATUS
TO/FROM
XCONNECT
DS3
LMC
DS3
LBO
WAYSIDE
DS1
WAYSIDE
DS1
P/N DATA
P/N DATA
OVHD
I/Q
DATA
DX-35N
DS3
I/O
INTFC
STATUS
UD-51( )
POWER
AMPL
(OPTION)
RF
UD-35( )
XMTR
A
I/Q
DATA
RF
TO/FROM
RPTR INTFC
CONTROL/
STATUS
TO/FROM
ANT W/G
BRANCHING
RF
UD-36( )
RCVR
A
POWER
SUPPLY
A
B
LMW-3101F
01/07/04
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
MCS11
USI
RELAY
MODULE
LMC
DATA/RS232/AUDIO
ASYNC
SYNC
CONTROL/
STATUS
AE37( )
CONTROLLER
CONTROL/
STATUS
OVHD
CONTROL/
STATUS
OC3
STATUS
TO/FROM
XCONNECT
WAYSIDE
DS1
OC3
AUX
INTFC
WAYSIDE
DS1
I/Q
DATA
DX-35P
OC3
I/O
INTFC
UD-51( )
POWER
AMPL
(OPTION)
RF
UD-35( )
XMTR
A
I/Q
DATA
SVCE
CHAN
RPTR
DS1
TO/FROM
RPTR INTFC
RF
TO/FROM
ANT W/G
BRANCHING
RF
UD-36( )
RCVR
A
POWER
SUPPLY
A
B
LMW-5028F
05/21/01
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
MCS11
USI
RELAY
MODULE
LMC
DATA/RS232/AUDIO
ASYNC
SYNC
CONTROL/
STATUS
AE37( )
CONTROLLER
CONTROL/
STATUS
OVHD
CONTROL/
STATUS
10/100/1000BASE-T
STATUS
ETHERNET
WAYSIDE
DS1
OC3
AUX
INTFC
DS1
I/Q
DX-35R
DATA
ETHERNET
I/O
INTFC
UD-51( )
POWER
AMPL
(OPTION)
RF
UD-35( )
XMTR
A
RX/RS
DATA
SVCE
CHAN
RPTR
DS1
TO/FROM
ANT W/G
BRANCHING
RF
UD-36( )
RCVR
TO/FROM
RPTR INTFC
RF
A
B
POWER
SUPPLY
Note
A
B
MDR-1199F
07/21/06
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3.4
I/O SUBSYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
See Figure 3 - 10, Figure 3 - 11, Figure 3 - 12 and Figure 3 - 13. The DS1/E1 and DS3 I/O subsystem consists of the DS1/E1 and DS3 LBO and I/O interface modules. The OC3/STM-1 I/O
subsystem consists of the OC3/STM-1 AUX interface board and I/O interface modules. The I/O
subsystem interfaces the XMT and RCV and monitor and control subsystems. The DS1, E1,
and DS3 I/O subsystem converts digital signals into a data stream and multiplexes this data
with overhead data. The OC3/STM-1 I/O subsystem converts OC3/STM-1 optical signals to
digital signals and multiplexes this data with overhead data. Multiplexed data is demultiplexed to separate the overhead data from the data stream.
J303/
J304
DS1
116
LBO
J314
X/Y DATA
BUS 14
I/Q
DATA
DX-35M
DS1/E1
I/O
INTFC
A
RAIL
DATA
TO
XMTR A
FROM
RCVR A
MX/DX
BUS
CHANNEL BUS
DX-35M
DS1/E1
I/O
INTFC
B
I/Q
DATA
RAIL
DATA
TO
XMTR B
FROM
RCVR B
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
J1 (IN)/
J2 (OUT)
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
DS3
DX35N
I/O
INTFC
A
LBO
J201 (IN)/
J202 (OUT)
WAYSIDE
DS1
J401
P/N DATA
I/Q
DATA
I/Q
DATA
TO
XMTR A
FROM
RCVR A
MX/DX
BUS
DS3
CHANNEL BUS
DS1
CHANNEL BUS
I/Q
DATA
DX35N
I/O
INTFC
B
I/Q
DATA
TO
XMTR B
FROM
RCVR B
OC3/STM-1
DX-35P
OC3/STM-1
INTFC
A
OC3/STM-1
AUX
INTFC
J201 (IN)/
J202 (OUT)
I/Q
DATA
FROM
RCVR A
MX/DX
BUS
RPTR
DS1
DS1
CHANNEL BUS
DX-35P
OC3/STM-1
INTFC
B
DATA BUS
OC3/STM-1
TO
XMTR A
WAYSIDE
DS1
SVCE
CHANNEL BUS
J203
I/Q
DATA
I/Q
DATA
I/Q
DATA
TO
XMTR B
FROM
RCVR B
LMW-3156F
01/07/04
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
10/100/1000BaseT
DX-35R
Ethernet I/O
INTFC
A
AUX
INTFC
J201 (IN)/
J202 (OUT)
I/Q
DATA
TO
XMTR A
FROM
RCVR A
DS1
MX/DX
BUS
SVCE
CHANNEL BUS
J203
I/Q
DATA
RPTR
DS1
CHANNEL BUS
DX-35R
Ethernet I/O
INTFC
B
DATA BUS
10/100/1000BaseT
I/Q
DATA
I/Q
DATA
TO
XMTR B
FROM
RCVR B
LMW-3156B-F
07/21/06
3.4.1.1
DS1/E1 Radio
Digital signals are routed from the DS1 cross-connect/E1 interface to the LBO. The incoming
DS1/E1 signals are transformer coupled to a splitter/termination. The splitter terminates
the balanced signals and converts them to unbalanced P and N signals. These signals are
connected to the A and B I/O Interface cards. The I/O interface cards multiplex up to 16 DS1/
E1 input signals with overhead into a data stream. If the radio is being used as a repeater
(repeater cable is connected to J314), data on the X/Y data bus is also multiplexed into the
data stream. This data stream is converted into XY rail data and then multiplexed into I/Q
data rails (digital baseband).
3.4.1.2
DS3 Radio
Digital signals are routed from the DS3 cross-connect to the LBO. The incoming DS3 signals
are transformer coupled to a splitter/termination. The splitter terminates the balanced signals and converts them to unbalanced P and N signals. These signals are connected to the A
and B I/O Interface cards. If wayside DS1 is desired, digital signals are routed from the DS1
cross-connect to the LBO. The incoming wayside DS1 signals are transformer coupled to a
3-15
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
DS1 splitter/termination. The DS1 splitter terminates the balanced signals and converts
them to unbalanced P and N signals that are connected to the A and B I/O Interface cards.
The I/O interface cards multiplex one or three DS3 and WS DS1 signals with overhead into a
data stream. If the radio is being used as a repeater (repeater cable is connected to J401),
data on the X/Y data bus is also multiplexed into the data stream. This data stream is converted into XY rail data and then multiplexed into I/Q data rails (digital baseband).
3.4.1.3
OC3/STM-1 Radio
Optical signals are routed from the fiber optic interface to the A and B I/O Interface cards. If
wayside DS1 is desired, digital signals are routed from the DS1 cross-connect to the aux board.
The wayside DS1 signals are connected to the A and B I/O Interface cards. The I/O interface
cards convert the optical signal to digital signal and multiplex the digital signal and WS DS1
signals with overhead into a data stream. If the radio is being used as a repeater (repeater
cable is connected to J401), data on the X/Y data bus is also multiplexed into the data stream.
This data stream is converted into XY rail data and then multiplexed into I/Q data rails (digital baseband).
3.4.1.4
Ethernet Radio
The Ethernet radio I/O subsystem is populated with the OC3 AUX Interface board and one
or two DX-35R-1 or -2 ETH I/O Interface modules for Ethernet software releases prior to
R2.0 and the line interface card and one or two DX-35S-1 ETH/T1 I/O modules for release
following R2.0. The following paragraphs describe both versions of I/O subsystems.
3.4.1.4.1
The DX-35R-1 I/O interface module accepts electrical 10/100/1000 Base-T ETH signals. The
DX-35R-2 I/O Interface module accepts optical or electrical 10/100/1000 Base-T ETH signals.
Optical ETH signals are converted to ETH electrical signals using an SFP (Small Form-factor Pluggable), a compact optical XCVR connected to the fiber optic cable.
In the ETH RCV/Radio XMT direction, the I/O interface module processes and multiplexes
the incoming ETH signals with up to four (4) DS1 and service channel signals to provide an
I/Q baseband data output to the XMTR module(s). The XMTR module(s) convert the digital
baseband signal to a modulated TCM RF signal that can be further amplified by the Power
Amplifier module(s) (if equipped) or applied directly to the antenna.
3.4.1.4.2
The DX-35S-1 ETH/T1 I/O module accepts optical and electrical 10/100/1000 Base-T ETH
signals. Optical ETH signals are converted to ETH electrical signals using an SFP (Small
Form-factor Pluggable), a compact optical XCVR connected to the fiber optic cable.
In the ETH RCV/Radio XMT direction, the ETH/T1 I/O module processes and multiplexes
the incoming ETH signals with up to 32 T1 and service channel signals to provide an I/Q
baseband data output to the XMTR module(s). The XMTR module(s) convert the digital
baseband signal to a modulated TCM RF signal that can be further amplified by the Power
Amplifier module(s) (if equipped) or applied directly to the antenna.
3-16
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
3.4.1.5
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Overhead
The transmitted overhead data consists of three 64 kb/s service channels and one 64 kb/s
extended link monitor channel (ELMC). Each service channel contains multiplexed telephone, ELMC, MCS-11/TBOS alarm and control data, RS-232 serial data, and audio signals.
3.4.2
3.4.2.1
DS1/E1 Radio
In the I/O interface, the digital rails received from the RCVR are demultiplexed to separate
the overhead data from the traffic. The I/Q rails are demultiplexed to produce an XY rail data
stream that is converted and demultiplexed to provide overhead and up to 16 DS1/E1 outputs.
3.4.2.2
DS3 Radio
In the I/O interface, the digital rails received from the RCVR are demultiplexed to separate
the overhead data from the traffic. The I/Q rails are demultiplexed to produce an XY rail
data stream that is converted and demultiplexed to provide overhead, up to three DS3 outputs and up to three wayside DS1 outputs.
3.4.2.3
OC3/STM-1 Radio
In the I/O interface, the digital rails received from the RCVR are demultiplexed to separate
the overhead data from the traffic. The I/Q rails are demultiplexed to produce an XY rail
data stream that is converted and demultiplexed to provide overhead, OC3/STM-1 optical
output, and up to three wayside DS1 outputs.
3.4.2.4
Ethernet Radio
The Ethernet radio I/O subsystem is populated with the OC3 AUX interface board and one
or two DX-35R-1 or -2 ETH I/O interface modules for Ethernet software releases prior to
R2.0 and the ETH/T1 Line interface card and one or two DX-35S-1 ETH/T1 I/O modules for
releases following R2.0. The following paragraphs describe both versions of I/O subsystems.
3.4.2.4.1 I/O Prior to R2.0
In the Radio RCV/ETH XMT direction, the TCM RF signal from the antenna is converted to
demodulated R and S baseband data in the RCVR module(s) and applied to the I/O interface
module(s). The I/O interface module(s) process and demultiplex the baseband to provide
electrical ETH, DS1, and service channel outputs to the OC3 AUX interface board.
3.4.2.4.2 I/O After R2.0
In the Radio RCV/ETH XMT direction, the TCM RF signal from the antenna is converted to
demodulated R and S baseband data in the RCVR module(s) and applied to the ETH/T1 I/O
module(s). The ETH/T1 I/O module(s) process and demultiplex the baseband to provide electrical ETH, T1, and service channel outputs to the line interface card.
3.4.2.5
Overhead
The overhead data stream is demultiplexed to provide three 64 kb/s service channels and
one 64 kb/s ELMC channel. Each service channel is demultiplexed to provide telephone,
ELMC, MCS-11/TBOS alarm and control data, RS-232 serial data, and audio signals.
3-17
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
3.5
I/O SUBSYSTEM MODULES
Modules are described to the functional block diagram level in the following paragraphs. Modules are described in transmit signal flow order.
3.5.1 DS1/E1 LBO
Refer to Table 3 - 1 for LBO options. The MDR-8000/i/s can be equipped with an XMT LBO to
interface DS1 or E1 data rates. The LBO compensates for the distance to the cross-connect for
DS1 requirements or compensates for 12 dB cable loss (maximum allowed) between the radio
and customer connection point to meet E1 requirements. See Figure 3 - 14 for application
information.
PART NUMBER
APPLICATIONS
3DH 03144 AA
Linear/Ring
3DH 03144 AB
Linear/Ring
3DH 03144 AC
Linear/Ring
3DH 03144 AD
Linear/Ring
3DH 04164 AA
Back-to-Back Repeater
3DH 04164-AB
Back-to-Back Repeater
3DH 04164 AC
Back-to-Back Repeater
3DH 04164 AD
Back-to-Back Repeater
3.5.1.1
See Figure 3 - 15 for functional block diagram. The transformer couples the DS1/E1 Multiplex Tip/Ring (DS1/E1 MX T/R) signals at J303 to DX-35( ) I/O Interface A (via connector
A3D), and B (via connector B3D) if the system is hot-standby.
3.5.1.2
The demultiplexed signals from the DX-35( ) I/O Interface module(s) are transformer coupled
to the LBO circuit. The LBO circuit simulates lengths of twisted-pair cable to meet cross-connect requirements. The LBO conditions up to 16 DS1/E1 lines. The balanced output is applied
to the DS1 cross-connect or E1 interface via connector J304.
3.5.1.3
The DS1/E1 LBO distributes repeater data (XMT and RCV X/Y DATA T/F 1-4) between
RPTR connector J314 and the A and B I/O interface modules.
3-18
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
DS1/E1 LBO
A3D
DX CLK
DX CLK
DX SYNC
DX SYNC
DX ALIGN
DX ALIGN
DX FRM LOSS
DX FRM LOSS
A3
B3D
DX-35M
I/O
INTFC B
MX CLK
MX CLK
MX SYNC
MX SYNC
ALL Z CLK
ALL Z CLK
RCV A ON LINE
RCV B DISABLE
I/O A ON LINE
I/O B DISABLE
RCV A DISABLE
RCV B ONLINE
I/O A DISABLE
I/O B ONLINE
B3
MW211-0025-1B-F
07/21/06
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
DS1/E1 LBO
J314
J314
RPTR
LBO
A3D
DX35M
I/O
INTFC A
A3
B3D
DX35M
I/O
INTFC B
B3
A3C
DX35M
I/O
INTFC A
J314
J314
RPTR
LBO
A3
B3C
DX35M
I/O
INTFC B
B3
J303
FROM
CROSS
CONNECT/
E1 INTFC
A3D
DS1 MX T/R 116
DX35M
I/O
INTFC A
A3
A3D
DX35M
I/O
INTFC A
A3
B3D
DS1 DX T/R 111
DS1 MX T/R 116
DS1 DX T/R 1216
DX35M
I/O
INTFC B
B3
B3D
J304
DX35M
I/O
INTFC B
B3
TO
CROSS
CONNECT/
E1 INTFC
MW21100251A
072598
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
B3D
FROM
DX35M
I/O INTERFACE
B
J304
A3D
DS1/E1 DX T
FROM
DX35M
I/O INTERFACE
A
DS1/E1 DX T
XFMR
TO DS1
CROSS
CONNECT/
E1 INTFC
LBO
DS1/E1 DX R
DS1/E1 DX R
1 OF 16
RCV CIRCUIT
1 OF 16
A3D
J303
DS1/E1 MX T
FROM DS1
CROSS
CONNECT/
E1 INTFC
DS1/E1 MX T
TO
DX35M
I/O INTERFACE
A
XFMR
DS1/E1 MX R
DS1/E1 MX R
B3D
XMT CIRCUIT
TO
DX35M
I/O INTERFACE
B
MW21100261
050698
3.5.2.1
Strapping
FAR position straps are provided to bypass the LBO circuits and pass the signals without
delay. NEAR straps are provided to delay the circuit. Straps are changed manually and are
not software controlled.
3-21
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3.5.2.2
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
See Figure 3 - 16 for functional block diagram. The transformer couples the DS3 Multiplex
Tip/Ring (DS3 MX T/R) signals at J2 to DX-35N I/O Interface A (via connector A3C), and B
(via connector B3C) if the system is hot-standby.
3.5.2.3
The transformer couples the wayside DS1 Multiplex Tip/Ring (WDS1 MX T/R) signals at
J201 to DX-35N DS3 I/O Interface A (via connector A3D), and B (via connector B3D) if the
system is hot-standby.
DS3/E3 LBO
A3D
DX-35N
DS3
I/O
INTFC
A
B3D
B TERM SYNC IN
A3
WDS1 MX STFR
WDS1 MX STFR
RCV A ON LINE
DX-35N
DS3
I/O
INTFC
B
A3C
B3C
RCV B DISABLE
I/O A ON LINE
I/O B DISABLE
RCV A DISABLE
RCV B ONLINE
I/O A DISABLE
I/O B ONLINE
XMT A ON LINE
XMT B DISABLE
XMT A DISABLE
XMT B ON LINE
B3
LMW-3108F
07/21/06
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
HOTSTANDBY
DS3 LBO
3C/3D
A E/W RX SC1 DATA T/F
A E/W RX SC1 INSERT T/F
A E/W RX SC1 INSERT O/H T/F
DX-35N
DS3
I/O
INTFC
A3
J401
SERVICE CHAN
J401
RPTR
LBO
DX-35N
DS3
I/O
INTFC
B3
DX-35N
DS3
I/O
INTFC
A3
J401
RPTR
LBO
SERVICE CHAN
DX-35N
DS3
I/O
INTFC
B3
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
A3C
FROM
DX-35N
DS3
I/O
INTFC
A
FAR
A DS3 DX LINE 1
J21
XFMR
B3C
A/B
DS3 DX
LINE 1
TO
DS3 CROSSCONNECT
LBO
NEAR
FROM
DX-35N
DS3
I/O
INTFC
B
B DS3 DX LINE 1
RCV CIRCUIT
A3D
TO
DX-35N
DS3
I/O
INTFC
A
A DS3 MX LINE 1
J22
FROM
DS3 CROSSCONNECT
XFMR
B3D
TO
DX-35N
DS3
I/O
INTFC
B
B DS3 MX LINE 1
XMT CIRCUIT
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
FROM
DX-35N
DS3
I/O
INTFC
B
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
B3D
FAR
J202
A3D
WDS1 DX T
FROM
DX-35N
DS3
I/O
INTFC
A
WDS1 DX T
XFMR
NEAR
TO DS1
CROSSCONNECT/
E1 INTERFACE
LBO
WDS1 DX R
WDS1 DX R
FAR
RCV CIRCUIT
A3D
WDS1 MX T
FROM DS1
CROSSCONNECT/
E1 INTERFACE
WDS1 MX T
TO
DX-35N
DS3
I/O
INTFC
A
XFMR
WDS1 MX R
WDS1 MX R
B3D
XMT CIRCUIT
TO
DX-35N
DS3
I/O
INTFC
B
LMW-3115F
Sheet 2 of 2
02/22/02
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3.5.2.4
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
The demultiplexed signals (A/B DS3 DX LINE 1) from the DX-35N DS3 I/O Interface module(s) are transformer coupled to the strapping for the LBO circuit. If the LBO is strapped
for NEAR, the LBO circuit simulates lengths of twisted-pair cable to meet cross-connect
requirements. If the LBO is strapped for FAR, the LBO circuit is bypassed.
3.5.2.5
The demultiplexed signals (WDS1 DX T/R) from the DX-35N DS3 I/O Interface module(s) are
transformer coupled to the strapping for the LBO circuit. If the LBO is strapped for NEAR,
the LBO circuit simulates lengths of twisted-pair cable to meet cross-connect requirements.
If the LBO is strapped for FAR, the LBO circuit is bypassed.
3.5.2.6
In a hot-standby configuration, the DS3 LBO distributes SC1 and SC2 TX and RX service
channel data, insert data, insert off-hook, and repeater and TX sync to/from RPTR connector
J401 and the A and B I/O interface modules.
3.5.2.7
The DS3 LBO distributes redundant data between I/O interface A and I/O interface B. I/O
interface A-to-B data is wired directly to connectors A3D and B3D. Receive On-Line and I/O
On-Line are also cross-coupled to provide a make-before-break switch control.
3.5.3 OC3/STM-1 Aux Interface
The MDR-8000 is equipped with an auxiliary (aux) interface to interface wayside DS1 data,
I/O interface-to-I/O interface data and controls, and repeater data. See Figure 3 - 18 for to/from
signal information and application information.
3.5.3.1
See Figure 3 - 19. Transformers couple the DS1 in tip and ring (DS1 IN T/R) signals at J201
to DX-35P OC3/STM-1 I/O Interface A (via connector A3E), and B (via connector B3E) if the
system is hot-standby.
3.5.3.2
The demultiplexed signals (DS1 OUT T/R) from the DX-35P OC3/STM-1 I/O Interface module(s) are transformer coupled to the DS1 cross-connect via connector J202.
3.5.3.3
3-26
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
A3E
DX35-P
OC3/STM-1
I/O
INTFC
A
B3E
SYNT-SYNC IN/OUT
SYNT-SYNC IN/OUT
A3D
B3D
A3E
B WAYSIDE DISABLE
A WAYSIDE DISABLE
B WAYSIDE ONLINE
A TX AUX ONLINE
B TX AUX DISABLE
A TX AUX DISABLE
B TX AUX ONLINE
A3E
FROM
2ND SHELF
(RPTR)
DX35P
OC3/STM-1
I/O INTFC
B
J202
WS DS1 1-3 OUT T/R
B3E
DX35P
OC3/STM-1
I/O INTFC
B
DX35P
OC3/STM-1
I/O INTFC
A
J203
A3E
DX35P
OC3/STM-1
I/O INTFC
A
DX35-P
OC3/STM-1
I/O
INTFC
B
B3E
A WAYSIDE ONLINE
J201
FROM
CROSSCONNECT
OC3/STM-1
INTFC AUX
J203
RPTR DS1 OUT T/R
TO
CROSSCONNECT
TO
2ND SHELF
(RPTR)
LMW-5000F
05/18/05
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
DS1 OUT T
A T1 TX T
FROM
DX-35P
OC3/STM-1
I/O
INTFC
A
J202
RCV CIRCUIT
A3E
XFMR
A T1 TX R
TO
DS1
CROSSCONNECT
B3E
B T1 TX T
FROM
DX-35P
OC3/STM-1
I/O
INTFC
B
XFMR
B T1 TX R
DS1 OUT R
XMT CIRCUIT
A3E
A T1 RX T
TO
DX-35P
OC3 I/O
INTFC
A
J2O1
DS1 IN T
XFMR
A T1 RX R
FROM
DS1
CROSSCONNECT
B3E
B T1 RX T
DS1 IN R
XFMR
B T1 RX R
TO
DX-35P
OC3 I/O
INTFC
B
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3.5.4.1
See Figure 3 - 21. Transformers couple the DS1 in tip and ring (DS1 IN T/R) signals at J201
to DX-35P OC3/STM-1 I/O Interface A (via connector A3E), and B (via connector B3E) if the
system is hot-standby.
3.5.4.2
The demultiplexed signals (DS1 OUT T/R) from the DX 35P OC3/STM-1 I/O Interface module(s) are transformer coupled to the DS1 cross-connect via connector J202.
3.5.4.3
3-29
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
A3E
DX35-P
OC3/STM-1
I/O
INTFC
A
B3E
SYNT-SYNC IN/OUT
SYNT-SYNC IN/OUT
A3D
B3D
A3E
B WAYSIDE DISABLE
A WAYSIDE DISABLE
B WAYSIDE ONLINE
A TX AUX ONLINE
B TX AUX DISABLE
A TX AUX DISABLE
B TX AUX ONLINE
A3E
FROM
2ND SHELF
(RPTR)
DX35P
OC3/STM-1
I/O INTFC
B
J202
WS DS1 1-3 OUT T/R
B3E
DX35P
OC3/STM-1
I/O INTFC
B
DX35P
OC3/STM-1
I/O INTFC
A
J203
A3E
DX35P
OC3/STM-1
I/O INTFC
A
DX35-P
OC3/STM-1
I/O
INTFC
B
B3E
A WAYSIDE ONLINE
J201
FROM
CROSSCONNECT
OC3/STM-1
INTFC AUX
J203
RPTR DS1 OUT T/R
TO
CROSSCONNECT
TO
2ND SHELF
(RPTR)
LMW-5000F
05/18/05
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
DS1 OUT T
A T1 TX T
FROM
DX-35P
OC3/STM-1
I/O
INTFC
A
J202
RCV CIRCUIT
A3E
XFMR
A T1 TX R
TO
DS1
CROSSCONNECT
B3E
B T1 TX T
FROM
DX-35P
OC3/STM-1
I/O
INTFC
B
XFMR
B T1 TX R
DS1 OUT R
XMT CIRCUIT
A3E
A T1 RX T
TO
DX-35P
OC3 I/O
INTFC
A
J2O1
DS1 IN T
XFMR
A T1 RX R
FROM
DS1
CROSSCONNECT
B3E
B T1 RX T
DS1 IN R
XFMR
B T1 RX R
TO
DX-35P
OC3 I/O
INTFC
B
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
J303
A3E
T1 1-16 IN
X-CONN
J323
T1 1-32 IN
B
DX-35S
ETH/T1
I/O
J304
A
DX-35S
ETH/T1
I/O
B3E
T1 17-32 IN
A3D
T1 1-32 IN
T1 1-16 OUT
A3E
X-CONN
J324
T1 17-32 OUT
B3D
A
DX-35S
ETH/T1
I/O
B
DX-35S
ETH/T1
I/O
J203
ON 2ND
MDR-8000
SHELF
B3E
T1 12-16 & 26-32 OUT
A3E
PROTECT 1-4
B3E
PROTECT 1-4
J203
A3E
A
DX-35S
ETH/T1
I/O
B
DX-35S
ETH/T1
I/O
B3E
RX AUX
B
DX-35S
ETH/T1
I/O
TX AUX
T1
B3D
T1
B
DX-35S
ETH/T1
I/O
TX AUX
RX AUX
= HARD WIRED
MDR-1294
04/06/07
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
3.5.5.1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
T1 XMT Circuit
See Figure 3 - 23. Transformers couple the T1 IN tip and ring (T1 IN T/R) signals at J303
(1-16) and J323 (17-32) to DX-35S ETH/T1 I/O A (via connector A3E), and B (via connector
B3E) if the system is hot-standby.
RCV CIRCUIT
A3E
A T1 TX T
FROM
DX-35S
ETH/T1 I/O
A
J304
DS1 OUT T
XFMR
A T1 TX R
TO
DS1
CROSSCONNECT
B3E
B T1 TX T
FROM
DX-35S
ETH/T1 I/O
B
XFMR
B T1 TX R
DS1 OUT R
XMT CIRCUIT
A3E
A T1 RX T
TO
DX-35S
ETH/T1 I/O
A
J303
T1 IN T
XFMR
A T1 RX R
FROM
DS1
CROSSCONNECT
B3E
B T1 RX T
T1 IN R
TO
DX-35S
ETH/T1 I/O
B
XFMR
B T1 RX R
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3.5.5.2
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
T1 RCV Circuit
The demultiplexed signals (T1 TX T/R) from the DX-35S ETH/T1 I/O module(s) are transformer coupled to the cross-connect via connectors J304 (1-16) and J324 (17-32).
3.5.5.3
In a hot-standby configuration, the ETH T1 Line interface distributes SC1 TX and RX service channel data, insert data, insert off-hook, and repeater and TX sync to/from RPTR connector J203 and the A and B ETH/T1 I/O modules. The SC32 service channel is wired but
not used.
3.5.5.4
The OC3/STM-1 aux interface distributes redundant data between I/O interface A and I/O
interface B. I/O interface A-to-B data is wired directly to connectors A3E and B3E. WAYSIDE ONLINE/DISABLE, RCV AUX ONLINE/DISABLE, AND TX AUX ONLINE/DISABLE CONTROLS are cross-coupled to provide a make-before-break switch control.
3.5.6 DX-35M-1/2 DS1/E1 I/O Interface
The DX-35M-1/2 DS1/E1 I/O Interface multiplexes/demultiplexes up to 16 DS1/E1 channels,
up to four X/Y data rail pairs, and service channel data in the MDR-8000 radio. The DX-35M-1
(PN 3DH 03131 AA) operates with North American data while the DX-35M-2 (PN 3DH 03131
AB) is compatible with international (E1) data rates.
See Figure 3 - 24 for to/from signal information and application information. The I/O Interface
consists of several functional blocks each of which is described in the following paragraphs.
3-34
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
DX-35M
I/O INTERFACE
UD-35AN
RCVR
P101
(3A)
P102
(3A)
RX X/Y 1-4
UD-35AN
RCVR
DX FRAME LOSS
RX BIT CLK
RX BAUD CLK
A2/B2
A2/B2
UD-36AN
XMTR
I 0-4
A4/B4
Q 0-4
FREQ CONTROL
P102
(3B)
SERIAL DATA
LAMP TEST
AE-37Y
CNTLR
RCV SC DATA E
SC 256k CLK E
SERIAL DATA TX
SC 64k CLK E
SERIAL CLK
SC 16k CLK E
SERIAL TX/RX
SC MARK E
XMT ENABLE
SC FRAME E
I/O ENABLE
RCV SC DATA W
RCV ENABLE
SC 256k CLK W
XMT SC DATA E
SC 64k CLK W
XMT SC OFFHOOK E
C1
A4/B4
TX BAUD CLK
P102
(3B)
SC 16k CLK W
XMT SC DATA W
SC MARK W
XMT SC OFFHOOK W
C1
SC FRAME W
P104
(3D)
P103
(3C)
DS1/E1
LBO
2
P104
(3D)
MX CLK
8
2
MX SYNC
DX X/Y DATA 1-4
I/O DISABLE
DX CLK
RCV DISABLE
DX SYNC
I/O DISABLE
A3/B3
RCV DISABLE
MW211-0011-1F
01/21/99
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3.5.6.1
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Signal Crossover
See Figure 3 - 25. Crossover occurs in the LIO ASIC in both XMT and RCV directions. Crossover signals include data, sync, and clock. Refer to Table 3 - 2 for switching characteristics.
Refer to Table 3 - 3 for switching priorities.
XMT Switch
I/O Switch
RCV Switch
Terminal
Independent
Switching
Independent
Switching
Tracks on-line
RCVR
Independent
Switching
Independent
Switching
Tracks on-line
RCVR
Independent
Switching
Independent
Switching
Tracks on-line
RCVR
Tracks on-line
XMTR
Tracks on-line
RCVR
RCV Switch
Eye Closure
Path Distortion
AGC Alarm
Manual Switch (Switch on Controller Front Panel)
3-36
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
XMT
BUFFERS
DS1 IN
XMTR
A
RCV
OUTPUT DRIVER
BUFFERS
DS1 OUT
RCVR
A
MX DATA
MX CLK
MX SYNC
TO/FROM
DS1 LBO
DX DATA
DX CLK
DX SYNC
XMT
DS1 IN
XMTR
B
BUFFERS
RCV
OUTPUT DRIVER
BUFFERS
DS1 OUT
RCVR
B
I/O
ON LINE
RCV
ON LINE
MDR-1238F
04/24/06
3.5.6.2
The I/O interface module receives 16 DS1/E1 channels from the DS1/E1 LBO via connector
P104. Each channel (CHAN 1-16 DS1/E1) consists of positive (P) and negative (N) data
streams in RZ format. The channel inputs are applied to appropriate DS1/E1 interface
ASICs. The I/O interface module sends four I and Q data rails to the UD-35( ) Transmitter
module via connector P101.
3-37
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3.5.6.2.1
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
There are eight DS1/E1 interface ASICs that serve as DS1 or E1 line interface processors.
Each of these ASICs processes two DS1 or E1 channels and performs clock recovery, clock
smoothing, elastic buffering, and line encoding and decoding (AMI, B8ZS, HDB3). The RZ
data pairs (Chan 1-16 In Tip and Ring) entering the multiplex section of the DS1/E1 interface gate arrays are bridged onto one channel, converted to NRZ format, B8ZS or HDB3
decoded, and then written into an elastic buffer by the recovered clock. In the elastic buffer,
stuff requests are generated whenever the two clocks writing into (recovered clock) and
reading from (Mux Clock) the elastic buffer are five states apart. The data is re timed off the
rising edge of the Mux Clock and sent to the output pins as MUX CHAN 1-4 DATA. The outputs of two of the DS1/E1 interface ASICs (1 and 2) are applied directly to the low capacity I/
O (LIO) ASIC. The outputs of the remaining six DS1/E1 interface ASICs (3 through 8) are
applied to the MUX/DEMUX EPLD.
3.5.6.2.2
The multiplexer circuits in the low capacity I/O ASIC combines inputs from the following
sources (redundant, if the system is hot-standby): 1) rail X/Y 1-4 data from repeater via connector J314 on the LBO, 2) channel 1 MUX data from DS1/E1 interface ASIC #1, 3) channel
2 MUX data from DS1/E1 interface ASIC #1, 4) channel 3 MUX data from DS1/E1 interface
ASIC #2, 5) channel 4 MUX data from DS1/E1 interface ASIC #2, 6) rail X/Y 2-4 data (multiplexed channels 5-16) from the muldem ASIC, and 7) loopback data from demultiplexer circuits in the muldem ASIC and the low capacity I/O ASIC.
In the low capacity I/O ASIC, the MUX CHAN 1-4 DATA outputs of the DS1/E1 interface
ASICs are combined and converted to an X/Y data rail pair. Using control bits from the serial
interface, this data may be inserted into the rail pairs, overwriting the repeater data. Service
channel and auxiliary channel data is converted for insertion into the X/Y data rail pair.
The four X/Y data rail pairs are scrambled into pseudo-random bit sequences and then multiplexed and modulated to form a 32 or 128 TCM encoded data set. The data set is output as
I and Q data (TX I/Q 1-4) to the transmitter module via connector P101.
3.5.6.2.3
In the multiplex section of the muldem PLD, twelve data outputs from the six DS1/E1 interface ASICs are combined into 3 pairs of data rails, MX X/Y DATA 2-4, which are sent to the
on-line low capacity I/O interface ASIC.
The muldem PLD provides the rail clock (MX CLK) and frame pointer (MX SYNC) necessary
to regenerate the transmit radio frame counters. For each of the 12 data streams emanating
from the DS1/E1 interface ASICs, a clock derived from the MX CLK is generated from these
counters. Each of these twelve clocks are sent to the appropriate DS1/E1 interface ASIC to
clock the data out of the MX elastic buffer and to place the data properly within the MX X/Y
2-4 DATA rails. Stuff requests from the DS1/E1 interface ASICs are processed to provide stuff
code bits in the radio frame overhead and to keep the MX elastic buffer pointers aligned.
3-38
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
P102
G
RCV ENABLE
P104
P104
TO RCV DISABLE
INPUT ON OTHER
I/O INTFC VIA LBO
RCV ON LINE
RCV
SW
LOGIC
RCV DISABLE
RCV ON LINE
P102
I/O ENABLE
B
I/O
SW
LOGIC
P104
P104
TO I/O DISABLE
INPUT ON OTHER
I/O INTFC VIA LBO
I/O ON LINE
I/O DISABLE
I/O ON LINE
P102
(3A)
TO/FROM
UD-36AN
XMTR
A4/B4
SH 2
Q 0-4
TO
UD-36AN
XMTR
A4/B4
CLK 1/2
LIO
ASIC
49 MHz
P103
(3D)
TO/FROM
DS1 CROSSCONNECT/
E1 INTFC
I 0-4
FREQ CONTROL
LIO ASIC
P101
(3A)
P103
(3C)
TO/FROM
DX-35M
I/O
INTFC B
(VIA LBO)
FROM
UD-35AN
RCVR
A2/B2
DS1 DX T/R
1-4
DS1/E1
INTFC
ASIC
CHAN 1-4
I/O ON LINE
P104
(3D)
P102
(3A)
(2 EA)
CHAN SYNC 1
A/B
2
MX DATA 1-4
MX CLOCK 1-4
RX X/Y 1-4
MX STUFF RATE
STUFF REQ 1-4
DX DATA 1-4
DX CLOCK 1-4
SYNC FAIL
RCV FAIL
COMMON LOSS
ALARM
I/O FAIL
RCV SC DATA E
ALL ZERO CLOCK
SC 256k CLK E
MX CLOCK
SC 64k CLK E
MX SYNC
DX CLOCK
DX SYNC
XCVR
P102
(3B)
TO
AE-37Y
CNTLR
SC 16k CLK E
SC MARK E
SC FRAME E
RCV SC DATA W
C
SC 256k CLK W
SH 2
D
SC 64k CLK W
SC 16k CLK W
P102
(3B)
SC MARK W
XMT SC DATA E
FROM
AE-37Y
CNTLR
XMT SC OFFHOOK E
SC FRAME W
XCVR
XMT SC DATA W
B
XMT SC OFFHOOK W
MW211-0027A-1A-F
07/21/06
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
P103 (3C)
CHAN 5 OUT T/R
P104 (3D)
CHAN 5 IN T/R
CHAN SYNC 2A
CHAN 6 IN T/R
DS1/E1
INTFC
ASIC
MX DATA 5/6
SRO 5/6
MX CLK 5/6
MX STUFF RATE
DX DATA 2
DX CLK 5/6
CHAN 5/6
CHAN 6 OUT T/R
DS1/E1
INTFC
ASIC
MX DATA 7/8
SRO 7/8
MX CLK 7/8
MX STUFF RATE
DX DATA 2
DX CLK 7/8
CHAN 7/8
CHAN 8 OUT T/R
DS1/E1
INTFC
ASIC
SH 3
E
MX DATA 9/10
SRO 9/10
MX CLK 9/10
MX STUFF RATE
DX DATA 3
DX CLK 9/10
CHAN 9/10
CHAN 10 OUT T/R
DS1/E1
INTFC
ASIC
SH 3
F
MX DATA 11/12
SRO 11/12
MX CLK 11/12
MX STUFF RATE
DX DATA 3
DX CLK 11/12
CHAN 11/12
CHAN 12 OUT T/R
CHAN 13 IN T/R
CHAN SYNC 4A
DS1/E1
INTFC
ASIC
CHAN 14 IN T/R
CHAN 13/14
MX DATA 13/14
SRO 13/14
MX CLK 13/14
MX STUFF RATE
DX DATA 4
DX CLK 13/14
CHAN 15 IN T/R
CHAN SYNC 4B
DS1/E1
INTFC
ASIC
CHAN 16 IN T/R
CHAN 15/16
MX DATA 15/16
SRO 15/16
MX CLK 15/16
MX STUFF RATE
DX DATA 4
DX CLK 15/16
DX FRAME LOSS
ALL ZERO CLK
SERIAL ENABLE
SERIAL SELECT 0
SERIAL SELECT 1
SERIAL SELECT 2
SERIAL SELECT 3
TO/FROM
AE-37Y
CNTLR
SERIAL DATA/CLK
I/O ON LINE
A
D C
SH 1
MW211-0027-1B-F
07/21/06
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
P104
TD X1
TD Y1
TD X2
TD Y2
TD X3
TD Y3
TD X4
TD Y4
MX FRM SYNC
MX RAIL CLK
EPLD
LIO
ASIC
MX X2 DATA
MX Y2 DATA
E
MX X3 DATA
MUX
MX Y3 DATA
SH 2
MX X4 DATA
MX Y4 DATA
XCVR
DX FRAME SYNC
DX RAIL CLK
DX X1 DATA
DX Y1 DATA
DX X2 DATA
F
DX Y2 DATA
DEMUX
SH 2
DX X3 DATA
DX Y3 DATA
DX X4 DATA
DX Y4 DATA
XCVR
RX X1 T/F
P103
(3C)
RX Y1 T/F
RX X2 T/F
RX Y2 T/F
TO RPTR
CONN J314
VIA LBO
RX X3 T/F
RX Y3 T/F
RX X4 T/F
RX Y4 T/F
P104
(3D)
TO/FROM
OTHER I/O
INTFC VIA
LBO
B I/O ON LINE
SH 1
G RCV ON LINE
SH 1
MDR-1241F
07/24/06
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3.5.6.3
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
The I/O interface module receives four RX X/Y data rails from the UD-36( ) Receiver module
via connector P102. The I/O interface module sends 16 DS1/E1 channels to the DS1/E1 LBO
via connector P103. Each channel (CHAN 1-16 DS1/E1) consists of positive (P) and negative
(N) data streams in RZ format.
3.5.6.3.1
The low capacity I/O (LIO) ASIC receives RX X/Y data rails from the UD-36( ) Receiver module (connector P102). The data is demultiplexed, according to the modulation mode (determined by the capacity key), and DADEed, to align the receive portion of the ASIC with the
on-line ASIC, which is necessary for errorless switching.
Each X and Y rail contains four channels of data. Rail number 1 channel number 1 also contains auxiliary data, including service channel. The X/Y rail number 1 data is decoded and
de-scrambled and service channel and auxiliary channel data is recovered. The received service channel data (recovered from the first rail pair) is sent to the OSS circuit in the AE-37( )
Controller module. Repeater service channel data from the OSS circuit is inserted back into
the first rail pair.
The four X/Y rail pairs of the on-line module (RCV) are then sent to the DS1/E1 demultiplexing sections of the A and B I/O Interface modules, and the repeater port connectors. X/Y rail
pair 1 is sent to the DS1/E1 interface ASICs TI CHANNELS 1-4. X/Y rail pairs 2, 3, and 4
are applied to the MUX/DEMUX EPLD.
The LIO ASIC may bridge onto any of the X/Y rail channels and route that channel data to
the line interface arrays for lines 1-4 (channel is selectable by provisioning). This data may
originate in the on-line low capacity I/O ASIC or the off-line ASIC.
3.5.6.3.2
Each DS1/E1 interface ASIC (Leghorn) can process two DS1/E1 lines. The DS1/E1 interface
ASICs numbers 1 and 2 provide a smooth clock and elastic buffer for each line 1-4. Line coding is added and the coded P and N data from the on-line module (I/O) is sent to lines 1-4 of
the DS1/E1 LBO module.
3.5.6.3.3
MUX/DEMUX EPLD
The MUX/DEMUX EPLD regenerates the receive frame counters using the clock and frame
sync from the LIO array. It bridges onto the second, third, and fourth X/Y rail pairs and
routes the channel data to the DS1/E1 interface ASICs for lines 5-16.
In the demultiplex section, the multiplexed receive rail data from the low capacity I/O ASIC
(DX X/Y 2-4) is converted into three DS2 signals (DX DATA 2-4). Each DX DATA signal is
applied to a pair of DS1/E1 Interface ASICs for ultimate conversion to four DS1/E1 data
streams (DX DATA 2 is applied to DS1/E1 Interface ASIC #3 and #4, DX DATA 3 is applied
to DS1/E1 Interface ASIC #5 and #6, and DX DATA 4 is applied to DS1/E1 Interface ASIC
#7 and #8). The muldem PLD provides the rail clock (DX CLK 5-16)) and frame pointer (DX
SYNC) necessary to regenerate the receive radio frame counters. These counters are used to
provide the twelve clocks necessary for clocking the DX DATA into the DS1/E1 Interface
ASIC DX elastic buffers. Stuff code bits contained within DX X/Y rail overhead are used to
gap the DX elastic buffer clocks so that the receive DS1/E1 data rate equals the transmit
DS1/E1 data rate.
3-42
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
3.5.6.3.4
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
The DS1/E1 interface ASICs provide a smooth clock and elastic buffer for each line. Line
coding is added and the coded P and N data from the on-line module is sent to lines 5-16 of
the DS1/E1 LBO.
The demultiplex section of each DS1/E1 interface ASIC receives 6.312 MHz data (2DXDT,
containing four channels of DS1/E1 data), a 1.544 or 2.048 MHz DEMUX gapped clock
(E1DXCK), the 49 MHz reference clock (49 MHZ), and a 1.544 or 2.048 MHz MUX gapped
clock (E1DXCK). Normally the DEMUX clock is used. In an out of frame condition the integrity of the DEMUX clock is lost and the MUX clock is selected. The 6.312 MHz NRZ data,
and the stuffed gapped clock are re timed by the 49 MHz reference clock. The data is then
clocked by the gapped clock to remove the appropriate two channels of data. The two channels of data are clocked into an elastic buffer by the gapped clock. The data is then converted
to a quasi-RZ format and encoded, according to the modulation mode. The encoded data is
sampled in an AIS detector for loss of signal, demultiplexed onto two (T&R) channels, and
converted to RZ data. In the DS1 mode only, TEO (trailing edge overshoot) pulses are added
to the RZ data so that the pulses conform to cross-connect requirements without the need of
an external equalizer. Tip and ring outputs for each channel (DS1/E1 Chan 1-16 Out T/R)
are applied to the MDR-8000 DS1/E1 LBO module via connectors P103 and P104.
3.5.6.3.5
Service Channel
At a terminal, the LIO ASIC multiplexes the 256 kb/s data stream (comprised of three 64 kb/
s service channels and one 16 kb/s auxiliary channel from the AE-37( ) Controller) together
with the MX DATA 1-( ) and MX X/Y DATA (hot-standby only) inputs into radio frames. The
radio frames are then converted into four X/Ys rail pairs (XMT X/Y RAILS 1-4 P/N) and
clocked into the encoder/decoder circuit by the BAUD CLK.
The XMT X/Y 1-4 T/F and REPEATER SYNC T/F inputs from connector J103, via LBO connector J401, are the primary inputs to the I/O in a drop and insert or through-repeater configuration. If the repeater is hot-standby, the I/O multiplexes the 256 kb/s data stream
(comprised of three 64 kb/s service channels and one 16 kb/s auxiliary channel from the AE37X Controller) together with the XMT X/Y 1-4 T/F repeater inputs (J103) and MX X/Y
DATA (J106) from the off-line DX-35L I/O interface. The REPEATER SYNC T/F syncs the
repeater LIOs. Insert data consists of MX DATA 1-4 and MX X/Y DATA 5-16. The insert
data is inserted into the rail pairs, overwriting the repeater data.
3.5.6.4
3.5.6.4.1
PROV 1-8 inputs from the provisioning key, located on the UD-35( ) Transmitter module,
select the type of radio and trellis coded modulation scheme (32/128 TCM).
3.5.6.4.2
I2C Bus
The I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) bus communicates module part number, serial number,
and revision history information to the AE-37( ) Controller.
3-43
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3.5.6.4.3
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
In a hot-standby system, an I/O ENABLE signal from the controller turns on the DS1/E1
output drivers in the RCV circuits on the on-line module and turns off the output drivers on
the redundant off-line I/O interface module. The RCV ENABLE signal from the controller
turns on the MX X/Y 1-4 rail drivers on the inputs to LIO ASIC and turns on the repeater X/
Y rail drivers (RCV X/Y DATA T/F 1-4) on the output of LIO.
3.5.6.4.4
Loopback Controls
Refer to loopback information on the Control screen for details. To access the Control screen:
3.5.6.4.5
On the Main screen, on dropdown for type of radio, click on DS1. DS1 Status
Alarm screen will open.
On DS1 Status Alarm screen, on tool bar, click on User Control. User control
screen will open.
Alarms
I/O FAIL red LED, indicates loss of signal, bipolar violation detected, or failure on one
of the active DS1/E1 lines.
SYNC FAIL red LED, indicates a transmit synchronization failure between I/O interface modules in a hot-standby configuration.
RCV FAIL red LED, indicates a loss of receive frame synchronization.
COMMON LOSS ALARM red LED, indicates a far end transmit common loss alarm.
A transmit Common Loss Alarm (CLA) is generally an indication of a silent failure (no alarm
activated) at the transmitter. The common loss alarm, generated by the AE-37( ) Controller,
triggers when both A-side and B-side downstream receivers have a radio frame loss or channel failure. In a hot-standby hop, loss of both receivers initiates a request to switch to the
standby transmitter, even though no transmit alarms are present. If the path is nominal, the
transmitter switches in 5 seconds. If the path is in a fade (ATPC is in active range), the
transmitter switches in 30 seconds. If the downstream alarms clear within 5 seconds, a CLA
is initiated on the off-line side to indicate a silent transmit failure. If alarms still exist, the
transmitter continues to switch every 30 seconds. This process continues until the receive
alarms clear, but no CLA is activated.
3.5.6.4.6
Status
3-44
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3.5.7.1
Capacity/Modulation Versions
The DS3 I/O interface module is available in a 1 or 3-line 64 QAM version or a 2-line 32 TCM
version. The 2-line 32 TCM version of the modules, introduced in the second generation, are
typically used for applications in the 6.875 to 7.125 GHz Broadcast Auxiliary Service Band.
The typical RF bandwidth for this 2-line application is 25 MHz. The RF bandwidth requirement for 3 DS3 lines is 30 MHz.
3.5.7.1.1
First Generation
The first generation modules (part number 3DH03169AA, AB, and AG) require both radio
and line DADE, manually, using the front panel controls.
3.5.7.1.2
Second Generation
The second generation modules (part number 3DH03169AH, and AJ) have automatic line
DADE capability. Manual radio DADE is required using the front panel controls. Second
generation modules can be mixed and matched with the first generation modules that have
the same modulation scheme, however when mixed in the same shelf, both radio and line
DADE must be performed manually.
3.5.7.1.3
Third Generation
The third generation modules (part number 3DH03169AK, AL, AM, and AN) have automatic radio and line DADE capability. Third generation modules with AK and AL variants
have front panel controls. Third generation modules with AM and AN variants do not have
front panel controls.
Third generation modules with part numbers 3DH03169AK and AL can be mixed and
matched in the same shelf with first, second, and third generation modules that have the
same modulation scheme. When third generation modules with AK and AL variants are
mixed with first generation modules, both radio and line DADE must be performed. When
AK and AL modules are mixed with second generation modules, only radio DADE must be
performed. Radio DADEing may be required when a third generation AK is matched with
another AK module or AL is matched with another AL module. This requirement is configuration dependent. Refer to Chart 3 DS3 I/O Interface Removal and Replacement procedure
in the Maintenance section for details. No DADEing is required when mixing third generation modules with AM and AN variants with other third generation modules.
See Figure 3 - 27 for to/from signal information and application information.The DS3 I/O
Interface consists of several functional blocks each of which is described in the following
paragraphs.
3-45
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
DX-35N
DS3
I/O INTFERFACE
RX I 0-3
UD-35A( )
RCVR
P101
(3A)
P102
(3A)
RX Q 0-3
UD-35A( )
RCVR
DX FRAME LOSS
RX BIT CLK
A2/B2
RX BAUD CLK
A2/B2
UD-36A( )
XMTR
TX I 0-4
A4/B4
TX Q 0-4
TX2 BAUD CLK
FREQ CONTROL
P102
(3B)
SERIAL DATA
LAMP TEST
AE-37Y
CNTLR
RCV SC DATA E
SC 256k CLK E
SERIAL DATA TX
SC 64k CLK E
SERIAL CLK
SC 16k CLK E
SERIAL TX/RX
SC MARK E
SC FRAME E
WSDS1 ENABLE
RCV SC DATA W
RCV ENABLE
SC 256k CLK W
XMT SC DATA E
SC 64k CLK W
XMT SC OFFHOOK E
C1
A4/B4
TX BAUD CLK
P102
(3B)
SC 16k CLK W
XMT SC DATA W
SC MARK W
XMT SC OFFHOOK W
C1
SC FRAME W
P104
(3D)
P103
(3C)
WE1 MX T/R 4
DS3/E3 LINE 1
WDS1/E1 MX T/R 1-3
DS3
LBO
DS3/E3 LINE 2
E3 LINE 4
2
P104
(3D)
MX CLK
MX SYNC
8
2
DX CLK
DX SYNC
DS3
LBO
DS3/E3 LINE 3
WDS1 DISABLE
A3/B3
RCV DISABLE
I/O DISABLE
RCV DISABLE
DS3/E3 LINE 1
DS3/E3 LINE 2
DS3/E3 LINE 3
E3 LINE 4
LMW-3113F
07/23/06
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
3.5.7.2
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
The DX-35N DS3 I/O Interface multiplexes three DS3 data streams of primary traffic, three
DS1 data streams of secondary traffic (wayside DS1/E1), and low-speed data streams for
miscellaneous signaling and communication, creating the radio frame output I/Q data.
The XMT circuits (Figure 3 - 28) receive DS3 data, auxiliary (overhead data), and a reference
sync signal. The overhead data contains a 262 kb/s service channel, a 1.544 Mb/s WDS1 per
each DS3, and two 16 kb/s command path channels. (The 262 kb/s SC data interfaces from
the service channel muldem where four 64 kb/s data streams are multiplexed into the 262
kb/s SC data stream.) A UNIXMT gate array multiplexes/encodes these inputs to form parallel I, Q data signals, and clock.
3.5.7.2.1
DS3 Interface
The DX-35N contains three identical DS3 interface circuits. A fourth identical interface circuit is wired but not used. The DS3 signals are applied to the DS3 interface circuits via connector P103. Each interface circuit consists of a DS3 processor that converts the bi-polar
DS3 data into positive (P) and negative (N) uni-polar digital pulses and recovers the clock
(CK) used to clock the data into the UNIXMT ASIC.
The P and N data clocked into the UNIXMT ASIC is B3ZS decoded and frame synchronized.
Parity violations are monitored and removed from the data. The data is passed through an
elastic buffer and then multiplexed with the overhead data. The multiplexed data is scrambled, differentially and gray encoded, and converted to I and Q data. The I and Q data is
applied to the XMT EPLD for FEC. The UNIXMT ASIC also creates low-speed clock (MCK)
from the recovered DS3 clock that is used to clock wayside DS1 data (MDT) and stuffing signals (MSR) into the UNIXMT ASIC.
3.5.7.2.2
The XMT EPLD performs XMT FEC functions on the I and Q signals from the UNIXMT ASIC.
The encoding function uses the Nakamura Single Lee Error Correcting (SLEC) codes. One 3bit symbol is added by ENFEC to the I channel data and to the Q channel data every 27 data
symbols, increasing the bit rate from 81 to 84. Removal of the 3-bit symbols, correcting the
data, and decoding are functions of the UNIRCV ASIC, described later in this section.
The TX I (2:0) and TX Q (2:0) data is applied to the transmitter module via connector P101.
3-47
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
BIT CLK
48.840 MHz
R446
SC
ALIGN
LOOP
FLTR
VCXO
PED.
R445
LINE 1
P1
P103
DS3
DS3
PROC.
CK1
TO/FROM
LBO
P104
P102
(3B)
TO/FROM
CONTROLLER
WDS1
PROV.
P102 (3A)
FROM XMTR
N1
1/2 DS1
INTFC
ASIC 1
UNIXMT
ASIC
CLK
FEC
(XMT)
EPLD
TX I(2:0)
TX Q(2:0)
P101 (3A)
TO XMTR
WDS1/WE1 ON
TAUX ON
BAUD CLK
2 BAUD CLK
MSR1
P104
TO LBO
MDT1
SERIAL CLK
MCK1
SERIAL DATA
TX SERIAL
ENABLE
LINE 2
P2
P103
DS3
DS3
PROC.
N2
SERIAL
INTERFACE
CK2
P102
(3B)
TO/FROM
CONTROLLER
WDS1
TX SERIAL DATA
RSR ENABLE
1/2 DS1
INTFC
ASIC 1
LSR ENABLE
WDS1/WE1 ON
P102 (3B)
TO/FROM
CONTROLLER
SERIAL ENABLE
TO/FROM
LBO
P104
RX SERIAL DATA
TO UNIRCV (SH 2)
TO DS1 INTFC
ASICS (SH 2)
TO UNIRCV AND
DS1/E1 INTFC ASIC
RCV CKTS (SH2)
TAUX ON
MSR2
P104
TO LBO
MDT2
SC CLOCKS
SC 256K CLK E
SC 64K CLK E
MCK2
(XMT)
EPLD
LINE 3
SC FRAME E
P3
P103
DS3
DS3
PROC.
CK3
XMT DATA
SC XMT DATA E
P102 (3B)
TO/FROM
CONTROLLER
P104
WDS1
1/2 DS1
INTFC
ASIC 1
SC XMT DATA W
SC XMT OFF HOOK W
WDS1/WE1 ON
TAUX ON
MSR3
P104
TO LBO
SC DATA E
N3
TO/FROM
LBO
P102
(3B)
TO/FROM
CONTROLLER
SC 16K CLK E
SC MARK E
MDT3
MCK3
TX SC DATA W
RX SC DATA W
TX INSERT W
RX INSERT E
TX OFF-HOOK W
RX OFF-HOOK E
P103/P104
TO/FROM
LBO
TX SYNC W
RX SYNC E
LMW-3111A-F
04/10/00
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
P102
FROM
CONTROLLER
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
RCV ENABLE
XMT AUX ENABLE
WDS1 ENABLE
RCV ON
(RCV)
EPLD
WDS1 ON
LINE
XMT AUX ON
RCV DISABLE
OTHER
I/O
COND
RCV ON
LINE
WDS1 ON
XMT ON
LINE
SW
DADE
RX I(2:0)
P101
FROM
RCVR
RX Q(2:0)
RETIME
LSR ENABLE
FEC
RFL
RCV
FAIL
S.C.L.
RCV
AUX
FAIL
CLK
FROM
SERIAL
INTERFACE
(SH1)
RSR ENABLE
CLK
UNIRCV
ASIC
BAUD CLK
WDS1 FAIL
LINE 1
BIT CLK
P103/P104
TO/FROM
LBO
ALIGN 1
SET 1
LINE 1
ALIGN 1 SET 1
RCV ON
DS3
ALIGN
R 830
DS3
CLK
RECOVERY
P
N
CLK
DATA
CLK
BIPOLAR
DRIVE
1/2 DS1
INTFC
ASIC 1
DS3
WDS1
P103
P104
LINE 2
LINE 2
BIT CLK
P
ALIGN 2 SET 2
P103/P104
TO/FROM
LBO
N
CLK
ALIGN 2
SET 2
DS3
ALIGN
R 930
DS3
CLK
RECOVERY
BIPOLAR
DRIVE
DS3
P103
TO
LBO
DATA
CLK
1/2 DS1
INTFC
ASIC 1
WDS1
P104
LINE 3
P
N
LINE 3
BIT CLK
ALIGN 3 SET 3
P103/P104
TO/FROM
LBO
ALIGN 3
SET 3
DS3
ALIGN
R 630
DS3
CLK
RECOVERY
CLK
DATA
CLK
BIPOLAR
DRIVE
1/2 DS1
INTFC
ASIC 2
RX SC DATA
WDS1
P103
P104
SC 256K CLK W
SC
CLOCKS
DS3
(XMT)
EPLD
SC 64K CLK W
SC 16K CLK W
SC MRK W
SC FRM W
P102 (3D)
TO
CONTROLLER
SC DATA W
LMW-3112A-F
04/10/00
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3.5.7.2.3
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
The wayside DS1 interface circuits use one-half of a Leghorn ASIC to provide clock recovery,
clock smoothing, elastic buffering and line encoding for each wayside DS1 (WDS1) channel.
Each DS1 interface circuit is controlled by the WDS1 ON and TAUX ON inputs from the AE37Y-1 controller module. The WDS1 ON control signal turns on the driver that supplies the
MCK( ) to the DS1 interface circuits. The TAUX ON control signal turns on the output drivers that provide WDS1 data (MDT) and stuff requests (MSR) to the UNIXMT ASIC, and in
protected systems, to the off-line I/O conditioner module (P104).
The wayside DS1 tip and ring signals (WSDS1-1 MXT and WSDS1-1 MXR) are applied to the
DS1 interface circuits via connector P104. The balanced tip and ring signals consist of pulsed
square waves at 1.544 Mb/s. The DS1 interface circuit bridges the RZ data onto one channel,
converts the balanced tip and ring signals to NRZ data, B3ZS encodes the data, and using the
recovered clock, writes the data into an elastic buffer. In the elastic buffer, the recovered clock
is compared to the low-speed clock (MCK) created by the UNIXMT ASIC and if a mismatch is
detected, stuffing bits are inserted. The output of the DS1 interface circuit is clocked into the
UNIXMT ASIC by the low-speed clock (MCK) generated by the UNIXMT ASIC.
3.5.7.2.4
Service channel data is processed by the XMT EPLD. The XMT EPLD receives east and west
insert service channel data (RX SC DATA E and W) and sync signals (RX SYNC E and W)
from the LBO via connectors P103 and P104. The XMT EPLD receives through service channel data from the AE-37Y-1 controller module via connector P102. The through service channel data consists of the clocks (SC 256K, 64K, and 16K CLK E and W) mark and frame bits
(MARK and FRAME E and W), and off hook clocks (SC XMT OFF-HOOK E and W).
In the XMT EPLD, the service channel insert data is clocked into time slots in the through
data stream by the SC XMT OFF-HOOK E and/or W signals to provide the XMT DATA output to the UNIXMT ASIC. The service channel insert data is inserted into the radio frame
overhead when the off-hook command is active high. The through-data is inserted into the
radio frame overhead when the off-hook command is active low. If there is no insert service
channel data, the through data is passed to the UNIXMT ASIC, and vice versa.
3.5.7.2.5
Note
When provisioned as a terminal, the A-side I/O interface is automatically
put on pedestal and the B-side I/O interface automatically locks to the Aside I/O interface. When provisioned as a repeater, both A and B sides (online and off-line) sync to the recovered clock. Loss of sync causes the I/O
interface to be put on the fixed pedestal voltage.
A Phase Locked Loop (PLL) controls the frequency of the Voltage Controlled Crystal Oscillator (VCXO) generated clock (48.840 BIT CLK) that is the clock source for the UNIXMT ASIC.
See Figure 3 - 29. The PLL consists of the Voltage Controlled Crystal Oscillator (VCXO), a
phase detector circuit in the UNIXMT ASIC, an analog MUX, an activity detector circuit,
and a loop filter. The UNIXMT ASIC generates clocks from the BIT CLK that enable the
UNIXMT to multiplex DS3, DS1, AUX channels, and overhead, generating the radio frame.
3-50
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
PEDESTAL
FIXED
VOLTAGE
VCXO
R445
FROM J401
VIA LBO
FROM
CONTROLLER
FROM
OTHER I/O
COND
VIA LBO
BIT CLK
UNIXMT
ASIC
PHASE
CORRECTION
VOLTAGE
ANALOG
MUX
PHASE
CORRECTION
VOLTAGE
LOOP
FILTER
RPTR SYNC
TERM/RPTR
SELECT
ACTIVITY
DETECTOR
SYNC DETECT
TERM SYNC
TO
XMTR
MODULE
LMW-3122-SM
03/07/00
The 48.840 BIT CLK is phase detected by the phase detector circuit in the UNIXMT ASIC
and a resulting correction voltage is applied to the analog MUX. The analog MUX is controlled by the SYNC DETECT signal from the activity detector. Activity detected on the
RPTR SYNC input or TERM SYNC input turns on the analog MUX and the correction voltage from the UNIXMT ASIC is applied to the loop filter. The loop filter completes the PLL by
looping the correction voltage to the VCXO, correcting the frequency of the BIT CLK. If no
activity is detected by the activity detector on the RPTR SYNC input or TERM SYNC input.
the analog MUX is turned off, and the correction voltage path to the loop filter is opened.
This action places the VCXO under pedestal voltage control. The pedestal voltage is factory
adjusted for VCXO center frequency by potentiometer R445.
The TERM/RPTR control line selects the TERM or the RPTR SYNC input to the activity
detector. This is a software control and automatically selects the input when TERM or RPTR
is provisioned on the USI screen.
The loop filter provides a FREQ CONTROL output to the capacity key located in the
XMTR module to sync the VCXO (clock source) in the XMTR module to the VCXO in the
I/O conditioner.
3-51
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3.5.7.3
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
The DX-35N DS3 I/O Interface RCV circuits (Figure 3 - 28) receive parallel I, Q data signals
(RX I and Q 2:0), and BAUD CLK from the RCVR module. The UNIRCV ASIC demultiplexes/decodes these inputs to form DS3 data, auxiliary (overhead data), and a reference
sync signal. The overhead data contains a 262 kb/s service channel, a 1.544 Mb/s WDS1 per
each DS3, and two 16 kb/s command path channels.
3.5.7.3.1
RCVR Interface
RCVR module interface circuits consist of a retime circuit and FEC circuit. RX I (2:0) and
RX Q ( 2:0) signals from the RCVR are clocked into the retime circuit by the BAUD CLK.
The retime circuit retimes the I and Q signals to the baud clock and the I and Q signals are
applied to the FEC circuit. The FEC circuit removes the FEC encoding that was placed on
the data stream by the MDR-8000 XMTR. The I and Q outputs are clocked out of the FEC
circuit and into the UNIRCV ASIC by the CLK.
3.5.7.3.2
UNIRCV ASIC
The UNIRCV ASIC performs differential and gray decoding for 64 QAM, descrambling,
radio frame detection and alignment, extracting service channel and DS1 overhead channels, elastic buffering, DS3 frame detection and B3ZS encoding, PVMR, data rate adjustment to interface with FEC array, and phase/frequency detection and alignment signal
generation.
3.5.7.4
DS3 Interface
The DX-35N contains three identical DS3 interface circuits. A fourth identical interface circuit is wired but not used. Each DS3 interface circuit consists of a DS3 alignment circuit,
DS3 clock recovery circuit, and a bipolar drive circuit.
3.5.7.4.1
The DS3 clock recovery circuit recovers the DS3 clock from the I and Q inputs to the
UNIRCV ASIC. The UNIRCV ASIC uses the DS3 clock to clock the P and N data out of the
UNIRCV ASIC to the bipolar drive circuits.
3.5.7.4.2
Bipolar Drive
The bipolar drive circuits convert the framed P and N input signals into framed DS3 data.
The circuits are enabled by the RCV ON output of the RCV EPLD. The DS3 outputs are
routed through connector P103 to the DS3 LBO.
3.5.7.4.3
For errorless switching, SET and ALIGN lines are connected between the A- and B-side
I/O conditioner modules. The SET input is used to synchronize the B3ZS encoder of the
off-line channel to the on-line channel for errorless switching. The ALIGN input is used
to synchronize the DS3 framing of the off-line channel to the DS3 of the on-line channel
for errorless switching.
3-52
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
3.5.7.4.4
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
DADE
Each DS3 data line for the radio has adjustable delay processed in the UNIRCV gate array.
This allows factory DADE alignment using S2 ALIGN switch.
3.5.7.4.5
UNIRCV VMR
Parity bits are continuously monitored and a parity error pulse is generated when a mismatch is detected. If the VMR (Violation Monitor and Removal) is enabled (by the controller
through the serial interface) parity bits are replaced with new calculated parity bits. Otherwise they are not changed.
3.5.7.4.6
The blue signal detector is enabled when DS3 is out of frame. The blue signal generated is a
DS3 frame with valid framing bits, C bits set to zero, and information bits have a 101010.....
pattern.
3.5.7.4.7
UNIRCV AIS
The AIS detector is enabled when DS3 is out of frame. The AIS generated is an unframed all
1s pattern.
3.5.7.5
The DX-35N contains three identical wayside DS1 interface circuits. A fourth identical interface circuit is wired but not used. Each DS1 interface circuit uses a Leghorn ASIC (hereafter
referred to as DS1 interface ASIC) for DS1 signal processing. The demultiplex section of each
DS1 interface ASIC receives 6.312 MHz data (2DXDT, containing four channels of DS1 data),
a 1.544 DEMUX gapped clock (DXCK), the 49 MHz reference clock (49 MHZ), and a 1.544
MHz MUX gapped clock (DXCK). Normally the DEMUX clock is used. In an out of frame
condition the integrity of the DEMUX clock is lost and the MUX clock is selected. The 6.312
MHz NRZ data and destuffed gapped clock are retimed by the 49 MHz reference clock. The
data is then clocked by the gapped clock to remove the appropriate two channels of data. The
two channels of data are clocked into an elastic buffer by the gapped clock. The data is then
converted to a quasi-RZ format and encoded, according to the modulation mode. The encoded
data is sampled in an AIS detector for loss of signal, demultiplexed onto two (T&R) channels,
and converted to RZ data. TEO (trailing edge overshoot) pulses are added to the RZ data so
that the pulses conform to cross-connect requirements without the need of an external equalizer. Tip and ring outputs for each channel (DS1 Chan 1-4 Out T/R) are applied to DS1 LBO
circuits on the MDR-8000 DS3 LBO module via connectors P103 and P104.
3.5.7.6
Service channel data from the UNIRCV ASIC is clocked into the XMT EPLD by the 256K
CLK in the SC CLKS. The XMT EPLD separates and applies the SC 256K, 64K, and 16K
CLK E and W, MARK and FRAME E and W, and SC DATA E and W to AE-37Y-1 controller
module via connector P102.
3-53
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3.5.7.7
3.5.7.7.1
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
The serial interface is used to transfer alarm and status information to the AE-37( ) Controller. It is also used to receive control information from the AE-37( ) Controller.
Alarms generated in the UNIXMT ASIC are latched in the serial interface until they are
acknowledged by the system controller. Alarms provided for each DS3 line are loss of input,
buffer spill, and frame alarm. Status provided for each DS3 line are summary line and blue
signal detect. A counter is provided for each DS3 line, which counts parity errors.
Data is sent and received during a two-byte transfer. The first byte is a poll byte that selects
the device ID and register address. It also controls whether a read or write operation is taking place. The second byte contains data from the selected register.
3.5.7.7.2
Provisioning Inputs
Provisioning inputs (PROV 1-8) from capacity keys on the XMTR and RCVR modules,
control the following functions:
Select 64 QAM modulation scheme.
Select local oscillator control source (pedestal voltage or PLL).
Select DS3 operation and number of DS3 lines enabled.
Select data scrambler or passes data through unmodified.
Select stuff rate source for stuffing DS1/E1 signals in radio frame (average stuff rate or
stuff request signals from Leghorns).
Enables or disables data scrambler stuck pattern (all 1s, all 0s, or alternating 1s and 0s).
3.5.7.7.3
I2C Bus
The I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) bus communicates module part number, serial number,
and revision history information to the AE-37( ) Controller.
3.5.7.7.4
ON-Line/Off-Line Enable/Disable
In a hot-standby system, a XMT AUX ENABLE, RCV ENABLE, and WDS1 ENABLE signals from the AE-37Y Controller module turn on the respective XMT, RCV and wayside DS1
circuits on the on-line DS3 I/O interface module. This results in XMT AUX DISABLE, RCV
DISABLE, and WDS1 DISABLE signals being generated in the on-line I/O conditioner that
turn off the respective circuits in the off-line DS3 I/O interface module.
3.5.7.7.5
Loopback Controls
3.5.7.7.6
Alarms
Refer to loopback information on the Control screen for details. To access the Control screen:
1
3-54
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
On the Main screen, on dropdown for type of radio, click on DS3. DS3 Status
Alarm screen will open.
On DS3 Status Alarm screen, on tool bar, click on User Control. User control
screen will open.
I/O FAIL red LED, indicates loss of signal, bipolar violation detected, or failure on one
of the active DS1/E1 lines.
SYNC FAIL red LED, indicates a transmit synchronization failure between I/O interface modules in a hot-standby configuration.
RCV FAIL red LED, indicates a loss of receive frame synchronization detected by
UNIRCV ASIC.
RCV SC FAIL red LED, indicates a loss of service channel receive frame synchronization detected by UNIRCV ASIC.
WDS1 FAIL red LED, indicates loss of signal, bipolar violation detected, or failure on
one of the active WDS1 lines.
3.5.7.7.7
Status
RCV ON LINE - green LED, indicates UNIRCV circuits are enabled, allowing transfer of
data to DS1 interface circuit.
XMT ON LINE - green LED, indicates UNIXMT circuits are enabled, allowing transfer of
data to encoder/decoder circuits.
WDS1 ON LINE - green LED, indicates DS1 interface circuit output drivers are enabled.
3.5.8 DX-35P-1 OC3/STM-1 I/O Interface
The DX-35P I/O Interface multiplexes/demultiplexes up to three STS1 channels (OC3/STM-1),
wayside DS1/E1, and service channel data in the MDR-8000/i/s radio. Two types of DX-35P are
available to comply with wayside DS1 and E1 data rates. The DX-35P-1 accepts wayside DS1.
The DX-35P-2 accepts wayside E1. Both types accept multimode and single mode fiber.
See Figure 3 - 30 for to/from signal information and application information. The DS3 I/O
Interface consists of several functional blocks each of which is described below.
3.5.8.1
Signal Crossover
See Figure 3 - 31. Crossover occurs in a framer on the SMCRA in Optical Receive (OR) and
Radio Receive (RR) directions. Optical RCV crossover signals include OR DATA, OR PARITY, OR FRAME, and OR 39CLK. Radio RCV crossover signals include Optical XMT (OT)
DATA, and OT SYNC.
3-55
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
LC or MT-RJ
CONNECTOR
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
155 Mbp/s
J3A
TCMS
UD-35AN
RCVR
J3A
BAUD ID
LC or MT-RJ
CONNECTOR
155 Mbp/s
DX-35P
OC3 I/O
INTFC
UD-35AN
RCVR
RR LOF
A2/B2
RXD 0-4
RSD 0-2
UD-36AN
XMTR
TX I 1-4
BIT CLK
A2/B2
RCV BAUD
TX Q 1-4
J3B
IRQ
AE-37Y
CNTLR
2 BAUD CLK
BAUD CLK
TCK B
CORRECTION VOLTAGE
ADDR 0-9
SERIAL CLK (I2C)
SERIAL DATA (I2C)
J3B
CI 0-7
SELECT A/B
RT SDCC
RT OW DATA
RX 64k AUX 1-3
TX AUX ENABLE
WAYSIDE ENABLE
RX AUX ENABLE
EAST SC XMT DT 1/2
EAST SC XMT OH 1/2
WEST SC XMT DT 1/2
WEST SC XMT OH 1/2
C1
A4/B4
SERIAL DATA
EAST SC RX DATA 1/2
EAST SC 256k CLK
EAST 64k CLK
EAST 16k SYNC
EAST 8k SYNC
EAST 2k SYNC
WEST SC RX DATA 1/2
WEST SC 256k CLK
WEST SC 64k CLK
WEST SC 16k CLK
WEST SC 8k SYNC
WEST SC 2k SYNC
AE-37Y
CNTLR
OR SDCC
OR OW DATA
T192 CLK
T192 SYNC
RR SDCC
RR OW DATA
R192 CLK
R192 SYNC
C1
J3E J3E
OC3/STM-1
AUX
INTFC
12
RX AUX ONLINE
WAYSIDE ONLINE
TX AUX ONLINE
RX AUX DISABLE
WAYSIDE DISABLE
TX AUX DISABLE
OR DT 0-3 IN T/F
OR 39 CLK IN T/F
OR PARITY IN T/F
OR FRAME IN T/F
OC3/STM-1
AUX
INTFC
LMW-4019F
05/18/05
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
XMTR
A
SW
SW
CMD
SW
RCVR
A
SW
CMD
OR DATA (3:0)
OR PARITY
OR FRAME
OR 39 CLK
OT DATA (6:1)
OT SYNC
XMTR
B
SW
SW
CMD
SW
RCVR
B
SW
CMD
LMW-5045F
11/19/06
3.5.8.2
See Figure 3 - 32. The DX-35P I/O interface receives the OC3 optical signal on the front panel
and routes the optical signal to the laser hybrid. The laser hybrid converts the optical data
into an electrical data stream at 155 mb/s. The data stream is applied to the clock recovery
circuit. In the clock recovery circuit, a 39 mb/s clock is separated from the data stream. The
clock is used to clock the serial data into the 4 X 39 translator circuit. The 4 X 39 translator
separates the applied data in the data stream into four data streams, each containing 4-bit
nibble data at 39 mb/s. The nibble data is applied to the SONET Media Converting Regenerator Array (SMCRA). The SMCRA multiplexes the nibble data with data from the serial service channel interface and converts the multiplexed data, first to STS1 and then X/Y data
streams. The X/Y data is buffered in an elastic buffer and then applied to a multiplexer. In
the multiplexer the X/Y data is combined with overhead data and the serial data is applied
to a scrambler. The scrambled X/Y data is applied to a Forward Error Correction (FEC)
encoder circuit. Forward Error Correction (FEC) is provided using Trellis Coded Modulation
and Reed-Solomon coding. The encoded X/Y data steams are converted to I and Q data
steams that are clocked out of the SMCRA by the T CLK B input from the XMTR module.
The TX I 1-4 and TX Q 1-4 data is applied to the transmitter module via connector J3A.
3-57
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
J3B
CONTROLLER
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
J3E
OC3 AUX
INTFC
SMCRA
SWITCHING
CONTROL
LOGIC
TX AUX DISABLE
TX AUX DISABLE
RT SDCC
J3B/J3C
CONTROLLER
SMCRA
(OPTICAL
RCV/RADIO
XMT)
RT OW DATA
155 Mb/s
LASER
HYBRID
SERIAL
DATA
CLK
155
Mb/s
RECOVERY
SERIAL
DATA
155
Mb/s
(P/O LASER
HYBRID)
WS DS1-1T
WS DS1-1R
J3E
OC3/STM-1
AUX
INTFC
J3E
OC3/STM-1
AUX
INTFC
TX AUX ENABLE
WS DS1-2T
WS DS1-2R
WS DS1-3T
WS DS1-3R
RPTR T
RPTR R
4-BIT
NIBBLE
DATA
39 Mb/s
4
3
4X39
2
XLATOR
1
CLK
DATA 1
CLK 1
WAYSIDE
SYSTEM
INTFC
DATA 2
CLK 2
BUFFER
OR SDCC
OR OW DATA
T192 CLK
T192 SYNC
BUFFER
OR SDCC
OR OW DATA
T192 CLK
T192 SYNC
J3B/J3C
CONTROLLER
J3C
CONTROLLER
TXI 1-4
TXQ 1-4
BAUD CLK
2 BAUD CLK
J3A
TO XMTR
MODULE
DATA 3
CLK 3
DATA 4
CLK 4
MHZ54T
CORRECTION
VOLTAGE
PH54A
J3B/J3C
CONTROLLER
SC TX DATA 1 E
SC TX DATA 2 E
SC TX OH 1 E
SC TX OH 2 E
RX 64K AUX 1
RX 64K AUX 2
RX 64K AUX 3
PH54B
PLL
XMT
VXCO
TCKB
PHBA
PHBB
J3E
OC3/STM-1
AUX
INTFC
(OTHER
I/O INTFC)
OR DATA 3 IN T/F
OR DATA 2 IN T/F
OR DATA 1 IN T/F
OR DATA 0 IN T/F
OR PARITY IN T/F
OR FRAME IN T/F
OR 39 CLK IN T/F
CORRECTION
VOLTAGE
PLL
BAUD
VCXO
J3E
OC3/STM-1
AUX
INTFC
(OTHER
I/O INTFC)
LMW-3161C-SM
05/18/05
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
SMCRA
CONTROL
INTFC
ADDRESS (9:0)
ALM
SELECT A
SELECT B
SERIAL CLK
SERIAL DATA
EEPROM
I2C
INSVC
WAYSIDE
SYSTEM CI DATA 0-7
INTFC
J3B/J3C
CONTROLLER
WYSD ON
WYSD ALM
OC3/STM-1 IN
CI DATA (7:0)
IRQ
J3E
AUX
BACKPLANE
(OTHER I/O
INTFC)
OC3/STM-1 ALM
A-SIDE
OC3/STM-1 OUT
LMW-3161B
05/18/05
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
RX AUX ENABLE
WAYSIDE ENABLE
J3B
CONTROLLER
J3E
OC3 AUX
INTFC
(OTHER I/O
INTFC)
RX AUX DISABLE
WAYSIDE DISABLE
RXD (4:0)
RSD (2:0)
BAUD ID
TCMS
RCV_BAUD
BIT CLK
FRMF (RR SEF)
VITERBI CORE
J3A
RCVR
MODULE
MHZ-51R
RCV
VXCO
J3E
OC3/STM-1
AUX
INTFC
(OTHER I/O INTFC)
RX AUX DISABLE
SMRCA
SWITCHING
CONTROL
LOGIC
SMCRA
(RADIO
RCV/
OPTICAL
XMT)
WAYSIDE DISABLE
4-BIT NIBBLE
DATA
4
3
2
1
CLK 39M
4X39
XLATOR
SERIAL
DATA
155 Mb/s
155 Mb/s
LASER
HYBRID
A
CORRECTION
VOLTAGE
LOOP
FILTER/
AMP
WS DS11T
WS DS11R
RCV PDA
WS DS12T
RCV PDB
WAYSIDE WS DS12R
SYSTEM
INTFC WS DS13T
J3E
OC3/STM-1
AUX
INTFC
WS DS13R
J3B/J3C
CONTROLLER
RPTR T
RPTR R
WEST SC TX DATA 1
WEST SC TX DATA 2
WEST TX OH 1
WEST SC TX OH 2
OT SDCC
OT OW DATA
BUFFER
TX 64K AUX 1
TX 64K AUX 2
TX 64K AUX 3
RR SDCC
RR OW DATA
R192 CLK
R192 SYNC
J3E
OC3/STM-1
AUX INTFC
(OTHER
I/O INTFC)
OT DT IN 16 T/F
12
OT SYNC IN T/F
SNT-SYNC-IN
RGRK-IN
OT DT OUT 16 T/F
OT SYNC OUT T/F
SNT-SYNC-OUT
RGRK OUT
J3B/J3C
CONTROLLER
BUFFER
RR SDCC
RR OW DATA
R192 CLK
R192 SYNC
12
J3E
OC3/STM-1
AUX INTFC
(OTHER I/O
INTFC)
LMW-3161A-F
05/18/05
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
3.5.8.2.1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
The RCVR module interface at connector J3A consists of Receive Data (RXD), Receive Subset data (RSD), BAUD Identification (ID), Trellis Code Modulation Sync (TCMS), Receive
BAUD clock (RCV BAUD), Bit Clock (CLK), (FRMF) and Viterbi Correcting Errors (VITERBI CORE).
3.5.8.2.2
The wayside DS1 interface circuit provides clock recovery, clock smoothing, elastic buffering
and line encoding for each wayside DS1 (WS DS1-1-3 T/R) channel.
The wayside DS1 tip and ring signals (WS DS1-1T and WS DS1-1R) are applied to the DS1
interface circuits via connector J3E. The balanced tip and ring signals consist of pulsed
square waves at 1.544 Mb/s. The DS1 interface circuit bridges the RZ data onto one channel,
converts the balanced tip and ring signals to NRZ data, B3ZS encodes the data, and using
the recovered clock, writes the data into an elastic buffer. In the elastic buffer, the recovered
clock is compared to the low-speed clock created by the SMCRA and if a mismatch is
detected, stuffing bits are inserted. The DATA 1-4 outputs of the DS1 interface circuit are
clocked into the SMCRA by the respective four output clocks (CLK 1-4) .
3.5.8.2.3
Figure 3 - 33 and Figure 3 - 34 show XMT and RCV signal flow. Refer to service channel
demultiplex description later in this section for RCV details. The DX-35P receives inserted
service channel 1 data from the AE-37Y-1 controller module via connector J3B. Service channel 2 data from the controller is wired (J3C) but not used for the OC3/STM-1 radio applications.
3.5.8.2.3.1
Terminal
See Figure 3 - 33. At a terminal, the service channel interface at the SMRCA in the I/O interface consists of the EAST SC XMT DT input and EAST SC CLKS (EAST SC 256K CLK,
EAST SC 64K CLK, EAST SC 16K SYNC, EAST SC 8K SYNC, and EAST SC 2K SYNC)
outputs. The EAST SC XMT DT input consists of four 64kb/s channels multiplexed into a
single 256 kb/s signal.
Overhead MUX circuitry in the SMRCA receives local insert-service channel data (EAST SC
XMT DT) from the service channel muldem in the controller module. The EAST SC XMT DT
is clocked into the SMCRA by the controller using the EAST SC CLOCKS (EAST SC 256K
CLK, EAST SC 64K CLK, EAST SC 16K SYNC, EAST SC 8K SYNC, and EAST SC 2K
SYNC) provided by the SMCRA. In the SMCRA, the service channel insert data (EAST SC
XMT DT) is inserted into the radio frame overhead.
3-61
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
OC3/STM-1
I/O INTFC
West - RCV
West SC RCV DT
West SC Clocks
SMCRA
East SC XMT DT
East SC Clocks
SMCRA
East - XMT
CONTROLLER
LMW-5030F
05/18/05
Repeater
The service channel interface at the SMRCA in rack 2 I/O interface consists of the EAST SC
XMT DT and EAST SC XMT OH inputs and EAST SC CLKS (EAST SC 256K CLK, EAST
SC 64K CLK, EAST SC 16K SYNC, EAST SC 8K SYNC, and EAST SC 2K SYNC) outputs,
and rack 1 data input via the RPTR cable. Each data (DT) input and output consists of four
64kb/s channels multiplexed into a single 256 kb/s signal.
When EAST SC XMT OH is low (No off hook from rack 2 controller) data received over the
repeater cable by the frame in/frame out (FIFO) circuit (EAST SC RCV DT) is passed
through the MUX and inserted into the radio frame overhead.When EAST SC XMT OH is
high (off hook), EAST SC RCV DT is clocked into the rack 2 controller by the EAST SC
CLKS. The rack 2 controller multiplexes the EAST SC RCV DT with local insert-data and
the combined signal (EAST SC XMT DT) is passed through the MUX and inserted into the
radio frame overhead.
3-62
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
WEST - RCV
WEST - RCV
(SAME AS
WEST-RCV RACK 1)
WEST SC RCV DT
WEST SC CLOCKS
RR RPTR CLK
RT RPTR CLK
RR RPTR DATA
RPTR DS1
RT RPTR DATA
FIFO
WEST SC XMT OH
WEST SC XMT DT
EAST SC RCV DT
EAST SC XMT DT
EAST SC XMT OH
EAST SC CLOCKS
EAST - XMT
(SAME AS EAST-XMT
RACK 2)
EAST - XMT
RACK 1
RACK 2
CONTROLLER
CONTROLLER
LMW-5027-SM
01/29/04
The I/O interface locks to the incoming fiber. It is only put on pedestal upon LOS or LOF
alarm.
3.5.8.2.5
Normal Operation
The 39 MHz clock, recovered from the fiber input is used for front-end SMCRA function (all
functions before the elastic buffer). The 39 MHz clock is used to perform frame sync, LOS,
LOF, and B1 Bit error checks in framer. Crossover occurs after the framer.
3.5.8.2.6
XMT VCXO
The input clock (MHZ54T) from the XMT VCXO is used to generate radio XMT STS1 data,
sync, and clock. A Phase Locked Loop (PLL) controls the frequency of the Voltage Controlled
Crystal Oscillator (VCXO) generated clock that is the clock source for SMRCA XMT functions. The PLL consists of the Voltage Controlled Crystal Oscillator (VCXO). a phase detector circuit in the SMCRA, a loop filter/amplifier.
Phase Detector A/B (PH54A/B) complimentary outputs provide relative phase difference
between pointers in STS elastic buffer. The phase difference is converted to a correction voltage in the PLL to control the frequency of the VCXO.
3-63
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3.5.8.2.7
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Holdover
When LOS or LOF is declared, the holdover condition is enabled. The SAMPLE voltage from
the loop amplifier holds the oscillator to the frequency at the time the alarm occurred. The
oscillator stays close to frequency and then over time slowly migrates to pedestal.
The SAMPLE voltage is applied to the holdover switch circuits and is switched to the analog
MUX. The analog MUX selects the sample voltage to output to the loop filter. The loop filter/
amplifier develops a correction voltage from the phase difference and uses the voltage to
drive the VCXO.
3.5.8.2.8
Pedestal
The oscillator is placed on a fixed voltage (pedestal) before lockup, when forced to pedestal
for test, and after holdover has migrated to pedestal.
When pedestal is selected by the analog MUX holdover switching is disabled, and the fixed
pedestal voltage is applied to the pedestal circuit. This action places the VCXO under pedestal voltage control. The pedestal voltage is factory adjusted for VCXO center frequency by
potentiometer R418.
An LOS in the laser receiver, a loss of activity on all four of the input data bits, or an input
SEF condition will cause the holdover circuits to stop sampling the control voltage for the 54
MHz oscillator. A LOS in the laser receiver, a loss of activity on all four of the input data, or
an input LOF condition will force an AIS condition in the STS insert circuits and force the
loop into holdover.
3.5.8.2.9
Baud VCXO
TCKB The input clock (TCKB) from the baud VCXO is used to generate the baud and nibble clocks. Frequency dependent. Phase Detector A/B (PHBA/B) complimentary outputs provide relative phase difference between pointers in an elastic buffer.
3.5.8.3
The DX-35P OC3/STM-1 I/O Interface RCV circuits (Figure 3 - 28) receive parallel I, Q data
signals (RX I and Q 2:0), and BAUD CLK from the RCVR module. The SMCRA demultiplexes/decodes these inputs to form STS1 data, auxiliary (overhead data), and a reference
sync signal. The overhead data contains a 262 kb/s service channel, a 1.544 Mb/s WDS1 per
each DS3, and two 16 kb/s command path channels.
3.5.8.3.1
The RCVR module interface at connector J3A consists of Receive Data (RXD), Receive Subset data (RSD), BAUD Identification (ID), Trellis Code Modulation Sync (TCMS), Receive
BAUD clock (RCV BAUD), Bit Clock (CLK), (FRMF) and Viterbi Correcting Errors (VITERBI CORE).
RCVR module interface circuits consist of a retime circuit and FEC circuit. RX I (2:0) and
RX Q ( 2:0) signals from the RCVR are clocked into the retime circuit by the BAUD CLK.
The retime circuit retimes the I and Q signals to the baud clock and the I and Q signals are
applied to the SMCRA FEC circuit. The FEC circuit removes the FEC encoding that was
placed on the data stream by the MDR-8000 XMTR at the other end of the hop.
3-64
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
3.5.8.3.2
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
SMCRA Functions
The SMCRA performs Reed-Solomon decoding, descrambling, radio frame detection and
alignment, extracting service channel and DS1 overhead channels, elastic buffering, STS1
frame detection, PVMR, data rate adjustment to interface with FEC array, phase/frequency
detection, and alignment signal generation.
3.5.8.3.3
RCV VCXO
The input clock (MHZ-51R) from the RCV VCXO is used to generate the 39 MHz clock that is
used for all SMCRA RCV functions and to generate the RCV baud and nibble clocks used by
the 4X39 translator RCV circuits. A Phase Locked Loop (PLL) controls the frequency of the
Voltage Controlled Crystal Oscillator (VCXO) generated clock. The PLL consists of the Voltage Controlled Crystal Oscillator (VCXO), a phase detector circuit in the SMCRA, and a loop
filter/amplifier.
RCV PDA/B - Receive Phase Detector A/B. Complimentary outputs provide relative phase
difference between pointers in local or adjacent SMCRA elastic buffers. The loop filter/amplifier develops a correction voltage from the phase difference and uses the voltage to drive the
RCV VCXO.
3.5.8.3.4
Errorless Switching
Errorless switching is performed using elastic buffers in the A and B I/O interface modules
and a common read clock between the modules, in a protected system.
3.5.8.3.5
DADE
DADE is an automatic function of the SMRCA and is performed using the elastic buffers in
the A and B I/O interface modules.
3.5.8.3.6
B1 Byte
Parity bits are continuously monitored and a parity error pulse is generated when a mismatch is detected.
3.5.8.3.7
3.5.8.4
The DX-35P uses a DS1 interface ASIC for DS1 signal processing. The demultiplex section
of the DS1 interface ASIC receives four channels of DS1/E1 data and clocks (WS DS1-1 through
3 T/R and RPTR T/R). The four channels of data are clocked into an elastic buffer. The data is
then converted to a quasi-RZ format and encoded, according to the modulation mode. The
encoded data is sampled in an AIS detector for loss of signal, demultiplexed onto two (T&R)
channels, and converted to RZ data. TEO (trailing edge overshoot) pulses are added to the RZ
data so that the pulses conform to cross-connect requirements without the need of an external
equalizer. Tip and ring outputs for each channel (DS1 Chan 1-4 Out T/R) are applied to DS1 LBO
circuits on the MDR-8000 OC3/STM-1 AUX interface via connector J3E.
3-65
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3.5.8.5
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Figure 3 - 33 and Figure 3 - 34 show XMT and RCV signal flow. Refer to service channel multiplex description previously described in this section for XMT details. The DX-35P sends
service channel 1 data to the AE-37Y-1 controller module via connector J3B. Service channel
2 data from the controller is wired (J3C) but not used for the OC3/STM-1 radio applications.
3.5.8.5.1
Terminal
See Figure 3 - 33. At a terminal, the service channel interface at the SMRCA in the I/O interface consists of the WEST SC RCV DT and WEST SC CLKS (WEST SC 256K CLK, WEST
SC 64K CLK, WEST SC 16K SYNC, WEST 8K SYNC, and WEST SC 2K SYNC) outputs.
The WEST SC XMT DT output is a single 256 kb/s multiplied signal that contains four 64kb/
s channels.
In the SMRCA, the service channel data (WEST SC RCV DT) is removed from the radio
frame overhead and is sent to the service channel muldem in the controller module. The
WEST SC RCV DT is clocked into the controller by the SMRCA using the WEST SC
CLOCKS provided by the SMRCA.
3.5.8.5.2
Repeater
See Figure 3 - 34. The service channel interface at the SMRCA in the rack 1 I/O interface consists of the WEST SC XMT DT and WEST SC XMT OH inputs and WEST SC CLKS (WEST
SC 256K CLK and WEST SC 2K SYNC) outputs. The WEST SC XMT DATA input consists
of four 64kb/s channels multiplexed into a single 256 kb/s signal.
When WEST SC XMT OH is low (No off hook from rack 1 controller) data received over the
RF path (WEST SC RCV DT) is passed through the MUX and put on the repeater cable to
rack 2. When WEST SC XMT OH is high (off hook), WEST SC RCV DT is clocked into the
rack 1 controller by the WEST SC CLKS. The rack 1 controller multiplexes the WEST SC
RCV DT with local insert-data and the combined signal is passed through the MUX and put
on the repeater cable to rack 2.
3.5.8.6
3.5.8.6.1
The controller interface is used to transfer alarm and status information to the AE-37( )
Controller. It is also used to receive control information from the AE-37( ) Controller.
Alarms generated in the SMCRA are latched in the controller interface until they are
acknowledged by the system controller. Optical receive/radio transmit alarms generated by
the SMCRA include: Severely Errored Frame (SEF), Loss of Frame (LOF), B1 Bit Error (B1
ERROR), and Loss of Signal (LOS).
3.5.8.6.2
SEF
SEF is declared when a minimum of four consecutive errored framing patterns has been
received. SEF is cleared when a minimum of two consecutive error-free framing patterns
have been received.
3-66
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
3.5.8.6.3
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
LOF
LOF is declared if the SEF state persists for a count comparable to 23 frames. LOF is
cleared when the signal remains in-frame for a minimum of one millisecond.
3.5.8.6.4
B1 ERROR
The B1 parity checker calculates BIP-8 parity over all the bytes of the STSn frame and
checks this calculated parity against the RCV parity (B1 byte) in the next frame. B1 ERROR
is declared if a mis-compare or error is detected.
3.5.8.6.5
LOS
LOS is declared when an all zeros pattern is received on all four bits of nibble data (a minimum of 100 microseconds).
Data is sent and received during a two-byte transfer. The first byte is a poll byte that selects
the device ID and register address. It also controls whether a read or write operation is taking place. The second byte contains data from the selected register.
3.5.8.6.6
Provisioning Inputs
The I/O interface receives the following provisioning inputs (PROV 1-8) from capacity keys
on the XMTR and RCVR modules:
modulation scheme
local oscillator control source (pedestal voltage or PLL)
STS1 operation and number of STS1 lines enabled
data scrambled or passed data through unmodified
stuff rate source for stuffing DS1/E1 signals in radio frame (average stuff rate or stuff
request signals from DS1 interface ASIC)
enables or disabled data scrambler stuck pattern (all 1s, all 0s, or alternating 1s and 0s).
3.5.8.6.7
I2C Bus
The I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) bus communicates module part number, serial number,
and revision history information to the AE-37( ) Controller.
3.5.8.6.8
ON-Line/Off-Line Enable/Disable
In a hot-standby system, a XMT AUX ENABLE, RCV ENABLE, and WDS1 ENABLE signals from the AE-37Y Controller module turn on the respective XMT, RCV and wayside DS1
circuits on the on-line OC3/STM-1 I/O interface module. This results in XMT AUX ONLINE,
RCV ONLINE, and WDS1 ONLINE signals being generated in the on-line I/O interface that
are applied to the OC3/STM-1 AUX interface. The XMT AUX DISABLE, RCV DISABLE,
and WDS1 DISABLE output signals from the OC3/STM-1 AUX interface turn off the respective circuits in the off-line OC3/STM-1 I/O interface module.
3-67
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3.5.8.6.9
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Loopback Controls
Refer to loopback information on the Control screen for details. To access the Control screen:
1
On the Main screen, on dropdown for type of radio, click on OC3. OC3 Status
Alarm screen will open.
On OC3 Status Alarm screen, on tool bar, click on User Control. User control
screen will open.
3.5.8.6.10 Alarms
ALM red LED, indicates I/O interface module failure.
OC3/STM-1 ALM red LED, indicates OC3/STM-1 signal failure.
WYSD FAIL red LED, indicates loss of signal, bipolar violation detected, or failure on
one of the active WDS1 lines.
3.5.8.6.11 Status
RF ON green LED, indicates I/O on-line.
OC3/STM-1 ON green LED, indicates OC3/STM-1 on-line.
WDS1 ON green LED, indicates DS1 interface circuit output drivers are enabled.
3.5.9 DX-35R-1/2 Ethernet I/O Interface
There are two versions of the DX-35R Ethernet I/O Interface module. The earlier version,
(DX35R-1 (PN 3EM16610AA), supports electrical ethernet applications and is equipped with
one front-panel mounted RJ-45 connector. The later version, DX35R-2 (PN 3EM16610AB)
replaces the DX-35R-1 and supports both electrical and optical Ethernet applications. The DX35R-2 module is equipped with a front-panel mounted RJ-45 connector for electrical Ethernet
connection and an SFP (Small Form factor Pluggable) module receptacle for optical Ethernet
connection. The SFP plugs into the SFP receptacle and XMT and RCV fiber optic cables connect to the SFP. One interface (electrical or optical) is active, the other interface is backup and
becomes active if the already active interface fails.
The DX-35R Ethernet I/O Interface multiplexes/demultiplexes up to three data channel pairs,
DS1, and service channel data in the MDR-8000 Ethernet radio. The Ethernet data input/output is via Ethernet cable connected to an RJ45 connector. The input/output between the I/O
interface and the MDR-8000 radio is via the radio backplane output between the I/O interface
and the MDR-8000 radio is via the radio backplane through J3A, J3B, and J3C. There is also
connection to the AUX card via J3D and J3E.
See Figure 3 - 35 for to/from signal information and application information. The Ethernet I/O
Interface consists of several functional blocks each of which is described below.
3-68
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
SFP
OC 3*
10/100/GigE
DX-35R
ETHERNET
I/O INTFC
J1
TCMS
J3A
LINK
PARTNER
UD-35AN
RCVR
J3A
BAUD ID
UD-35AN
RCVR
RR SEF
A2/B2
RXD 4-0
RSD 2-0
UD-36AN
XMTR
TX I 0-4
BIT CLK
RCV BAUD
A2/B2
TX Q 0-4
VITERBI CORE
2 BAUD CLK
BAUD CLK
TCK B
CORRECTION VOLTAGE
J3B
AE-37Y
CNTLR
ADDR 9-0
SERIAL CLK (I2C)
SERIAL DATA (I2C)
J3B
SERIAL DATA (I2C)
CI DATA 7-0
EAST SC RX DATA
EAST SC 256k CLK
EAST 64k CLK
EAST 16k SYNC
EAST 8k SYNC
EAST 2k SYNC
WEST SC RX DATA
WEST SC 256k CLK
WEST SC 64k CLK
WEST SC 16k CLK
WEST SC 8k SYNC
WEST SC 2k SYNC
TX AUX ENABLE
RX AUX ENABLE
EAST SC XMT DT
EAST SC XMT OH
WEST SC XMT DT
WEST SC XMT OH
C1
J3D
RTDT IN 5-0 T/F
RT FRAME IN T/F
RT PARITY IN T/F
RT_CLK_IN
2
2
RR DT IN 4-1
RR SYNC IN T/F
RGRK IN T/F
RX AUX DISABLE
TX AUX DISABLE
8
2
2
C1
J3D
12
J3E
WS DS1 1-4 T/R
AE-37Y
CNTLR
Cl DATA 7-0
SELECT A/B
DSTRB
RWF
AUX
INTFC
A4/B4
12
2
AUX
INTFC
J3E
WS DS1 1-4 T/R
RR DT OUT 4-1
RR-SYNC-OUT T/F
RGRK-OUT T/F
2
2
RX AUX ONLINE
TX AUX ONLINE
ETH-1092F
05/20/06
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3.5.9.1
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Modes of Operation
Provisionable modes of operation include: A Only, A and B Switched, A and B Separate, and
A and B Summed. Refer to signal flow drawings in Initial Turnup section.
Note
For all modes of operation, only the Eth Out associated with the active Eth
In is allowed to put out data.
3.5.9.1.1
A Only
The A Only mode allows external equipment, that has a single input and a single output
port, to connect to an MDR-8000E that has one or two I/O interface modules. Only the A Eth
In and A Eth Out ports are active.
In the XMT direction, the A Eth In data is connected to the A I/O interface modules. Crossover data is sent to the B I/O interface module (if equipped).
In the RCV direction, the A Eth Out data is connected to the A I/O interface modules. Crossover data is sent from the B I/O interface module (if equipped).
3.5.9.1.2
A & B Switched
A & B Separate
In this mode, A and B are two completely separate unprotected data channels.
In the XMT direction, data from the A I/O interface Eth In port is applied to the A XMTR
module and data from the B I/O interface Eth In port is applied to the B XMTR module. If a
failure occurs, data on that channel is lost.
In the RCV direction, the A Eth Out port uses data only from the farend A XMTR and the B
Eth Out port uses data only from the farend B XMTR. If a failure occurs, data on that channel is lost.
3.5.9.1.4
A & B Summed
This mode can be used to provide Ethernet link protection for hops with one RF link.
In the XMT direction, both the A and B Ethernet I/O interface modules receive data on the
Eth In port. When there is only one RF link, the data from both the A and B I/O interface
Eth In ports are combined into a single data stream and the composite signal is applied to
the active XMTR module. Frames are tagged to indicate the data source. When there are two
RF links, this mode functions the same as A and B Separate with A and B operating as separate, independent channels. In this scenario, data from both the A I/O interface Eth In port
is applied to the A XMTR module and data from both the B I/O interface Eth In port is
applied to the B XMTR module.
3-70
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
In the RCV direction, the A Eth Out port uses data only from the farend A XMTR and the B
Eth Out port uses data only from the farend B XMTR. If a failure occurs, data on that channel is lost.
3.5.9.2
Ethernet Switching
See Figure 3 - 36. In the A and B Switched mode, when an I/O switch is initiated by an alarm
or a manual switch (refer to Table 3 - 4), the A ETH R/RT (Ethernet In) and A RR/ETH T
(Ethernet Out) signals are switched simultaneously to B. B will remain in service until it
alarms or a manual switch to A is initiated.
XMTR
A
SW
SW
CMD
SW
RCVR
A
SW
CMD
XMTR
B
SW
SW
CMD
SW
RCVR
B
SW
CMD
MDR-1201F
08/22/05
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Function
5 Highest
Card Not Valid (the card is being stored in the B side, but is not provisioned and not being used)
1 Lowest
3.5.9.3
DS1 Switching
See Figure 3 - 37. DS1 and AUX channel switching is independent of the Ethernet data
switching. In hot-standby, space-diversity, and frequency-diversity radios, in the radio XMT
direction, DS1 data is applied to both the A and B I/O Interface modules, multiplexed with
Ethernet data and AUX channel data, and applied to the A and B XMTRs.
In the radio RCV direction, DS1 data out of the A RCVR is applied to both the A and B I/O
Interface modules. When a DS1 switch is initiated by an alarm or a manual switch (refer to
Table 3 - 5), the A DS1 TX outputs from the A RCVR are switched to the B I/O Interface module.
DS1 switching is not revertive. DS1 RCV circuits on the B I/O Interface will remain in service until either B alarms or a manual switch to A is initiated.
Function
4 Highest
Card not valid (the I/O Interface card is being stored on the B side,
but is not provisioned and not being used).
Override
1 Lowest
Manual switch
3.5.9.4
10/100BASE-T Operation
The 10BASE-T and 100BASE-T radios employ half-duplex and full duplex baseband transmission over two pairs of category 5/5E (CAT5/5E) balanced cabling. The aggregate data rate of
10/100 Mb/s is achieved by transmission at a data rate of 10/100 Mb/s over each wire pair. The
data is transmitted over the RF path in burst of up to 10 Mb/s and 100 Mb/s, respectively.
3-72
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
3.5.9.5
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
1000BASE-T Operation
The 1000BASE-T (sometimes referred to in the industry as GigE) radio employs full duplex
baseband transmission over four pairs of category 5/5E balanced cabling. The aggregate data
rate of 1000 Mb/s is achieved by transmission at a data rate of 250 Mb/s over each wire pair.
The use of hybrids and cancellers enables full duplex transmission by allowing symbols to be
transmitted and received on the same wire pair at the same time. Data from the link partner
is received in bursts of up to 1000 Mb/s and is transmitted over the RF path in bursts of up to
150 Mb/s.
RADIO RCV
SW
RCVR
A
SW
CMD
DS1 Tx 1-4
ETH I/O INTFC B
RADIO XMT
To/From
AUX INTFC
MUX
XMTR
B
DS1 Rx 1-4
RADIO RCV
SW
RCVR
B
SW
CMD
ETH-1036
03/23/06
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3.5.9.6
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
See Figure 3 - 38. The DX-35R I/O Interface consists of the RJ45 connector, the Input/Output
transformer, the Ethernet PHY, the ETHRA FPGA, and the T1/E1 Line Interface. A description of each follows.
ETHRA FPGA
10/100/
1000BASE-T
ETHERNET
MII
RJ45
INTFC
XFMR
PHY
MII
MAC
FIFO
GFP
MULDEM
RADIO
RADIO
RX/TX
SFP_TDP/N
T1/DS1 FRAMING
ETHERNET
DATA
SFP*
SFP_RDP/N
DS1
TO/FROM AUX
PARALLEL BUS
ETH-1091F
05/20/06
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
3.5.9.6.1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
RJ45 Connector
The RJ45 connector is the Ethernet cable connection to/from the interface transformer on
the DX-35R Ethernet I/O Interface board.
3.5.9.6.2
Interface Transformer
The transformer is used for signal coupling between the RJ45 connector and the Ethernet
PHY block. Transformer coupling provides spike filtering and termination.
3.5.9.6.3
SFP
The SFP is used for signal coupling between the fiber optic cable and the Ethernet PHY
block.
3.5.9.6.4
Ethernet PHY
The PHY connects Ethernet media to the ETHRA FPGA (through Media Access Control)
and defines the electrical signaling, line states, clocking guidelines, data encoding, and circuitry needed for data transmission and reception.
The PHY also performs auto-negotiation (detects the rate of incoming and/or outgoing data;
10BASE-T, 100BASE-T, 1000BASE-T) and selects the highest common input rate.
3.5.9.6.5
The main internal components of the FPGA are: MAC, FIFO, GFP, Muldem and T1/DS1
Framing block.
3.5.9.6.5.1
The MAC interfaces between the Physical Layer (PHY) and the FIFO and primarily performs Ethernet Framing to wit:
When receiving Ethernet data from the PHY (for Radio XMT), this component recognizes
where frames begin and end in the bit-streams received.
When transmitting data to the PHY (during Radio RX), the MAC delimits the frame by
inserting some extra bits into or among the frames being sent to enable the receiver(s) to
recognize the beginning and ending of the frames.
The MAC employs cyclical redundancy checks (CRC) by the use of checksums to ensure
the integrity of the bits in the frame to verify the frame is intact.
The MAC implements CSMA/CD during half-duplex Ethernet RX mode.
3.5.9.6.5.2
The First In First Out buffer (FIFO) connects between the MAC and the GFP processor. Its
purpose is to transfer Ethernet data to the GFP for framing encapsulation prior to insertion
in the service channel for radio XMT, and to receive decapsulated framed data from the GFP
for transfer to the MAC and further transmission over the Ethernet.
In the Ethernet RCV/Radio XMT direction the three modules are: System Receive module
(receives data from the MAC), the Fabric receive module (sends data to the GFP), and the
3-75
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Water Mark module. In the radio RCV/Ethernet XMT direction there are three sub-modules in
the data path: the Fabric TX module (receives RF from the GFP), the System TX module (sends
data to the MAC), and the Water Mark module (data flow control during data transfer). In both
directions data is written to and read from the Generic Synchronous 2-port SRAM buffer.
During half-duplex operation, CSMA/CD mode is operational and collision effects are evaluated during data transfer. Excessive collisions will cause a cessation of transfer and removal
of collision corrupted transferred data. During full-duplex operation, CAMA/CD is off and
there are no collision effects to interrupt data flow.
In the Ethernet RCV/Radio XMT direction, Ethernet data is clocked into the egress FIFO
eight bits at a time from the MAC through the System Receive module, written into FIFO
memory in the sequence of arrival, read out of memory into the Fabric Transmit module, and
then, four bytes at a time, sent to the GFP. To begin transfer of data, the MAC sends the
FIFO a Ready-To-Send signal and awaits the FIFO reply Ready-To-Receive. As the MAC
sends its Ethernet data to the FIFO, it runs data validity checks. If the data is invalid
because of corruption, or excessive collision effects, FIFO is notified to abort reception. When
data transmission resumes, the data is written into memory by the System receive module.
The data at the same time is being read out of memory by the fabric receive module. This
module hand shakes with the GFP (Ready to Send/Ready to Receive). When GFP acknowledgement is received, the data is sent to the GFP four bytes at a time. In the GFP the data
frame is encapsulated for insertion into the radio service channel.
In the Radio RCV/Ethernet XMT direction, RF data is clocked into the ingress FIFO four
bites at a time through the Fabric Transmit module, written to FIFO memory in the
sequence of arrival, read out of memory into the System Receive module and then transferred eight bits at a time to the MAC. During reception from the GFP to the FIFO the data
undergoes validity checking by the Fabric Transmit module. If data is invalid, the Fabric
Transmit module notifies the GFP to quit sending the present data and restart a new frame
sequence. A Water Mark module in the FIFO is used to control data flow and assure that
data threshold levels at all points of transmission and reception are within limits. In the
case of under-run, the FIFO holds data in the buffer until more is received from the GFP
module. In the Radio RCV/Ethernet XMT direction, a short frame (less than 64 byte frame
length) is considered an error frame and is discarded.
3.5.9.6.5.3
The Generic Framing Processor (GFP) processes received Ethernet signals for transport over
the radio network and processes received radio signals for transport over the Ethernet network. The processor preserves original control information and incurs very short transmission delay. The framing process incurs very short transmission delay. The framing process
includes encapsulation (for radio transmission) and decapsulation (for Ethernet transmission), header processing, digital encoding/decoding, performance monitoring and more. The
processor contains a simplified FIFO interface to connect to the ingress/egress FIFO.
During Ethernet RCV/Radio XMT, the processor receives the Ethernet signals from the
FIFO via the FIFO Interface. It aligns character and control code, and maps consecutive
characters into block code. Eight block codes are grouped into a superblock with core and
payload headers. There is also a CRC-16 error check code added which calculates and inserts
core and payload header error control into each transmitting GFP frame. The superblocks
are then encapsulated as payload into periodic, fixed length GFP frames and inserted in the
radio service channel for RF transmission.
3-76
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
During Radio RCV/Ethernet XMT, the processor receives the radio frames from the service
channel, performs frame delineation and validation (core/payload header error control) for
each received GPF frame, and decapsulates the data into a set of superblocks. The superblocks are then decoded into 8-bit characters (data and control codes) and sent to the egress
FIFO via the FIFO interface.
3.5.9.6.5.4
Muldem
The muldem contains the circuitry to perform framing, to insert Ethernet, Service Channel,
and data into the frames for radio transmitting, and in the case of radio receiving, remove
data from the overhead and transfer it to the PHY for feed to the Ethernet cable. In the case
of DS1, the data is DS1 framed in the T1/DS1 ETHRA circuitry and directed through the T1/
E1 Line Interface to the Aux Interface.
3.5.9.6.5.5
T1/DS1 Framing
Frames the DS1 data for transmission to the T1/E1 Line Interface.
3.5.9.6.5.6
T1 Line Interface
The T1 Line Interface interfaces between the ETHRA and the AUX card for WS DS1 signals
and also connects to the backplane parallel bus for handling radio controller bi-directional data.
3.5.9.7
See Figure 3 - 39. The DX-35R Ethernet I/O Interface board data flow follows from board input
at the RJ45 connector to the Coupling Transformer to the Physical Layer Device (PHY) and
into the ethernet Regenerator Array (ETHRA). From there it leaves the Ethernet I/O Interface
board and enters the radio path.
The PHY chip on the I/O board serves as the controlling influence for Ethernet data flow.
When enabled for Auto-Negotiation, the PHY establishes a communication link with the far
end PHY on the other end of the Ethernet cable (if it, too, has Auto-Negotiate capability) and
between them they compare their abilities and connect at the highest common data transfer
rate or mode (10BASE-T, 100BASE-T, or 1000BASE-T). Auto-Negotiation makes automatic
connection of the highest data rate available without intervention from the user or from
management software and ensures data integrity. If Auto-Negotiation is not enabled, the
transfer will occur at a pre-configured rate.
The coupling transformer filters and terminates the incoming Ethernet signal and from
there the data is picked off by the PHY for application to the ETHRA. Connecting the PHY
and the ETHRA is the Medium Independent Interface (MII) circuitry. Since the MII circuits
interface between the PHY and the ETHRA, identical circuits are located in the PHY and
also in the Media Access Control (MAC) circuitry within the ETHRA. The MII circuits convert the line signals received by the PHY into digital format signals and provide them to the
ETHRA via the MAC. the ETHRA multiplexes the Ethernet data with data from the serial
service channel interface and wayside interface and converts the final multiplexed data into
two X/Y data rail pairs. The X/Y data pairs are then applied to a serial scrambler. The scrambled X/Y data is applied to a Forward Error Correction (FEC) encoder circuit which uses
Trellis Coded Modulation and Reed-Solomon coding. The encoded X/Y data steams are converted to I and Q data steams and clocked out of the ETHRA by the T CLK B input from the
XMTR module BAUD VCXO. The TX1 1-4 and TX Q 1-4 data are applied to the transmitter
module via connector J3A.
3-77
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
J3B
CONTROLLER
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
TX AUX ENABLE
J3E
AUX
INTFC
ETHRA
SWITCHING
CONTROL
LOGIC
TX AUX DISABLE
J3E
AUX
INTFC
TX AUX DISABLE
MGMT/CNTRL/STATUS
SPF4
XMT 2
XMT 3
ETHRA
(RADIO
XMT)
10/100/1000 BaseT
ETH RXD 7-
XMT
J1
RJV5
RH45
XMT 1
BUFFER
XFMR
PHY
J3B/J3C
CONTROLLER
ETH_RXC
XMT 2
XMT 3
ETH_125_CLK
DATA 1
CLK 1
WS DS1-1T
WS DS1-1R
WS DS1-2T
WS DS1-2R
J3E
AUX
INTFC
WS DS1-3T
WS DS1-3R
WAYSIDE
SYSTEM
INTFC
RPTR T
RPTR R
DATA 2
CLK 2
TXI 1-4
TXQ 1-4
BAUD CLK
2 BAUD CLK
J3A
TO XMTR
MODULE
DATA 3
CLK 3
DATA 4
CLK 4
MHZ54T
CORRECTION
VOLTAGE
PH54A
PH54B
J3B/J3C
CONTROLLER
SC TX DATA 1 EAST
SC TX DATA 2 EAST
SC TX OH 1 EAST
SC TX OH 2 EAST
PLL
TCKB
PHBA
PHBB
J3E
AUX INTFC
(OTHER
I/O INTFC)
RT_ACCEPT_OUT T/F
RT DATA 3 IN T/F
RT DATA 2 IN T/F
RT DATA 1 IN T/F
RT DATA 0 IN T/F
RT_CNTRL_IN_1 T/F
RT_CNTRL_IN_0 T/F
RT CLK IN T/F
LVDS
RCVR
XMT
VXCO
RT_ACCEPT_OUT
RT DATA 3 IN
RT DATA 2 IN
RT DATA 1 IN
RT DATA 0 IN
RT_CTRL_IN_1
RT_CTRL_IN_0
RT CLK IN
CORRECTION
VOLTAGE
PLL
RT_ACCEPT_IN
RT DATA 3 OUT
RT DATA 2 OUT
RT DATA 1 OUT
RT DATA 0 OUT
RT_CNTRL_OUT_1
RT_CNTRL_OUT_0
RT CLK OUT
LVDS
RCVR
BAUD
VCXO
RT_ACCEPT_IN T/F
RT DATA 3 OUT T/F
RT DATA 2 OUT T/F
RT DATA 1 OUT T/F
RT DATA 0 OUT T/F
RT_CNTRL_OUT_1 T/F
RT_CNTRL_OUT_0 T/F
RT CLK OUT T/F
J3E
AUX INTFC
(OTHER
I/O INTFC)
FADED LINES
(
) = WIRED BUT NOT USED FOR CURRENT ETHERNET
RADIO APPLICATIONS
ETH-1090F
05/20/06
Figure 3 - 39 DX-35R Ethernet I/O Interface Ethernet RCV/Radio XMT Functional Block Diagram
3-78
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
3.5.9.7.1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
The XMTR module interface at connector J3A receives Transmit Data (TX1 1-4 and TXQ 1-4),
BAUD CLK, and 2 BAUD CLK (twice the frequency of BAUD CLK) from the ETHRA.
3.5.9.7.2
DS1 Interface
The DS1 interface circuit provides clock recovery, clock smoothing, elastic buffering and line
encoding for each DS1 (WS DS1-1-3 T/R) channel.
The DS1 tip and ring signals (WS DS1-1T and WS DS1-1T and WS DS1-1R) are applied to the
DS1 interface circuits via connector J3E. The balanced tip and ring signals consist of pulsed
square waves at 1.544 Mb/s. The DS1 interface circuit bridges the RZ data onto one channel,
converts the balanced tip and ring signals to NRZ data, B3ZS encodes the data, and using the
recovered clock, writes the data into an elastic buffer. In the elastic buffer, the recovered clock
is compared to the low-speed clock created by the ETHRA and if a mismatch is detected, stuffing bits are inserted. The DATA 1-4 outputs of the DS1 interface circuit are clocked into the
ETHRA by the respective four output clocks (CLK 1-4).
3.5.9.7.3
Refer to service channel demultiplex description later in this section for RCV details. The DX35R ETHRA receives inserted service channel 1 data from the AE-37Y-1 controller module via
connector J3B. Service channel 2 data from the controller is wired (J3C) but not used for the
Ethernet radio applications.
Overhead MUX circuitry in the ETHRA receives local insert-service channel data (SC TX
DATA 1 EAST, SC TX DATA 2 EAST, SC TX OH 1 E, and SC TX OH 2 E) from the service
channel muldem in the controller module. The EAST SC TX DATA is clocked into the ETHRA
by the controller using the EAST SC CLOCKS (EAST SC 256K CLK, EAST SC 64K CLK,
EAST SC 16K SYNC, EAST C 8K SYNC, and EAST SC 2K SYNC) provided by the ETHRA. In
the ETHRA, the service channel insert data (EAST SC TX DATA) is inserted into the radio
frame overhead.
3.5.9.8
See Figure 3 - 40. The DX-35R ETHERNET I/O Interface RCV circuits receive parallel RX and
RS data signals; an BAUD CLK from the RCVR module. The ETHRA demultiplexes/decodes
these inputs to form Ethernet data, auxiliary (overhead data), and a reference sync signal. The
overhead data contains a 262 kb/s service channel, a 1.544 Mb/s WDS1 per each DS1, and two
16 kb/s command path channels.
3-79
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
J3B
CONTROLLER
J3E
AUX
INTFC
(OTHER I/O
INTFC)
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
J3E
AUX INTFC
(OTHER
I/O INTFC)
RX AUX DISABLE
RX AUX ENABLE
ETHRA
SWITCHING
CONTROL
LOGIC
RX AUX DISABLE
WAYSIDE DISABLE
10/100/1000 BaseT
J3A
RCVR
MODULE
RXD (4:0)
RSD (2:0)
BAUD ID
TCMS
RCV_BAUD
BIT CLK
FRMF (RR SEF)
VITERBI CORE
RCV
RCV 1
XFMR RCV 2
RCV 3
ETH RXD 7-
ETHRA
(RADIO
RCV)
ETH_GTX
PHY
ETH_TXC
SEP-RDP
SFP-RDN
J1
RJ 45
SFP*
WS DS11T
WS DS11R
WS DS12T
WS DS12R
SYSTEM
INTFC WS DS13T
WS DS13R
J3B/J3C
CONTROLLER
RPTR T
RPTR R
WEST SC TX DATA 1
WEST SC TX DATA 2
WEST TX OH 1
WEST SC TX OH 2
BUFFER
RR DATA IN 04 T/F
J3E
AUX INTFC
(OTHER
I/O INTFC)
RR SYNC IN T/F
LVDS
RCVR
RGRK IN T/F
J3E
AUX
INTFC
RR DATA IN 04
RR DATA OUT 04
RR SYNC IN
RR SYNC OUT
RGRK IN
RGRK OUT
J3B/J3C
CONTROLLER
J3E
AUX INTFC
(OTHER I/O
INTFC)
FADED LINES
(
) = WIRED BUT NOT USED FOR CURRENT
ETH-1093F
05/20/06
Figure 3 - 40 DX-35R Ethernet I/O Interface Radio RCV/Ethernet XMT Functional Block Diagram
3-80
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
3.5.9.8.1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
The RCVR module interface at connector J3A consists of Receive Data (RXD), Receive Subset
data (RSD), BAUD Identification (ID), Trellis Code Modulation Sync (TCMS), Receive BAUD
clock (RCV BAUD), Bit Clock (CLK), Frame False (FRMF) and Viterbi Correcting Errors (VITERBI CORE).
RCVR module interface circuits consist of a retime circuit and Forward Error Correcting
(FEC) circuit. RXD and RSD signals from the RCVR are clocked into the retime circuit by the
BAUD CLK. The retime circuit retimes these to the baud clock and the signals are then
applied to the ETHRA FEC circuit. The FEC circuit removes the FEC encoding placed on the
data stream by the MDR-8000 XMTR at the other end of the hop.
3.5.9.8.1.1
ETHRA Functions
The ETHRA performs Reed-Solomon decoding, de scrambling, radio frame detection and
alignment, extracting service channel and DS1 overhead channels, elastic buffering. STS1
frame detection, PVMR, data rate adjustment to interface with FEC array, phase/frequency
detection, and alignment signal generation.
3.5.9.8.1.2
Parity Byte
Parity bits are continuously monitored and a parity error pulse is generated when a mismatch is detected.
3.5.9.8.2
DS1 Interface
The DX-35R uses a DS1 interface ASIC for DS1 signal processing. The demultiplex section of
the DS1 interface ASIC receives four channels of DS1/E1 data and clocks (WS DS1-1 through
3 T/R and RPTR T/R). The four channels of data are clocked into an elastic buffer. The data is
then converted to a quasi-RZ format and encoded, according to the modulation mode. The
encoded data is sampled in an AIS detector for loss of signal, demultiplexed onto two (T&R)
channels, and converted to RZ data. TEO (trailing edge overshoot) pulses are added to the RZ
data so that the pulses conform to cross-connect requirements without the need for an external equalizer. Tip and ring outputs for each channel (DS1 Chan 1-4 Out T/R) are applied to
DS1 LBO circuits on the MDR-8000 ETHERNET AUX interface via connector J3E.
3.5.9.8.3
Refer to service channel multiplex description previously described in this section for XMT
details. The DX-35R sends service channel 1 data to the AE37Y-1 controller module via connector J3B. Service channel 2 data from the controller is wired (J3C) but not used for the
Ethernet radio applications.
See Figure 3 - 41. The service channel interface at the ETHRA in the Ethernet I/O interface
consists of the WEST SC RX DATA, WEST SC CLKS (WEST SC 256K CLK, WEST SC 64K
CLK, WEST SC 16K), and WEST SC SYNC (WEST SC 8K SYNC, WEST SC 2K SYNC) outputs. In the ETHRA, the service channel data (WEST SC RCV DT) is removed from the
radio frame overhead and is sent to the service channel muldem in the controller module.
The WEST SC RX DATA is clocked into the controller by the ETHRA using the WEST SC
CLOCKS provided by the ETHRA.
3-81
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
ETH/T1 I/O
West RCV
West SC RX Data
West SC Clocks
ETHRA
East SC TX Data
East SC Clocks
ETHRA
East XMT
CONTROLLER
MDR-1143F
04/17/07
3.5.9.9
3.5.9.9.1
See Figure 3 - 42. The controller interface is used to transfer alarm and status information to the
AE-37( ) Controller. It is also used to receive control information from the AE-37( ) Controller.
Alarms generated in the ETHRA are latched in the controller interface until they are
acknowledged by the system controller. Ethernet receive/radio transmit alarms generated
by the ETHRA include: Severely Errored Frame (SEF), Loss of Frame (LOF), Parity Error,
and Loss of Signal (LOS).
3-82
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
RWF
DSTRB
ETHRA
CONTROL
INTFC
(CI)
ADDRESS (9:0)
SELECT A
SELECT B
ALM
INSVC
SERIAL CLK
SERIAL DATA
J3B/J3C
CONTROLLER
EEPROM
I2C
WYSD ON
SYSTEM
INTFC
CI DATA 0-7
WYSD ALM
ETH IN
CI DATA (7:0)
ETH ALM
IRQ
J3E
AUX
INTFC
ETH OUT
A-SIDE
MDR-1096B-F
04/28/05
Figure 3 - 42 DX-35R Ethernet I/O Interface Controller Interface Functional Block Diagram
3.5.9.9.2
SEF
SEF is declared when a minimum of four consecutive errored framing patterns has been
received. SEF is cleared when a minimum of two consecutive error-free framing patterns
have been received.
3.5.9.9.3
LOF
LOF is declared if the SEF state persists for a count comparable to 23 frames. LOF is
cleared when the signal remains in-frame for a minimum of one millisecond.
3-83
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3.5.9.9.4
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Parity Error
The parity checker calculates CRC-8 parity over all the bytes of the STSn frame and checks
this calculated parity against the RCV parity (B1 byte) in the next frame. An error is
declared if a mismatch or error is detected.
3.5.9.9.5
LOS
LOS is declared when an all zeros pattern is received on all four bits of nibble data (a minimum of 100 microseconds).
Data is sent and received during a two-byte transfer. The first byte is a poll byte that selects
the device ID and register address. It also controls whether a read or write operation is taking place. The second byte contains data from the selected register.
3.5.9.9.6
Provisioning Inputs
The I/O interface receives the following provisioning inputs (PROV 1-8) from capacity keys
on the XMTR and RCVR modules:
modulation scheme
local oscillator control source (pedestal voltage or PLL)
STS1 operation and number of STS1 lines enabled
data scrambled or passed data through unmodified
stuff rate source for stuffing DS1/E1 signals in radio frame (average stuff rate or stuff
request signals from DS1 interface ASIC)
enables or disables data scrambler stuck pattern (all 1s, all 0s, or alternating 1s and 0s).
3.5.9.9.7
I2C Bus
The I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) bus is for inventory control and communicates module
part number, serial number, and revision history information to the AE-37( )Controller.
3-84
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
3.5.9.9.8
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Loopback Controls
Refer to loopback information on the Control screen for details. To access the Control
screen:
3.5.9.9.9
On the Main screen, on dropdown for type of radio, click on ETH. ETH
Status Alarm screen will open.
On ETH Status Alarm screen, on tool bar, click on User Control. User control
screen will open.
Alarms
3-85
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
DX-35S
ETH/T1 I/O
SFP
J3A
RR SEF
ETHERNET DATA
LINK
PARTNER
UD-35AN
RCVR
A2/B2
J1
TXI 0-4
10/100/GigE
UD-35AN
RCVR
TX Q 0-4
J3A
2 BAUD CLK
TCMS
UD-35AN
RCVR
BAUD CLK
BAUD ID
TCK B
RXD 4-0
CORRECTION VOLTAGE
A4/B4
RXD 2-0
J3B
BIT CLK
RCV BAUD
A2/B2
VITERBI CORE
C1 DATA 7-0
AE-37Y
CNTLR
EAST SC RX DATA
J3B
RXD 9-0
EAST 8k SYNC
EAST 2k SYNC
C1 DATA 7-0
WEST SC RX DATA
SELECT A/B
DISTRB
RWF
TX AUX ENABLE
WEST SC 2k CLK
RX AUX ENABLE
C1
EAST SC XMT DT
J3D
EAST SC XMT OH
T1 RX TIP & RING 1-11
WEST SC XMT DT
WEST SC XMT OH
C1
J3E
LINE
INTFC
CARD
LINE
INTFC
CARD
J3E
PROTECT 1-4
PROTECT 1-4
MDR-1295
04/06/07
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Note
For all modes of operation, only the Eth Out associated with the active Eth
In is allowed to put out data.
3.5.10.1.1 A Only
The A Only mode allows external equipment, that has a single input and a single output
port, to connect to an MDR-8000E that has one or two ETH/T1 I/O modules. Only the A Eth
In and A Eth Out ports are active.
In the XMT direction, the A Eth In data is connected to the A ETH/T1 I/O modules. Crossover data is sent to the B ETH/T1 I/O module (if equipped).
In the RCV direction, the A Eth Out data is connected to the A ETH/T1 modules. Crossover
data is sent from the B ETH/T1 I/O module (if equipped).
3.5.10.1.2 A & B Switched
A failure on A or a manual switch, switches Ethernet data on A Ethernet In and A Ethernet
Out ports to the B ETH/T1 I/O. Data is not automatically returned to A when the alarm is
cleared. The data remains on B until an alarm or manual switch on B switches the data to A.
3.5.10.1.3 A & B Separate
In this mode, A and B are two completely separate unprotected data channels.
In the XMT direction, data from the A ETH/T1 I/O Eth In port is applied to the A XMTR
module and data from the B ETH/I/O Eth In port is applied to the B XMTR module. If a failure occurs, data on that channel is lost.
In the RCV direction, the A Eth Out port uses data only from the farend A XMTR and the B
Eth Out port uses data only from the farend B XMTR. If a failure occurs, data on that channel is lost.
3.5.10.1.4 A & B Summed
This mode can be used to provide Ethernet link protection for hops with one RF link.
In the XMT direction, both the A and B ETH/T1 I/O modules receive data on the Eth In port.
When there is only one RF link, the data from both the A and B ETH/T1 I/O Eth In ports are
combined into a single data stream and the composite signal is applied to the active XMTR
module. Frames are tagged to indicate the data source. When there are two RF links, this
mode functions the same as A and B Separate with A and B operating as separate, independent channels. In this scenario, data from the A ETH/T1 I/O Eth In port is applied to the A
XMTR module and data from the B ETH/T1 I/O Eth In port is applied to the B XMTR module.
3-87
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
In the RCV direction, the A Eth Out port uses data only from the farend A XMTR and the B
Eth Out port uses data only from the farend B XMTR. If a failure occurs, data on that channel is lost.
ETH/T1 I/O A
ETH RCV/RADIO XMT
ETH In
ETH R/RT
A
ETH In
XMTR
A
SW
SW
CMD
SW
RCVR
A
SW
CMD
ETH/T1 I/O B
ETH RCV/RADIO XMT
ETH In
ETH R/RT
B
ETH In
XMTR
B
SW
SW
CMD
SW
RCVR
B
SW
CMD
MDR-1301
04/16/07
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Function
5 Highest
Card Not Valid (the card is being stored in the B side, but is not provisioned and not being used)
1 Lowest
Function
4 Highest
Card not valid (the ETH/T1 I/O card is being stored on the B side,
but is not provisioned and not being used).
Override
1 Lowest
Manual switch
3-89
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
ETH/T1 I/O A
RADIO XMT
MUX
XMTR
A
RADIO RCV
SW
RCVR
A
SW
CMD
DS1 Tx 1-32
ETH/T1 I/O B
RADIO XMT
To/From
ETH/T1
LINE
INTFC
MUX
XMTR
B
DS1 Rx 1-32
RADIO RCV
SW
RCVR
B
SW
CMD
ETH-1096
04/16/07
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
ETHRA FPGA
10/100/
1000BASE-T
ETHERNET
MII
RJ45
INTFC
XFMR
PHY
MII
MAC
FIFO
GFP
MULDEM
RADIO
RADIO
RX/TX
SFP_TDP/N
T1/DS1 FRAMING
ETHERNET
DATA
SFP
SFP_RDP/N
DS1
T1 LINE INTERFACE
TO/FROM
ETH/T1 Line INTFC
PARALLEL BUS
ETH-1097
04/16/07
3-91
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
The MAC interfaces between Physical Layer (PHY) and the FIFO and primarily performs
Ethernet Framing to wit:
When receiving Ethernet data from the PHY (for Radio XMT), this component recognizes
where frames begin and end in the bit-streams received.
When transmitting data to the PHY (during Radio RX), the MAC delimits the frame by
inserting some extra bits into or among the frames being sent to enable the receiver(s) to
recognize the beginning and ending of the frames.
The MAC employs cyclical redundancy checks (CRC) by the use of checksums to ensure
the integrity of the bits in the frame to verify the frame is intact.
The MAC implements SMMA/CD during half-duplex Ethernet RX mode.
3.5.10.6.5.2
The First In First Out buffer (FIFO) connects between the MAC and the GFP processor. Its
purpose is to transfer Ethernet data to the GFP for framing encapsulation prior to insertion
in the service channel for radio XMT, and to receive decapsulated framed data from the GFP
for transfer to the MAC and further transmission over the Ethernet.
In the Ethernet RCV/Radio XMT direction the three modules are: System Receive module
(receives data from the MAC), the Fabric receive module (sends data to the GFP), and the
Water Mark module. In the radio RCV/Ethernet XMT direction there are three sub-modules
in the data path: the Fabric TX module (receives RF from the GFP), the System TX module
(sends data to the MAC), and the Water Mark module (data flow control during data transfer). In both directions data is written to and read from the Generic Synchronous 2-port
SRAM buffer.
During half-duplex operation, CSMA/CD mode is operational and collision effects are evaluated during data transfer. Excessive collisions will cause a cessation of transfer and removal
of collision corrupted transferred data. During full-duplex operation, CAMA/CD is off and
there are no collision effects to interrupt data flow.
In the Ethernet RCV/Radio XMT direction, Ethernet data is clocked into the egress FIFO
eight bits at a time from the MAC through the System Receive module, written into FIFO
memory in the sequence of arrival, read out of memory into the Fabric Transmit module, and
3-92
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
then, four bytes at a time, sent to the GFP. To begin transfer of data, the MAC sends the
FIFO a Ready-To-Send signal and awaits the FIFO reply Ready-To-Receive. As the MAC
sends its Ethernet data to the FIFO, it runs data validity checks. If the data is invalid
because of corruption, or excessive collision effects, FIFO is notified to abort reception. When
data transmission resumes, the data is written into memory by the System receive module.
The data at the same time is being read out of memory by the fabric receive module. This
module hand shakes with the GFP (Ready to Send/Ready to Receive). When GFP acknowledgement is received, the data is sent to the GFP four bytes at a time. In the GFP the data
frame is encapsulated for insertion into the radio service channel.
In the Radio RCV/Ethernet XMT direction, RF data is clocked into the ingress FIFO four
bites at a time through the Fabric Transmit module, written to FIFO memory in the
sequence of arrival, read out of memory into the System Receive module and then transferred eight bits at a time to the MAC. During reception from the GFP to the FIFO the data
undergoes validity checking by the Fabric Transmit module. If data is invalid, the Fabric
Transmit module notifies the GFP to quit sending the present data and restart a new frame
sequence. A Water Mark module in the FIFO is used to control data flow and assure that
data threshold levels at all points of transmission and reception are within limits. In the
case of under-run, the FIFO holds data in the buffer until more is received from the GFP
module. In the Radio RCV/Ethernet XMT direction, a short frame (less than 64 byte frame
length) is considered an error frame and is discarded.
3.5.10.6.5.3
The Generic Framing Processor (GFP) processes received Ethernet signals for transport over
the radio network and processes received radio signals for transport over the Ethernet network. The processor preserves original control information and incurs very short transmission delay. The framing process incurs very short transmission delay. The framing process
includes encapsulation (for radio transmission) and decapsulation (for Ethernet transmission), header processing, digital encoding/decoding, performance monitoring and more. The
processor contains a simplified FIFO interface to connect to the ingress/egress FIFO.
During Ethernet RCV/Radio XMT, the processor receives the Ethernet signals from the
FIFO via the FIFO Interface. It aligns character and control code, and maps consecutive
characters into block code. Eight block codes are grouped into a superblock with core and
payload headers. There is also a CRC-16 error check code added which calculates and inserts
core and payload header error control into each transmitting GFP frame. The superblocks
are then encapsulated as payload into periodic, fixed length GFP frames and inserted in the
radio service channel for RF transmission.
During Radio RCV/Ethernet XMT, the processor receives the radio frames from the service
channel, performs frame delineation and validation (core/payload header error control) for
each received GPF frame, and decapsulates the data into a set of superblocks. The superblocks are then decoded into 8-bit characters (data and control codes) and sent to the egress
FIFO via the FIFO interface.
3.5.10.6.5.4
Muldem
The muldem contains the circuitry to perform framing, to insert Ethernet, Service Channel,
and data into the frames for radio transmitting, and in the case of radio receiving, remove
data from the overhead and transfer it to the PHY for feed to the Ethernet cable. In the case
of DS1, the data is DS1 framed in the T1/DS1 ETHRA circuitry and directed through the T1/
E1 Line Interface to the Aux Interface.
3-93
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3.5.10.6.5.5
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
T1/DS1 Framing
T1 Line Interface
The T1 Line Interface interfaces between the ETHRA and the AUX card for WS DS1 signals
and also connects to the backplane parallel bus for handling radio controller bi-directional data.
3-94
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
J3B
CONTROLLER
TX AUX ENABLE
J3E LINE
INTFC CARD
TX AUX DISABLE
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
ETHRA
SWITCHING
CONTROL
LOGIC
J3E
LINE
INTFC
CARD
RT AUX ON LINE
MGMT/CNTRL/STATUS
SFP
XMT 2
XMT 3
ETHRA 2
(RADIO
XMT)
10/100/1000 BaseT
ETH RXD 7-
XMT
J1
RJ45
XMT 1
BUFFER
XFMR
PHY
J3B/J3C
CONTROLLER
ETH_RXC
XMT 2
XMT 3
ETH_125_CLK
T1 TX TIP
T1 TX RING
RT DATA 1
RT CLK 1
TXI 0-4
TXQ 0-4
BAUD CLK
2 BAUD CLK
J3A
TO XMTR
MODULE
LINE
SYSTEM
INTFC
T16 TX TIP
T16 TX RING
LINE
INTFC
CARD
RT DATA 16
RT CLK 16
T17 TX TIP
RT DATA 17
T17 TX RING
RT CLK 17
LINE
SYSTEM
INTFC
MHZ54T
CORRECTION
VOLTAGE
PH54A
PH54B
T32 TX TIP
RT DATA 32
T32 TX RING
RPTR TX TIP
RT CLK 32
RT DATA RPTR
RPTR TX RING
RT CLK RPTR
PLL
TCKB
PHBA
PHBB
J3B/J3C
CONTROLLER
XMT
VXCO
CORRECTION
VOLTAGE
PLL
BAUD
VCXO
SC TX DATA 1 EAST
SC TX DATA 2 EAST
SC TX OH 1 EAST
SC TX OH 2 EAST
PHY
PHY
FADED LINES
(
) = WIRED BUT NOT USED FOR CURRENT ETHERNET
RADIO APPLICATIONS
* AVAILABLE ON DX-35R-2 PN 3EM16610AB ONLY
MDR-1297
04/28/07
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
J3B
CONTROLLER
J3E
LINE
INTFC CARD
(OTHER I/O
MODULE)
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
T1/E1 ENABLE
RX AUX DISABLE
J3E LINE
INTFC CARD
(OTHER
I/OMODULE)
RR AUX ON LINE
RX AUX ENABLE
ETHRA
SWITCHING
CONTROL
LOGIC
T1/E1 ON LINE
T1/E1 DISABLE
10/100/1000 BaseT
J3A
RCVR
MODULE
J3B/J3C
CONTROLLER
RXD (4:0)
RSD (2:0)
BAUD ID
TCMS
RCV_BAUD
BIT CLK
FRMF (RR SEF)
VITERBI CORE
WEST SC TX DATA 1
WEST SC TX DATA 2
WEST TX OH 1
WEST SC TX OH 2
ETH RXD 7-
ETHRA 2
(RADIO
RCV)
ETH_GTX
PHY
ETH_TXC
RCV
RCV 1
XFMR RCV 2
RCV 3
SFP-RDP
SFP-RDN
RR DATA 1
RR CLK 1
J1
RJ 45
SFP
T1 RX TIP
T1 RX RING
LINE
SYSTEM
INTFC
RR DATA 16
RR CLK 16
T16 RX TIP
T16 RX RING
RR DATA 17
T17 RX TIP
RR CLK 17
T17 RX RING
LINE
INTFC
CARD
LINE
SYSTEM
INTFC
RR DATA 32
T32 RX TIP
RR CLK 32
RR DATA RPTR
T32 RX RING
RPTR RX TIP
RR CLK RPTR
RPTR RX RING
BUFFER
FADED LINES
(
) = WIRED BUT NOT USED FOR CURRENT
J3B/J3C
CONTROLLER
MDR-1298
04/28/07
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
RWF
DSTRB
ETHRA
CONTROL
INTFC
(CI)
ADDRESS (9:0)
SELECT A
SELECT B
ALM
INSVC
SERIAL CLK
SERIAL DATA
EEPROM
I2C
WYSD ON
J3B/J3C
CONTROLLER
SYSTEM
INTFC
CI DATA 0-7
WYSD ALM
ETH IN
CI DATA (7:0)
ETH ALM
IRQ
J3E
AUX
INTFC
ETH OUT
A-SIDE
MDR-1096B-F
04/28/05
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
ETHRA Functions
The ETHRA performs Reed-Solomon decoding, descrambling, radio frame detection and
alignment, extracting service channel and DS1 overhead channels, elastic buffering, frame
detection, PVMR, data rate adjustment to interface with FEC array, phase/frequency detection, and alignment signal generation.
3.5.10.8.1.2
Parity Byte
Parity bits are continuously monitored and a parity error pulse is generated when a mismatch is detected.
3.5.10.8.2 T1 Interface
The DX-35S uses a line system interface ASIC for T1 signal processing. The demultiplex section of each line system interface ASIC receives 16 channels of T1 data and clocks. The 16
channels of data are clocked into an elastic buffer. The data is then converted to a quasi-RZ
format and encoded, according to the modulation mode. The encoded data is sampled in an
AIS detector for loss of signal, demultiplexed onto two (T&R) channels, and converted to RZ
3-98
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
data. TEO (trailing edge overshoot) pulses are added to the RZ data so that the pulses conform to cross-connect requirements without the need for an external equalizer. Tip and ring
outputs for each channel are applied to the MDR-8000 interface via connector J3E.
3.5.10.8.3 Service Channel Interface
Refer to service channel multiplex description previously described in this section for XMT
details. The DX-35S sends service channel 1 data to the AE37Y-1 controller module via connector J3B. Service channel 2 data from the controller is wired (J3C) but not used for the
Ethernet radio applications.
See Figure 3 - 48. The service channel interface at the ETHRA in the Ethernet I/O interface
consists of the WEST SC RX DATA, WEST SC CLKS (WEST SC 256K CLK, WEST SC 64K
CLK, WEST SC 16K), and WEST SC SYNC (WEST SC 8K SYNC, WEST SC 2K SYNC) outputs. In the ETHRA, the service channel data (WEST SC RCV DT) is removed from the
radio frame overhead and is sent to the service channel muldem in the controller module.
The WEST SC RX DATA is clocked into the controller by the ETHRA using the WEST SC
CLOCKS provided by the ETHRA.
ETH/T1 I/O
West RCV
West SC RX Data
West SC Clocks
ETHRA
East SC TX Data
East SC Clocks
ETHRA
East XMT
CONTROLLER
MDR-1143F
04/17/07
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
3-100
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
stuff rate source for stuffing DS1/E1 signals in radio frame (average stuff rate or stuff
request signals from DS1 interface ASIC)
enables or disables data scrambler stuck pattern (all 1s, all 0s, or alternating 1s and 0s).
3.5.10.9.7 I2C Bus
The I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) bus is for inventory control and communicates module
part number, serial number, and revision history information to the AE-37( ) Controller.
3.5.10.9.8 Loopback Controls
Refer to loopback information on the Control screen for details. To access the Control screen:
1
On the Main screen, on dropdown for type of radio, click on ETH. ETH
Status Alarm screen will open.
On ETH Status Alarm screen, on tool bar, click on User Control. User control
screen will open.
3.5.10.9.9 Alarms
ALM red LED, indicates I/O interface module failure
ETH ALM yellow LED, indicates ETHERNET receive circuit failure.
3.5.10.9.10Status
INSVC green LED, indicates XMT and/or RCV circuits are passing data
ETH IN green LED. This activity monitor indicates data on input to ETHERNET RCV/
RADIO XMT circuits.
ETH OUT green LED. This activity monitor indicates data on output from RADIO RX/ETHERNET XMT circuits.
3.6
TRANSMITTER SUBSYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
See Figure 3 - 49. The transmitter subsystem consists of a QAM transmitter, and a power
amplifier (optional). The purpose of the transmitter is to convert digital baseband signals to a
QAM RF signal and transmit the signal. The following paragraphs describe the operation of
the transmitter subsystem.
The digital baseband signals are converted to analog baseband signals that are then converted
to an RF QAM signal by mixing the analog baseband with a multiplied crystal oscillator. The
2GHz I/Q modulator output is up-converted to the desired RF frequency and amplified to a
medium power RF signal. If higher power is required the signal is sent to the UD-51( ) Power
Amplifier before being sent to the antenna. The RF QAM signal is amplified and applied to the
antenna via a transmit filter.
3-101
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
AE-37( )
CONTROLLER
APC
CONTROL
TX RF
DETECTOR
PA
PRESENT
PA RF
DETECTOR
I DATA
Q DATA
UD-35( )
TRANSMITTER
BAUD
TO/FROM
I/O
INTERFACE
RF
UD-51( )
POWER AMPLIFIER
OPTIONAL
RF
TO
XMT FILTER
2X BAUD
CLOCK
CAPACITY KEY
FREQUENCY CONTROL
CAP KEY PROVISIONING
MW211-0003-1-F
01/29/04
3-102
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
See Figure 3 - 50. There is no correlation between the DC MON test point on the PA front
panel, the PA RF MON input to the controller, and the PA (DC MON) reading on the USI. The
PWR Mon test point on the XMTR front panel is not designed to match the XMTR RF MON
voltage at the input on the controller and the TX (PWR MON) voltage on the USI; however, it
is common to find less than 1% difference.
If the shelf is not equipped with a PA, the RF monitor voltage from the RF coupler/detector on
the XMTR output is switched to the XMTR AGC circuits. The detected RF monitor voltage from
the PA is switched to the AGC circuits on the XMTR module by the PA Present control signal
from the PA when equipped. The AGC circuit controls the gain of the XMTR output amplifier.
3.6.1.1
The voltage on the PWR MON test point on the XMTR front panel is not adjustable. The output monitor is driven by the unity gain buffer. This reference voltage on this test point and/or
the voltage displayed on the TX (PWR MON) display on the USI Analog screen are useful as a
troubleshooting aid when the shelf does not have a PA. If the shelf is equipped with a PA, the
PA voltages should be used.
3.6.1.2
PA DC Mon
The voltage on the DC MON test point on the PA front panel is adjustable on earlier versions of the PA and is normally only factory adjustable on later versions (the control is covered by the output level label). The output monitor circuit is driven by the level shifter. The
reference voltage on this test point and/or the voltage displayed on the PA (DC MON) display on the USI Analog screen are useful troubleshooting aids.
At the factory, the DC MON test point on the PA front panel is set for 0.1 volts per dB output
power (e.g. 2.9v = 29dB output power).
Controller
Cable
RF
Out
AGC
RF
Coupler
RF
Coupler
DET
XMTR
RF MON
(Vdc)
USI
USI
INTFC
A to
D
Conv
PA
RF MON
DET
SWITCH
PWR
MON
(Vdc)
XMTR
DC
MON
ADJ
Buffer
(Unity Gain)
DC
MON
(Vdc)
ALC
(Vdc)
Level
Shift
PA Present
Processor
BACKPLANE
PA
MDR-1108F
06/15/05
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3.6.1.3
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Controller
The XMTR RF MON and PA RF MON voltages are applied to the analog to digital (A to D)
converter circuits on the controller. The digital outputs are read by the USI in the USI interface circuits.
3.6.2 Automatic Level Control (ALC)
When ATPC is disabled, ALC analog circuits control the output power level of the XMTR module or the PA (if equipped). The ALC loop function is disabled if ATPC is enabled.
3.6.2.1
See Figure 3 - 51 for the XMTR ALC loop signal flow. When the radio is not equipped with a PA,
the RF output of the XMTR module is detected and looped back to control the level of the IF
input to the up-converter. Lack of a ground on the PA PRESENT signal causes the PA/XMTR
select switch to switch the XMTR RF DETECTOR VOLTAGE from the RF detector to the integrator circuit in the XMTR module. Integrator circuit gain is controlled by the front panel XMT
LVL control. The control voltage developed in the integrator circuit is switched to the voltage
controlled variable attenuator that controls the level of the IF signal to the upconverter.
CONTROLLER
XMTR
PA
PA PRESENT
PA RF DETECTOR
VOLTAGE
XMTR
RF DETECTOR
VOLTAGE
INTEGRATER
XMT
LVL
RF
DETECTOR
VOLTAGE
CONTROLLED
VARIABLE
ATTENUATOR
ATPC
VOLTAGE
I C
BUS
UPCONV
RF
DETECTOR
XMTR
RF OUT
I C
IF
LMW-3001F
01/29/04
3.6.2.2
See Figure 3 - 52 for the PA ALC loop signal flow. When the radio is equipped with a PA, the RF
output of the PA module is detected and looped back to control the level of the IF input to the
up-converter on the XMTR module. The PA PRESENT signal causes the PA/XMTR select switch
to switch the PA RF DETECTOR VOLTAGE from the RF detector to the integrator circuit in the
3-104
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
XMTR module. The control voltage developed in the integrator circuit is switched to the voltage
controlled variable attenuator that controls the level of the IF signal to the upconverter. The
output of the up-converter is amplified and applied to the fixed-gain amplifier in the PA.
CONTROLLER
XMTR
PA PRESENT
PA
PA RF DETECTOR
VOLTAGE
XMTR
RF DETECTOR
VOLTAGE
INTEGRATER
XMT
LVL
VOLTAGE
CONTROLLED
VARIABLE
ATTENUATOR
ATPC
VOLTAGE
2
I C
BUS
RF
DETECTOR
UPCONV
RF
DETECTOR
XMTR
RF OUT
2
I C
IF
LMW-3002F
01/29/04
3.6.3.1
See Figure 3 - 53 for the XMTR ATPC loop signal flow. In this loop mode of operation, the
ATPC power is at the high or low rail and the level is maintained by the controller module.
The RF output of the XMTR module is detected and looped back to control the level of the IF
input to the up-converter. Lack of a ground on the PA PRESENT signal causes the PA/
XMTR select switch to switch the XMTR RF DETECTOR VOLTAGE from the RF detector to
the controller module. The control voltage developed in the controller modules switched to
the voltage controlled variable attenuator that controls the level of the IF signal to the
upconverter. The output of the up-converter is amplified and applied to the XMT filter.
See Figure 3 - 54 for the PA ATPC loop signal flow. In this loop mode of operation, the ATPC
power is at the high or low rail and the level is maintained by the controller module. The RF
output of the PA module is detected and looped back to control the level of the IF input to the
up-converter on the XMTR module. The PA PRESENT signal causes the PA/XMTR select
switch to switch the PA RF DETECTOR VOLTAGE from the RF detector to the controller module. The control voltage developed in the controller modules switched to the voltage controlled
variable attenuator that controls the level of the IF signal to the upconverter. The output of the
up-converter is amplified and applied to the fixed-gain amplifier in the PA.
3-105
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
CONTROLLER
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
XMTR
PA PRESENT
PA
PA RF DETECTOR
VOLTAGE
XMTR
RF DETECTOR
VOLTAGE
INTEGRATER
XMT
LVL
ATPC
VOLTAGE
IC
BUS
RF
DETECTOR
RF
DETECTOR
VOLTAGE
CONTROLLED
VARIABLE
ATTENUATOR
UPCONV
XMTR
RF OUT
IC
LMW-3003F
05/5/99
IF
CONTROLLER
XMTR
PA PRESENT
PA
PA RF DETECTOR
VOLTAGE
XMTR
RF DETECTOR
VOLTAGE
INTEGRATER
XMT
LVL
RF
DETECTOR
VOLTAGE
CONTROLLED
VARIABLE
ATTENUATOR
ATPC
VOLTAGE
IC
BUS
UPCONV
RF
DETECTOR
XMTR
RF OUT
IC
IF
LMW-3004F
05/5/99
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
3.6.3.2
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
See Figure 3 - 55 for the active region ATPC loop signal flow. In this loop mode of operation,
the ATPC power is in the active region (level is between low and high power rails) and the
far end receiver controls the transmitter via the return command path. During faded path
conditions, low RSL detected in the far end receiver causes an increase in transmit power at
the upstream transmitter.
The radio can be operated with the ATPC disabled, enabled, or enabled with timeout. Select
ATPC disable for maximum power out of the PA at all times. Select ATPC enabled with timeout to force ATPC to low power when the high power alarm is activated. An ATPC high
power alarm is generated if the ATPC is active for more than five minutes without returning
to low power. ATPC remains at low power until the far end receiver requests an ATPC power
reduction.
In normal ATPC operation, the transmitter gain and PA bias control are under software
supervision. The transmitter is set for low gain (10 dB below full gain) and the PA is set for
low bias. The low bias reduces the current consumption in the output stage of the PA to save
power and reduce heat dissipation. When ATPC is provisioned disabled, the PA operates at
full output power. In hot-standby transmitters, the bias control of the off-line PA is set to low
bias with the transmitter gain set at full.
The near end transmitter sends status information to the far end to indicate if the ATPC is
able to go up or down. The far end receiver monitors the RSL voltage from the on-line
receiver and compares this voltage to a preset threshold voltage (representative of approximately -65dBm RSL). If the RSL voltage is higher than the threshold voltage and the near
end transmitter status indicates the ATPC can go down, a down request is sent to the near
end transmitter. If the RSL voltage is lower than the threshold voltage and the near end
transmitter status indicates the ATPC can go up, an up request is sent to the near end
transmitter. The down and up messages are sent from the far end transmitter over the
return path in an internal 16 kb/s command channel in the radio overhead. The near end
controller module receives the messages from the near end receiver and moves the ATPC
one step (approximately 0.5 to 1.0 dB) down or up.
Any time ATPC is not at low gain, the PA bias is enabled so that maximum PA linearity is
available. In hot-standby transmitters, the off-line transmitter gain is set to track the online gain. In frequency diversity systems, the A and B ATPC operate independently.
3-107
3-108
NEAR END
FAR END
RCVR
XMTR
16 kb/s
CONTROLLER
XMTR
PA
PA PRESENT
PA RF DETECTOR
VOLTAGE
XMTR
RF DETECTOR
VOLTAGE
INTEGRATER
XMT
LVL
VOLTAGE
CONTROLLED
VARIABLE
ATTENUATOR
ATPC
VOLTAGE
IC
BUS
RF
DETECTOR
RF
DETECTOR
DETECTOR
UPCONV
XMTR
RF OUT
IC
RCVR
IF
LMW-3005
5/5/99
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3.7.1.1
BB Modulator Board
See Figure 3 - 57. On the BB modulator board, the digital I/Q data rails are digitally filtered
and converted to an analog I/Q baseband. The aliases are removed and the signal is amplified.
3.7.1.2
This front panel control fine tunes the crystal oscillator resonant frequency.
3.7.1.3
In a protected system, the controller enables the online XMTR via the A/B XMT ENABLE
signal. The enable signal causes the control logic to turn on the IN SERVICE LED and an
XMT ON LINE output signal is sent to the other XMTR module as a XMT DISABLE input.
On the other XMTR, the XMT DISABLE signal is applied to the control logic and turns off
the XMTR. In a protected system with the RF switch, when the selected XMTR is on line,
the SWITCH signal from the control logic circuit is applied to the RF switch and switches
the XMTRs.
3.7.1.4
This front panel control adjusts the RF output power of the XMTR by changing the correction voltage applied to the output variable attenuator. Refer to the description of the ALC
loop for details.
3.7.1.5
Capacity Key
The capacity key (PN 967-1609-001 through 020) consists of an I 2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) EEPROM, I and Q low-pass filters, VCXO, and pull-down resistor array. The I 2C
EEPROM communicates part number, serial number, and revision history to the I 2C select
circuit on the BB MOD board. The I and Q filters are baud clock frequency dependent. The
filtered I and Q outputs are applied to the RF MOD subboard. The VCXO is frequency
dependent and derives the CAPACITY CLOCK output (baud clock) from the CAPACITY
KEY FREQ CONTROL input. The pull-down resistor array uses a 6-bit word (PROV 1-8) to
communicate to the controller how the radio is configured. The PROV 1-8 outputs select the
type of radio and provision the trellis coded modulation scheme (32/128 TCM).
3-111
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3.7.1.6
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
See Figure 3 - 58. The crystal oscillator board operates in the 105-150 MHz range depending
on the RF requirements. The oscillator is a low phase noise oscillator. The output is interfaced to the RF modulator board at 50 ohms at a +10dBm level.
UD36AN
XMTR
P101
P101
CAPACITY CLOCK
DX35M
I/O
INTFC
I 04
PROV 18 (CAPACITY KEY)
Q 04
DX35M
I/O
INTFC
AE37Y
CNTLR
A3/B3
TX BAUD CLK
LAMP TEST
TX PRESENT
SERIAL SELECT 03
XMT ON LINE
AE37Y
CNTLR
C1
SERIAL DATA TX
SERIAL CLK
SERIAL TX/RX
J301
APC ENABLE
C1
B XMT SW
(B4 ONLY)
APC CONTROL
RF
SWITCH
XMT ENABLE
J4
UD51Z
PWR AMP
PA RF DETECT
RF OUT
PA PRESENT
A5/B5
A5/B5
A4/B4
UD51Z
PWR AMP
MW21100121
112498
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
SERIAL DATA
P101
TO/FROM
CNTLR
I2C
SELECT
SERIAL CLK
(I2C)
SERIAL
PRCSR
SERIAL DATA
(I2C)
SERIAL CLK
SERIAL
DATA
SERIAL
CLK
J102
APC ENABLE
FREQ
CONTROL
FREQ
CONT
ATPC/
XMT RF DETECT
TEMP/
COMP
CONTROL CORRECTION V DC
PA PRESENT
ATPC CONTROL
XMT
LVL
XMT PWR
ALM
P103
XMT DISABLE
TO/FROM
OTHER
XMTR
TO
RF SWITCH
SWITCH
PA RF DETECT
FROM
CNTLR
P101
SERIAL DATA
EEPROM
FROM PA
SERIAL
CLK
CONTROL
LOGIC
XMT ON LINE
IN
SERVICE
J1
EEPROM
P102
CRYSTAL
OSC BD
LPF
D/A
CONV
XTAL
MON
EEPROM
P101
CAPACITY CLOCK
PROV 18
J102
J8
RF
OUT
J4
AMP
RF
MON
DIGITAL
FILTER
TO/FROM
I/O INTFC
J5
I
CARR
NULL
LVL
ADJ
LPF
D/A
CONV
AMP
LVL
ADJ
BAUD
RF MOD
SUBBOARD
Q
CARR
NULL
CAPACITY
KEY
SUBBOARD
2XBAUD
BB MOD
BOARD
MW21100151A
120198
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
P102
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
AFC
FREQ CONTROL
CRYSTAL
OSC
AMP
AMP
AMP
P102
100 MHZ
OUT
LOWPASS
FILTER
CRYSTAL
TEMP
CONTROL
CKT
EEPROM
MW21100211
072598
3.7.1.7
RF Modulator Subboard
See Figure 3 - 59. The RF modulator subboard receives the crystal oscillator input and splits
the signal to a monitor and a frequency multiplier. The multiplier is usually a low order (2, 3
or 4) and the output is heavily filtered to remove all unwanted harmonics. The signal is multiplied once or twice more to reach a 2GHz frequency, each time filtered to remove unwanted
harmonics. This LO signal is split, one side to the I/Q modulator the other to a higher frequency multiplier.
The LO feeding the I/Q modulator is split into two quadrature vectors each driving a double
balanced mixer. These mixers up-convert the analog baseband signal to a 2GHz QAM signal.
This signal is combined and amplified and fed to a voltage variable attenuator (VVA) where
ATPC and temperature compensation level correction occurs.
The LO feeding the higher frequency multiplier is multiplied as required to drive an upconverter mixer to shift the 2GHz QAM signal to the desired RF frequency. The output of the
mixer is amplified to a usable RF level so some short distance applications can be satisfied
without the optional UD-51( ) Power Amplifier.
3-114
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
FROM
J8
CAPACITY
KEY
BB MOD
VIA
BOARD
MIXER
IF
FROM
100 MHz
OSC
J102
3X
MULT
5X
MULT
AMP
90 DEG
HYBRID
SPLITTER
IF
COMBINER
J1
90
XTAL
MON
FROM
CAPACITY
KEY
BB MOD
J8
VIA
BOARD
MIXER
IF
J5
3X
MULT
RF
MON
J6
RF LO
COUPLER
J4
RF
OUT
AMP
LO
MON
COUPLER
BANDPASS
FILTER
RF
AMP
IF
MIXER
VARIABLE
ATTEN
AMP
CONTROL
RF
DETECTOR
TO
BB MOD
BOARD
(ALC
LOOP)
ATPC/ALC
LOOP
XMT
DETECT
MW21100151B
120298
3.7.1.7.1
Monitor Circuits
Two crystal oscillator monitor circuits are provided, one at the input to the RF MOD subboard
(J1 XTAL MON), that is a direct connection, and the second (J6 LO MON) at the input to the
RF/IF mixer, through a coupler. The RF output is monitored via an RF coupler (J5 RF MON).
The XTAL MON and RF MON test points are accessible via front panel connectors.
3-115
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3.7.1.7.2
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
3.7.1.8
ALC Loop
The Automatic Level Control (ALC) loop automatically maintains the RF output level of the
transmitter. Refer to Automatic Level Control (ALC) under Transmitter Subsystem Functional Description in this section for details.
3.7.1.9
The output signal is fed either to the UD-51( ) Power Amplifier (if equipped) or directly to
the antenna. The signal is also coupled to a monitor with a nominal level of 0dBm. The signal is coupled to a level detector as well which generates a DC level proportional to the RF
output level. This detector voltage is fed back to the controller which uses the signal to
determine failure and to correct for gain changes over temperature.
The transmitter sends provisioning data and a frequency control signal to the DX-35( ) I/O
Interface module. The provisioning data communicates the type of radio (DS1/E1) and the
TCM modulation scheme (32 or 128 TCM) to the I/O interface. The frequency control input is
the feedback loop from the phase-lock loop on the I/O interface module to automatically control the crystal oscillator frequency.
3.7.1.9.1
I2C Bus
EEPROMs to interface the I2C bus are provided on the BB MOD board, crystal oscillator
subboard, and capacity key subboard. The I2C bus communicates module part number,
serial number, and revision history information to the AE-37( ) Controller. The EEPROM on
the crystal oscillator subboard also provides oscillator frequency to the controller.
3.7.2 UD-51( ) RF Power Amplifier (Optional)
See Figure 3 - 60 and Figure 3 - 61. The RF signal from the UD-35( ) Transmitter is amplified by
the UD-51( ) Power Amplifier and routed through a bandpass filter to the antenna. The output
of the power amplifier varies depending on the particular unit from +25 dBm to +33 dBm. It is
a solid-state linear amplifier with a fixed gain of approximately 21 dB. The actual gain is a
function of the radio type and output power.
3.7.2.1
ALC Loop
The Automatic Level Control (ALC) loop automatically maintains the RF output level of the
fixed-gain PA by controlling the output level of the XMTR module. Refer to Automatic Level
Control (ALC) under Transmitter Subsystem Functional Description in this section for details.
3.7.2.2
The power amplifier uses an active bias control stage that allows the unit to go to high bias
only during high power operation when increased linearity is required. The RF MON test
point is coupled off of the power amplifier output and is nominally 0 dBm. A low power
alarm is provided to indicate when the RF output signal power is below a preset level. A
detector diode is used to generate a dc voltage that is proportional to output power. This voltage is used to drive alarm circuits and a dc monitor and is also fed back to the XMTR module
for ALC. The alarm and dc monitor are independently adjustable.
3-116
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
3.7.2.2.1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
I2C Bus
An EEPROM to interface the I2C bus is provided on the bias board. The I2C bus communicates module part number, serial number, and revision history information to the AE-37( )
Controller.
3.7.2.2.2
The power amplifier mounts to the heatsink on the backplane with three screws. If the
mounting screws are not installed and tightened properly, after approximately ten minutes,
the TEMP ALM LED will light and an alarm output is sent to the controller.
UD51Z
PWR AMP
J1
UD35AN
XMTR
RF OUT
P101
SERIAL CLK (I2C)
AE37Y
CNTLR
J2
RF IN
XMT
FILTER
P101
PA RF DETECT
UD35AN
XMTR
LAMP TEST
HIGH LINEARITY BIAS
PA PRESENT
AE37Y
CNTLR
MW21100231
112498
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
RF
MONITOR
J1
J2
RF
INPUT
RF
OUTPUT
AMPL STAGE
RF PWR
ALM
P101
HIGH LINEARITY BIAS
FROM
CNTLR
BIAS CIRCUIT
ALARM
DC MON
OUT
SERIAL CLK
SERIAL DATA
EEPROM
ALARM
ADJ
DC MON
ADJ
TEMP
ALM
TEMP
ALARM
MW21100241
050198
3.8
TRANSMIT FILTERS
The transmit filter removes unwanted spurious RF signals and provides a reflection point
when stacking several transmitters on a common waveguide run.
3.9
RECEIVER SUBSYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The receiver in the MDR-8000 radio demodulates a radio frequency (RF) signal into digital
decoded data. The digital data from the receiver is fed to the input/output interface (I/O interface module) where it is further decoded and demultiplexed.
3.10
RECEIVER SUBSYSTEM MODULES
See Figure 3 - 62. The MDR-8000 receiver subsystem can have either one of two available
receiver modules; the single receiver or the dual receiver.
The following paragraphs describe the operation of the receive subsystems. The single receive
subsystem is described in the 3.9.1 series of paragraphs and the dual receive subsystem is
described in the 3.9.2 series of paragraphs.
3-118
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
AE-37( )
CONTROLLER
ALARMS
TDE
BIT CLOCK
RSL
XTAL
OSC
RAIL DATA
TO I/O
INTERFACE
AFC
CAP
KEY
RF
FROM
STACK
RF DEMODULATOR
BAUD CLOCK
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
UD-36( )
RCVR
P101
AE-37Y
CNTLR
C1
P101
SERIAL CLK
RSL MON
SERIAL DATA
AFC MON
LAMP TEST
EYE MON
EYE ALM
SERIAL DATA TX
CH ALM
SERIAL CLK
OFF NORM
SERIAL TX/RX
RSL ALM
AE-37Y
CNTLR
C1
RX PRESENT
DX-35( )
I/O
INTFC
A3/B3
DX FRAME LOSS
RCV RF
FILTER
A3/B3
RF IN
A2/B2
LMW-5053F
06/08/03
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
I DATA
RF_IN
RF
DOWN
CONVERTER
ANALOG
BASEBAND
CAPACITY
KEY
A/D
BB
FILTERING
TDE
TCM
DECODER
Q DATA
AGC
CHANNEL ALM
AFC
LOCAL
OSCILLATOR
BER ALM
CONTROLLER EYE VOLTAGE
INTERFACE AGC VOLTAGE
AFC VOLTAGE
SERIAL BUS
SPI_I2C
CHANNEL
ALM
BER ALM
ALARM
INTERFACE
EYE MON
RSL MON
AFC MON
LMW-9034F
02/04/04
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
3.10.1.2 Oscillator
The operating frequency of the receiver is set by the oscillator sub-assembly, part of the RF
Down Converter. The oscillator sub-assembly contains a VCXO that operates in the 100
MHz to 150 MHz range depending on the desired channel frequency. The output of the oscillator is effectively multiplied up to the desired RF for demodulation in the RF portion of the
receiver. The center operating frequency of the VCXO is set by an external potentiometer in
earlier versions of the receiver. In later versions the center frequency is automatically controlled from the time domain equalizer (TDE). The receive oscillator is phase locked to the
transmitter by the AFC and the associated control loop parameters. The phase detector is in
the TDE functional block.
3.10.1.3 RF Demodulator
See Figure 3 - 65. The RF demodulator, part of the RF Down Converter, converts a suppressed carrier QAM RF signal into I and Q analog baseband signals. The demodulator has
a low noise amplifier (LNA) section that sets the noise figure and the overload level of the
unit. An AGC circuit is deployed to control the levels through the unit and is set to maximum gain at low signal levels to help achieve a good noise figure. Additionally, at normal to
high RSL, the AGC limits the levels through the chain to prevent amplitude distortion. The
control signal to the AGC circuit is generated in the TDE.
The down conversion function is performed in the RF demodulator and is generally done in
two steps. The RF is first converted to an IF and then further demodulated into I and Q analog baseband signals by using a quadrature demodulator. The local oscillator (LO) used to
perform the down conversion and demodulation is derived from the oscillator sub-assembly.
The CW signal from the oscillator is multiplied appropriately and fed to the down conversion
and demodulation circuits. The multiplication factor varies with RF bands. The oscillator
generates a signal in the 100 MHz - 150 MHz range. The RF input signal to be demodulated
is in the 2 GHz - 11 GHz range.
3-122
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
J2
RF
IN
RF
PIN
DIODE
LNA
LNA
IF
MIXER
LNA
J102
RF AGC
PIN
DIODE
BB
AMP
TO/FROM
BB
DEMOD
BOARD
MIXER
IF
0o
CARR
FREQ
GEN
HYBRID
90o
P102
XTAL
OSC
SUBBD
MULTI
PLIER
EEPROM
BB
AMP
MIXER
IF
SPLITTER
IF
FREQ CTRL
AFC
100 MHz
MULTI
PLIER
MW21100281
072598
3-123
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
3.10.1.7 TDE
The Time Domain Equalizer (TDE) is a countermeasure primarily for multipath impairments. The TDE consists of a 11-tap feed forward section and a 11-tap decision feedback section with a single center tap. The TDE uses least mean squared (LMS) and Zero forcing
algorithms for tap adaptation. The TDE output symbols are also used in the decision
directed recovery loops for AGC, AFC, and clock recovery.
4d Trellis rate 2/3 Convolutional Code providing 4.66 dB of coding gain over
uncoded 128 QAM. Modulation used is 128 signal points with channel information
density of 6.54 bits per channel symbol.
Outer Code
4-Way Byte Interleaved Reed Solomon Code with 856 bytes block size with 840
bytes of information. This is expected to provide between 0.5 and 1 dB of coding
gain. An additional level of bit interleaving is employed outside the Reed Solomon
code to distribute burst errors (105 max). Bit interleaving is performed in order to
distribute errors in a manner in which every other symbol will have no more than
1 bit error.
3.10.1.10 Monitoring
Alarm and status information from the receiver is fed to the controller for reporting to the
USI and the network management systems. The information is also brought to the receivers
front panel to test points and LEDs for local access. The LEDs indicate the Channel Alarm
and the Eye Closure Alarm status and the On-Line condition.
A Channel Alarm is generated if the incoming signal is degraded by noise or other impairments to the point that clock or carrier recovery cannot be achieved. When the Channel Alarm
is ON the LED indicator goes to red. During this time, receiver performance typically exceeds
10-6 BER. Under normal conditions the Channel Alarm indicator should be off.
3-124
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
The Eye Closure Alarm threshold is provisionable from 10-5 to 10-8 BER. An Eye Closure
Alarm is generated when the receive signal degrades to these thresholds; the LED indicator
goes to red. Under normal conditions the Eye Closure Alarm indicator should be off.
The On-Line condition indicator should be green when the receiver is in service and red
when out of service.
3.10.2 UD-36 ( ) Dual Receiver
See Figure 3 - 66, and Figure 3 - 67. The UD-36( ) dual receiver module consists of the main
receiver unit, the capacity key to set the units capacity and modulation, and the local oscillator to set the units specific operating frequency. This module also contains a diversity channel
that is functionally the same as the main channel. The two channels (main and diversity) are
on the same PC board but physically on opposite sides. The diversity channel has its own independent capacity key and oscillator to set its mode of operation. The outputs of the two channels are fed to the switching circuit which monitors the condition of the channels and selects
the better signal for transmission to the I/O. The switching circuit is physically located on the
main channel side of the PC board.
The receiver supports 128 TCM for OC3/STM-1 applications only and supports an RF range
from 6 GHz to 8 GHz. The dual receiver is used where Quad Diversity operation is needed but
can also be used to provide space diversity protection in non-standby systems.
AE-37( )
CONTROLLER
ALARMS
RSL-M
RSL-D
XTAL
OSC
RAIL DATA
TDE
CAP
KEY
BIT CLOCK
RAIL DATA
DATA
RAIL
TDE STRESS
(ON LINE)
RF
FROM
MAIN
ANTENNA
RF
FROM
DIVERSITY
ANTENNA
RF DEMODULATOR
BAUD CLOCK
TO I/O
INTERFACE
FPGA
SWITCH
BIT CLOCK
XTAL
OSC
RAIL DATA
BAUD CLOCK
TDE
BIT CLOCK
CAP
KEY
RF DEMODULATOR
BAUD CLOCK
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
UD-36( )
DUAL
RCVR
P101
AE-37Y
CNTLR
C1
P101
SERIAL CLK
MN RSL MON
SERIAL DATA
MN TDE STRESS
LAMP TEST
MN EYE MON
MN EYE ALM
SERIAL DATA TX
MN CH ALM
SERIAL CLK
MN OFF NORM
SERIAL TX/RX
MN RSL ALM
AE-37Y
CNTLR
C1
MN RX PRESENT
DV RSL MON
DV TDE STRESS
DX-35( )
I/O
INTFC
A3/B3
DV EYE MON
DX FRAME LOSS
DV EYE ALM
DV CH ALM
DV OFF NORM
DV RSL ALM
DV RX PRESENT
J2
MN RCV RF MN RF IN
FILTER
RX/RS DATA
DV RCV RF
FILTER
DX-35( )
I/O
INTFC
DV RF IN
RX BIT CLK
RX BAUD CLK
A3/B3
A2/B2
LMW-9036F
02/04/04
3-126
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3.10.2.2 Oscillator
The oscillators of the dual receiver are physically and functionally identical to the oscillator
used for the single receiver. A separate oscillator is provided for the main channel and the
diversity channel. The main and diversity oscillators typically operate at the same frequency.
3.10.2.6 Switching
The switching circuit is physically located on the main channel side of the receiver PC board.
Data and status information from both the main and diversity channels are fed to the
switching circuit. This circuit performs two major functions; data alignment and switching.
Data alignment is required for errorless switching between the two channels. The radio
frame markers are found on each channel and are aligned by using data buffers. The alignment circuit can tolerate a maximum of 300 nsec of delay offset.
Status information is fed to the switching circuit from the TDE. The TDE processes the status
information from both sides and selects the data from the better channel for distribution to the
I/O interface unit. The following parameters are used to make the switching decision:
Channel Fail
Frame Alarm
Eye Closure Alarm
AGC Alarm
TCM Errors
TDE Stress
The switching circuit constantly evaluates these parameters and selects the channel that has
the best performance. The switching parameters from both the main and diversity channels are
also fed to the controller. In protected systems the controller evaluates the status of the on-line
channel to determine if a switch between the A and B dual receiver is required.
3-127
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
3.10.2.7 Monitoring
Alarms, indicators, and test points are the same as for the single receiver, except that the
dual receiver has two sets of each. For details, refer to the single receiver section.
3.11
RECEIVER
Override (initiated from controller)
Highest priority
Alarms
Manual switch (initiated from USI
laptop computer or from controller
front panel)
Lowest priority
Highest priority
TRANSMITTER
CLA Switch
Alarms
Manual switch (initiated from USI
laptop computer or controller)
Lowest priority
Highest priority
I/O
Alarms
CLA Switch
Manual switch (initiated from USI
laptop computer or controller).
Lowest priority
Parallel or serial receive/transmit alarms are activated by any module. Manual switching is
from the USI laptop computer local or far-end controls menu. Manual switchover cannot occur
from an alarm-free condition to the other side with an alarm. Alarms causing switchover are
as follows:
3-128
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
RECEIVER ALARMS
TRANSMITTER ALARMS
I/O ALARMS
No report
No report
No report
Channel fail
PA power
Radio frame
Common/loss
Eye closure
Buffer spill
Radio errors
3-129
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
3-130
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Variations in counter phase relationships in the X/Y-I/Q MUX and DEMUX circuits may also
create differential delay or cause the delay to vary when the receiver lock is disturbed. These
variations are part of normal operation and do not affect the errorless switching performance.
3.11.7 Manual Switching
Manual switches are provided on the AE-37( ) Controller to manually switch the transmitters,
receivers, and I/O interface drivers. Under normal operation, the manual switches will be in
the AUTO position, which allows the switching decisions to be made by the controller based on
alarm information. In the transmit and receive directions, both data paths have equal priority.
This means that if either the A or B path is selected for transmission by the controller, it will
then remain selected until a path failure occurs. If the manual switches are set to A or B, the
controller will switch to the selected side if that side does not have a higher level of active
alarms. By simultaneously pressing the OVRD switch, the manual requests are latched and
switching will occur regardless of the alarm status. A switch will never be made to a nonequipped or non-powered side.
3.11.8 Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC)
Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) is standard in the MDR-8000 radio, but a provisioning option allows the user to disable the function. When enabled, the user can select
between two modes of operation: ATPC for normal ATPC functions or ATPC T/O for ATPC
with timeout. The ATPC function allows the radio XMTR to operate at a level lower than maximum power output level during normal operating periods. A level detector in the associated
RCVR at the far end monitors RSL and when a failure is detected (includes fading) the RCVR
commands the associated XMTR to go to high power. Specific function details depend on the
mode of operation provisioned and/or the failure as follows:
Provisioning: ATPC or ATPC T/O
Normal Operation: ATPC tracks RCVR with highest RSL. XMTR output is 10 dB down
from maximum power out. Normally the A-side has the highest RSL (B-side RSL is 10 dB
down from A-side RSL).
If one RCVR fails: XMTR goes to high power for 10 seconds, once every minute, until
RCVR is restored.
If both RCVRs fail: XMTR goes to high power and stays there (until RCVRs are restored).
Provisioning : ATPC T/O (only)
If Command path fails: XMTR goes to high power for five minutes and then returns to low
power. Then, if command path has not been restored, once every hour the XMTR goes
high for 10 seconds and then returns to low power.
3.11.9 ALC Loop
The Automatic Level Control (ALC) loop automatically maintains the RF output level of the
fixed-gain PA by controlling the output level of the XMTR module. Refer to Automatic Level
Control (ALC) under Transmitter Subsystem Functional Description in this section for details.
3-131
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
3.11.10 Provisioning
The AE-37( ) Controller uses a nonvolatile EEPROM to store configuration information
for the system. This information is displayed and modified in the provisioning screen of
the USI computer.
The controller periodically examines the status from each module to ensure concurrence
with the information stored in the EEPROM. If a mismatch is found, the OFF NORMAL
alarm is activated.
3.11.11 Remote Inventory
See Figure 3 - 68. The 256 X 8 bit EEPROM stores inventory information that is read by the
AE-37Y Controller over the I2C bus when the remote inventory function on the USI is initiated. Inventory data, including part number, software revision, serial number, and hardware
revision are stored in the non-volatile memory on each equipped module.
There is an I2C bus for the A-side modules (I2C A), B-side modules (I2C B), and ancillary modules (I2C C). Ancillary modules include the relay interface and controller modules.
DX35( )
I/O INTFC
A
UD35( )
XMTR
A
UD36( )
RCVR
A
UD51( )
PWR AMP
A
POWER
SUPPLY
A
UD36( )
RCVR
B
UD51( )
PWR AMP
B
POWER
SUPPLY
B
RELAY
INTFC
MODULE
I2C A
AE37( )
CONTROLLER
I2C C
I2C B
DX35( )
I/O INTFC
B
UD35( )
XMTR
B
MW21100051
060598
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3.12
TMN SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
See Figure 3 - 69 for a simplified block diagram showing Telecommunications Management
Network (TMN) overhead access in the MDR-8000. Simple Network Management Protocol
(SNMP) data for transport is transferred to the radio controller via the parallel bus on the
backplane. The radio controller inserts the data into the provisioned service channel. The Service Channel controller inserts the data into the provisioned service channel. The Service
Channel 1 SC1) output of the controller at 256 kb/s (four 64 kb/s channels combined) is applied
to the XMT baseband (BB) circuits on the I/O interface module and output to the radio XMTR.
SC1 data from the RCV BB circuits on the I/O interface are applied to the TMN interface module where the SNMP data is extracted and applied to the radio controller via the parallel bus.
I/O INTERFACE
MCS-11/TMN
MCS-11/TMN
TRANSPORT
RADIO
CONTROLLER
PARALLEL BUS
TCP/IP
TMN INTFC
MODULE
LMW-8051F
07/21/05
3.12.1.1 West SC
See Figure 3 - 70. At a terminal, the west service channel interface at the I/O interface module consists of the WEST SC RCV DT and WEST SC CLKS (WEST SC 256K CLK, WEST SC
64K CLK, WEST SC 16K SYNC, WEST 8K SYNC, and WEST SC 2K SYNC) outputs. The
WEST SC XMT DT output is a single 256 kb/s multiplex signal that contains four 64 kb/s
channels. In the I/O interface, the service channel data (WEST SC RCV DT) is removed from
the radio frame overhead and is sent to the service channel muldem in the controller module. The WEST SC RCV DT is clocked into the controller by the WEST SC CLOCKS.
3-133
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
3.12.1.2 East SC
At a terminal, the east service channel interface at the I/O interface consists of the EAST SC
XMT DT input and EAST SC CLKS (EAST SC 256K CLK, EAST SC 64K CLK, EAST SC 16K
SYNC, EAST SC 8K SYNC, and EAST SC 2K SYNC) outputs. The EAST SC XMT DT input
consists of fur 64 kb/s channels multiplexed into a single 256 kb/s signal. Overhead MUX circuitry in the I/O interface receives local insert-service channel data ( EAST SC XMT DT)
from the service channel muldem in the controller module. The EAST SC XMT DT is clocked
into the controller using the EAST SC CLOCKS (EAST SC 256K CLK, EAST SC 64K CLK,
EAST SC 16K SYNC, EAST SC 8K SYNC, and EAST SC 2K SYNC). In the I/O interface, the
service channel insert data (EAST SC XMT DT) is inserted into the radio frame overhead.
EAST XMT
EAST SC CLOCKS
RACK 1
RACK 1
TMN
INTFC
CONTROLLER
PARALLEL
BUS
LMW-9024F
03/29/03
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3.12.2.1 West SC
See Figure 3 - 71. The service channel interface rack 1 I/O interface consists of the WEST SC
XMT DATA and WEST SC XMT OFF HOOK inputs and WEST SC CLKS (WEST SC 256K
CLK and WEST SC 2K SYNC) outputs. The WEST SC XMT DATA input consists of four 64
kb/s channels multiplexed into a single 256 kb/s signal.
The rack 1 controller module and TMN interface module always receive WEST SC RCV
DATA and WEST SC RCV CLOCKS, regardless of the state of the WEST SC OFF HOOK SIGNAL from the controller. The WEST SC OFF HOOK signal from the controller controls only
the WEST SC RCV DATA output of the MUX to the repeater port.
When WEST SC XMT OFF HOOK is low, (no off hook from rack 1 controller) data received
over the RF path (WEST SC RCV DATA) is passed through the MUX and put on the repeater
cable to rack 2. When WEST SC SMT OFF HOOK is high (off hook), WEST SC RCV DATA is
clocked into the rack 1 controller by the WEST SC CLKS. The rack 1 controller multiplexes
the WEST SC RCV DATA with local insert-data and the combined signal is passed through
the MUX and put on the repeater cable to rack 2.
3.12.2.2 East SC
The service channel interface in rack 2 I/O interface consists of the EAST SC XMT DATA
and EAST SC XMT OFF HOOK inputs and EAST SC CLKS (EAST SC 256K CLK, EAST SC
64K CLK, EAST SC 16K SYNC, EAST SC 8K SYNC, and EAST C 2K SYNC) outputs, and
rack 1 data input via the RPTR cable. Each data (DT) input and output consists of four 64
kb/s channels multiplexed into a single 256 kb/s signal.
The rack 1 controller module and TMN interface module always receive EAST SC RCV
DATA and EAST SC RCV CLOCKS, regardless of the state of the EAST SC OFF HOOK signal from the controller. The EAST SC OFF HOOK signal from the controller controls only the
EAST SC RCV DATA output of the MUX to the RF port.
When EAST SC XMT OH is low (no off hook from rack 2 controller) data received over the
repeater cable by the frame in/frame out (FIFO) circuit (EAST SC RCV DT) is passed
through the MUX and inserted into the radio frame overhead. When EAST SC XMT OH is
high (off hook), EAST SC RCV DT is clocked into the rack 2 controller by the EAST SC CLKS.
The rack 2 controller multiplexes the EAST SC RCV DT with local insert-data and the combined signal (EAST SC XMT DT) is passed through the MUX and inserted into the radio
frame overhead.
3-135
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
RR RPTR CLK
TO
RACK 2
RR RPTR DATA
RT RPTR CLK
FIFO
FROM
RACK 2
RT RPTR DATA
EAST XMT
EAST SC CLOCKS
RACK 1
RACK 1
TMN
INTFC
CONTROLLER
PARALLEL
BUS
LMW-9022F
03/25/03
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
3.12.2.3
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Operation
The SC XMT is always off hook and there is no direct through path in the radio. Packets are
either buffered through the TMN interface or dropped and reinserted using a forwarding
buffer in the radio controller.
See Figure 3 - 72 and Figure 3 - 73. The TMN Interface monitors the Service Channel for
packets. It also sends packets to the Radio Controller to be inserted into the Service Channel
via the TMN_E and TMN_W ports.
PR RPTR
DATA
TO/FROM
RACK 2
TO/FROM
RF
EAST SC XMT DATA
EAST SC XMT OFF HOOK
SOFTWARE
BUFFER
SOFTWARE
BUFFER
SW FLOW
CONTROL
SW FLOW
CONTROL
SOFTWARE
BUFFER
TMN_E
SOFTWARE
BUFFER
TMN_W
ETH
1-3
PPP
BRIDGE
RADIO CONTROLLER
TMN INTFC
LOCAL MCS-11
PORTS J307-J310
PARALLEL
BUS
LMW-9004F
10/26/05
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
PR RPTR
DATA
TO/FROM
RACK 2
TO/FROM
RF
EAST SC XMT DATA
SOFTWARE
BUFFER
SOFTWARE
BUFFER
SW FLOW
CONTROL
SW FLOW
CONTROL
SOFTWARE
BUFFER
TMN_E
SOFTWARE
BUFFER
TMN_W
ETH
1-3
PPP
BRIDGE
RADIO CONTROLLER
TMN INTFC
LOCAL MCS-11
PORTS J307-J310
PARALLEL
BUS
LMW-9005F
06/19/03
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
IP PAYLOAD
OPENING
FLAG
8 BITS
(7E)
ADDRESS
16 BITS
PROTOCOL SOURCE
CONTROL
OR DATA ADDRESS
8 BITS
8 BITS
16 BITS
CLOSING
FLAG
8 BITS
(7E)
PADDING TO
8N BITS
MCS-11 PAYLOAD
PAYLOAD
8N BITS
FRAME
CHECK
SEQUENCE
(CRC)
16 BITS
LMW-8050F
01/12/03
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
SNMP Optional AE-37AA TMN Interface module and TMN software must be installed. Customer must also dedicate (provision) one service channel to carry the SNMP IP data (can be
carried on same service channel as MCS-11 data).
Relay Interface Optional AE-27A Relay Interface module must be installed. Customer must
wire foreign alarm interface to appropriate pins on connector J305. Refer to AE-27A Relay
Interface module functional description in this section and relay interface connections in the
Interconnect section for details.
3-140
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
AE37Y CONTROLLER
CSF
ADDR (A3A0)
R/WF
ECLK
DATA (D7D0)
CONTROLLER
CIRCUITS
J316
AUDIO 1 IN
AUDIO 1 OUT
SC 64K CLK E
J317
SC MRK E
AUDIO 2 IN
SC FRM E
AUDIO 2 OUT
AUDIO
INTERFACE
CIRCUITS
SC 64K CLK W
SC MRK W
SC FRM W
RCV SC DATA W
XMT SC DATA W
HANDSET
(2WIRE)
J312
RS2321 IN
RCV SC DATA E
XMT SC DATA E
AUDIO
PORT 2
(4WIRE)
J301
HANDSET IN
HANDSET OUT
DX35M( )
I/O
INTERFACE
A/B
AUDIO
PORT 1
(4WIRE)
RS2321
OSS
INTERFACE
CIRCUITS
RS2321 OUT
J313
RS2322 IN
RS2322
RS2322 OUT
MW21100371
051998
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
3-142
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
AE37Y
CONTROLLER
A PWR SUPPLY ALM
REMOTE SHUTDOWN
CE16BB
PWR
SUPPLY
SERIAL CLK
C1C
SERIAL DATA
A+ BAT MON
LAMP TEST
A BAT MON
SERIAL SELECT 0B
A +10.5 V DC MON
A +12 V DC MON
A1
C1C
UD36AN
XMTR
SERIAL DATA TX
C1B
SERIAL CLK
A 12 V DC MON
SERIAL DATA RX
A 5 V DC MON
SERIAL TX/RX
A APC ENABLE
A APC CONTROL
C1C
A4
A XMT ENABLE
B +BAT MON
B BAT MON
B +10.5 V DC MON
B +12 V DC MON
C1B
UD36AN
XMTR
B 12 V DC MON
B1
B 5 V DC MON
B APC ENABLE
UD51Z
PWR
AMP
A5
A PA RF PWR MON
B APC CONTROL
A PA RF PWR ALM
B XMT ENABLE
UD51Z
PWR
AMP
B5
B4
C1C
A XMT ENABLE
A I/O ENABLE
B PA RF PWR ALM
DX35M
I/O
INTFC
A RCV ENABLE
A XMT SC DATA E
A XMT SC OFF HOOK E
A XMT SC DATA W
A3
MW21100141A
041598
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
AE37Y
CONTROLLER
DX35M
I/O
INTFC
A RSL MON
A AFC MON
UD35AN
RCVR
A EYE MON
A EYE ALM
A CH ALM
C1C
A OFF NORM
A RSL ALM
A2
B XMT ENABLE
A RX PRESENT
A3
B I/O ENABLE
B RCV ENABLE
B RSL MON
B AFC MON
UD35AN
RCVR
B EYE MON
B EYE ALM
UD35AN
RCVR
B CH ALM
B OFF NORM
C1C
A2
B RSL ALM
B2
B RX PRESENT
UD35AN
RCVR
A4
B2
A XMT ON LINE
B XMTR PWR MON
UD36AN
XMTR
UD51Z
PWR AMP
A5
B TX PRESENT
B4
B XMT ONLINE
UD51Z
PWR AMP
B5
UD51Z
PWR AMP
A5
UD51Z
PWR AMP
B5
MW21100141B
041598
D
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
AE37Y
CONTROLLER
J307
MCS11
2
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
J307
2 RTN CLK+
2 RCV CLK+
2 RTN CLK
2 RCV CLK
2 XMT DATA+
2 RCV DATA+
2 XMT DATA
2 RCV DATA
C1A
MCS11
2
C1A
J310
MCS11
3
J310
3 RTN CLK+
3 RCV CLK+
3 RTN CLK
3 RCV CLK
3 XMT DATA+
3 RCV DATA+
3 XMT DATA
3 RCV DATA
CALL COMMON
P1 AUDIO OUT T
MCS11
3
J316
J316
CALL DETECT
P1 ELEAD
AUDIO
1
P1 AUDIO IN R
C1B
P1 AUDIO OUT R
AUDIO
1
P1 MLEAD
C1B
P1 AUDIO IN T
J318
J318
P1 LMC RCV+
P1 LMC XMT+
P1 LMC RCV
P1 LMC XMT
LMC
J315
P2 LMC XMT+
C1A
C1A
P2 LMC XMT
P2 LMC RCV
P2 AUDIO IN T
P2 AUDIO OUT T
P2 AUDIO IN R
P2 AUDIO OUT R
P2 ELEAD
P2 MLEAD
P3 AUDIO IN T
P3 AUDIO OUT T
P3 AUDIO IN R
P3 ELEAD OR RS232 P3 XMT DATA
C1B
C1B
RS232/
AUDIO
3
P3 AUDIO OUT R
P3 MLEAD OR RS232 P3 RCV DATA
J312
J313
RS232/
AUDIO
4
AUDIO
2
J312
J312
RS232/
AUDIO
3
LMC
J317
J317
AUDIO
2
J315
P2 LMC RCV+
P4 AUDIO IN T
P4 AUDIO OUT T
P4 AUDIO IN R
P4 AUDIO OUT R
RS232/
AUDIO
3
MW21100141D
041698
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
D
AE37Y
CONTROLLER
DX35M
I/O
INTFC
SERIAL DATA TX
B3
AE27AF
RELAY
INTFC
RCV SC DATA E
SC 256k CLK E
SERIAL DATA TX
D0D7
RCV SC DATA E
DX35M
I/O
INTFC
SC 256k CLK E
C1B
AUX CSF
SC 64k CLK E
SC 16k CLK E
SC MARK E
C2
SC FRAME E
A3
RCV SC DATA W
SC 256k CLK W
J305
SC 64k CLK W
SC 16k CLK W
SC MARK E
RACK ALARM
SC FRAME E
C1A
AUDIBLE/MAJOR ALM
C1C
VISUAL/MINOR ALM
RACK ALM RTN
DX35M
I/O
INTFC
B3
J308
J308
1 XMT CLK+
1 RCV CLK+
1 XMT CLK
1 RCV CLK
1 XMT DATA+
MCS11
1
1 XMT DATA
1 RCV DATA+
C1A
1 RCV DATA
MCS11
1
1 OFF HOOK+
1 OFF HOOK
1 CLK OUT+
1 CLK OUT
J308
J309
MW21100141C
041598
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
C1A
P1 LMC XMT +/
P1 LMC RCV +/
P2 LMC XMT +/
P2 LMC RCV +/
XMT SC DT E
XMT SC OH E
RCV SC DT E
SC 256K CK E
SC 64K CK E
SC 16K CK E
SC MRK E
SC FRM E
XMT SC DT W
XMT SC OH W
RCV SC DT W
SC 256K CK W
SC 64K CK W
SC 16K CK W
SC MRK W
SC FRM W
A3
I/O INTFC
P102
C1A
LMC
J318
J315
P2 RCV CLK +/
P2 RCV DATA +/
P2 RTN CLK +/
P2 XMT DATA +/
J307
MCS11
2
P3 RCV CLK +/
P3 RCV DATA +/
P3 RTN CLK +/
P3 XMT DATA +/
J310
MCS11
3
OFFHOOK +/
RCV CLK +/
RCV DATA +/
XMT CLK +/
XMT DATA +/
CLK OUT +/
OSS
INTERFACE
CKTS
J308
MCS11
1
XMT DATA +/
XMT CLK +/
RCV DATA +/
RCV CLK +/
OFFHOOK +/
C1C
SERIAL CLK
SER CLK TERM
SER DATA A
J309
MCS11
TXD 1
RXD 1
J312
RS232/
AUDIO 3
TXD 2
RXD 2
J313
RS232/
AUDIO 4
SER EN A
SER SEL 0
SER SEL 1
SER SEL 2
I/O IRQ A
OSS CSF
I/O EN B
RCV EN B
XMT EN B
LAMP TEST
RX DATA
DCD
TX DATA
IRQ
J301
USI
APC EN A
APC CTRL A
XMT PWR MON
XMT PWR ALM
A4
XMTR
RSL MON A
APC MON A
EYE MON A
EYE ALM A
CH ALM A
OFF NORM A
RSL ALM A
RX PRESENT
A2
RCVR
C1C
B4 XMTR
B2 RCVR
C1A
A3
I/O INTFC
P102
PROCESSOR BUS
I/O A CSF
I/O B CSF
DATA
ADDRESS
DSF
R/WF
CONTROLLER
CKTS
AUDIO CSF
HANDSET IN
HANDSET OUT
J23
TEL
C1A
AUDIO
INTERFACE
CKTS
AUDIO 1 IN T/R
MLEAD 1
ELEAD 1
AUDIO 1 OUT T/R
CALL DETECT
COMMON CALL
J316
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2 IN T/R
MLEAD 2
ELEAD 2
AUDIO 2 OUT T/R
J317
AUDIO 2
MW21100071
041498
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
3-148
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
path and between repeaters. The OSS circuits consist of two service channel muldems,
address and register data busses, serial communication ports, and RS-232 ports.
3.13.1.2.1 Front Panel Controls and Indicators
See Figure 3 - 78 Sheet 1. Twenty two LEDs and four switches are mounted on the front
panel. Fifteen front panel LEDs light/flash to indicate status of controller/system. One
alarm LED lights to indicate controller failure and one LED lights to indicate a shelf alarm.
The LEDs are controlled/driven by the Enhanced Serial Communication Controller (ESCC).
Refer to the Operations section for control and indicator details.
3.13.1.2.2 SPI Bus
See Figure 3 - 78 Sheet 2. The Serial Processor Interface (SPI) bus interfaces the MC68360
peripheral section with the EPLD that controls bus operations. Serial data is transmitted to
and received from the MDR-8000 modules via the SPI bus. The SPI bus is controlled by the
SER TX/RX and SERIAL SELECT 0-3 outputs of the transceiver. The SER TX/RX logic
determines the mode of operation. The SERIAL SELECT 0-3 lines select the module. The
SPI CLK clocks the SERIAL SELECT 0-3 into the transceiver.
3.13.1.2.3 I2C Bus
The I2C bus consists of one bidirectional data line and a clock. Serial data received over the
I2C bus includes part numbers and revision history (all modules and the backplane) and
also capacity key information and crystal frequency from the transmitter and receiver.
3.13.1.2.4 Register Data Bus
See Figure 3 - 78 Sheet 4. The register data bus interfaces the MC68360 processor with the
peripherals and other controller circuits, the OSS circuits, and the audio circuits. Individual
chips are addressed via the address bus and enabled by the chip select lines (CS0 - CS6).
Three I2C master bus controllers interface the I2C bus with all MDR-8000 modules.
Analog-to-digital converters interface the register data bus and analog signals from the MDR8000 modules. The analog signals consists of voltages from the power supplies (+10.5, +12, 12 and -5 Vdc) , RF power monitor voltage (PA RF PWR MON) from the power amplifiers (if
equipped), RF power monitor voltage (XMT PWR MON) from the transmitter modules, and
receive level monitor voltage (RSL MON), AFC voltage (AFC MON), and a voltage representative of the signal quality (EYE MON) from the receivers.
Transceivers interface the register data bus and digital alarm and status data from the
MDR-8000 modules. Configuration status signals (TX PRESENT, RX PRESENT, and PA
PRESENT) are used to inform the processor of current configuration which is then used by
the processor logic to control functions, such as switching and the transmit ALC loop.
Alarms applied to the register data bus include PA power supply (PA PS) alarm and PA
power alarm (PA PWR ALM) from the power amplifiers (if equipped), combiner alarm
(COMBINER ALM, if equipped with combiner), XMT PWR ALM from transmitter modules,
power supply alarm (PS ALM) from power supplies, and channel fail alarm (CH FAIL), EYE
CLOSURE, and RSL alarms from the receiver modules. Refer to functional description of
relay interface module in this section for alarm descriptions.
A digital-to-analog converter for each side of the radio sends a dc voltage ( ATPC CONTROL)
to the A and B power amplifier.
3-149
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Note
MCS-11 must be provisioned MCS-11 J310 Master/Junction to enable
XMT, RCV, and OUTPUT clocks. If an external modem is being used, provision MCS-11 for MCS-11 J310 Modem. This selection disables XMT, RCV,
and OUTPUT clocks and all MCS-11 clocks must now be provided by the
external modem.
d. MCS-11 J310 Master/Junction must be selected unless an external modem is connected to
the radio. If an external modem is used it must provide all MCS-11 clocks and the radio
must be provisioned MCS-11 J310 Modem.
Note
When provisioned J308 Input Clock, J308 and J309 RCV CLK and XMT
CLK and J308 OUTPUT CLK are disabled. Select J308 Output Clock to send a
64 kb/s clock to external equipment (OUTPUT CLK J308-4/12) and also
enable RCV CLK and XMT CLK.
e. MCS-11 J308 Output Clock must be selected unless an external clock source is provided that
will supply all MCS-11 clocks. If an external clock source is used, the radio must be provisioned MCS-11 J308 Input Clock.
3-150
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
CIC
RACK ALM RLY
P/O
ESCC
RACK
ALM
RELAY
RACK ALM
VISUAL
RACK
ALM VISUAL
RELAY RACK ALM
AUDIBLE
RACK
ALM
RELAY
J305
TBOS RCV +
XCVR
C1A
J305
TBOS
XMT +
TBOS TBOS
RELAY XMT -
J301
USI RXD
TBOS
TX
P2 LMC
RCV +
LMC
RX
LMC P2 LMC
RELAY RCV -
J318
LMC 2 RELAY
P2 LMC XMT +
XCVR
LMC
TX
USI
COMPUTER
CONNECTOR
USI DCD
XCVR
P2 LMC XMT -
J305
TBOS RCV -
MC68360
PERIPHERAL
SECTION
USI TXD
SPI TX EN
CIC
SPI TX
A DATA
SPI EN A F
SPI EN A
SPI EN B F
SPI RX
A DATA
SPI CLK
SPI EN B
SPI TX
EN F
SPI TX
B DATA
SPI RX
B DATA
A SERIAL
DATA TX
A SERIAL
DATA RX
XCVR
B SERIAL
DATA TX
B SERIAL
DATA RX
SERIAL
TX/RX
SPI
BUS
TO/
FROM
ALL
MODS
SERIAL
CLK A
SPI CLK 0
SPI SEL 0-3
XCVR SERIAL
CLK B
SERIAL
SEL 0-3
TTL
SWITCH
A KILL 10.5 V TO PA
TTL
SWITCH
B KILL 10.5 V TO PA
TO
A/B
PWR
AMP
TTL
A HIGH LINEARITY BIAS
CONTROL
CKT
TTL
B HIGH LINEARITY BIAS
CONTROL
CKT
MW211-0051-1B-F
02/04/04
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
C1A
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
SC 256k CLK W
RCV SC DATA W
FROM
I/O
INTFC
P/O
ESSC
P/O
EPLD
SC 2k FRM W
SC 16k CLK W
SC TDATA 1 W
P/O
BUFFER
SC TDATA 2 W
EPLD
W
SC MLDM
P/O
ESCC
RX D1
TX D1
RX D2
TX D2
C1A
C1A
XMT
SC DATA W
XMT SC DATA W
XMT
CH O/H W
SC
RDATA 1 W
SC 64k CLK E
SC MRK E
SC
RDATA 2 W
SC 64k CLK W
SC 64k CLK E
SC MRK W
SC 8k CLK E
FROM
I/O
INTFC
XCVR
SC 64k CLK W
P/O
EPLD
SC
RDATA 2 E
XMT
SC DATA E
RCV DATA 2 W
C1A
P/O
BUFFER
XMT SC DATA E
C1B
RX D1
RADIO MCS XMT
RADIO MCS INSERT
RX RS2321
TX RS2321
RS232
CONV
TX D2
RX RS2322
SC 256k CLK E
FROM
I/O
INTFC
SC TDATA 2 E
A
RPTR COMM 1 RCV
16k CLK E
C1A
J313
TX RS2322
SC TDATA 1 E
P/O
BUFFER
TO
I/O
INTFC
XMT SC O/H E
XMT
CH O/H E
EPLD
TX D1
E
SC MLDM RX D2
TO
AUDIO
CIRCUITS
RCV DATA 2 E
SC
RDATA 1 E
P/O
ESCC
RCV DATA 1 E
RCV DATA 1 W
SC 8k CLK W
P CLK
TO
I/O
INTFC
P/O
BUFFER XMT SC O/H W
64 k CLK E
P/O
ESSC
RCV SC DATA E
SC 2k FRM E
SC 16k CLK E
P/O
EPLD
MW21100511C
060398
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
C1A
FROM A
A PA RF PWR MON
PWR AMP A5
+12 V A
A RSL MON
FROM A
RCVR A2
FROM A
RCVR A2
FROM B
PWR AMP B5
A AFC MON
A/D
CONV
+5 V A
A/D
CONV
+BATT A
A EYE MON
BATT A
A/D WRF
FROM
EPLD
B PA RF PWR MON
A/D WRF
FROM
EPLD
+12 V B
10.5 V B
B AFC MON
A/D
CONV
B APC
FROM B
XMTR B4
+5 V B
A/D
CONV
+BATT B
FROM B
RCVR B2
FROM A
XMTR A4
B EYE MON
BATT B
FROM A
RCVR A2
A RX PRESENT
XCVR
A OFF NORMAL
FROM B
RCVR B2
B RX PRESENT
PS A ALM
EYE CLOSURE A
FROM
EPLD
PA PS B
XCVR
B PA PWR ALM
B XMT PWR ALM
XCVR
B SERIAL CLK
FROM A XMTR A4
FROM A PWR SPLY A1
FROM A RCVR A2
PS B ALM
CH FAIL B
SERIAL/
PARALLEL
CONV
SERIAL/
PARALLEL
CONV
COMBINER ALM B
B OFF NORMAL
B SERIAL DATA
ALM RDF
B PA TEMP NORMAL
A SERIAL CLK
A RSL
B PA PRESENT
A SERIAL DATA
C1C
CH FAIL A
B TX PRESENT
P/O
MC68360
PRCSR
A PA PWR ALM
XCVR
A PA TEMP NORMAL
FROM B
XMTR B4
P/O
EPLD
COMBINER ALM A
A PA PRESENT
FROM
EPLD
FROM B
PWR AMP
B5
FROM B
RCVR B2
PA PS A
A TX PRESENT
FROM B
PWR SPLY
B1
12 V B
FROM A
PWR AMP
A5
FROM A
RCVR A2
FROM A
PWR SPLY
A1
12 V A
B RSL MON
FROM B
RCVR B2
TO/FROM
AUDIO
CIRCUITS
10.5 V A
A APC
FROM A
XMTR A4
C1B
EYE CLOSURE B
FROM B RCVR B2
B RSL
D/A
CONV
A APC CONTROL
APC WRF
TO A XMTR A4
FROM
EPLD
I2C CSF
R/W F
D/A
CONV
B APC CONTROL
TO B XMTR B4
ADDRESS BUS
REG DATA BUS
MW21100511D
060398
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
3.13.1.2.6.1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Port 1
Note
Applicable signal lines, functions, and components are highlighted on the
block diagram. Associated signal lines, functions, and components are
faded.
See Figure 3 - 79. The EAST CLK is used to clock RCV data out of the microprocessor,
through the EPLD, and to the east SC muldem. The WEST CLK is used to clock XMT data
from the west SC muldem into the microprocessor.
EPLD
PROCESSOR
CLK EAST
XMT CLK
CLK WEST
RCV CLK
EAST
OFF HOOK
SC
MULDEM
CLK
DET
CLK
DET
RCV DATA
XMT DATA
LMW-5036-SM
02/04/04
WEST
SC
MULDEM
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3.13.1.2.6.2
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Port 2
Note
Applicable signal lines, functions, and components are highlighted on the
block diagram. Associated signal lines, functions, and components are
faded.
See Figure 3 - 80 and Figure 3 - 81. Port 2 interfaces connector J307 at a terminal or the east
and west service channel muldems at a repeater. The interface is controlled by software
switching in the EPLD that switches XMT/RCV clock and data to/from the microprocessor.
Note
MCS-11 must be provisioned MCS-11 J310 Master/Junction to enable
XMT, RCV, and OUTPUT clocks. If an external modem is being used, provision MCS-11 for MCS-11 J310 Modem. This selection disables XMT, RCV,
and OUTPUT clocks and all MCS-11 clocks must now be provided by the
external modem.
3.13.1.2.6.3
Terminal
See Figure 3 - 80. When provisioned as a terminal, the EPLD switches to position 1. XMT
DATA at J307 is switched to the EPLD output and clocked into the microprocessor using
CLK EAST output of the east SC muldem. RCV DATA is clocked out of the microprocessor
by the RTN CLK and is switched through position 1 of the EPLD switch to J307.
3.13.1.2.6.4
Repeater
See Figure 3 - 81. When provisioned as a repeater, the EPLD switches to position 2. XMT
DATA is switched to the EPLD output and clocked into the microprocessor using CLK
WEST output of the west SC muldem. RCV DATA is clocked out of the microprocessor by the
CLK EAST output of the east SC muldem and is switched through position 2 of the EPLD
switch to the west SC muldem.
3-156
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
J307
XMT DAT +
XMT DAT RCV DAT +
RCV DAT RTN CLK +
RTN CLK RCV CLK +
RCV CLK -
ELPD
5
XMT DATA
PROCESSOR
1
13
2
1
2
RCV DATA
10
4
RTN CLK
12
1
RCV CLK
CLK
DET
CLK
DET
CLK
DET
CLK WEST
1
CLK EAST
2
WEST
SC
MULDEM
LMW-5037-SM
02/04/04
EAST
SC
MULDEM
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
J307
XMT DAT +
XMT DAT RCV DAT +
RCV DAT RTN CLK +
RTN CLK RCV CLK +
RCV CLK -
ELPD
PROCESSOR
XMT DATA
13
2
RCV DATA
2
10
4
RTN CLK
12
1
RCV CLK
CLK
DET
CLK
DET
CLK
DET
CLK WEST
1
CLK EAST
2
WEST
SC
MULDEM
CLK
DET
EAST
SC
MULDEM
LMW-5038-SM
02/04/04
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
3.13.1.2.6.5
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Port 3
Note
Applicable signal lines, functions, and components are highlighted on the
block diagram. Associated signal lines, functions, and components are
faded.
See Figure 3 - 82, Figure 3 - 83, and Figure 3 - 84. Port 3 XMT data is clocked into the microprocessor by the return clock (RTN CLK). The RTN CLK is generated by an external source
in response to the external equipment receiving the RCV CLK (J310-1/9). The RCV CLK
driver is enabled by the RCV ENABLE signal from the TX/RXF select control in the EPLD.
Port 3 RCV data is clocked out of the microprocessor by one of three clocks; RTN CLK (same
clock used by Port 3 XMT), RCV CLK, or CLK EAST.
3.13.1.2.6.6
Return Clock
See Figure 3 - 82.When the RTN CLK (J310-4/12) is detected, it is switched through position
3 of the EPLD switch to the microprocessor.
3.13.1.2.6.7
RCV Clock
See Figure 3 - 83. When the RCV CLK is used as an input, the XMT CLK driver (J310-1/9) is
turned on by the XMT ENABLE signal from the TX/RXF select control in the EPLD. When
the XMT CLK is detected, it is switched through position 1 of the EPLD switch to the microprocessor.
3.13.1.2.6.8
Clock East
See Figure 3 - 84.When CLK EAST from the east SC muldem is detected, it is switched
through position 2 of the EPLD switch to the microprocessor.
3-159
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
J310
EPLD
XMT DAT -
XMT DATA
13
2
RCV DAT +
RCV DAT -
RCV DATA
10
4
RTN CLK +
RTN CLK -
PROCESSOR
XMT DAT +
RTN CLK
12
CLK
DET
RCV CLK +
XMT CLK
MCS3
RTN
CLK
DET
9
RCV CLK -
XMT/RCV ENABLE
TX/RXF
SELECT
3
2
RCV CLK
XMT CLK -
CLK
DET
XMT CLK +
CLK DETECT
CLK
DET
11
64K CLK
CLK EAST
EAST
SC
MULDEM
CLK
DET
CLK
DET
LMW-5040F
02/04/04
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
J310
XMT DAT +
XMT DAT RCV DAT +
RCV DAT RTN CLK +
RTN CLK RCV CLK +
EPLD
XMT DATA
13
2
RCV DATA
10
4
RTN CLK
12
CLK
DET
XMT CLK
RTN
CLK
DET
1
3
9
RCV CLK -
PROCESSOR
XMT/RCV ENABLE
TX/RXF
SELECT
RCV CLK
CLK
DET
CLK DETECT
CLK
DET
CLK EAST
CLK
DET
CLK
DET
EAST
SC
MULDEM
LMW-5039F
02/04/04
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
J310
EPLD
XMT DAT +
XMT DAT RCV DAT +
RCV DAT RTN CLK +
RTN CLK RCV CLK +
XMT DATA
13
2
RCV DATA
10
4
RTN CLK
12
CLK
DET
XMT CLK
RTN
CLK
DET
1
3
9
RCV CLK -
PROCESSOR
XMT/RCV ENABLE
TX/RXF
SELECT
RCV CLK
CLK
DET
CLK DETECT
CLK
DET
CLK EAST
CLK
DET
CLK
DET
EAST
SC
MULDEM
LMW-5041F
02/04/04
Note
Applicable signal lines, functions, and components are highlighted on the
block diagram. Associated signal lines, functions, and components are
faded.
Note
Only one connector on an asynchronous port can be used at a time. J308 and
J309 can not be used simultaneously in the same shelf.
3-162
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
3.13.1.2.6.9
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Port 4
See Figure 3 - 85, Figure 3 - 86, and Figure 3 - 87. Port 4 RCV data is clocked out of the microprocessor by CLK EAST. Port 4 XMT data is clocked into the microprocessor by either of two
clocks; CLK EAST or CLK WEST. The XMT CLK and RCV CLK are bi-directional. Direction
is determined by bidirectional XCVRs. The bi-directional XCVR is controlled by the switch
control logic on the EPLD.
3.13.1.2.6.10 Clock East
See Figure 3 - 85. When CLK EAST from the east SC muldem is detected, it is switched
through position 1 of the EPLD switch to the microprocessor and J308 and J309 output drivers as follows:
SIGNAL NAME
DESTINATION
XMT CLK
MICROPROCESSOR
J308-3/11
J309-3/11
RCV CLK
MICROPROCESSOR
J308-1/9
J309-1/9
Note
When provisioned J308 Input Clock, J308 and J309 RCV CLK and XMT
CLK and J308 OUTPUT CLK are disabled. Select J308 Output Clock to
send a 64 kb/s clock to external equipment (OUTPUT CLK J308-4/12) and
also enable RCV CLK and XMT CLK.
When provisioned J308 CLK OUT ENABLE, CLK EAST also drives the output driver for
CLK OUT (J308-4/12).
3.13.1.2.6.11 Clock West
See Figure 3 - 86. When CLK WEST from the west SC muldem is detected, it is switched
through position 2 of the EPLD switch to the microprocessor and to the XMT CLK driver
(J308-3/11 and J309-3/11).
3-163
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
BI-DIRECTIONAL
XCVRS
J309
XMT CLK +
XMT CLK RCV CLK +
RCV CLK RCV DAT +
RCV DAT XMT DAT +
XMT DAT OFF HK +
OFF HK -
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
EPLD
XMT CLK
PROCESSOR
11
1
RCV CLK
9
2
RCV DATA
10
5
XMT DATA
13
6
OFF HK
14
J308
XMT CLK +
XMT CLK RCV CLK +
RCV CLK CLK OUT +
CLK OUT RCV DAT +
RCV DAT XMT DAT +
3
11
1
CLK
OUT
EN
12
2
CLK EAST
10
CLK
DET
CLK
DET
13
6
14
EAST
SC
MULDEM
CLK WEST
CLK
DET
CLK
DET
WEST
SC
MULDEM
LMW-5043F
05/19/04
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
BI-DIRECTIONAL
XCVRS
J309
XMT CLK +
XMT CLK RCV CLK +
RCV CLK RCV DAT +
RCV DAT XMT DAT +
XMT DAT OFF HK +
OFF HK -
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
EPLD
XMT CLK
PROCESSOR
11
1
RCV CLK
9
2
RCV DATA
10
5
XMT DATA
13
6
OFF H00K
14
J308
XMT CLK +
XMT CLK RCV CLK +
RCV CLK CLK OUT +
CLK OUT RCV DAT +
RCV DAT XMT DAT +
3
11
1
CLK
OUT
EN
12
2
CLK EAST
10
CLK
DET
CLK
DET
13
6
14
EAST
SC
MULDEM
CLK WEST
CLK
DET
CLK
DET
WEST
SC
MULDEM
LMW-5042-F
05/19/04
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
EPLD
CLK DIR CTRL
PROCESSOR
MASTER/SLAVE
CLK
E
DET
CLK E DET
SWITCH
CONTROL
LOGIC
XCVR
DRIVER
W SC
MULDEM
64 CLK W
INTFC
RCV CLK +
RCV CLK -
RCVR
CLK 7
TO PROCESSOR
CLK 8
E SC
MODEM
XCVR
64 CLK E
TX CLK OUT
J308 TX
CLK DET
DRIVER
TX CLK
INTFC
XMT CLK +
XMT CLK -
RCVR
NOTE:
SOFTWARE CONTROLS ARE SHOWN AS PHYSICAL FOR SIMPLIFICATION.
MDR-1016
5/18/04
Termination relays are connected in parallel to the MCS( ) XT DT lines applied to the transceiver and, when activated, terminate the data in 120 ohms (approximately). The termination relays are provisionable on or off. Off is the default position. The termination relays are
controlled by the MCS TERM control logic from the EPLD to the relay driver and MCS RLY
control signal from the relay driver. In a daisy chain MCS scenario, the termination relay
contacts should be provisioned open at all controllers except the end controller in the system, which is terminated through the closed contacts of the relay.
3.13.1.2.7 TBOS
The Telemetry byte oriented serial protocol (TBOS) fault alarm function is enabled by selecting
displays 1-8 on the radio configuration provisioning screen. This enables the appropriate drivers
on the controller and allows the user to view the external display on a PC. The four TBOS lines
share pins on connector J305 with station alarm 13 through 16. TBOS to/from the controller or
station alarm 13 through 16 to the relay interface are selected via provisioning. TBOS does not
require the optional relay interface card. Refer to the Interconnect section for further details.
3-166
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
3.13.1.2.7.1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
TBOS Termination
The TBOS termination function on the radio controller is not provisionable. The function is
held in the off position by software.
3.13.1.2.8 Controller Alarm Relays
Three separate alarm outputs of the ESCC are applied to three relay drivers/relays. The
relay outputs are connected to alarm/status connector J305 on the backplane. The relays are
software controlled and two of the three relays share functions. The functions are selected
through two provisioning options: major/minor or visual/audible.
3.13.1.2.8.1
The rack (shelf) alarm relay is activated by any MDR-8000 alarm. When activated a ground
is placed on J305-25.
3.13.1.2.8.2
Visual/Audible Alarms
The visual and audible alarm outputs are an extension of the rack (shelf) alarm. The applicable relays are activated by any MDR-8000 alarm. When activated, a ground is placed on
J305-24 (visual alarm) and J305-50 (audible alarm). the audible alarm (only) can be cleared
by setting the ACO/LT (alarm cutoff/lamp test) switch on the controller front panel to ACO.
ACO will not cutoff the visual alarm. The fault causing the alarm must be cleared before the
visual alarm is cleared.
3.13.1.2.8.3
The major alarm relay is activated by any service affecting alarm. When activated a ground
is placed on J305-24. The fault causing the alarm must be cleared before the major alarm is
cleared.
3.13.1.2.8.4
The minor alarm is activated by any non service affecting alarm. When activated a ground is
placed on J305-50. The fault causing the alarm must be cleared before the minor alarm is
cleared.
3.13.1.2.9 Controller Interface With AE-27( ) Relay Interface Module
The controller sends relay controls and receives status to/from the AE-27( ) Relay Interface
module via a serial data bus. Refer to AE-27( ) Relay Interface functional description in this
section.
3.13.1.2.9.1
Shelf/Station Alarms
See Figure 3 - 88. Sixteen station alarm inputs to the relay interface module (J305) are
applied to XCVRs in the relay interface and routed to the MCS and USI software functions
over the serial data bus. Station alarm 1 and local rack alarm are ORed by a software OR
function and an alarm on either input to the OR gate causes ann alarm output to the MCS11 and USI. The rack alarm generated in the controller is also routed as a shelf alarm output to connector J305.
3-167
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
RACK ALM
J305
SHELF ALM
STATION ALM 1
STATION ALM 2
STATION ALM 3
MCS-11
SOFTWARE
"OR"
FUNCTION
RELAY
INTFC
STATION ALM 16
SHELF ALM
OR
STATION ALM 1
STATION ALM 2
STATION ALM 3
STATION ALM 16
CONTROLLER
USI
SOFTWARE
"OR"
FUNCTION
SHELF ALM
OR
STATION ALM 1
STATION ALM 2
STATION ALM 3
STATION ALM 16
LMW-5085F
02/04/04
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3-169
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
3.13.1.2.13Serial Ports
Serial ports can be configured by the controller for asynchronous or synchronous operation
using internal or external clocks.
One port provides 16 kb/s command path communication over the RF path and between
repeater racks. The data is transported synchronously in the 16 kb/s auxiliary channels.
Communication over these ports is stopped at the other end of the RF path or at the
repeater rack.
3.13.1.2.13.1 RS-232 Data Ports
In the EPLDs functioning as E and W SC muldems, the RS-232 input data is converted to
TTL and sampled at 64 kb/s. The sampled data is inverted and inserted into XMT SC DATA
E and W and combined with the data already present in the channel. Data from TXD1 is
inserted into channel 1 and data from TXD2 is inserted into channel 2. The receive data
from RCV SC DATA E and W is converted to RS-232 levels. Data from channel 1 appears at
RXD1 and data from channel 2 appears at RXD2.
3.13.1.2.13.2 RS-232 Bridge
Distribution of RS-232 data is controlled by the provisionable RS-232 bridging function. See
Figure 3 - 89. The purpose of the bridging function is to control distribution of SC data in one
direction (terminal) or two directions (repeater or back-to-back terminal).
3.13.1.2.13.3 Bridge Enabled
If the RS-232 bridge is provisioned enabled, the RS-232 input data is converted to TTL and
sampled at 64 kb/s. The sampled data is applied to the SC muldem where it is inserted
(INSERT E and W) into XMT SC DATA E and W and combined with THRU data already
present in the channel. Data from TXD1 (J312) is inserted into channel 1 (shown in the figure), and data from TXD2 (J313) is inserted into channel 2 (not shown).
AE37X CONTROLLER
SC MULDEM
J343
RCV SC
DATA E
TO/FROM
A
I/O INTFC
XMT SC
DATA W
J314
XMT SC
DATA E
THRU
DROP
E
INSERT
E
THRU
INSERT
W
RCV SC
DATA W
DROP
W
RS232 RXD1
RS232 TXD1
J312
BRIDGE ENABLED
MW21000781
092597
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
In the SC muldem, the receive data (DROP E and W) from RCV SC DATA E and W is
combined and the output of the SC muldem is then converted to RS-232 levels. Data from
channel 1 appears at RXD1 (J312), and data from channel 2 appears at RXD2 (J313).
3.13.1.2.13.4 Bridge Disabled
If the RS-232 bridge is provisioned disabled, insert data from TXD1 and TXD2 is added in
the radio transmit direction (XMT SC DATA W) and dropped from the radio receive direction (RCV SC DATA E) only.
3-171
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
1 kHz DET
1 kHz DET
GEN
1 kHz
E O/H 2
E O/H 1
DTMF ADDR (30)
SUM
AMP
DTMF
DETECT
DTMF DETECT
LCL O/H
M O/H 1
M O/H 2
ALERT EN
DTMF
REGISTER
DATA
BUS
REGISTER
SELECT
RELAY
CALL DET
LVL 1
LVL 2
CARD PRESENT
LCL O/H
SUBSCRIBER
LINE INTFC
SUM
AMP
AUDIO 1 E
SUM
AMP
T
1 KHz
PCM
CODEC
SUM
AMP
RCV DATA1 W
SC MRK W
XMT DATA1 W
AUDIO
IN 1
LCL O/H
M O/H 1
XMT INS 1
OR
O/H
MLEAD 2 DETECT
XMT INS 2
M O/H 2
ELEAD 1
E O/H 1
OR
E COMM
ELEAD 2
J317
AUDIO
PORT 2
XMT DATA1 E
SC FRM W
SC 64k CLK W
SUM
AMP
LVL 1
T
AUDIO
IN 1
R
O/H
AUDIO 1 W
MLEAD 1
J316
AUDIO
PORT 1
SC MRK E
LCL O/H
O/H
DETECT
J317
AUDIO
PORT 2
SC 64k CLK E
PCM
CODEC
SUM
AMP
SC FRM E
RCV DATA1 E
10 dB
SUM
AUDIO
OUT 1 R AMP
J316
AUDIO
PORT 1
O/H
1 KHz
HANDSET IN
C1B
T
AUDIO
OUT 2
R
T
AUDIO
IN 2
R
RELAY
E O/H 2
OR
O/H
AUDIO 2 E
SUM
AMP
RCV DATA2 E
PCM
CODEC
LVL 2
SUM
AMP
AUDIO IN 2
SUM
AMP
XMT DATA2 E
O/H
AUDIO 2 W
RCV DATA2 W
PCM
CODEC
MW21100081A
051998
SUM
AMP
XMT DATA2 W
CNTLR/
OSS
CKTS
CALL DETECT
HANDSET OUT
J302
TEL
PARALLEL
DATA
(D7D0)
OSS
INTFC
CKT
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
AUDIO
TRANSDUCER
ALERT EN
PARALLEL BUS
INTFC
(SH 1)
RING TONE
RING
LOGIC
RING
DRIVER
MW21100081B
041498
3-173
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
3-174
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
RPTR HUB
ETH 1
RX +/
J1
UPLINK
LED
DRIVER
P/O FPGA
ALM
LED
CONTROL
ACTIVITY
DET
ETHERNET 1
TX +/
ETH 2
J2
RX +/
ETH 1
J1 UPLINK
ETHERNET 2
ACTIVITY
DET
TX +/
ETH 3
J3
RX +/
J2
ETHERNET 3
ACTIVITY
DET
TX +/
J3
P/O
PQ/ECRC
Q TX P/N
SUBBOARD
XCO
40 MHz
ETH 2
ETH 3
SYS CLK
Q RX P/N
SPI MTXD
P/O
PQ/ECRC SPI MODE
SUBSPI CLK
BOARD
SIGNAL
P/O
PQ/ECRC
SUBBOARD
SPI MXRD
SPI
DIRECTION
NORMAL CROSSOVER
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
P/O
FPGA
XMT DATA
P/O
PQ/ECRC
XMT
CLK
PPP
J4
XMT
CLK
RCV DATA
RCV DATA
RS422
RCV
RCV CLK
XMT DATA
RS422
XMT
XMT CLK
PPP
J4
P/O
PQ/ECRC
RCV CLK
FPGA
MUX
P/O
PQ/ECRC
PPP
GP OUT ( )
LMW-9020F
07/01/03
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
WEST SC
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
LEVEL
TRANSLATOR
WEST SC
256K CLK
256K CLK
64K CLK
64K CLK
P/O
FPGA
PQ/ECRC
SUBBOARD
TMN WEST
SELECT
WEST
SC
RCV DATA
FROM
RADIO
I/O
INTFC
EAST SC
RCV DATA
LEVEL
TRANSLATOR
EAST SC
256K CLK
256K CLK
64K CLK
64K CLK
TMN EAST
SELECT
WEST
SC
RCV DATA
RCV DATA
XMT
WEST
IP PACKET
BUFFER
PARALLEL
BUS
XMT
EAST
IP PACKET
BUFFER
HDLC SC
PACKETS
GD - GD7
TO
RADIO
CONTROLLER
LMW-9021F
03/24/03
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
XMT DATA
P/O
PQ/ECRC
XMT
CLK
XMT
CLK
RCV DATA
RCV DATA
PPP
J4
XMT DATA
RS422
RCV
RCV CLK
RS422
XMT
XMT CLK
PPP
J4
P/O
PQ/ECRC
RCV CLK
FPGA
MUX
P/O
PQ/ECRC
PPP
GP OUT ( )
LMW-9050F
07/01/03
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
RCV DATA
P/O
PQ/ECRC
RCV
CLK
RCV
CLK
XMT DATA
XMT DATA
PPP
J4
RCV DATA
RS422
XMT
XMT CLK
RS422
RCV
RCV CLK
PPP
J4
P/O
PQ/ECRC
XMT CLK
FPGA
MUX
P/O
PQ/ECRC
PPP
GP OUT ( )
LMW-9052F
07/26/03
Note
The term active is used to identify an established link. A link can be active
and receiving data or active and receiving idle signals at the port. An inactive link is a link that has not been established and there is no communication between local and farend.
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Note
The color green always indicates an active link. The color yellow always
indicates an inactive link. Regardless of color, a blinking LED always indicates the associated port is receiving data.
COLOR
STATE
INDICATION
ALM
Red
Steady
ETHERNET 1-3
Green
Steady
ETHERNET 1-3
Green
Blinking
ETHERNET 1-3
Yellow
Steady
ETHERNET 1-3
Yellow
Blinking
PPP
Green
Steady
Link is active.
PPP
Green
Blinking
PPP
Yellow
Steady
PPP
Yellow
Blinking
3.13.7.1 IP Transmit
The TMN East and TMN West XMT channels are independent. Each XMT channel consists
of an IP packet buffer that received inputs from the PQ/ECRC subboard and outputs to the
parallel interface. Data flow is controlled by the radio controller software interface. Data
flow is controlled by the radio controller software and via Ready To Send ( RTS) and Clear To
Send (CTS) control signals between the radio controller, the FPGA, and the PQ/ECRC subboard. The PQ/ECRC subboard sets the RTS signal when data is ready for transfer to the
3-179
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
FPGA. The radio controller sets the CTS signal to let the PQ/ECRC subboard know it has not
finished reading the previous packet. The IP packet buffers in the FPGA will not accept new
data until the radio controller signifies it has finished. When the radio controller has finished reading the previous packet, the data to be transmitted is accepted as an HDLC
framed packet into the FPGA IP packet buffer. The FPGA removes the HDLC start and stop
bytes and the remaining packet data is stored in the IP packet buffer. After the data in the
packet is stored in the IP packet buffer, the FPGA sets the CTS signal to stop data transfer
from the PQ/ECRC and inform the radio controller that data is waiting to be read.
3.13.7.2 IP Receive
TMN East and TMN West RCV channels are decoded directly from the 256 kb/s overhead
stream by the FPGA. The 64 kb/s channel to be decoded is selected by provisioning. The
selected channel can be 1, 3, or 3. Channel 0 is reserved for ELMC and cannot be used. When
enabled, the East and West 64 kb/s overhead stream is output, with clock, to the TMN East
and TMN West RCV inputs on the PQ/ECRC subboard. The FPGA monitors the 256 kb/s and
64 kb/s clock inputs from the level translators for activity. The FPGA sets the TMN West
Carrier Detect (CD) signal and/or East CD signal to inform the PQ/ECRC subboard that it is
actively decoding the 256 kb/s overhead channel.
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
VCORE
VC3V
VREGS
KAPWR
WIRED BUT
NOT USED
VCC3.3V
GPIO
BDM
10/100BT
VARIOUS
(FPGA) LXT
LX 914 HUB
TMN_W
POWER ON
RESET
OSC.
TMN_E
RES
24.576 MHz
CLOCK
BUFFER
PROCESSOR
MPC860T
50 MHz
LVC
RS232
RS232
49.152 MHz
LVC
SYSTEM RAM
6-32-64 MByte SDRAM
(4/8/16 M x 32)
TMN_RF
F
DBG_L
SPI
I2C
32 BIT
FPGA
PPP J4
CRAFT J5
INT CONN J6
FPGA
EEPROM
MAC
ADDRESS
BOOT MEMORY
2 Mbyte F_EPROM
(1024 k x 16)
16 BIT
XCVR
PIO
RES
M_RES
SYS_ID
CONTROL
LOGIC
(TRAMINER)
PCMCIA
16 BIT
COMPACT
FLASH
CARD
JTAG
LMW-8042
07/21/05
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3.13.11.8 Ethernet
The Ethernet port connects to an internal interface of the Ethernet Bridge in the TMN
Interface. It provides local LAN access.
3.13.11.9 JTAG
Used to change the programming of the Traminer on the PQ/ECRC board. Is connected in
series with the serial EEPROM and FPGA.
3.13.11.10I2C
To allow the PQ/ECRC board to access the Motherboard I 2C Inventory EEPROM.
3.14.1.1 NSAM
The NE SNMP Adaptation Module (NSAM) is the NE software module that contains the software used to map NE specific data into the format required by the SGPA. The NSAM is loaded
from the flash card.
3.14.1.2 SGPA
The SNMP Generic Program Agent (SGPA) is the software module that contains the software used to map data into the MIB. The SGPA software is the same for all NEs. The SGPA
is loaded from the flash card.
3.14.1.3 Router
The router is the software module that contains the software used to distribute data
between the craft interface, Ethernet, PPP, serial TMNs and SGPA software modules. The
router is loaded from the flash card.
3-183
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
ELMC
MANAGER
(WINDOWS USI)
SGPA
SVI
CRAFT
INTERFACE
ROUTER
SPI BUS
INTERFACE
SPI BUS
TMN E
TMN W
PPP
TMN RF
PQ/ECRC BOARD
MOTHERBOARD
INVENTORY
NSAM
SERIAL
TMN
ETHERNET
MCS-11
SNMP
MIB
FPGA
DOWNLOAD
EEPROM
MCS-11
PACKET
BUFFER
ELMC
I2C
TO SNMP MANAGER
TO
REMOTE
NE
HDLC
PACKET
GENERATOR
ALARM
PROVISIONING
MESSAGING
INTERFACE
EEPROM
JTAG
FPGA
TMN
INTERCONNECT
RS-232
DRIVER
ETHERNET
BRIDGE
RS-422
DRIVER
CRAFT
INTERFACE
J5
10BaseT
ETH2
J2
PPP
J4
ETH1
UPLINK
J1
SPI
INTERFACE
DUAL PORT
RAM
SC
DECODE
PARALLEL
SC1
MUX
PARALLEL
INTERFACE
RADIO CONTROLLER
(EXISTING BOARD)
FROM RADIO
I/O INTFC MODULES
ETH3
J3
TO RADIO
I/O INTFC MODULES
LMW-8049
02/15/03
3.14.1.5 Ethernet
Ethernet is the software module that contains the software used to distribute data to/from
the ETH1 Uplink, ETH2, and ETH3 connectors from/to the router software module.
3-184
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3.14.1.9 FPGA
The FPGA is loaded at power-up by the serial EEPROM. The EEPROM is initially programmed via the JTAG port. At power-up, the FPGA initiates a download to itself from the
EEPROM.
3.14.2 Controller Module Software Modules
3.14.2.1 ELMC
The ELMC software module contains the software used to interface the radio windows USI
to the alarm provisioning message interface software module. This allows the radio to send
and receive alarms/provisioning data to/from remote NEs over the service channel. If the
message is addressed to this radio controller, the response is returned over the same port as
received. Otherwise the incoming message is retransmitted over the remaining three ports.
3-185
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
AE37Y1
CONTROLLER
CONTROL
ALM/STATUS
J305
DATA
ADDRESS
C1C
3
ALM/STATUS
J305
C2B
ALARM/STATION INPUTS
16
CONTROL/STATUS INPUTS
6
REMOTE CONTROL INPUTS
3
C2B
C2B
AE27AF1
RELAY
INTERFACE
ALARM OUTPUTS
8
STATUS OUTPUTS
7
CONTROL OUTPUTS
6
MW21100091
041598
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3-187
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
P100
DATA BUS
FROM
CONTROLLER
SERIAL
DATA
XCVR
XCVR
SERIAL
CLK
PATH ALARM
LOSS OF INPUT ALARM
A XMT ALM
B XMT ALM
A RCV ALM
B RCV ALM
PWR SUPPLY ALM
RELAY
RELAY
EEPROM
EN1
PROCESSOR BUS
CTRL
STATUS 1
DECODE/
DEMUX
EN2
EN3
EN4
EN5
DECODE/
DEMUX
EN6
EN7
EN8
EN9
XCVR
RELAY
K11
CTRL
STATUS 2
RELAY
K12
CTRL
STATUS 3
XCVR
RELAY
K13
CTRL
STATUS 4
XCVR
A XMTR IN SERV
B XMTR IN SERV
A RCVR IN SERV
B RCVR IN SERV
A I/O IN SERV
B I/O IN SERV
CTRL 1
RELAY
K14
CTRL
STATUS 5
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
XCVR BUS
RELAY
K15
CTRL
STATUS 6
RELAY
K16
SWITCH TX
SWITCH RX
SWITCH I/O
SPARE
STATION 1
STATION 2
STATION 3
STATION 4
TO
J305
RELAY
EN10
XCVR
RELAY
EN9
FROM
J305
P100
RELAY
RELAY
EN8
XCVR
XCVR
CTRL 2
CTRL 3
CTRL 4
CTRL 5
CTRL 6
SW OFF NORM
CONTROLLER FAIL
EN2
STATION 5
STATION 6
STATION 7
STATION 8
STATION 9
STATION 10
STATION 11
STATION 12
CONTROLLER FAIL
WATCHDOG
TIMER
XCVR
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
EN4
STATION 13
STATION 14
DIGITAL
SWITCH
STATION 15
XCVR
STATION 16
TBOS XMTTO/FROM
CONTROLLER
EN10
EN5
TBOS XMT+
TBOS RCVTBOS RCV+
LMW-3151F
05/12/04
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Note
Alarm/status not designated for a particular type of radio are applicable to
all radio types (DS1/E1, DS3, and OC3/STM-1).
Eight alarm relay outputs and seven status relay outputs provide relay closure to ground
(provisioned NO) or open (provisioned NC) when activated. All relays default to open if card
power is lost, except the Power Supply alarms, which default to ground. The maximum contact rating for each relay is 0.5 A, 100 V. The alarm/status relay outputs are:
Alarms:
Path Alarm This summary alarm is activated by the following alarms:
A/B Path Distortion
A/B AGC Threshold
Loss of Input Alarm This summary alarm is activated by the following alarms:
Loss of DS3 input
Loss of DS1/E1 input
3-189
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
A/B ATPC LOW POWER LOCK A or B Automatic Transmit Power Control low
power lock function is enabled on USI control screen on DS1, DS3, or OC3/STM1 radio. Lock prevents ATPC from going high.
A/B ATPC HIGH POWER LOCK A or B Automatic Transmit Power Control
high power lock function is enabled on USI control screen on DS1, DS3, or OC3/
STM-1 radio. Lock prevents ATPC from going low.
3-191
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Note
Control outputs and control status inputs operate together to perform control functions. The control status inputs to the relay interface must be properly wired to the external equipment that is being controlled by the
associated control output in order to display the ON or OFF status on the
USI control screen. Without the control status inputs, the control function on
the USI screen will still turn on equipment/functions, but no status will be
indicated and, once turned on, the equipment/function cannot be turned off.
Six relay control outputs (CTRL 1-6) provide relay closure to ground (provisioned NO) or
open (provisioned NC) when activated. These relays default to open if card power is lost. The
maximum contact rating for each relay is 0.5 A, 100 V.
3-192
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Table 3 - 9 Alarms
ALARM
FUNCTION
Controller
RF Power (TX)
Indicates loss of receive clock, buffer spills, or alarm insertion signal on the alarmed line. May also be caused by
DS1 driver failure.
3-193
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
3.15
POWER DISTRIBUTION
See Figure 3 - 98. Power is supplied to the basic radio at the backplane. Primary power is 20.5
to 60 Vdc. The CE-16BB Power Supplies have floating +/- power inputs that allow for positive
or negative ground operation. Strapping on the backplane allows for positive or negative
ground connection. Primary power protection for the Power Supply is provided by a 20 amp
input fuse.
The power supply converts 20.5 to 60 Vdc power from the battery to +10.5, +12, -12, and -5
Vdc outputs. The power supply provides + and -12 Vdc operating power to all modules except
the power amplifier and provides +10.5 and -5 Vdc outputs to the power amplifier.
3.15.1 Hot-Standby
In the hot-standby configuration, the A power supply supplies the operating voltage for the
AE-37Y Controller, AE-27AF Relay Interface, and the A-side modules. The B power supply
supplies the operating voltage for the AE-37Y Controller, AE-27AF Relay Interface, and B-side
modules.
3.15.2 Input Power Protection
Input power protection circuits protect the power supply against improper input power,
improper input power wiring, and improper module removal and installation.
3-194
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
+10.5 V
5 V
DX35( )
I/O INTFC
A
UD35( )
XMTR
A
UD36( )
RCVR
A
UD51( )
PWR AMP
A
+12 V (DIGITAL)
CE16BB
POWER
SUPPLY
A
CE16BB
POWER
SUPPLY
B
+/12 V (ANALOG)
AE27AF
RELAY
INTFC
+5 V
AE37( )
CNTLR
+5 V
+12 V (DIGITAL)
+/12 V (ANALOG)
+10.5 V
DX35( )
I/O INTFC
B
UD35( )
XMTR
B
UD36( )
RCVR
B
UD51( )
PWR AMP
B
5 V
MW21100061
050898
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
DRIVER
LIO
ASIC
TO/FROM
OTHER
I/O INTFC
MODULE
+5V
OR
TO
LBO
XMT
+5V
+5V
DS1/E1
DX T/R 1-4
TO
LBO
RCV
LEGHORN
ASIC
DRIVER
(1 OF 16)
LMW-1031F
3/14/99
3.15.4.1 Configurations
There are currently four versions of the CD-16BB Power Supply. All have the same part
number and functions are identical, with different designs to meet the same design requirements. Alcatel originally designed and manufactured the power supplies that are now being
supplied to Alcatel. See Figure 3 - 100 for the CE-16BB Power Supply interconnect diagram.
See Figure 3 - 101 for a typical functional block diagram.
3-196
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
P101
P102
BATT +
+12 Vdc (Digital)
J1/J2
GND
BATT -
CE-16BB
Power
Supply
SER CLK
I/O INTFC
XMTR
RCVR
Controller
Relay INTFC
XMTR
RCVR
RF SW Assy
Controller
Relay INTFC
SER DAT
Controller
REM S/D
+10.5 Vdc
Lamp Test
Remote Sense
P101
-5 Vdc
-12 Vdc
PWR
Ampl
XMTR
RCVR
Fan Assy
Relay INTFC
PS ALM NC
+10.5V Temp
+12.5V Temp
+BATT MON
-BATT MON
+10.5Vdc I MON
Controller
+12.5Vdc I MON
-12.5Vdc I MON
-5Vdc I MON
MDR-1260
11/16/06
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
The office battery is applied through a 15 A fast-blow fuse to the input filter. Battery noise
present on the -48 Vdc inputs is attenuated by the filter, which in turn reduces noise on
power supply outputs. The output of the filter is applied to the +10.5 Vdc and +12 Vdc DC/
DC converters.
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Functional Description Section
3-200
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
4
3EM20188AAAA
Installation Section
INSTALLATION
INTRODUCTION
This section provides information for installing Alcatel MDR-8000 hot-standby shelf. Instructions are included to customize the installation for individual requirements. Refer to the following appendices for similar installation information for the Compact radio:
4.1
DANGER
Possibility of
Injury
to Personnel
WARNING
Possibility of
Damage
to Equipment
Unpack and inspect equipment in an area that is dry, dust-free, and as close to
final installation location as possible.
4-1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Installation Section
3EM20188AAAA
DANGER
Possibility of
Injury
to Personnel
Use common shears to cut banding around box or crate. See Figure 4 - 1.
Use shears to cut open moisture-vapor barrier bag. Remove packing or bracing
material.
Before removing equipment from box or crate, check for parts that may have
become loose during shipment.
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
4-2
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Installation Section
4-3
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Installation Section
3EM20188AAAA
2.50"
6"
8.97"
RACK
POSITION
RACK
INCREMENTS
WAVEGUIDE
TRANSITIONS
1
2
PDU
A1
3
4
5
MDR-8000
SHELF 1
A2
10
FAN ASSY
A3
11
HEAT DEFLECTOR
A4
MDR-8000
SHELF 2
A5
19
FAN ASSY
A6
20
HEAT DEFLECTOR
A7
MDR-8000
SHELF 3
A8
28
FAN ASSY
A9
29
OPEN
SPACE
6
7
8
9
WAVEGUIDE
SUPPORT
BRACKET
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
30
31
32
OTHER
EQUIPMENT
FRONT VIEW
SIDE VIEW
LMW-3166-sm
07/22/00
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Installation Section
SEISMIC
STANDARD ALUMINUM
1
81.125
PDU PANEL
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
FAN UNIT
10
HEAT DEFLECTOR
11
12
13
14
48 VDC
15
16
17
18
FAN UNIT
19
HEAT DEFLECTOR
20
21
22
23
48 VDC
24
25
26
27
FAN UNIT
PDU PANEL
3
1
2
48 VDC
28
LAPTOP
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
4
5
6
7
48 VDC
8
9
10
11
FAN UNIT
12
HEAT DEFLECTOR
13
14
15
16
48 VDC
17
18
19
20
FAN UNIT
21
HEAT DEFLECTOR
22
23
24
25
48 VDC
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
FAN UNIT
LAPTOP
FIBER MANAGEMENT PANEL
FIBER MANAGEMENT PANEL
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
LMW-6036
03/12/02
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Installation Section
3EM20188AAAA
RACK
CHANNEL
FRONT
OF SHELF
MW21100631
112498
4-6
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Installation Section
MDR-8000
BACKPLANE
J302
INSTALL IMMEDIATELY
BELOW MDR-8000
SHELF ASSEMBLY.
HEAT
DEFLECTOR
(MANUFACTURE
DISCONTINUED)
LMW-3139-sm
11/21/06
The customer provided interface is the antenna port on the diplexer or filter. Components
required to connect to customer furnished antenna are optional. Connect cables, isolators, circulators and waveguide flanges to meet customer requirements. Refer to Equipping Option
drawing (3DH 03177 0000 BJZZA) in the Diagrams section for waveguide, flange, and cable
information.
4-7
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Installation Section
3EM20188AAAA
RACK
INCREMENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
ANT
PORT
17
18
19
20
21
22
DIPLEXER
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
REAR VIEW
LMW-3164-sm
07/22/00
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Installation Section
2'
3'
1'
RACK
INCREMENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1'
8
9
10
3'
2'
11
12
13
14
15
FILTER
16
ANT
PORT
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
DIPLEXER
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
REAR VIEW
LMW-3165-sm
05/10/00
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Installation Section
3EM20188AAAA
RACK
INCREMENT
RACK
INCREMENT
SEMI-FLEX
CABLE
IS P/O KIT
9
10
8
9
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
ANT
PORT
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
FILTER
20
20
21
21
22
DIPLEXER
23
22
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
31
31
32
32
1. ANTENNA CONFIGURATION
2. ANTENNA CONFIGURATION
LMW-3167A-sm
05/10/00
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Installation Section
CONNECTOR LOCATIONS
See Figure 4 - 8 for connector locations.
J301
4.7
LBO
J307
J315
J313
J308
J318
CONNECTOR DESIGNATION/FUNCTION
J302
J307
J308
J309
J310
J312
J313
J315
J318
J305
J316
J317
FAN/ALARM ASSY
MCS-11 MASTER
MCS-11 DAISYCHAIN
MCS-11 DAISYCHAIN
MCS-11 SPUR
RS-232 (1) PORT 3
RS-232 (2) PORT 4
LINK MONITOR CHANNEL (2)
LINK MONITOR CHANNEL (1)
CUSTOMER ALM/CONTROLS/TBOS
AUDIO PORT 1
AUDIO PORT 2
J309
J310
J305
J312
J316
J317
J302
4-11
4-12
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
INTERCONNECT
5.1
SECTION INTRODUCTION
This section gives the location and describes strapping, power connections, signal connections,
status and alarm connections, and service channel connections for the MDR-8000 hot-standby
shelf. Refer to the following appendix for similar installation information for the Compact
radios:
DANGER
Possibility of
Injury
to Personnel
WARNING
Possibility of
Damage
to Equipment
WARNING
Possibility of
Damage
to Equipment
5-1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
Note
Grounding of pole, antenna, customer interfaces, and all entrances to the
building interior shall meet local electrical code and standard business
practices.
1. DETERMINE IF INSTALLATION
REQUIRES POS OR NEG GND.
PIN 1
POS
PIN 2
GND
PIN 3
NEG
J1
(J2 ON OPPOSITE
END OF SHELF)
5. CONNECT BATT.
REAR VIEW OF SHELF
WARNING
Possibility of
Damage
To Equipment
PWR CABLE ASSEMBLY
PN 695-7845-005/009
RED
ORN
BLK
CONNECT + BATT WIRE
TO + RACK GND FOR
POS GND INSTALLATIONS
ORN
12 AWG
+ BATT
RED
12 AWG
CHASSIS
GND
SLIDE-ON
LUG
BATT
LMW-3103F
11/20/06
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
5.3
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
BATTERY INPUT
WIRE SIZE NO. 4 (MAX)
+
A BATT
+
B BATT
TOP VIEW
NEG
POS
'B' BATTERY 'B' BATTERY
-24/-48
+24/+48
R3
TB1
TB2
TB3
TB4
E7 E15
E1 E3
E4 E6
E8
2C
2B
E2
E5
2A
CIRCUIT BOARD
LOCATED INSIDE
POWER DISTRIBUTION
PANEL
FRONT VIEW
2D
BRN
WHT
BLANK
ALARM
INDICATOR
ALARM CONNECTOR
(SHOWN POSITIONED
FOR 48V OPERATION).
PN 695-6200-001/002
LMW-7029F
10/10/05
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
BATTERY INPUT
WIRE SIZE NO. 4 (MAX)
A+ A-
BATTERY
B+ B-
BATTERY
BATTERY
E38
E39
FUSES
3 4 5
FUSESFUSES
35 4 3 2
FUSES
4 3 2
E37
E42
E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6
BATTERY
E40
E41
CIRCUIT BOARD
LOCATED INSIDE PDU
JUMPER E39 TO E38 AND E42 TO E41 FOR
POSITIVE RACK GND (AS SHOWN ABOVE).
JUMPER E37 TO E38 AND E40 TO E41 FOR
NEGATIVE RACK GND. FOR DETAILED WIRING
INFORMATION, SEE APPLICATION DWG
3DH031770000 EJZZA.
PN 3EM13317AA
LMW-9001
10/10/05
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
5.4
SHELF/RACK ALARM CONNECTION
Each MDR-8000 rack equipped with the Power Distribution Unit (PDU) 695-6200-001/002 has
a visual rack alarm indicator to report a shelf failure. In order to activate a rack alarm visual
indicator on the PDU, the shelf alarm output from each MDR-8000 shelf must be hardwired to
connector J1 on the PDU. The shelf alarm is provided on alarm connector J305 pin 24 (major/
visual alarm). A wire-wrap adapter (PN 695-4171-002) for connector J305 is available. Insulated 22-gauge solid copper wire is recommended for connecting to the wire-wrap adapter. To
attach to J1 (2-pin connector) on the PDU, use 2-position socket housing PN 372-0114-140 and
socket contact PN 372-0114-390. See Figure 5 - 3, sheet 1, for shelf-to-rack alarm wiring.
Each MDR-8000 rack equipped with PDU 3EM13317AA has a blown fuse alarm visual indicator
and a Form C relay alarm output (J4, J5, and J6) for connection to customer alarm equipment.
An optional Fuse and Shelf alarm plug-in assembly is available to provide shelf alarm connections requiring Form C relays. The alarm inputs (major and minor) must be hard wired to J3
on the PDU. The alarms are provided on alarm connector J305 pin 24 (major/visual alarm) and
pin 50 (minor/audible alarm) of each shelf. A wire-wrap adapter (PN 695-4171-002) for connector J305 is available. Insulated 22-gauge solid copper wire is recommended for connecting to
the wire-wrap adapter and also to J3 on the PDU. Alarm outputs are transmitted to customer
equipment via Form C relay outputs (J4, J5, J6, relays 1 through 8). This option also includes
the blown fuse alarm indicator and Form C relay alarm output (J4, J5, and J6 relay 9). See
Figure 5 - 3, sheet 2, for shelf to PDU alarm wiring.
5.5
MDR-8000 SYNCHRONOUS REPEATER CONNECTIONS
The following paragraphs describe the cabling and limitations involved with carrying MDR8000 service channel information across two (2) back-to-back radio terminals at a repeater
site. In this document, the term synchronous indicates that the clocks of the two radios are
locked together. Synchronous, in this document, has absolutely nothing to do with
whether or not the radios are transporting synchronous (SONET or SDH) data.
Where allowed, only two radios can be tied together synchronously. In scenarios where there
are three (3) radios (or some other odd number of radios), the third radio must be clocked independently or asynchronously from the first two.
Note
There are several scenarios that prevent two radios from being connected
synchronously. This document attempts to lay down the rules for MDR-8000
synchronous repeater cable usage.
Note
Multiple service channel functions [i.e., orderwire, fault alarm, RS-232 and
extended link monitor channel (ELMC) data] can be carried across a common synchronous repeater cable. When asynchronous connections are
required between radios, each service channel function (i.e., orderwire, fault
alarm, ELMC, etc.) must be carried across its own independent cable.
5-5
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
E30
E31
E32
E33
E7
E15
F4
R1
R2
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
TO ATTACH USE:
2 - POSITION SOCKET HOUSING:
PN 372-0114-140
AND SOCKET CONTACT:
PN 372-0114-390
E8
E34
E4
E5
J2C
J2B
ABAM CABLE
PN 424-0429-030
J2D
J2A
PIN 1
PDU
MDR-8000 SHELF
J305
24
MAJOR / VISUAL ALM
FAN ASSY
HEAT DEFLECTOR
MDR-8000 SHELF
J305
FAN ASSY
LMW-7070F
07/24/02
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
RACK GND
20 AMP
20 AMP
20 AMP
20 AMP
FUSES
10 AMP
10 AMP
10 AMP
1 AMP
1 AMP
1 AMP
10 AMP
20 AMP
FUSES
20 AMP
20 AMP
1
20 AMP
RACK GND
WIRE WRAP
ALARM INPUT
J3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ALARM OUTPUT
J4 J5 J6
MAJOR 1
MINOR 1
MAJOR 2
MINOR 2
MAJOR 3
MINOR 3
MAJOR 4/AUX
MINOR 4/AUX
UNUSED
1
2
3
CUSTOMER
4
OUTPUTS
5
6
7
8
FUSE ALM
NC COM NO
PIN 1
24
PDU
MDR-8000 SHELF
J305
50
24
PIN 1
FAN ASSY
HEAT DEFLECTOR
MDR-8000 SHELF
J305
50
FAN ASSY
LMW-8057F
04/23/03
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
Note
The DS1 version of the radio is the only one that can pass its through traffic across the synchronous repeater cable.
Note
The E1 version of the radio uses all of the same components as the DS1, with
the exception of the capacity keys and LBOs. Therefore, its operation is virtually identical to the DS1. However, an E1 radio cannot be configured as a
synchronous repeater with a DS1 radio.
5.5.2 High Capacity DS3 Radios
The MDR-8000 synchronous repeater connection J401 in a high capacity DS3 radio is used to
pass orderwire, fault alarm and ELMC data between two (2) back-to-back high capacity terminals over a common cable. The frame structure of the data transported over the synchronous
repeater cable on radios configured to transport 1 or 3 DS3 is the same for both capacities.
Repeater connections using J401 between a radio configured for 1 DS3 and a radio configured
for 3 DS3s is allowed. Repeater connections between a radio configured for DS1 or OC3
capacities to a radio configured for DS3 capacities using J314 to J401 or J203 to J401 are
not allowed. Connections between a radio configured for DS1, E1, or OC3 capacities and a
radio configured for DS3 capacities must be interconnected asynchronously.
5.5.3 High Capacity OC3 Radios
The MDR-8000s synchronous repeater connection J203 in a high capacity OC3 radio is used
to pass orderwire, fault alarm and ELMC data between two (2) back-to-back high capacity
terminals over a common cable. The orderwire, fault alarm and ELMC data is multiplexed
together into a standard T1. The multiplexed T1 data is the same for either version of the
OC3 radio, 10 MHz/1STS-1 or 30 MHz/3STS-1 payload. Therefore, repeater connections
using J203 between a radio configured for 1 STS-1 and a radio configured for 3 STS-1s is
allowed. Repeater connections between an OC3 version of the radio and a non-OC3 version
of the radio using J203 to J314 or J203 to J401 are not allowed. Connections between a radio
configured for OC3 capacities and a radio configured for DS1 or DS3 capacities must be
interconnected asynchronously.
5-8
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
Note
Having the radio overhead multiplexed together into a standard T1 also
allows the overhead to be transported over non-Alcatel radio facilities (i.e.,
channel banks, fiber optic terminals, or no-Alcatel radio equipment). This
feature is extremely useful in SONET rings where part of the ring will be
MDR-8000s OC3 radio and part will be SONET fiber equipment.
5.5.4 MDR-8000 Synchronous Repeater Compatibility Matrix
Table 5 - 1 lists the combinations of MDR-8000 capacities that support the use of the synchronous repeater cable.
DS1
DS3
OC3
10
MHz
30
MHz
OC3
(10 MHz)
OC3
(30 MHz)
12
16
4 DS1
8 DS1
12 DS1
16 DS1
1 DS3
3 DS3
2 DS1
Notes:
1 For both High and Low capacity applications, refer to drawing number
3DH031770000EJZZA for the specific cable connections.
2 The MDR-8000 Synchronous Repeater Cable part number is the same for both the
DS1 and D3 versions of the radio. Refer to drawing number 3DH031770000BJZZA
for cable dash numbers and lengths.
3 The MDR-8000 Synchronous repeater Cable for the OC3 version of the radio uses the
same part number as the ELMC cable.
5-9
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
Part Number
Designation
No. of Pins
DS1
695-7863-001/005
J314
50
DS3
695-7863-001/005
J401
50
OC3
695-4125-010/013
J203
5.6
DS1 CONNECTIONS (J303 IN AND J304 OUT)
Recommended connectorized cable assembly PN 695-7806-001 through -005 (22 AWG 16 pair
shielded, jacketed cable with 37-pin D-type connector on one end). See Figure 5 - 4 for shelf connector location and pinout. Refer to Table 5 - 3 for mating cable wiring and color code.
T1 1-16
T1 17-32
J323
J324
T1 17-32
J303/J304
19
37
20
FRONT VIEW
LMW-9037F
07/03/07
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
WIRE COLOR
SIGNAL NAME
WHITEBLUE
CHAN 1 TIP
20
BLUEWHITE
CHAN 1 RING
WHITEORANGE
CHAN 2 TIP
21
ORANGEWHITE
CHAN 2 RING
WHITEGREEN
CHAN 3 TIP
22
GREENWHITE
CHAN 3 RING
WHITEBROWN
CHAN 4 TIP
23
BROWNWHITE
CHAN 4 RING
WHITESLATE
CHAN 5 TIP
24
SLATEWHITE
CHAN 5 RING
REDBLUE
CHAN 6 TIP
25
BLUERED
CHAN 6 RING
REDORANGE
CHAN 7 TIP
26
ORANGERED
CHAN 7 RING
REDGREEN
CHAN 8 TIP
27
GREENRED
CHAN 8 RING
REDBROWN
CHAN 9 TIP
28
BROWNRED
CHAN 9 RING
10
REDSLATE
CHAN 10 TIP
29
SLATERED
CHAN 10 RING
11
BLACKBLUE
CHAN 11 TIP
30
BLUEBLACK
CHAN 11 RING
12
BLACKORANGE
CHAN 12 TIP
31
ORANGEBLACK
CHAN 12 RING
13
BLACKGREEN
CHAN 13 TIP
32
GREENBLACK
CHAN 13 RING
14
BLACKBROWN
CHAN 14 TIP
33
BROWNBLACK
CHAN 14 RING
15
BLACKSLATE
CHAN 15 TIP
34
SLATEBLACK
CHAN 15 RING
16
YELLOWBLUE
CHAN 16 TIP
35
BLUEYELLOW
CHAN 16 RING
5-11
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
5.7
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
Note
The DS1 repeater cable carries clocks, DS1 data, and overhead for two
directions. If the 314 cable is not used, the embedded data in the overhead
must be cabled individually. In this case, individual cables must be run for
MCS11, audio, RS-232, and ELMC.
Recommended connectorized cable assembly PN 6957836001/005 (25 pair shielded cable
with 50 pin Amp connectors) (SCSI). See Figure 5 - 5 for shelf connector location and pinout.
Refer to Table 5 - 4 for mating cable wiring and color code.
Note
Use repeater cables for cabling repeater shelf 1 to repeater shelf 2 (eastbound/westbound data/clock)
LBO
25
J314
PIN 1
26
50
FRONT VIEW
LMW-9038F
05/29/03
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
END 1
WIRE COLOR
PAIR
END 2
FUNCTION
NOT USED
26
WHT/TAN
25
NOT USED
NOT USED
01
TAN/WHT
50
NOT USED
RCV SYNC T
27
WHT/BRN
24
XMT SYNC T
RCV SYNC F
02
BRN/WHT
49
XMT SYNC F
NOT USED
28
WHT/PNK
23
NOT USED
NOT USED
03
PNK/WHT
48
NOT USED
RCV XID T
29
WHT/ORN
22
XMT XID T
RCV XID F
04
ORN/WHT
47
XMT XID F
RCV YID T
30
WHT/YEL
21
XMT YID T
RCV YID F
05
YEL/WHT
46
XMT YID F
RCV X2D T
31
WHT/GRN
20
XMT X2D T
RCV X2D F
06
GRN/WHT
45
XMT X2D F
RCV Y2D T
32
WHT/BLU
19
XMT Y2D T
RCV Y2D F
07
BLU/WHT
44
XMT Y2D F
RCV X3D T
33
WHT/VIO
18
XMT X3D T
RCV X3D F
08
VIO/WHT
43
XMT X3D F
RCV Y3D T
34
WHT/GRY
17
XMT Y3D T
RCV Y3D F
09
GRY/WHT
42
XMT Y3D F
RCV X4D T
35
TAN/BRN
10
16
XMT X4D T
RCV X4D F
10
BRN/TAN
10
41
XMT X4D F
RCV Y4D T
36
TAN/PNK
11
15
XMT Y4D T
RCV Y4D F
11
PNK/TAN
11
40
XMT Y4D F
NOT USED
37
TAN/ORN
12
14
NOT USED
NOT USED
12
ORN/TAN
12
39
NOT USED
NOT USED
38
TAN/YEL
13
13
NOT USED
NOT USED
13
YEL/TAN
13
38
NOT USED
NOT USED
39
TAN/GRN
14
12
NOT USED
NOT USED
14
GRN/TAN
14
37
NOT USED
XMT Y4D T
15
TAN/BLU
15
36
RCV Y4D T
XMT Y4D F
40
BLU/TAN
15
11
RCV Y4D F
XMT X4D T
16
TAN/VIO
16
35
RCV X4D T
XMT X4D F
41
VIO/TAN
16
10
RCV X4D F
XMT Y3D T
17
TAN/GRY
17
34
RCV Y3D T
XMT Y3D F
42
GRY/TAN
17
09
RCV Y3D F
XMT X3D T
18
BRN/PNK
18
33
RCV X3D T
XMT X3D F
43
PNK/BRN
18
08
RCV X3D F
5-13
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
END 1
WIRE COLOR
PAIR
END 2
FUNCTION
XMT Y2D T
19
BRN/ORN
19
32
RCV Y2D T
XMT Y2D F
44
ORN/BRN
19
07
RCV Y2D F
XMT X2D T
20
BRN/YEL
20
31
RCV X2D T
XMT X2D F
45
YEL/BRN
20
06
RCV X2D F
XMT Y1D T
21
BRN/GRN
21
30
RCV Y1D T
XMT Y1D F
46
GRN/BRN
21
05
RCV Y1D F
XMT X1D T
22
BRN/BLU
22
29
RCV X1D T
XMT X1D F
47
BLU/BRN
22
04
RCV X1D F
NOT USED
23
BRN/VIO
23
28
NOT USED
NOT USED
48
VIO/BRN
23
03
NOT USED
RPTR SYN T
24
BRN/GRY
24
27
RPTR SYN T
RPTR SYN F
49
GRY/BRN
24
02
RPTR SYN F
NOT USED
25
PNK/ORN
25
26
NOT USED
NOT USED
50
ORN/PNK
25
01
NOT USED
5.8
DS3 LBO STRAPPING AND CONNECTIONS
The DS3 LBO compensates for the distance to the cross-connect for DS3 and wayside DS1 outputs. See Figure 5 - 6 for strap locations. Refer to Table 5 - 5 for strapping requirements.
IN/OUT STRAPPING
FOR
WAYSIDE DS1 LINES
IN
IN
IN/OUT STRAPPING
FOR
DS3 LINES
LBO
LBO
OUT
IN
OUT
LBO
IN
OUT
LBO
OUT
DS3 LINE 1
DS3 LINE 2
DS3 LINE 3
WAYSIDE LINE 1
WAYSIDE LINE 2
WAYSIDE LINE 3
LMW-3149B-F
07/27/02
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
Note
When using 734 or equivalent type DS3 cable, 450 feet is the maximum
length to the cross-connect. The maximum length with the LBO strapped IN
is 225 feet.
DISTANCE TO CROSSCONNECT
STRAPPING
DS3
0 to 225 ft
In
DS3
226 to 450 ft
Out
Wayside DS1
0 to 330 ft
In
Wayside DS1
331 to 660 ft
Out
5.9
DS3 LBO DS3 BNC CONNECTIONS (J21 THROUGH J26)
BNC removal tool (PN 359-0092-010) is required for installing and removing BNC cables.
J301
Recommended connectorized cable assembly for all applications except repeaters, PN 6324429-096/180 (8/15 ft RG-59B/U coax cable with straight male BNC connector on one end and
right angle male BNC connector on other end). For repeater applications, recommend PN 6324288-096/180 (8/15 ft RG-59B/U coax cable with straight male BNC connector on each end).
See Figure 5 - 7 for locations. Refer to Table 5 - 6 for connections.
J307
J315
J313
J308
J309
J305
J318
J310
J312
J316
J22 LINE 1 IN
J24 LINE 2 IN
J26 LINE 3 IN
J317
FRONT VIEW
J302
LMW-7065F
07/23/02
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
DS3 OUTPUTS
FUNCTION
BNC
CONNECTOR
FUNCTION
BNC
CONNECTOR
DS3 LINE 1
J22
DS3 LINE 1
J21
DS3 LINE 2
J24
DS3 LINE 2
J23
DS3 LINE 3
J26
DS3 LINE 3
J25
5.10
DS3 LBO WAYSIDE DS1 CONNECTIONS (J201 IN AND J202 OUT)
Wayside DS1 is an option in the MDR-8000 DS3 radios. This option provides 1 DS1 for each
equipped DS3. To activate the wayside channels requires a small circuit board, called ELMC
option key, that plugs onto the controller module. The protection of the wayside channels follows the protection scheme of the radio configuration. In other words, if the radio is hotstandby the wayside channels are hot-standby. The channels are point to point just as is the
payload traffic. They are independent of the traffic and reside in the overhead channels. The
advantage of the wayside DS1 is the ability to drop 1 to 3 DS1s without having to add a 1:3
muldem to access the traffic. Refer to Table 5 - 7 for ELMC option key requirements for remote
monitoring/controlling wayside DS1s.
FUNCTION
695-5647-019
695-5647-020
5-16
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
J301
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
J307
J315
J313
J308
J318
J309
J310
J305
J312
J316
J317
J302
LINE 3 IN TIP
GND
GND
J201
INPUT
5
LINE 2 IN TIP
LINE 1 IN TIP
1
J202
OUTPUT
5
LINE 1 IN RING
LINE 2 IN RING
LINE 3 IN RING
FRONT VIEW
FRONT VIEW
LMW-7069F
07/23/02
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
SHELF 1
SHELF 2
OUTPUT
J202
J202
OUTPUT
INPUT
J201
J201
INPUT
LMW-7071-sm
7/24/02
5-18
202 (OUTPUTS)
FUNCTION
END 1
WIRE
COLOR
WIRE
COLOR
END 2
FUNCTION
LINE 1 TIP IN
01
BLACK
BLACK
01
LINE 1 RING IN
06
RED
RED
06
LINE 2 TIP IN
02
BLACK
BLACK
02
LINE 2 RING IN
07
WHITE
WHITE
07
LINE 3 TIP IN
04
BLACK
BLACK
04
LINE 3 RING IN
08
GREEN
GREEN
08
NOT USED
05
BLACK
BLACK
05
NOT USED
NOT USED
09
BLUE
BLUE
09
NOT USED
GND
03
BLACK
GND
03
NOT USED
NOT USED
10
YELLOW
YELLOW
10
NOT USED
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
5.11
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
Note
The DS3 repeater cable carries clocks, data, and overhead for two directions.
It does not carry DS3 or wayside DS1 traffic. DS3 and wayside DS1 cables
must be run separately. If the 401 cable is not used, the embedded data in the
overhead must be cabled individually. In this case, individual cables must be
run for MCS-11, audio, RS-232, and ELMC.
Recommended connectorized cable assembly PN 695-7836-001/005 (25 pair shielded cable
with 50 pin Amp connectors) (SCSI). See Figure 5-10 for shelf connector location and pinout.
Refer to Table 5-9 for mating cable wiring and color code.
Note
J301
Use repeater cables for cabling repeater shelf 1 to repeater shelf 2 (eastbound/westbound data/clock).
J307
J315
J313
25
J308
J318
J309
J305
J310
J312
J316
J317
J401
50
J302
PIN 1
26
FRONT VIEW
LMW-7066F
07/23/02
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
END 1
WIRE COLOR
PAIR
END 2
FUNCTION
GND
26
WHT/TAN
25
GND
C GND
01
TAN/WHT
50
C GND
27
WHT/BRN
24
02
BRN/WHT
49
28
WHT/PNK
23
03
PNK/WHT
48
NOT USED
29
WHT/ORN
22
NOT USED
NOT USED
04
ORN/WHT
47
NOT USED
RCV SYNC T
30
WHT/YEL
21
XMT SYNC T
RCV SYNC F
05
YEL/WHT
46
XMT SYNC F
31
WHT/GRN
20
06
GRN/WHT
45
32
WHT/BLU
19
07
BLU/WHT
44
33
WHT/VIO
18
08
VIO/WHT
43
34
WHT/GRY
17
09
GRY/WHT
42
35
TAN/BRN
10
16
10
BRN/TAN
10
41
NOT USED
36
TAN/PNK
11
15
NOT USED
11
PNK/TAN
11
40
37
TAN/ORN
12
14
NOT USED
12
ORN/TAN
12
39
NOT USED
NOT USED
38
TAN/YEL
13
13
NOT USED
NOT USED
13
YEL/TAN
13
38
NOT USED
NOT USED
39
TAN/GRN
14
12
NOT USED
14
GRN/TAN
14
37
NOT USED
15
TAN/BLU
15
36
NOT USED
40
BLU/TAN
15
11
5-20
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
END 1
WIRE COLOR
PAIR
END 2
FUNCTION
16
TAN/VIO
16
35
41
VIO/TAN
16
10
17
TAN/GRY
17
34
42
GRY/TAN
17
09
18
BRN/PNK
18
33
43
PNK/BRN
18
08
19
BRN/ORN
19
32
44
ORN/BRN
19
07
20
BRN/YEL
20
31
45
YEL/BRN
20
06
XMT SYNC T
21
BRN/GRN
21
30
RCV SYNC T
XMT SYNC F
46
GRN/BRN
21
05
RCV SYNC F
NOT USED
22
BRN/BLU
22
29
NOT USED
NOT USED
47
BLU/BRN
22
04
NOT USED
23
BRN/VIO
23
28
48
VIO/BRN
23
03
24
BRN/GRY
24
27
49
GRY/BRN
24
02
GND
25
PNK/ORN
25
26
GND
C GND
50
ORN/PNK
25
01
C GND
5.12
DANGER
Possibility of
Injury
to Personnel
5-21
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
WARNING
Possibility of
Damage
to Equipment
PART NO.
APPLICATION
FC to LC
3EM07651AA-AK
TERMINAL
SC TO LC
3EM07646AA-AK
TERMINAL
LC TO LC
3EM07641AA-AK
REPEATER
5-22
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
VIEW OF
CONNECTOR
WITH FIBER
OPTIC CABLES
REMOVED
IN
OT-1
OR-1
CONNECT OPTICAL
RCV (OR) CABLE TO
IN CONNECTOR
OUT
IN
4
RO
O
R3
SHELF 2B
IN
2
O
R-
R1
OT-1 OUT
OT-2 OUT
SHELF 2A
OUTPUTS
SHELF 1B
SHELF 1A
INPUTS
IN
IN
IN
R1
IN
R2
O
R3
O
R4
IN
IN
CONNECT OPTICAL
XMT (OT) CABLE TO
OUT CONNECTOR
OT-2 OUT
OT-1 OUT
OT-4 OUT
OT-3 OUT
LMW-6038F
07/22/02
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
IN
OT-1 OR-1
OUT
VIEW OF
CONNECTOR
WITH FIBER
OPTIC CABLES
REMOVED
CONNECT OPTICAL
RCV (OR) CABLE TO
IN CONNECTOR
CONNECT OPTICAL
XMT (OT) CABLE TO
OUT CONNECTOR
FRONT VIEW
COM
COM
OT-1
OT-2
FROM RADIO I/O
INTFC MODULES
OUTPUT TO
CUSTOMER
2 FIBER
COM
SPLITTER
COM
COMBINER
OR-1
OR-2
TO RADIO I/O
INTFC MODULES
INPUT FROM
CUSTOMER
2 FIBER
LMW-6037F
07/22/02
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
5.13
OC3/STM-1 AUX INTERFACE BOARD WAYSIDE DS1 CONNECTIONS (J201 IN AND J202 OUT)
Wayside DS1 is an option in the MDR-8000 OC3/STM-1 radios that prevents having to add a
SONET add/drop MUX to access payload traffic. This option provides 1 DS1 for each STS-1
within the OC3/STM-1. Refer to Table 5 - 7 for ELMC option key requirements for remote monitoring/controlling wayside DS1.
5.13.1 Wayside DS1 Terminal
Recommended connectorized cable assembly PN 695-4125-041 (26 AWG 5 pair shielded,
jacketed cable with 9-pin D-type connector on one end). See Figure 5 - 13 for location. Refer to
Table 5 - 11 for mating cable pinout and color code.
J301
J307
J315
J313
J318
J309
J310
J305
J312
J316
J317
J302
LINE 3 IN TIP
GND
GND
LINE 2 IN TIP
J201
INPUT
5
J308
LINE 1 IN TIP
LINE 1 IN RING
J202
OUTPUT
LINE 2 IN RING
LINE 3 IN RING
FRONT VIEW
FRONT VIEW
LMW-7068F
07/23/02
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
Table 5 - 11 J201/J202 Wayside DS1 Terminal Mating Cable Pinout and Color Code
Pin
Wire Color
Function
TP
RING
1
6
BLACK
RED
MUX 1 TIP
MUX 1 RING
TIP
RING
2
7
BLACK
WHITE
MUX 2 TIP
MUX 2 RING
TIP
RING
4
8
BLACK
GREEN
MUX 3 TIP
MUX 3 RING
TIP
RING
5
9
BLACK
BLUE
MUX 4 TIP
MUX 4 RING
Table 5 - 12 J201/J202 Wayside DS1 Repeater Mating Cable Pinout and Color Code
J201/
J202
J201
5.14
FUNCTION
END 1
WIRE COLOR
DS1 IN 1 T
DS1 IN 1 R
01
06
BLACK
RED
DS1 IN 2 T
DS1 IN 2 R
02
07
UNUSED
PAIR
J202
END 2
J202
01
06
DS1 OUT 1 T
DS1 OUT 1 R
BLACK
WHITE
02
07
DS1 OUT 2 T
DS1 OUT 2 R
03
CUT-BACK
03
UNUSED
DS1 IN 3 T
DS1 IN 3 R
04
08
BLACK
GREEN
04
08
DS1 OUT 3 T
DS1 OUT 3 R
DS1 IN 4 T
DS1 IN 4 R
05
09
BLACK
BLUE
05
09
DS1 OUT 4 T
DS1 OUT 4 R
Note
The OC3/STM-1 radio repeater cable carries clocks, data, and overhead
for two directions. It does not carry OC3/STM-1 or Wayside DS1 traffic.
OC3/STM-1 fiber optic cables and Wayside DS1 cables must be run separately. If the repeater cable is not used, the embedded data in the overhead must be cabled individually. In this case, separate cables must be
run for MCS-11, audio, RS-232, and ELMC.
Recommended connectorized cable assembly PN 695-4125-007/013 (26 AWG 5 pair shielded,
jacketed cable). See Figure 5 - 14 for shelf connector location and pinout. Refer to Table 5 - 13
for mating cable wiring and color code.
5-26
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
Note
J301
Use repeater cables for cabling repeater shelf 1 to repeater shelf 2 (eastbound/westbound data/clock)
J307
J315
J308
J313
J318
J309
J
J310
J305
J312
J316
J317
J302
GND
RPTR DS1 OUT TIP
J203
5
FRONT VIEW
LMW-7067
07/23/02
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
J203/
J203
FUNCTION
END 1
WIRE
COLOR
PAIR
WIRE
COLOR
END 2
FUNCTION
DS1 IN TIP
01
BLACK
BLACK
02
DS1 IN RING
06
RED
RED
07
DS1 OUT
RING
02
BLACK
BLACK
01
DS1 IN TIP
DS1 OUT
RING
07
WHITE
WHITE
06
DS1 IN RING
NOT USED
BLACK
GND
03
GREEN
NOT USED
04
BLACK
NOT USED
08
BLUE
NOT USED
05
BLACK
NOT USED
09
YELLOW
3
4
5
BLACK
NOT USED
GREEN
03
GND
BLACK
05
NOT USED
BLUE
09
NOT USED
BLACK
04
NOT USED
YELLOW
08
NOT USED
5.15
ETHERNET AUX INTFC CABLE CONNECTIONS
Part numbers are assigned for unshielded, straight-through CAT5 UTP (PN 3AL48960AAAL) and CAT5E UTP(PN 3AL15052AA-AL) cables. The CAT5 or CAT5E cables can be used
for 10/100/1000BASE-T applications, however the CT5E cable is the recommended cable
for 1000BASE-T applications. The CAT5E cable has a tighter, higher quality twisting on
the wire pairs and is less susceptible to crosstalk. Refer to Table 5 - 14 and Table 5 - 15 for
pinout. See Figure 5 - 15 for pair wire colors. See Figure 5 - 16 and Figure 5 - 17 for interconnect information.
5.15.1 Automatic MDI/MDI-X Configuration
The Ethernet PHY provides automatic Medium Dependent Interface (MDD/Medium Independent Interface-crossover (MDI-X). Automatic MDI/MDI-X configuration eliminates the need
for crossover cables.
5.15.2 Crossover Cable Option
Crossover type cables with pin 1 wired to pin 3 and pin 2 wired to pin 6 can be used, but are
not necessary. Crossover is automatically performed by the Ethernet PHY, resulting in a
straight-through interface to the link partner.
5-28
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
FUNCTION
PORT
MDI
MDI-X
TD+
Output
Input
TD+
Output
Input
RD+
Input
Output
4/5
GRD
N/A
N/A
RD-
Input
Output
7/8
GRD
N/A
N/A
FUNCTION
DIRECTION
TRDA+
Input/Output
TRDA-
Input/Output
TRDB+
Input/Output
TRDB-
Input/Output
TRDC+
Input/Output
TRDC-
Input/Output
TRDD+
Input/Output
TRDD-
Input/Output
5-29
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
PAIR A
PAIR B
CONN 1
CONN 2
WHITE-GREEN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
GREEN
WHITE-ORANGE
ORANGE
WHITE-BLUE
BLUE
WHITE-BROWN
BROWN
PAIR C
PAIR D
LMW-9053F
05/24/05
MDI Mode
MDI-X Mode
Ethernet
I/O INTFC
Ethernet
I/O INTFC
Active
TD+
TD-
Active
Active
RD+
RD-
Active
MDR-1169F
05/24/05
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
Shelf 1
Shelf 2
Ethernet
I/O INTFC
Ethernet
I/O INTFC
TRDA+
TRDA-
TRDB+
TRDB-
TRDC+
TRDC-
TRDD+
TRDD-
MDR-1170F
05/24/05
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
WARNING
Possibility of
Damage
to Equipment
CABLE BEND
RADIUS
CABLE DIA.=0.20
DONT
DONT
25
MW21500281
071897
5-32
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
Radio
Terminal
1
Eth Card
Cable
PN 695-4125-041
DS1
IN
RPTR
IN/OUT
DS1
OUT
J201
J203
J202
Cable
PN 695-4125-041
DS1 LINES 1-3
Cable
PN 695-4125-041
ETH-1047F
02/15/06
5.15.3.1 Terminal DS1 Lines 1-3 Connections (J201 In and J202 Out)
5-33
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
J301
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
J307
J315
J313
J308
J318
J309
J310
J305
J312
J316
J317
J302
LINE 3 IN TIP
GND
J201
INPUT
5
GND
LINE 2 IN TIP
J202
OUTPUT
LINE 1 IN TIP
1
LINE 1 IN RING
LINE 2 IN RING
LINE 3 IN RING
FRONT VIEW
FRONT VIEW
LMW-7068F
07/23/02
END 1
202 (OUTPUTS)
WIRE COLOR
WIRE COLOR
END 2
FUNCTION
LINE 1 TIP IN
01
BLACK
BLACK
01
LINE 1 RING IN
06
RED
RED
06
LINE 2 TIP IN
02
BLACK
BLACK
02
LINE 2 RING IN
07
WHITE
WHITE
07
LINE 3 TIP IN
04
BLACK
BLACK
04
LINE 3 RING IN
08
GREEN
GREEN
08
NOT USED
05
BLACK
BLACK
05
NOT USED
NOT USED
09
BLUE
BLUE
09
NOT USED
GND
03
BLACK
GND
03
NOT USED
NOT USED
10
YELLOW
YELLOW
10
NOT USED
5-34
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
Note
J301
J307
J315
J308
J309
J3
J305
J318
J313
J310
J316
J312
J317
J302
GND
LINE 4 TIP OUT
J203
5
LINE 4 TIP IN
1
LINE 4 RING IN
LINE 4 RING OUT
FRONT VIEW
MDR-1166F
05/02/05
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
END 1
WIRE COLOR
LINE 4 TIP IN
01
BLACK
LINE 4 RING IN
06
RED
02
BLACK
07
WHITE
NOT USED
BLACK
GND
03
GREEN
NOT USED
04
BLACK
NOT USED
08
BLUE
NOT USED
05
BLACK
NOT USED
09
YELLOW
J203/J203
PAIR
1
J203/J203 MDR-8000E
WIRE COLOR
END 2
BLACK
02
RED
07
BLACK
01
LINE 4 TIP IN
WHITE
06
LINE 4 RING IN
BLACK
FUNCTION
NOT USED
GREEN
03
GND
BLACK
05
NOT USED
BLUE
09
NOT USED
BLACK
04
NOT USED
YELLOW
08
NOT USED
second shelf)
5-36
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
Radio
Terminal
1
Eth Card
10/100/1000 Base T
Ethernet Cable
Radio
Terminal
2
Eth Card
DS1
IN
RPTR
IN/OUT
DS1
OUT
DS1
IN
RPTR
IN/OUT
DS1
OUT
J201
J203
J202
J201
J203
J202
Cable
PN 695-4125-051
Cable
PN 695-4125-007/013
DS1 LINES 1-3
Cable
PN 695-4125-051
Note:
Audio, MCS-11/TMN, RS-232,
and ELMC require separate
cables between shelves 1 and 2.
ETH-1048
03/14/06
second shelf)
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
Radio
Repeater
1
Eth Card
10/100/1000 Base T
Ethernet Cable
Radio
Repeater
2
Eth Card
DS1
IN
RPTR
IN/OUT
DS1
OUT
DS1
IN
RPTR
IN/OUT
DS1
OUT
J201
J203
J202
J201
J203
J202
Cable
PN 695-4125-051
RPTR Cable
PN 695-4125-007/013
DS1 LINES 1-3
Cable
PN 695-4125-051
MDR-1165F
03/14/06
5.16
ETH/T1 LINE INTERFACE CABLE CONNECTIONS
Part numbers are assigned for unshielded, straight-through CAT5 UTP (PN 3AL48960AA-AL)
and CAT5E UTP (PN 3AL15052AAAL) cables. The CAT5 or CAT5E cables can be used for 10/
100/1000BASE-T applications, however the CAT5E cable is the recommended cable for
1000BASE-T applications. The CAT5E cable has a tighter, higher-quality twisting on the wire
pairs and is less susceptible to crosstalk. Refer to Table 5 - 14 and Table 5 - 15 for pinout. See
Figure 5 - 15 for pair wire colors. See Figure 5 - 16 and Figure 5 - 17 for interconnect information.
5-38
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
Recommended connectorized cable assembly PN 695-7806-001 through 005 (22 AWG 16 pair
shielded, jacketed cable with 37-pin D-type connector on one end). See Figure 5-24 for shelf
connector location and pinout. Refer to Table 5-18 for mating cable wiring and color code for
T1 1-16. Refer to Table 5-19 for mating cable wiring and color code for T1 17-32.
Radio
Terminal
Eth Card
J323
Cable
PN 695-7806-001/005
J324
DS1
IN
RPTR
IN/OUT
DS1
OUT
J303
J203
J304
Cable
PN 695-7806-001/005
T1 LINES 17-32
Cable
PN 695-7806-001/005
T1 LINES 1-16
T1 LINES 1-16
T1 LINES 17-32
Cable
PN 695-7806-001/005
MDR-1299
07/09/07
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
T1 1-16
T1 17-32
J323
J324
J303/J304
19
37
T1 17-32
1
20
FRONT VIEW
LMW-9037F
07/03/07
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
WIRE COLOR
SIGNAL NAME
WHITEBLUE
CHAN 1 TIP
20
BLUEWHITE
CHAN 1 RING
WHITEORANGE
CHAN 2 TIP
21
ORANGEWHITE
CHAN 2 RING
WHITEGREEN
CHAN 3 TIP
22
GREENWHITE
CHAN 3 RING
WHITEBROWN
CHAN 4 TIP
23
BROWNWHITE
CHAN 4 RING
WHITESLATE
CHAN 5 TIP
24
SLATEWHITE
CHAN 5 RING
REDBLUE
CHAN 6 TIP
25
BLUERED
CHAN 6 RING
REDORANGE
CHAN 7 TIP
26
ORANGERED
CHAN 7 RING
REDGREEN
CHAN 8 TIP
27
GREENRED
CHAN 8 RING
REDBROWN
CHAN 9 TIP
28
BROWNRED
CHAN 9 RING
10
REDSLATE
CHAN 10 TIP
29
SLATERED
CHAN 10 RING
11
BLACKBLUE
CHAN 11 TIP
30
BLUEBLACK
CHAN 11 RING
12
BLACKORANGE
CHAN 12 TIP
31
ORANGEBLACK
CHAN 12 RING
13
BLACKGREEN
CHAN 13 TIP
32
GREENBLACK
CHAN 13 RING
14
BLACKBROWN
CHAN 14 TIP
33
BROWNBLACK
CHAN 14 RING
15
BLACKSLATE
CHAN 15 TIP
34
SLATEBLACK
CHAN 15 RING
16
YELLOWBLUE
CHAN 16 TIP
35
BLUEYELLOW
CHAN 16 RING
5-41
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
5-42
WIRE COLOR
SIGNAL NAME
WHITEBLUE
CHAN 17 TIP
20
BLUEWHITE
CHAN 17 RING
WHITEORANGE
CHAN 18 TIP
21
ORANGEWHITE
CHAN 18 RING
WHITEGREEN
CHAN 19 TIP
22
GREENWHITE
CHAN 19 RING
WHITEBROWN
CHAN 20 TIP
23
BROWNWHITE
CHAN 20 RING
WHITESLATE
CHAN 21 TIP
24
SLATEWHITE
CHAN 21 RING
REDBLUE
CHAN 22 TIP
25
BLUERED
CHAN 22 RING
REDORANGE
CHAN 23 TIP
26
ORANGERED
CHAN 23 RING
REDGREEN
CHAN 24 TIP
27
GREENRED
CHAN 24 RING
REDBROWN
CHAN 25 TIP
28
BROWNRED
CHAN 25 RING
10
REDSLATE
CHAN 26 TIP
29
SLATERED
CHAN 26 RING
11
BLACKBLUE
CHAN 27 TIP
30
BLUEBLACK
CHAN 27 RING
12
BLACKORANGE
CHAN 28 TIP
31
ORANGEBLACK
CHAN 28 RING
13
BLACKGREEN
CHAN 29 TIP
32
GREENBLACK
CHAN 29 RING
14
BLACKBROWN
CHAN 30 TIP
33
BROWNBLACK
CHAN 30 RING
15
BLACKSLATE
CHAN 31 TIP
34
SLATEBLACK
CHAN 31 RING
16
YELLOWBLUE
CHAN 32 TIP
35
BLUEYELLOW
CHAN 32 RING
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
Note
The ETH/T1 radio repeater cable carries clocks, data, and overhead for two
directions at the DS1 data rate. It does not carry Eth or DS1 traffic. ETH
fiber optic/electrical cables and DS1 cables must be run separately. If the
repeater cable is not used, the embedded data in the overhead must be
cabled individually. In this case, separate cables must be run for MCS-11,
audio, RS-232, and ELMC.
Recommended connectorized cable assembly PN 695-4125-007/013 (26 AWG 5 pair shielded,
jacketed cable). See Figure 5 - 26 for shelf connector location and pinout. refer to Table 5 - 20 for
mating cable wiring and color code.
Note
Use repeater cables for cabling repeater shelf 1 to repeater shelf 2 (eastbound/westbound data/clock).
5-43
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
Radio
Repeater
1
Cable
PN 695-TBD
Eth Card
10/100/1000 Base T
Ethernet Cable
Radio
Repeater
2
Eth Card
T1 17-32 IN
T1 17-32 OUT
T1 17-32 IN
T1 17-32 OUT
J323
J324
J323
J324
T1 1-16 IN
RPTR
IN/OUT
T1 1-16 OUT
J303
J203
J304
Cable
PN 695-TBD
T1 1-16 IN
RPTR
IN/OUT
T1 1-16 OUT
J303
J203
J304
T1 LINES 17-32
Cable
PN 695-TBD
T1 LINES 1-16
Cable
PN 695-4125-007/013
T1 LINES 1-16
T1 LINES 17-32
Cable
PN 695-TBD
ETH-1099
07/07/07
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
J301
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
J307
J315
J313
J308
J309
3
J305
3
J318
J310
J312
J316
J317
J302
GND
RPTR DS1 OUT TIP
J203
5
FRONT VIEW
LMW-7067
04/09/07
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
J203/J203 MDR-8000
FUNCTION
END 1
WIRE
COLOR
PAIR
WIRE
COLOR
END 2
FUNCTION
DS1 IN TIP
01
BLACK
BLACK
02
DS1 IN RING
06
RED
RED
07
DS1 OUT
RING
02
BLACK
BLACK
01
DS1 IN TIP
DS1 OUT
RING
07
WHITE
WHITE
06
DS1 IN RING
NOT USED
5-46
J203/
J203
BLACK
GND
03
GREEN
NOT USED
04
BLACK
NOT USED
08
BLUE
NOT USED
05
BLACK
NOT USED
09
YELLOW
3
4
5
BLACK
NOT USED
GREEN
03
GND
BLACK
05
NOT USED
BLUE
09
NOT USED
BLACK
04
NOT USED
YELLOW
08
NOT USED
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
AE37( )
CNTLR
C1
MDR8000
SHELF
TO CONNECTOR J301
(CONNECTS TO
AE37 CONTROLLER)
RS232C
INTERFACE CABLE
USI
TERMINAL
RS232C PORT
MW21100661
101598
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
J301
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
J307
J315
J313
J308
J309
J305
J318
J310
J312
J316
J317
J302
USI
6
9
DSR
RTS
CTS
RI
DCD
RxD
TxD
DTR
GND
J301
FRONT VIEW
LMW-7059F
02/04/03
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
J301/
LAPTOP
LAPTOP
FUNCTION
END 1
WIRE
COLOR
PAIR
WIRE
COLOR
END 2
FUNCTION
DCD
01
BLACK
BLACK
01
DCD
DSR
06
RED
RED
06
DSR
RXD
02
BLACK
BLACK
02
RXD
RTS
07
WHITE
WHITE
07
RTS
TXD
03
BLACK
BLACK
03
TXD
CTS
08
GREEN
GREEN
08
CTS
DTR
04
BLACK
BLACK
04
DTR
RI
09
BLUE
BLUE
09
RI
GND
05
BLACK
BLACK
05
GND
NOT
USED
N/A
YELLOW
YELLOW
N/A
NOT
USED
NOT
USED
N/A
BLACK
BLACK
N/A
NOT
USED
NOT
USED
N/A
BROWN
BROWN
N/A
NOT
USED
5.17
USI/CONTROLLER CABLE CONNECTION TO LAPTOP (J301)
Recommended connectorized cable assembly PN 695-77848-001 through 004 (24 AWG 6 pair
shielded, jacketed cable with DEMM-9P connector on each end). See Figure 5 - 27 for laptop to
controller connection. See Figure 5 - 28 for controller connector location and pinout. refer to
Table 5 - 21 for mating cable pinout and color code.
5.18
SERVICE CHANNEL CONNECTIONS
A service channel is defined as a non-revenue bearing channel provided as part of a transmission system for operation, maintenance, monitoring, and control of the system. The MDR-8000
provides a 256 kb/s auxiliary channel for servicing the radio. This is an overhead channel and
is independent of the traffic channels. The 256 kb/s service channel contains four 64 kb/s service channels. Three of the four 64 kb/s channels (Service Channel 1, 2, and 3) can be provisioned on the USI for a specific use. Service channel 4 is dedicated to radio commands and
ELMC. Service channel is not provisionable. The four channels are multiplexed and shifted in
and out of registers on the controller.
See Figure 5 - 29. There are eight connectors on the backplane to interface with three of the
service channels. The connectors on the backplane interface three functions: audio, RS-232,
and MCS-11. Each service channel is provisioned for a specific function. As shown by the vertical line connecting to the three functions on one side and the three service channels (SC1, SC2,
and SC3) on the opposite side, audio and MCS can be put on any open service channel. RS-232
data can be put on service channel 1 or 2 but cannot be put on service channel 3. This is shown
by the dashed lines to the specific service channel.
5-49
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
J316
J316
RADIO
AUDIO
1
TELEPHONE
(4-WIRE)
RADIO
CONTROLLER
J317
AUDIO
1
CONTROLLER
SC1
AUDIO
2
SC
MULDEM
TSM2500
SC
MULDEM
SC2
SC2
OVERHEAD
CHANNELS
MCS
OVERHEAD
CHANNELS
SC3
J307, J310
(BRIDGED)
TSM2500
MCS
SC3
TEL
TEL
J315, J318
(BRIDGED)
J315, J318
(BRIDGED)
SC0
ELMC
J317
SC1
AUDIO
2
J307, J310
(BRIDGED)
TELEPHONE
(4-WIRE)
SC0
ELMC
J312
J312
RS2321
LAPTOP
HANDSET
(2-WIRE)
RS2321
LAPTOP
J313
J313
RS2322
RS2322
LMW-3138F
04/21/04
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
Note
Service channels at both ends of a hop (and end-to-end in a link) must be
provisioned the same.
Service channel provisioning is interactive. When an option is selected for any service channel,
that option is excluded from selections on the other applicable service channels. Provisioning
options for Service Channels 1, 2, and 3 are listed:
Service Channel 1 (64 kb/s channel) can be used to carry 4-wire audio, RS-232 data, or
MCS-11 fault alarm information.
AUDIO 1 and 2 Two audio provisioning options (AUDIO 1 and AUDIO 2) are provided for Service Channel 1. Each audio channel is a 4-wire audio channel that provides off-hook detection, level control, and E and M-lead signaling. AUDIO 1 also has
DTMF decoding that allows a specific station to be dialed. External connection to
AUDIO 1 is J316. External connection to AUDIO 2 is J317.
RS-232-1 RS-232 Channel 1 is an RS-232 formatted data channel that can provide
interface to an external computer/modem. External connection to RS-232-1 is J312.
MCS-11 The MCS-11 channel is an RS-422 formatted data that provides an interface to an external MCS-11 Monitor and Control System or TSM system, used to control multiple MCS-11 systems. External connections to the MCS-11 include J307,
J308, J309 and J310.
Service channel 2 (64 kb/s channel) can be used to carry 4-wire audio, RS-232 data, or
MCS-11 fault alarm information.
RS-232-2 RS-232 Channel 2 is an RS-232 formatted data channel that can provide
interface to an external computer/modem. External connection to RS-232-2 is J313.
Service Channel 3 (64 kb/s channel) can be used to carry 4-wire audio, or MCS-11 fault
alarm information
5-51
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
5.18.3.1 Audio 1
Audio 1 (J316) is a 4-wire function port on the backplane that provides off-hook detection,
level control, E and M-lead signaling, and DTMF and 2-wire handset capabilities.
5.18.3.2 Audio 2
Audio 2 (J317) is a 4-wire function port on the backplane that provides off-hook detection,
level control, and E and M-lead signaling. Audio 2 has no DTMF decoding capabilities.
Recommended connectorized cable assembly PN 695-4125-026 through 030 (26 AWG 5 pair
shielded, jacketed cable with 9-pin D-type connector on each end). See Figure 5 - 30 for shelf
connector locations and pinout. Refer to Table 5 - 22 for mating cable wiring and color code.
or
J301
Recommended cable PN 424-0305-030 (26 AWG 5 pair shielded, jacketed cable) for wirewrapping to wirewrap adapter PN 3DH04178AB. See Figure 5 - 31 for pinout. Refer to
Table 5 - 22 for mating cable wiring and color code.
J307
J315
J313
J308
J309
J310
J305
J318
J316
J317
J302
GND
CALL DETECT
AUDIO TIP OUT
M LEAD
AUDIO TIP IN
J316/J317
5
J312
AUDIO RING IN
E LEAD
AUDIO RING OUT
CALL COMMON
FRONT VIEW
LMW-7238F
02/23/04
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
END 1
WIRE
COLOR
PAI
R
WIRE
COLOR
END 2
FUNCTION
AUDIO TIP IN
01
BLACK
BLACK
03
AUDIO RING IN
06
RED
RED
08
AUDIO M LEAD
02
BLACK
BLACK
07
AUDIO E LEAD
AUDIO E LEAD
07
WHITE
WHITE
02
AUDIO M LEAD
03
BLACK
BLACK
01
AUDIO TIP IN
08
GREEN
GREEN
06
AUDIO RING IN
CALL DETECT
04
BLACK
BLACK
04
NOT USED
CALL COMMON
09
BLUE
BLUE
09
NOT USED
GND
05
BLACK
BLACK
05
GND
NOT USED
10
YELLOW
YELLOW
10
NOT USED
5-53
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
J301
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
J308
J315
J310
J305
J318
J313
J309
J316
J316
5
J317
J302
J317
1
J312
A1
P101
P101 P316
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A6
A8
A9
1
6
2
3
8
7
4
9
5
AUDIO TIP IN
AUDIO RING IN
AUDIO M LEAD
AUDIO TIP OUT
AUDIO RING OUT
AUDIO E LEAD
CALL DETECT
CALL COMMON
GND
P317
A9 A1
P102
P102
P317
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
1
6
2
3
8
7
4
9
5
AUDIO TIP IN
AUDIO RING IN
AUDIO M LEAD
AUDIO TIP OUT
AUDIO RING OUT
AUDIO E LEAD
CALL DETECT
CALL COMMON
GND
A9
LMW-7055F
08/17/06
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
J301
J307
J315
J308
J318
J313
J309
J310
J305
J312
J316
J317
J302
GND
RS232 IN
RS232 OUT
J312/J313
FRONT VIEW
LMW-7056
07/23/02
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
J312/J313 MDR-8000
J312/J313 MDR-8000
FUNCTION
END 1
WIRE
COLOR
PAIR
WIRE
COLOR
END 2
FUNCTION
NOT USED
01
BLACK
BLACK
01
NOT USED
NOT USED
06
RED
RED
06
NOT USED
02
BLACK
BLACK
03
NOT USED
07
WHITE
WHITE
08
NOT USED
03
BLACK
BLACK
02
NOT USED
08
GREEN
GREEN
07
NOT USED
NOT USED/
RS-232-2 OUT*
04
BLACK
BLACK
04
09
BLUE
BLUE
09
GND
05
BLACK
BLACK
05
GND
NOT USED
10
YELLOW
YELLOW
10
NOT USED
5.19
MCS-11 CONNECTIONS
When MCS is selected to be placed on one of the three service channels and then RSS is
enabled and properly addressed, applicable ports on the controller module are enabled. This
allows the user to interface external MCS-11 Monitor and Control System equipment at any or
all four connectors on the backplane (J307, J308, J309, and J310). Two connectors (J308 and
J309) are synchronous, parallel, data ports and provide CLK outputs. Connectors J307 and
J310 are asynchronous ports.
For proper operation, MCS-11 must be provisioned using the following guidelines:
a. MCS-11 must be selected as one of the service channels.
b. MCS must be assigned a valid address
c. The MCS RSS must be set to ON for each radio with a unique RSS address. Refer to Appendix B on the attached CD for address details. At a site, typically only one RSS is turned on.
Station scanners at all other radios at that site are normally jumpered to the RSS enabled
radio to allow access to their detail scanners. If station scanners are properly wired, detail
scanners always respond, regardless of whether RSS is provisioned ON or OFF.
5-56
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
Note
If the radio is provisioned Repeater, port 2 on the controller, that connects to
J307, is disabled. At a repeater, you can use J310 in lieu of J307 for connecting the TSM polling engine to the radio.
MCS-11 connector J307 is used to connect to a TSM (-2500, -3500, or -8000) polling engine at
a master terminal.
J301
J308
J307
J315
J313
J318
J309
J305
J312
J316
J317
J302
XMT DATA +
RTN CLK +
XMT CLK +
RCV DATA +
RCV CLK +
J307
8
J310
15
RCV CLK
RCV DATA
XMT CLK
RTN CLK
XMT DATA
FRONT VIEW
LMW-7052F
07/23/02
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
Table 5 - 24 MCS-11 Master Connector J307 Mating Cable Wiring and Color Codes
J307 MDR-8000
POLLING ENGINE
FUNCTION
END 1
WIRE
COLOR
PAIR
WIRE
COLOR
END 2
FUNCTION
RCV CLK +
01
BLACK
BLACK
01
RCV CLK +
RCV CLK-
09
RED
RED
09
RCV CLK-
RCV DATA +
02
BLACK
BLACK
02
RCV DATA +
RCV DATA -
10
WHITE
WHITE
10
RCV DATA -
XMT CLK +
03
BLACK
BLACK
03
XMT CLK +
XMT CLK -
11
GREEN
GREEN
11
XMT CLK -
RETURN CLK +
04
BLACK
BLACK
04
RETURN CLK +
RETURN CLK -
12
BLUE
BLUE
12
RETURN CLK -
XMT DATA +
05
BLACK
BLACK
05
XMT DATA +
XMT DATA -
13
YELLOW
YELLOW
13
XMT DATA -
NOT USED
06
BLACK
BLACK
06
OFF HOOK +
NOT USED
14
BROWN
BROWN
14
OFF HOOK -
NOT USED
07
BLACK
BLACK
07
RCV DATA
NOT USED
15
ORANGE
ORANGE
15
SIG GND
NOT USED
08
RED
RED
08
DTR
NOT USED
16
WHITE
WHITE
16
NOT USED
5-58
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
SITE C
SITE D
MDR-8000
MDR-8000
B1
TERM.
DS307
B2
RPTR
DS308
J307
J401
MDR-8000
B3
RPTR
DS309
J401
695-4126-007/009/012
REPEATER CABLE
695-7836-001 THRU -005
POLLING ENGINE
MDR-8000
B4
TERM 4
DS310
J308
J310
695-7837-001
THRU -005
CROSSWIRE
STRAIGHT
CABLE
695-7837-025
SITE B
A10
SITE E
J308
B5
TERM
J309 DS303
B6
TERM
DS304
MDR-8000
MDR-8000
A9
TERM
TERM J306
J309
J311
MDR-4000e
695-7837-021
THRU -025
SITE F
MDR-4000e
J308
695-7801-001
J202
MUX
STRAIGHT
CABLE
695-7837-025
B7
TERM
J309 DS301
B8
TERM
DS302
MDR-8000
MDR-8000
SITE G
DMX-3003N
E1A
J310
E2A
RPTR
G7572
J314
TERM
P7572
MDR-6000
MDR-6000
RPTR
CABLE
372-0546-020/050/070
SITE H
E3A
E4A
RPTR
J314
S7341
TERM
T7341
MDR-6000
LEGEND:
XXXX
MCS-11 ADDRESS
YYYY
CONFIGURATION
ZZZZ
ELMC ADDRESS
SITE A
MDR-6000
MDR-8000 J308/J309
PROVISIONING NOTES
1. PROVISION RPTR DS309 (FIRST
RADIO IN CHAIN) J308 OUTPUT CLOCK.
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
Note
MCS-11 must be provisioned MCS-11 J310 Master/Junction to enable XMT,
RCV, and OUTPUT clocks. If an external modem is being used, provision
MCS-11 for MCS-11 J310 Modem. This selection disables XMT, RCV,OUTPUT clocks and all MCS-11 clocks must now be provided by the external
modem.
Note
Multiple radios at a site can be provisioned and connected to operate using a
common XMT and RCV clock. In this scenario, one radio is provisioned to
supply the clocks. All other radios are provisioned to sync off the supplied
clocks. Provision the radio supplying the clocks J308 Output Clock. Provision all other radios at the site J308 Input Clock.
MCS-11 connectors J308 and J309 are typically used to sync radios at a site with multiple
radios configured as junctions, spurs, and/or daisy-chained spurs. The multiple radios are connected to common XMT and RCV clocks. In this scenario, one radio is provisioned to supply
the clocks. This radio is designated master or DCE. All other radios at the site are designed
as slave or DTE and receive their sync from the master.
See Figure 5 - 35 for a typical connection scheme for three radios. Shelf 1 is the master (DCE)
radio. Shelf 1 is provisioned J308 Output Clock. Shelves 2 and 3 (slaves) sync to Shelf 1 and
are provisioned J308 Input clock. Either Repeater Shelf 1 or Repeater Shelf 2 may feed the
spur shelf. The first connection out of the repeater must be crosswired from J308 to J308.
Then, every shelf from the spur must be wired 1:1, J309 to J308, in a daisy-chain fashion.
5.19.2.1 Clock Master and Slave Modes
Clock direction is controlled by the MASTER/SLAVE control from the microprocessor. Switching
is controlled by the CLK E DET control and the Master/Slave control from the microprocessor.
The master and slave modes are provisioned functions. The master mode is set by provisioning
the radio J308 Output Clock. The slave mode is set by provisioning the radio J308 Input Clock.
5-60
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
See Figure 5 - 36 for a simplified block diagram of the master mode. The master mode sends
RCV and XMT clocks out to other equipment. Typically one radio at a repeater/junction is provisioned J308 Output clock and this master radio provides the clocks on which other radios at
the site can sync. The east and west service channel modems on the controller provide the
XMT and RCV clocks. The east service channel modem provides the 64k CLK E (64 kHz clock
east) that is switched through the EPLD, amplified by the clock driver and output through the
bi-directional XCVR to connector J308. The west service channel modem provides the 64k
CLK W (64 kHz clock west) that is switched through the EPLD, amplified by the clock driver
and output through the bi-directional XCVR to connector J308.
5.19.2.3 Slave Mode (CLKS IN)
See Figure 5 - 37 for a simplified block diagram of the slave mode. The slave mode receives
RCV and XMT clocks from other equipment. Typically all but one radio at a repeater/junction
are provisioned J308 Input clock. The master radio provides the clocks on which the slave
radios at the site can sync. The RCV clock on J308 is passed through the bi-directional XCVR,
is switch through the EPLD, and output to the microprocessor as CLK 7. The XMT clock on
J308 is passed through the bi-directional XCVR, is switched through the EPLD, and output to
the microprocessor as CLK 8.
CROSSWIRED CABLE ASSEMBLY Recommended connectorized cable assembly PN 6957837-001 through -005 (26 AWG 8 pair shielded, jacketed cable with 15-pin D-type connector
on each end). See Figure 5 - 38 for shelf connectors J308 and J309 location and pinout. Refer to
Table 5 - 25 for J308 to J308 mating cable pinout and color code. See Figure 5 - 34 for typical
connection scheme.
DAISY CHAIN CABLE ASSEMBLY Recommended connectorized cable assembly PN 6957837-021 through -025 (26 AWG 8 pair shielded, jacketed cable with 15-pin D-type connector
on each end, wired 1:1.) Refer to Table 5 - 26 for J309 to J308 mating cable pinout and color
code. See Figure 5 - 34 for typical connection scheme.
5-61
5-62
MDR-1009
04/21/04
SHELF 1 (DCE)
MASTER = CLKS OUT
PROVISION-J308
OUTPUT CLK
J309
OFF HK -
OFF HK +
XMT DAT -
XMT DAT +
RCV DAT -
RCV DAT +
CLK OUT -
CLK OUT +
RCV CLK -
RCV CLK +
XMT CLK -
XMT CLK +
J308
OFF HK -
OFF HK +
XMT DAT -
XMT DAT +
RCV DAT -
RCV DAT +
RCV CLK -
RCV CLK +
XMT CLK -
XMT CLK +
J309
OFF HK -
OFF HK +
XMT DAT -
XMT DAT +
RCV DAT -
RCV DAT +
CLK OUT -
CLK OUT +
RCV CLK -
RCV CLK +
XMT CLK -
XMT CLK +
J308
OFF HK -
OFF HK +
XMT DAT -
XMT DAT +
RCV DAT -
RCV DAT +
RCV CLK -
RCV CLK +
XMT CLK -
XMT CLK +
J309
OFF HK -
OFF HK +
XMT DAT -
XMT DAT +
RCV DAT -
RCV DAT +
CLK OUT -
CLK OUT +
RCV CLK -
RCV CLK +
XMT CLK -
XMT CLK +
J308
OFF HK -
OFF HK +
XMT DAT -
XMT DAT +
RCV DAT -
RCV DAT +
RCV CLK -
RCV CLK +
XMT CLK -
XMT CLK +
14
13
10
12
11
14
13
10
11
14
13
10
12
11
14
13
10
11
14
13
10
12
11
14
13
10
11
EAST
SC
MULDEM
CLK
DET
CLK EAST
OFF HK
XMT DATA
RCV DATA
RCV CLK
XMT CLK
SHELF 3 (DTE)
SLAVE = CLKS IN
PROVISION-J308 INPUT CLK
EAST
SC
MULDEM
CLK
DET
CLK EAST
OFF HK
XMT DATA
RCV DATA
RCV CLK
XMT CLK
SHELF 2 (DTE)
SLAVE = CLKS IN
PROVISION-J308 INPUT CLK
EAST
SC
MULDEM
CLK
DET
CLK EAST
OFF HK
XMT DATA
RCV DATA
RCV CLK
XMT CLK
CLK
DET
CLK
OUT
EN
CLK
DET
CLK
OUT
EN
CLK
DET
CLK
OUT
EN
CLK
DET
EPLD
CLK
DET
EPLD
CLK
DET
EPLD
CLK
DET
CLK WEST
CLK
DET
CLK WEST
CLK
DET
CLK WEST
WEST
SC
MULDEM
PROCESSOR
WEST
SC
MULDEM
PROCESSOR
WEST
SC
MULDEM
PROCESSOR
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
EPLD
CLK DIR CTRL
PROCESSOR
CLK
E
DET
MASTER/SLAVE
CLK E DET
SWITCH
CONTROL
LOGIC
XCVR
DRIVER
W SC
MULDEM
64 CLK W
INTFC
RCV CLK +
RCV CLK -
RCVR
CLK 7
TO PROCESSOR
CLK 8
E SC
MODEM
XCVR
64 CLK E
TX CLK OUT
J308 TX
CLK DET
DRIVER
TX CLK
INTFC
XMT CLK +
XMT CLK -
RCVR
NOTE:
SOFTWARE CONTROLS ARE SHOWN AS PHYSICAL FOR SIMPLIFICATION.
MDR-1016A-F
6/16/04
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
EPLD
CLK DIR CTRL
PROCESSOR
CLK
E
DET
MASTER/SLAVE
CLK E DET
SWITCH
CONTROL
LOGIC
XCVR
DRIVER
W SC
MULDEM
64 CLK W
INTFC
RCV CLK +
RCV CLK -
RCVR
CLK 7
TO PROCESSOR
CLK 8
E SC
MODEM
XCVR
64 CLK E
TX CLK OUT
J308 TX
CLK DET
DRIVER
TX CLK
INTFC
XMT CLK +
XMT CLK -
RCVR
NOTE:
SOFTWARE CONTROLS ARE SHOWN AS PHYSICAL FOR SIMPLIFICATION.
MDR-1016-F
5/13/05
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
J301
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
J307
J315
J313
15
J318
J309
J310
J305
RCV CLK
RCV DATA
XMT CLK
CLK OUT
XMT DATA
OFF HOOK
FRONT VIEW
J302
XMT CLK +
RCV DATA +
RCV CLK +
J309
15
J317
OFF HOOK +
XMT DATA +
J312
J316
OFF HOOK +
XMT DATA +
CLK OUT +
XMT CLK +
RCV DATA +
RCV CLK +
J308
8
J308
RCV CLK
RCV DATA
XMT CLK
XMT DATA
OFF HOOK
FRONT VIEW
MDR-1011F
04/12/04
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
J308/J308
J308 MDR-8000
FUNCTION
END 1
WIRE
COLOR
PAIR
WIRE
COLOR
END 2
FUNCTION
RCV CLK +
01
BLACK
BLACK
03
XMT CLK +
RCV CLK-
09
RED
RED
11
XMT CLK-
RCV DATA +
02
BLACK
BLACK
05
XMT DATA +
RCV DATA -
10
WHITE
WHITE
13
XMT DATA -
XMT CLK +
03
BLACK
BLACK
01
RCV CLK +
XMT CLK -
11
GREEN
GREEN
09
RCV CLK -
04
BLACK
BLACK
04
NOT USED
CLK OUT -
12
BLUE
BLUE
12
NOT USED
XMT DATA +
05
BLACK
BLACK
02
RCV DATA +
XMT DATA -
13
YELLOW
YELLOW
10
RCV DATA -
OFF HOOK +
06
BLACK
BLACK
06
OFF HOOK +
OFF HOOK -
14
BROWN
BROWN
14
OFF HOOK -
NOT USED
07
BLACK
BLACK
07
NOT USED
NOT USED
15
ORANGE
ORANGE
15
NOT USED
NOT USED
08
RED
RED
08
NOT USED
CLK OUT+
NOT USED
5-68
WHITE
WHITE
NOT USED
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
J309/J308
J308 MDR-8000
FUNCTION
END 1
WIRE
COLOR
PAIR
WIRE
COLOR
END 2
FUNCTION
RCV CLK +
01
BLACK
BLACK
01
RCV CLK +
RCV CLK-
09
RED
RED
09
RCV CLK-
RCV DATA +
02
BLACK
BLACK
02
RCV DATA +
RCV DATA -
10
WHITE
WHITE
10
RCV DATA -
XMT CLK +
03
BLACK
BLACK
03
XMT CLK +
XMT CLK -
11
GREEN
GREEN
11
XMT CLK -
04
BLACK
BLACK
04
NOT USED
CLK OUT -
12
BLUE
BLUE
12
NOT USED
XMT DATA +
05
BLACK
BLACK
05
XMT DATA +
XMT DATA -
13
YELLOW
YELLOW
13
XMT DATA -
OFF HOOK +
06
BLACK
BLACK
06
OFF HOOK +
OFF HOOK -
14
BROWN
BROWN
14
OFF HOOK -
NOT USED
07
BLACK
BLACK
07
NOT USED
NOT USED
08
ORANGE
ORANGE
15
NOT USED
NOT USED
15
RED
RED
08
NOT USED
NOT USED
16
WHITE
WHITE
16
NOT USED
CLK OUT+
5-69
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
J301
J307
J308
J307
J315
J313
J318
J309
J305
J312
J316
J317
J302
XMT DATA +
RTN CLK +
XMT CLK +
RCV DATA +
RCV CLK +
J310
8
J310
15
RCV CLK
RCV DATA
XMT CLK
RTN CLK
XMT DATA
FRONT VIEW
LMW-7072
07/23/02
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
Table 5 - 27 MCS-11 Spur Connector J310 Mating Cable Wiring and Pinout
J310 MDR-8000
J310/J310
J310 MDR-8000
FUNCTION
END 1
WIRE
COLOR
PAIR
WIRE
COLOR
END 2
FUNCTION
RCV CLK +
01
BLACK
BLACK
04
RETURN CLK +
RCV CLK-
09
RED
RED
12
RETURN CLK-
RCV DATA +
02
BLACK
BLACK
05
XMT DATA +
RCV DATA -
10
WHITE
WHITE
13
XMT DATA -
XMT CLK +
03
BLACK
BLACK
03
XMT CLK +
XMT CLK -
11
GREEN
GREEN
11
XMT CLK -
RETURN CLK +
04
BLACK
BLACK
01
RCV CLK +
RETURN CLK -
12
BLUE
BLUE
09
RCV CLK -
XMT DATA +
05
BLACK
BLACK
02
RCV DATA +
XMT DATA -
13
YELLOW
YELLOW
10
RCV DATA -
NOT USED
06
BLACK
BLACK
06
NOT USED
NOT USED
14
BROWN
BROWN
14
NOT USED
NOT USED
07
BLACK
BLACK
07
NOT USED
NOT USED
15
ORANGE
ORANGE
15
NOT USED
NOT USED
08
RED
RED
08
NOT USED
NOT USED
16
WHITE
WHITE
16
NOT USED
5.20
TMN CONNECTIONS
This section gives the location and description of customer connections on the TMN interface
module.
5.20.1 Installing Module
1 Connect mating cables to applicable connectors J1-J4.
5-71
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
J1
ETH 1
UPLINK
J2
ETH 2
J3
ETH 3
J4
PPP
LMW-9006F
06/13/03
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
Note
Refer to Para. 2.24, Connecting MDR-8000 Radio TMN Interface in an
Ethernet LAN, for limitations on interconnecting radios and equipment at a
site.
5.20.2.1 Scenario 1 Daisy Chain, Bridged Connection
See Figure 5 - 41. In this scenario, four TMN interface modules are connected to the LAN.
Daisy chaining prevents having to use external equipment to connect to the LAN. Daisy
chaining is typically used instead of a costly battery powered switch/hub at smaller junction
stations and/or battery powered remote sites where ac power is not available.
This is accomplished using the Uplink (U) ports on the TMN interface modules on shelves 2
and 3 to connect to the TMN interface module in shelf 1. The uplink port on the TMN interface module in shelf 3 connects to the Ethernet 2 port TMN interface module in shelf 2.
5.20.2.2 Scenario 2 Switched Connection
See Figure 5 - 42. In this scenario, four TMN interface modules are connected to the LAN via
a switch/hub using the Ethernet uplink port on each module. Ethernet 2 or 3 could be used
with a crossover cable.
Note
Since many switch/hubs are powered by ac, this scheme is typically used at
terminals where ac power is accessible.
5.20.2.3 Scenario 3 Front PPP Port Connections
For TMN to TMN PPP connections from Normal (DCE) to Crossover (DTE) or vice-versa, use
standard Cat. 5 cable. For other PPP connection options see Figure 5 - 43 and Figure 5 - 44.
5-73
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
LAN
U
TMN
INTF
SHELF
1
2
3
PPP
U
TMN
INTF
SHELF
2
2
3
PPP
U
TMN
INTF
SHELF
3
2
3
PPP
NOTE
U
TMN
INTF
SHELF
4
2
3
PPP
LMW-9009
06/19/03
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
LAN
U
TMN
INTF
SHELF
1
2
SWITCH
HUB
3
PPP
U
TMN
INTF
SHELF
2
2
3
PPP
U
TMN
INTF
SHELF
3
2
3
PPP
NOTE
ALL CABLES ARE STANDARD CAT 5
STRAIGHT-THROUGH CABLES.
U
TMN
INTF
SHELF
4
2
3
PPP
LMW-9008F
06/19/03
TMN
Interface
Normal
(DCE)
P
P
P
P
P
P
TMN
Interface
Crossover
(DTE)
CLK
Loopback
MDR-1279
12/15/06
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
USER EQUIPMENT
GENERIC
MDR-8000
9400 AWY
CO-DIRECTIONAL
MODE
OR
DB-15
TXD+
TXD-
11
4
TXC+
TXC-
12
RXD+
TMN INTERFACE
CROSSOVER MODE
RJ-45
Data +
Data Clock +
Clock Data +
3 RXD+
6 RXD7 RXC+
8 RXC1 TXD+
Data -
2 TXD-
RXC+
Clock +
4 TXC+
RXC-
10
Clock -
5 TXC-
RXD-
MDR-8000
USER EQUIPMENT
GENERIC
9400 AWY
CO-DIRECTIONAL
MODE
OR
DB-15
TXD+
TXD-
11
TXC+
TXC-
12
RXD+
TMN INTERFACE
NORMAL MODE
RJ-45
Data +
Data Clock +
Clock Data +
1 RXD+
2 RXD4 RXC+
5 RXC3 TXD+
RXD-
Data -
RXC+
Clock +
7 TXC+
10
Clock -
8 TXC-
RXC-
6 TXD-
In Normal mode, the functions of the pins reverse, the clock from the user equipment is used
to time the incoming data, and an internal clock is used to time the outgoing data making the
interface fully asynchronous.
MDR-1280
12/15/06
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
MDR-8000
RS-422 CHANNEL BANK
DCE INTERNAL CLOCK
DB-37
TMN INTERFACE
CROSSOVER MODE
RJ-45
SEND DATA A
SEND DATA B
4
22
7
8
RXC +
RXC -
RX DATA A
RX DATA B
6
24
3
6
RXD +
RXD -
RX CLK A
RX CLK B
8
26
4
5
TXC +
TXC -
1
2
TXD +
TXD -
TT A
TT B
17
35
CHANNEL BANK TO TMN
LMW-9018F Rev
12/15/06
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
Note
See Figure 5 - 45. To determine which wire is number 1 on the RJ-45 connector on the mating cable, hold the cable so that the end of the plastic tip is facing away from you (the copper pins are facing up and the plastic spring lock
s=clip is underneath). When looking down on the copper pins, pin number 1
is on the far left.
PIN 1
PIN 8
LMW-8053F
06/30/03
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
FUNCTION
TX+
TX-
RX+
4/5
RX-
7/8
ETH2 and ETH3 connectors require straight-through cables to connect to external equipment. Refer to Table 5-29 for pinout/function.
FUNCTION
RX+
RX+
TX+
4/5
TX-
7/8
Proposed wiring compatible with TIA-568B on an RJ45 connector. Using this pinout, MDR8000 radios could be interconnected using a standard four twisted pair (8 wire) straightthrough wired CAT5 Ethernet Crossover patch cord, provided that the clocks port on one
end is provisioned to receive clock instead of transmit clock. Refer to Table 5 - 30 for pinout/
function.
5-79
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
FUNCTION
DTE
DCE
TXDAP
OUT
IN
TXDAN
OUT
IN
RXDAP
IN
OUT
TXCAP
OUT
IN
RXDAN
IN
OUT
RXCAP
IN
OUT
RXCAN
IN
OUT
PAIR A
PAIR B
CONN 1
CONN 2
WHITE-GREEN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
GREEN
WHITE-ORANGE
ORANGE
WHITE-BLUE
BLUE
WHITE-BROWN
BROWN
PAIR C
PAIR D
LMW-9053F
05/24/05
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
PAIR 3
PAIR 2
CONN 1
CONN 2
WHITE-GREEN
1
2
3
6
4
5
7
8
GREEN
WHITE-ORANGE
ORANGE
WHITE-BLUE
BLUE
WHITE-BROWN
BROWN
3
6
1
2
4
5
7
8
PAIR 1
PAIR 4
LMW-9054F
06/28/07
FUNCTION
DCD
TXD
RXDD
DTR
GND
DSR
NC
NC
NC
5-81
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
8 9
0 1
8 9
0 1
6
9
DSR
RTS
CTS
RI
DCD
RxD
TxD
DTR
GND
J5
FRONT VIEW
LMW-8054F
01/21/03
END 1
WIRE COLOR
END 2
FUNCTION
DCD
TXD
01
02
BLACK
RED
01
02
DCD
TXD
RXD
DTR
03
04
BLACK
WHITE
03
04
RXD
DTR
GND
DTR
05
06
BLACK
GREEN
05
06
GND
DTR
NC
NC
07
08
BLACK
BLUE
07
08
NC
NC
NC
09
BLACK
09
NC
5-82
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
5.21
ELMC (J315, J318)
As a standard feature, the Extended Link Monitor Channel (ELMC) function allows local provisioning, alarms, status information, and control commands for the local radio and, (with the
exception of wayside DS1), alarms, status information, control for addressable remote radios.
For wayside DS1 status, the ELMC option key (695-5647-019 or -020) must be installed on the
AE-37Y Controller. For remote provisioning and downloading capability, the ELMC option key
(695-5647-018 or 695-5647-020) must be installed on the AE-37Y Controller. Refer Table 5 - 33
for details.
695-5647-018
Required for remote provisioning and downloading on DS1/E1 radios, and DS3 and
OC3/STM-1 radios without wayside DS1
695-5647-019
695-5647-020
Required for remote provisioning and downloading of DS3 and OC3/STM-1 radios with
wayside DS1
Note
ELMC 1 connector J318 and ELMC 2 connector J315 are wired in parallel.
You can connect J315 to J315, J315 to J318, or J318 to J318. A typical connection scheme is shown.
END 1
RCV+
RCVXMT+
XMTNOT USED
GND
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
01
06
02
07
03
04
08
05
09
WIRE
COLOR
BLACK
RED
BLACK
WHITE
BLACK
GREEN
BLACK
BLUE
BLACK
YELLOW
J315/J318 MDR-8000
PAIR
1
2
3
4
5
WIRE
COLOR
BLACK
RED
BLACK
WHITE
BLACK
GREEN
BLACK
BLUE
BLACK
YELLOW
END 2
FUNCTION
02
07
01
06
XMT+
XMTRCV+
RCVNOT USED
GND
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
03
05
09
04
08
5-83
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
J301
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
J307
J315
J313
J308
J318
J309
J305
J310
J312
J316
J317
J302
GND
XMT +
J315/J318
RCV +
4
9
3
8
2
7
1
6
RCV
XMT
FRONT VIEW
LMW-7237F
02/23/04
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
SITE A
SITE C
MDR-8000
MDR-8000
B1
TERM.
DS307
B2
RPTR
DS308
J401
SITE G
MDR-8000
B4
TERM 4
DS310
J318
J401
REPEATER CABLE
695-7836-001 THRU -005
SITE B
MDR-8000
B3
RPTR
DS309
SITE H
695-4125-006/013
CROSSWIRE
J315
SITE D
J318
B5
TERM
DS303
MDR-8000
A10
A9
TERM
TERM
MDR-8000
695-4125-006/013
CROSSWIRE
J102
MDR-4000E
B6
TERM
DS304
MDR-4000E
J318
B7
TERM
DS301
PIGTAIL
CABLE
695-4125-008
MDR-8000
SITE E
E2A
J314
RPTR
T7572
MDR-6000
B8 J318
TERM
DS302
MDR-8000
695-4125-006/013
CROSSWIRE
MDR-6000
MDR-8000
MDR-8000
E1A
TERM
G7572
TERM
DS105
TERM
DS106
J309
J318
J318
SITE I
695-4125-006/013
CROSSWIRE
REPEATER
CABLE
372-0456
020/050/070
SITE F
J314
E4A
E3A
RPTR
J309
T7341
TERM
S7341
MDR-6000
MDR-6000
Note
When connecting MDR-8000 radios with Windows USI to radios with DOS USI, check the DOS USI ELMC address for
space, dash, slash, asterisk, or underscore. The Windows USI cannot recognize a space, dash, slash, asterisk, or
underscore. Change the DOS ELMC address to a 5-character alphanumeric address without the prohibited characters.
MDR-1026F
06/12/04
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
5.22
FOREIGN ALARM INTERFACE (J305)
Recommended connectorized cable assembly PN 695-4121-001/003 (24 AWG 25 pair cable).
See Figure 5 - 51 for shelf connector location and pinout. Refer to Table 5 - 35 for mating cable
pinout and color code.
or
Recommended wirewrap cable PN 424-0429-020 (22 AWG 30-pair twisted cable) for use with
wirewrap adapter PN 695-4171-002. Refer to Table 5 - 35 for pinout.
Note
J301
J307
J315
J313
J308
J318
J309
J305
J310
J312
J316
J317
J302
J305
50
25
24
49
26
1
26
FRONT VIEW
LMW-7060F
07/23/02
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
PIN
PR
01
26
02
27
03
28
04
29
05
30
06
31
07
32
08
33
STATION ALM 9 IN
09
STATION ALM 1 IN
34
WIRE
COLOR
REMARKS
WHT/
BLU
BLU/
WHT
WHT/
ORN
ORN/
WHT
WHT/
GRN
GRN/
WHT
WHT/
BRN
BRN/
WHT
WHT/SLT
SLT/WHT
RED/BLU
BLU/RED
RED/
ORN
ORN/
RED
RED/
GRN
GRN/
RED
RED/BRN
BRN/RED
5-87
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
Table 5 - 35 Alarm/Status Connector J305 Mating Cable Wiring and Pinout (Cont.)
ALM/STATUS/CONTROL
PIN
PR
WIRE
COLOR
STATION ALM 10 IN
10
10
RED/SLT
STATION ALM 2 IN
35
SLT/RED
STATION ALM 11 IN
11
BLK/BLU
STATION ALM 3 IN
36
BLU/BLK
STATION ALM 12 IN
12
BLK/ORN
STATION ALM 4 IN
37
ORN/BLK
13
13
BLK/GRN
SERIAL DATA INPUT TO RADIO CONTROLLER OR RELAY INPUT FROM CUSTOMER EQUIPMENT TO RELAY INTFC
CARD (PROVISIONABLE)
STATION ALM 5 IN
38
13
GRN/BLK
14
14
BLK/BRN
SERIAL DATA INPUT TO RADIO CONTROLLER OR RELAY INPUT FROM CUSTOMER EQUIPMENT TO RELAY INTFC
CARD (PROVISIONABLE)
STATION ALM 6 IN
39
BRN/BLK
15
BLK/SLT
STATION ALM 7 IN
40
SLT/BLK
16
YEL/BLU
STATION ALM 8 IN
41
BLU/YEL
CONTROL 1 OUT
17
YEL/ORN
CONTROL STATUS 1 IN
42
ORN/YEL
5-88
11
12
15
16
17
REMARKS
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
Table 5 - 35 Alarm/Status Connector J305 Mating Cable Wiring and Pinout (Cont.)
ALM/STATUS/CONTROL
PIN
PR
WIRE
COLOR
REMARKS
CONTROL 2 OUT
18
18
YEL/GRN
CONTROL STATUS 2 IN
43
GRN/YEL
CONTROL 3 OUT
19
YEL/BRN
CONTROL STATUS 3 IN
44
BRN/YEL
CONTROL 4 OUT
20
YEL/SLT
CONTROL STATUS 4 IN
45
SLTYEL
CONTROL 5 OUT
21
VIO/BLU
CONTROL STATUS 5 IN
46
BLU/VIO
CONTROL 6 OUT
22
VIO/
ORN
CONTROL STATUS 6 IN
47
ORN/
VIO
23
VIO/
GRN
48
GRN/
VIO
24
VIO/BRN
49
BRN/VIO
INPUT TO CONTROLLER
25
VIO/SLT
50
SLT/VIO
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
5.23
ALARM, STATUS, AND CONTROLS INTERCONNECT
See Figure 5 - 52 for interconnect diagram. The AE-27( ) Relay Interface provides alarm, control and status inputs, and alarm, status and control relay outputs. All output relays can be
disabled or provisioned normally open or normally closed as follows:
Normally open (NO) relays are normally de-energized and relay contacts are open. When
activated, relays are energized. Relay contacts close, connecting the output to ground.
5-89
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
Normally closed (NC) relays are normally energized and relay contacts are closed and
grounded. When activated, relays are de-energized. Relay contacts open, presenting an open
(high impedance) to the output.
Rack ALM Return, Pin 49 is a ground point for use with Rack ALM Out. It is a signal ground
(low current) not used for battery voltage or high current ground.
J305
SWITCH XMTR
SWITCH RCVR
RELAY
INTERFACE
J305
PATH ALM
SWITCH I/O
STATION ALM 1
A XMT ALM
STATION ALM 2
B XMT ALM
STATION ALM 3
A RCV ALM
STATION ALM 4
B RCV ALM
STATION ALM 5
STATION ALM 6
STATION ALM 7
CONTROLLER FAIL
STATION ALM 8
STATION ALM 9
A XMTR IN SERV
STATION ALM 10
B XMTR IN SERV
STATION ALM 11
A RCVR IN SERV
STATION ALM 12
B RCVR IN SERV
A I/O IN SERV
STATION ALM 14*
B I/O IN SERV
SW OFF NORMAL
CONTROL 1
CONTROL STATUS 1
CONTROL 2
CONTROL STATUS 2
CONTROL 3
CONTROL STATUS 3
CONTROL 4
CONTROL STATUS 4
CONTROL 5
CONTROL STATUS 5
CONTROL 6
CONTROL STATUS 6
DATA
CONTROL
TBOS RCV -*
TBOS RCV +*
TBOS XMT -*
RACK ALM
TBOS XMT +*
CONTROLLER
LMW-7064
5/12/04
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
Address lines A0 through A3 HCMOS inputs. 100K Ohm pull-ups. Used by address
decoders to enable output registers and input buffers.
Buffered bidirectional data lines D0 through D7 HCMOS input/outputs. 10K Ohm pullups. Used to write data to output registers and read present bits or data from input buffers.
ECLK 2 MHz bus clock. HCMOS input. 100K Ohm pull-up.
R/WF Read/Write False. HCMOS input. 100K Ohm pull-up. A logic 1 indicates data is
being read from an input buffer or the present bits. A logic 0 indicates data is being written to an output register.
Relay Intfc CSF Relay Interface Card Select False. HCMOS input. 100K Ohm pull-up.
Chip select for relay interface card. Active low.
5.23.2 Control Inputs
Nine buffered control inputs are provided. The inputs are diode protected from voltages outside
of the 0 to +5 V range, and have a 10K Ohm resistor for current limiting purposes. In addition,
each input has a 100K Ohm pull-up resistor.
Switch Transmitter (SWITCH TX) buffered HCMOS input, sends signal to controller
module to activate the transmitter that is currently not carrying traffic.
Switch Receiver (Switch RX) buffered HCMOS input, sends signal to controller module
to activate the receiver that is currently not carrying traffic.
Switch I/O Interface (SWITCH I/O) buffered HCMOS input, sends signal to controller
module to activate the stand-by I/O interface module.
5.23.3 Station Alarm Inputs/TBOS Interface
Each radio shelf can accept/report up to 12 different user-defined station-type alarms, and, if
provisioned Station Alarm 13-16, the radio can accept an additional four station alarms, for a
total of 16. Station alarms 13 through 16 share pins on connector J305 with the four TBOS
inputs and outputs. TBOS inputs and outputs are enabled by software when the radio is provisioned TBOS Display 1-8. When TBOS is enabled station alarms 13 through 16 are disabled.
The alarm/status input signals are buffered HCMOS inputs, diode protected from voltages
outside of the 0 to +5 V range, with10 kilohm current limiting (series) resistor and 100
kilohm pull-up resistor. A logic 0 indicates an alarm state. A logic 1 (or open) indicates a nonalarm state.
5-91
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
#1 STATION
ALM
(SEE NOTE)
PIN 1
PDU
MDR-8000 SHELF
J305
MCS-11
ADDRESS
A1A
34
36
49
35
26
#2 STATION
ALM
FAN ASSY
HEAT DEFLECTOR
MDR-8000 SHELF
J305
MCS-11
ADDRESS
A1B
PIN 25
RACK ALM
#3 STATION
ALM
FAN ASSY
HEAT DEFLECTOR
MDR-8000 SHELF
J305
MCS-11
ADDRESS
A1C
PIN 25
RACK ALM
NOTE
FAN ASSY
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Interconnect Section
Alarms:
Loss of Input Alarm This summary alarm is activated by the following alarms:
Loss of DS3 input
Loss of optical input (OC3/STM-1)
Loss of wayside DS1 input
A XMT A-side transmitter failure. This summary alarm is activated by any of the
following alarms on the A side:
XMT SYNC Alarm
RF Power Alarm
Common Loss Alarm
ATPC Timeout
MUX Input Loss Alarm
B XMT B-side transmitter failure. This summary alarm is activated by any of the
following alarms on the B side:
XMT SYNC Alarm
RF Power Alarm
Common Loss Alarm
ATPC Timeout
MUX Input Loss Alarm
A RCV B-side receiver failure. This summary alarm is activated by any of the following alarms on the A side:
Channel Alarm
RCV Frame Loss
Eye Closure
RSL Alarm
B RCV B-side receiver failure. This summary alarm is activated by any of the following alarms on the B side:
Channel Alarm
RCV Frame Loss
5-93
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Interconnect Section
3EM20188AAAA
Eye Closure
RSL Alarm
PWR Supply Alarm This summary alarm is activated by any A or B power supply
failure.
Controller Fail relay is activated if a card select has not been detected in the previous approximately 200 msec.
Status:
Switch Off Normal Click on OFF NORM LED on USI Status Alarm screen to view
message. Indicates manual control enabled or any of 22 conditions exists. Refer to the
Maintenance Section for details.
Note
Control outputs and control status inputs operate together to perform control functions. The control status inputs to the relay interface must be properly wired to the external equipment that is being controlled by the
associated control output in order to display the ON or OFF status on the
USI control screen. Without the control status inputs, the control function on
the USI screen will still turn on equipment/functions, but no status will be
indicated and, once turned on, the equipment/function cannot be turned off.
Six relay control outputs (CTRL 1-6) provide relay closure to ground (provisioned NC) or open
(provisioned NO) when activated. These relays default to open if card power is lost. The maximum contact rating for each relay is 0.5 A, 100 Vdc.
Nine buffered status inputs (CTRL STATUS 1-6) from the equipment controlled by the CTRL
1-6 outputs, verifying the controlled function. The inputs are diode protected from voltages
outside of the 0 to +5 V range, and have a 10K Ohm resistor for current limiting purposes. In
addition, each input has a 100K Ohm pull-up resistor.
5-94
3EM20188AAAA
Initial Turnup Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
INITIAL TURNUP
SECTION INTRODUCTION
This section describes the procedures required to turn up the MDR-8000 Microwave
Digital Radios after installation.
6.1
This provisioning part of the section describes provisioning options available with the MDR8000 software application. Provisioning allows for the definition, editing, and storing of specific functions. The MDR-8000 provides the ability to provision equipment and facilities
through a series of Windows-based screens and messages. The Provisioning menu lists
equipment and functions which may be provisioned. You should use only those provisioning
screens that are applicable to your radio.
RECOMMENDED SEQUENCE
Perform the following initial turnup procedures in sequence:
6.2
Note
Software installed at the factory before delivery should not be overwritten by
downloading to the radio controller at initial turnup. Refer to Maintenance
section on the attached CD for procedure to upgrade existing software.
b. Turn on the radio.
c.
Note
Saving provisioning on disk provides a reference for any future provisioning
changes.
d. Provision radio.
6.3
SECURITY MANAGEMENT
Note
A password is not required to operate the MDR-8000. The radio is shipped
without a password and if a password is desired, it must be entered using
the Change Password screen. Once entered initially, the password must be
entered each time the user wants to access the provisioning screens (level 1
password required) or download software (level 2 password required).
The MDR-8000 application software offers user password security management using two different levels of passwords. User security deals with access level assigned to specific users. The
level of user security affects the type and number of commands an individual user may execute. This prevents an unqualified users access to high-level commands.
6-1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Initial Turnup Section
Level 1 password allows the user to perform all tasks except downloading software. Level 2
password allows access to all functions and is the highest level.
LOAD MDR-8000 SOFTWARE ON PC
Before operating the user system interface (USI) for the first time, the programs contained on
the CD ROM must be installed on the PC. The installation process configures the PC for its
unique requirements and prepares it to run the program.
6.4
D:\
File
Edit
Back
Address
View
Go
Forward
Favorites
Up
Help
Cut
Copy
Paste
Undo
Delete
Properties
Views
C:\
setup.exe
DOUBLE CLICK
setup.1st
win11_xx.CAB
LOADING
FILES
MDR-8000 Universal USI Setup
Setup cannot install system files or update shared files if they are in use.
Before proceeding, we recommend that you close any application you may
be running.
2 CLICK HERE
OK
Exit Setup
CLICK HERE
Click this button to install MDR-8000 Universal USI software to the specified
destination directory.
COPYING
FILES
Directory:
Change Directory
c:\winuniversal_xx
Exit Setup
STARTING
DOWN LOAD
MDR-8000 Universal USI Setup
MDR-8000 Universal USI Setup was completed successfully.
4
OK
END
DOWNLOAD
CLICK HERE
LMW-4023
10/16/05
3EM20188AAAA
Initial Turnup Section
6.5
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
TURN-ON PROCEDURE
Note
For user safety, user should become familiar with locations of power distribution units and circuit breakers associated with the MDR-8000 radio.
Perform the following procedure to turn on the radio.
a. On power supply module, set PA ON/OFF switch to OFF. Yellow PA OFF
indicator will light.
b. On power supply module, set POWER ON 1/OFF 0 switch to ON 1.
c.
On power supply module, set PA ON/OFF switch to ON. Yellow PA OFF indicator
will turn off.
Note
Until both the local and farend radios in the hop are turned on and operating properly and the RF path has been established, alarm conditions will
exist.
d. Observe CHAN ALM indicator on RCVR module is lit.
e. Wait for RCVR to lock on frequency. When RCVR is locked on frequency
(approximately 5 to 30 seconds), CHAN ALM indicator on RCVR module will
turn off.
f.
Verify all front panel alarm indicators on radio shelf are off. If not, refer to
Maintenance section for troubleshooting.
Note
Disable infrared option on laptop (if equipped) to prevent disrupting communication on com port.
a. Connect RS-232 interface cable between USI connector on controller and PC.
See Figure 6 - 2.
b. On Windows desktop, click on Start icon. Program menu displays.
Note
Only one COM port can be used at a time.
6-3
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Initial Turnup Section
AE37( )
CNTLR
C1
MDR8000
SHELF
TO CONNECTOR J301
(CONNECTS TO
AE37 CONTROLLER)
RS232C
INTERFACE CABLE
USI
TERMINAL
RS232C PORT
MW21100661
101598
On Program menu, click on Win USI program. Win USI screen displays with
message COMMUNICATING to indicate PC is communicating with the radio
controller. If COMMUNICATION DOWN message is displayed, perform procedure
shown on Figure 6 - 3 to change COM port.
3EM20188AAAA
Initial Turnup Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
ELMCAddress:
F4
F5
F6
Alarm Status
Analog Monitor
F7
Station Alarm
Performance
F8
F9
User Control
Provisioning
CLICK HERE.
CONFIRMATION MESSAGE
DISPLAYS.
Com 1
com 1
com 2
com 3
com 4
Save *.iniFile
Thursd
ay,Jan
November
30
, 200
0
Tuesday,
u Com Port
Error
1:44:19 PM
R101
ELMC
ADDRESS
Cancel
OK
com 3
OK
LMW-7232
02/02/04
Cancel
com 1
com 2
com 3
com 4
SELECT ANOTHER
COM PORT
LMW-1023
10/16/05
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Initial Turnup Section
TEST PROCEDURES
The radio has been properly aligned and tested at the factory before shipment eliminating the
need for testing after initial turn-up. The only time testing and/or adjustment is required is
after a maintenance action such as removal and replacement procedure and/or constant
alarms requiring corrective maintenance action. The completed maintenance action procedure(s) will reference any required test procedure(s).
6.7
6.8
PROVISIONING RADIO
Note
Changes to provisioning do not have to be made in any particular order.
The following procedure is used to provision the radio after installation.
a. On main screen, click on applicable radio type. Status Alarm screen will open.
b. On Status Alarm screen, click on Provisioning on upper right side of toolbar.
Radio Configuration screen will open.
c.
Yes refer to Para. 6.9 TMN Interface Module Turnup and Test Philosophy.
No Initial Turnup is complete.
6.9
Start at the terminal end and move out thru hops from there
Note
Depending on the LAN configuration the far end may always be available,
automatically, via an alternate route with no proof of routing through the
radio network. Therefore pinging back to the terminal/starting point from
any radio LAN connection may always give positive results and will not
prove correct performance of all connected paths.
6-6
3EM20188AAAA
Initial Turnup Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Ping back to terminal router (router in TMN intfc module) as you move out thru hops
Note
Installation of the MIB and TMN interface module registration is performed
at the SNMP manager by qualified IT personnel. It is not necessary to register the TMN interface modules to test connectivity, although persistent manager registration for use with non-Alcatel managers may be done as part of
initial provisioning.
Finally follow up with configuration at the SNMP manager to monitor the radios.
TURNUP AND TEST PREREQUISITES
Before starting turnup and test, the following prerequisites must be accomplished:
6.11
MDR-8000 radio must have, at a minimum, the latest compatible radio controller software (DS1/E1, DS3, OC3, or Ethernet) for proper functionality of the TMN software (refer
to latest TMN release notes on CD-ROM). Load MDR-8000 software in accordance with
procedures in MDR-8000 Instruction Book PN 3DH03220AA or MDR-8000 Users Manual
PN 3EM11931AA.
TMN transport must be properly provisioned on the MDR-8000 radio.
For TMN transport provisioning, see Figure 6 - 4 for the proper radio controller
settings.
SELECT PORTS ON
I/O INTFC MODULE
THAT WILL BE USED
TO INSERT AND DROP
SERVICE CHANNEL
DATA.
TMN
Channel
SELECT CHANNEL 1, 2, OR 3 AS
SERVICE CHANNEL TO BE USED
FOR MCS TRANSPORT AND/OR
PPP TRANSPORT. SELECT OFF
TO DISABLE MCS AND PPP
TRANSPORT.
MCS Transport
RF/Rptr
PPP Transport
None
RF
Rptr
RF/Rptr
MCS-11 DATA
RF/Rptr
None
RF
Rptr
RF/Rptr
MCS-11 AND
IP DATA
Note
For MCS-11 to operate properly, all radio controllers in a system inter- connected by
RF or RPTR must have the same PPP transport provisioning on facing
(interconnecting) interfaces. The valid transport combinations (for terminal or
repeater) are shown. The combination chosen from MCS TRANSPORT and PPP
TRANSPORT determines the RPTR PORT and RF PORT PROTOCOLS supported.
Note
MCS-11 must be enabled even if it is unused.
MDR-1056
08/19/06
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Initial Turnup Section
RADIO PORT
MCS
PPP
RF
NONE
NONE
PASS-THROUGH MODE.
NO LOCAL INSERT CAPABILITY.
RPTR
B
C
D
RF
RPTR
RF/RPTR
NONE
NONE
NONE
MCS-11
DISABLED
MCS-11
DISABLED
MCS-11
MCS-11
Notes:
1) Set PPP Transport to NONE if the repeater and RF ports interface with radios not TMN
compatible.
2) RF at both ends of the hop must be provisioned for the same PPP Transport selection.
3) RPTR at both ends must be provisioned for the same PPP Transport selection.
4) MCS-11 = Non TMN compatible
MCS-11 + PPP = TMN compatible
5) TMN compatibility is determined by the radio controller software and radio provisioning.
ANY
PROTOCOL
MCS-11
RF PORT
MDR-8000
A
RF PORT
MDR-8000
B
ANY PROTOCOL
DISABLED
RPTR PORT
RPTR PORT
MCS TRANSPORT
PPP TRANSPORT
MCS TRANSPORT
PPP TRANSPORT
NONE
NONE
RF
NONE
DISABLED
MCS-11
RF PORT
MDR-8000
C
RF PORT
MDR-8000
D
MCS-11
MCS-11
RPTR PORT
RPTR PORT
MCS TRANSPORT
PPP TRANSPORT
MCS TRANSPORT
PPP TRANSPORT
RPTR
NONE
RF / RPTR
NONE
MDR-1255
12/05/06
3EM20188AAAA
Initial Turnup Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
MCS
NONE
RF
RPTR
RF/RPTR
A
B
C
D
PPP
RF
RF
RF
RF
RADIO PORT
RF
MCS-11 + PPP
MCS-11 + PPP
MCS-11 + PPP
MCS-11 + PPP
RPTR
DISABLED
DISABLED
MCS-11
MCS-11
Notes:
1) Set PPP Transport to RF when the farend radio is TMN compatible, but the radio connected via the
repeater cable is not.
2) RF at both ends of the hop must be provisioned for the same PPP Transport selection.
3) RPTR at both ends must be provisioned for the same PPP Transport selection.
4) MCS-11 = Non TMN compatible
MCS-11 + PPP = TMN compatible
5) TMN compatibility is determined by the radio controller software and radio provisioning.
MCS-11
PPP
MDR-8000
A
MCS-11
PPP
MDR-8000
B
RF PORT
DISABLED
DISABLED
RPTR PORT
RPTR PORT
RF PORT
MCS TRANSPORT
PPP TRANSPORT
MCS TRANSPORT
PPP TRANSPORT
NONE
RF
RF
RF
MCS-11
PPP
MDR-8000
C
MCS-11
PPP
MDR-8000
D
RF PORT
MCS-11
MCS-11
RPTR PORT
RPTR PORT
RF PORT
MCS TRANSPORT
PPP TRANSPORT
MCS TRANSPORT
PPP TRANSPORT
RPTR
RF
RF / RPTR
RF
MDR-1254
12/05/06
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Initial Turnup Section
MCS
NONE
RF
RPTR
RF/RPTR
A
B
C
D
PPP
RPTR
RPTR
RPTR
RPTR
RADIO PORT
RF
DISABLED
MCS-11
DISABLED
MCS-11
RPTR
MCS-11 + PPP
MCS-11 + PPP
MCS-11 + PPP
MCS-11 + PPP
Notes:
1) RF at both ends of the hop must be provisioned for the same PPP Transport selection.
2) RPTR at both ends must be provisioned for the same PPP Transport selection.
3) MCS-11 = Non TMN compatible
MCS-11 + PPP = TMN compatible
4) TMN compatibility is determined by the radio controller software and radio provisioning.
DISABLED
MDR-8000
A
MCS-11
PPP
MCS-11
MDR-8000
B
RF PORT
MCS-11
PPP
RPTR PORT
RF PORT
RPTR PORT
MCS TRANSPORT
PPP TRANSPORT
MCS TRANSPORT
PPP TRANSPORT
NONE
RPTR
RF
RPTR
DISABLED
MDR-8000
C
MCS-11
PPP
MCS-11
MDR-8000
D
RF PORT
MCS-11
PPP
RPTR PORT
RF PORT
RPTR PORT
MCS TRANSPORT
PPP TRANSPORT
MCS TRANSPORT
PPP TRANSPORT
RPTR
RPTR
RF / RPTR
RPTR
MDR-1253
12/05/06
3EM20188AAAA
Initial Turnup Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
MCS
NONE
RF
RPTR
RF/RPTR
A
B
C
D
PPP
RF/RPTR
RF/RPTR
RF/RPTR
RF/RPTR
RADIO PORT
RF
MCS-11 + PPP
MCS-11 + PPP
MCS-11 + PPP
MCS-11 + PPP
RPTR
MCS-11 + PPP
MCS-11 + PPP
MCS-11 + PPP
MCS-11 + PPP
Notes:
1) RF at both ends of the hop must be provisioned for the same PPP Transport selection.
2) RPTR at both ends must be provisioned for the same PPP Transport selection.
3) MCS-11 = Non TMN compatible
MCS-11 + PPP = TMN compatible
4) TMN compatibility is determined by the radio controller software and radio provisioning.
MCS-11
PPP
MDR-8000
A
MCS-11
PPP
MCS-11
PPP
MDR-8000
B
RF PORT
MCS-11
PPP
RPTR PORT
RF PORT
RPTR PORT
MCS TRANSPORT
PPP TRANSPORT
MCS TRANSPORT
PPP TRANSPORT
NONE
RF / RPTR
RF
RF / RPTR
MCS-11
PPP
MDR-8000
C
MCS-11
PPP
MCS-11
PPP
MDR-8000
D
RF PORT
MCS-11
PPP
RPTR PORT
RF PORT
RPTR PORT
MCS TRANSPORT
PPP TRANSPORT
MCS TRANSPORT
PPP TRANSPORT
RPTR
RF / RPTR
RF / RPTR
RF / RPTR
MDR-1252
12/05/06
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Initial Turnup Section
TUI and LLman software applications on the CD must be installed on your PC/laptop
Provisioning parameters values must be readily available for the technicians use during
TMN provisioning. The required parameters are identified in the Provisioning paragraph.
6.11.1
If it does, go to step 3.
If it does not:
1) Double-click the My Computer icon on the desktop
2) Double-click the CD-ROM drive entry
3) Continue on to step 3.
3 Go to the following paragraphs for instructions on installing the individual programs.
and Display the Lower Layers IP Manager installation guide . Click Finish
6 Alcatel Lower Layers settings window opens
7 Scroll System Identifier box and select identifier value
8 Scroll Sub-network Type box and enter Serial Port
9 Scroll Serial Port box, enter correct serial port (usually COM1)
10
6-12
3EM20188AAAA
Initial Turnup Section
11
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
When the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers Help window opens, go to
Para. 6.12 Laptop to TMN Interface Communications Setup.
6.11.1.4.1
Finish and Close. If Digital Signature Not Found window opens, click on Yes.
11 Install New Modem window opens and displays, Modem installation is finished.
Click Finish.
LAPTOP TO TMN INTERFACE COMMUNICATIONS SETUP
Use this procedure to change existing address values of the LLMan interface or to initially set
up the communications port between the laptop (LLMan interface) and the TMN interface
module. Assigning IP parameters that are compatible with the addressing scheme of the radio
allows the local laptop to access both local and remote equipment. If no network compatible
addresses are available at initial provisioning, alternate values may be used but communication through the Alcatel LLMan Virtual Network Card Adapter will be restricted to only the
directly attached TMN interface.When network compatible addresses become available,
repeat the procedure and insert the new addresses to replace the alternate values originally
used and gain access to remote equipment.
6.12
6-13
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Initial Turnup Section
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
Edit
Back
Address
View
Favorites
Tools
Search
Advanced
Help
Folders
T...
Status
LMW-9069F
07/29/03
3EM20188AAAA
Initial Turnup Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Sharing
Connect using:
Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers
Configure
Install...
Uninstall...
Properties
Description
Allows your computer to access resources on a Microsoft
network.
OK
Cancel
LMW-9071F
10/29/04
Protocol (TCP/IP).
5 Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) then click on Properties. Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
6-15
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Initial Turnup Section
10 . 100 . 0 . 1
Subnet mask:
Default gateway:
10 . 100 . 0 . 2
Advanced...
OK
Cancel
LMW-9070
11/16/04
TMN PROVISIONING
Overview
The MDR-8000 TMN with installed software is provisioned via the MDR-8000 TMN Textual
User Interface (TUI) program. This program prompts the user for parameter entries. See
paragraph 5.4.2 for the required parameters.
6.13.1
Provisioning Parameters
The following parameters are required for TMN card provisioning. The initial parameters are
required. The additional parameters can be done by the technician at the time of initial provisioning or at a later time either by the technician or another designated person at the site or
remotely.
6.13.2
The technician must have values for these parameter at hand to perform initial TMN provisioning. The values shown below are the minimum required for each TMN card to be provisioned.
6-16
3EM20188AAAA
Initial Turnup Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Initial Turnup Section
Values for these parameters may be entered after initial provisioning locally or remotely.
SNMP Operations
Date and Time (and NTP)
(NTP Configuration. Actual network design for use of NTP is beyond scope of this
manual)
NTP Status - Enabled/Disabled
NTP Main Server - IP Address
NTP Spare Server - IP Address
Note
If NTP is not used, the module Date and Time should be reset and checked
at regular intervals.
Station Alarms and Controls
Station Alarms (J305 Input Points) - Assign/change user label for each Alarm
point and assign/change polarity for each Alarm point - Active Low/Active High)
Station Controls (J305 Output Points) - Assign/change user label for each Control
point and assign/change polarity for each Control point - Active Low/Active High)
Other Operations
SNMP Operating Configuration
Note
The following information pertains to SNMPv3 Configuration and is for the
use of the Field Technician and the System Administrator.
Note
The TMN Interface can operate in one of four modes; 1) Factory SNMPv3
With Fixed Engine ID (default), 2) SNMPv3 with Automatic Unique Engine
ID, 3) Factory SNMPv2, or 4) Custom SNMP Configuration. Mode descriptions follow:
6-18
3EM20188AAAA
Initial Turnup Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
factory) This mode has two pre-defined user accounts to be used for initial provisioning.
Once initial configuration is complete, the system should be switched to the Automatic Unique Engine ID mode. If not, the system administrator should, for security, create new Administrator and Craft User accounts and delete the pre-defined
accounts. As a minimum, the administrator should change the default Passphrases.
Account modifications can only be performed through SNMPV3 operations.
a. Default Administrator Account:
Username: initial
Privacy Passphrase: adminadmin
Connection Mode: authPriv
Access is restricted to the following MIB objects:
system
snmpUsmMIB
snmpVacmMIB
b. Default Craft User Account (the TUI needs a Craft User Account to provision
SNMP operations):
Username: Craftperson
Authentication Passphrase: craftcraft
Connection Mode: authNoPriv
Access is to all supported MIB objects except:
snmpUsmMIB
snmpVacmMIB
2 SNMPv3 WITH AUTOMATIC UNIQUE ENGINE ID
This is the recommended operating mode since it gives each TMN card a unique
snmpEngineId. Without a unique EngineId, SNMP managers may refuse to communicate with the TMN Interface in SNMP V3 mode. Switch to this mode only after all initial provisioning has been completed.
6-19
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Initial Turnup Section
This mode has only one pre-defined User Account. Once this mode is activated, the
TUI will no longer have SNMPV3 access until the administrator creates a Craft
User Account.
Administrator Account:
Username: initial
Privacy Passphrase: adminadmin
Connection Mode: authPriv
Access is restricted to the following MIB objects:
system
snmpUsmMIB
snmpVacmMIB
3 FACTORY SNMPv2
This configuration sets the module for SNMPv2c compatibility. In this mode, the
default Communities are:
Read-Only: public
Read-Write: private
The Communities are configurable.
4 CUSTOM SNMP CONFIGURATION
The TUI supports upload of a custom configuration file but it cannot customize the configuration file. Configuration of a custom file is beyond the scope of this document.
MDR-8000 TMN TUI (this information applies only to TMN Version 2.2 and later)
Para. 5.4.3.1 shows the Main Menu headings of the TUI. Each of these headings, when
selected, displays additional sub-menus with choices of action. To complete an action, the values for the parameters from the prerequisites list (para. 5.4.2) must be entered. The procedure
in each of the sub-menus is self-explanatory and each series of menus includes a Help choice.
Of the Main Menu headings, 2)IP and Basic Module Configuration, 3)Software Upgrade, and
5)Other Operations are usually the only ones used for TMN module provisioning. These submenus and their own sub-menus are described in para. 5.4.3.2, TUI Main Menu Choices.
6.13.3
1) Exit
2) IP and Basic Module Configuration
3) Software Upgrade
4) SNMP Operations
5) Other Operations
6) Help
6-20
3EM20188AAAA
Initial Turnup Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
6.13.3.2
6.13.3.2.1
This menu is used for primary provisioning of the TMN module. Definitions of the selections
follow the selection titles.
1) Go Back
2)
3)
4)
5)
Change WAN Settings (used for provisioning) - Holds network information that applies to the PPP ports and the SNMP agent
6)
Change Static Routes Contains the Static Route List. Each block consists of a definition of a new route.
7)
Change OSPF Areas Contains the OSPF Area List with information to
configure OSPF areas.
8)
9)
Change Front Panel PPP Contains the information to describe and configure the front panel PPP port
10) Change Shelf Configuration Allows the user to identify the shelf as
Standard or Compact
11) Change RIP LAN Configuration
12) Change RIP WAN Configuration
13) Commit to Module Saves the currently displayed provisioning values to
the modules
14) Save Configuration Directory
15) HELP
6.13.3.2.2
3) Software Upgrade
This menu is used for upgrading the TMN module software using a non-SNMP download
method. This method is required to upgrade from release 1.x to 2.x. The Software Upgrade
sub-menus are displayed below:
Module Connection Method Menu
1)
Cancel
2)
Rawloader Mode
3)
LLMan
4)
Standard TCP/IP
5)
Help
6-21
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Initial Turnup Section
Rawloader Mode
This selection requires the TMN Module to be out of service. The method utilizes the Alcatel
SIBDL Serial Modem Adapter software and requires the Microsoft RASDIAL utility.
3)
LLMan
This method is similar to the Standard TCP/IP method that operates over a serial cable
instead of the Ethernet. It will attempt to automatically start the LLMan utility, if it is not
already running, and determine the IP address of the TMN card.
4)
Standard TCP/IP
4) SNMP Operations
3)
Manager Registration
4)
5)
6)
Software Downloads
7)
IP Configuration
8)
NE System Information
9)
CLA Reset
10) Help
6.13.3.2.4
5) Other Operations
Provides the user access to SNMP Communities, password management, SNMP Operating
Configuration, database deletion, and others.
1) Done
6-22
2)
SNMP Communities
3)
4)
Additional Information
5)
Engineering Utilities
6)
Force A Reset
7)
Delete Database
8)
9)
3EM20188AAAA
Initial Turnup Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
6.13.4
LLMan screen will be used as a reference throughout this procedure. Leave the
LLMan screen open during the remainder of the procedure.
4 Start the TUI program - click on Start>Programs>Alcatel>MDR8000>TUI>MDR8000 TMN TUI
5 Do you want to modify existing information on the TMN interface card or create a new
setup?
Modify existing? Go to step 6.
Create new setup? Go to step 8.
TO RETRIEVE CURRENT PROVISIONING
6 From IP and Basic Module Configuration menu, select 2) Get Configuration From
Module.
7 Wait for process to complete; TUI prompt will appear when complete.
Configuration menu.
TO CHANGE THE LAN SETTINGS
9 Select 4) Change LAN Settings. Change the following as required:
IP ADDRESS
Net Mask
Routing Protocol
OSPF AREA
STATE
10 When complete, select 1) Done.
IP ADDRESS
Routing Protocol
OSPF AREA
SNMP Port
6-23
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Initial Turnup Section
ADD ROUTE
DELETE ROUTE
14 Follow displayed sub-menu directions to complete changes.
PPP Mode
State
20 When complete, select 1) Done.
6-24
3EM20188AAAA
Initial Turnup Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Note
It is not unusual to experience flashing of the ALM LED and more than one
cold start trap when TMN interface module is unseated for reboot.
31 After reboot completes (approximately 30 seconds). ALM indicator on module front
Wait a minimum of 10 seconds, and then reseat module in backplane connector. ALM
indicator on module front panel will light to indicate reboot is in progress.
33 After LLMan reestablishes a connection, the Adjacent IP Address should now be the
6-25
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Initial Turnup Section
STATION ALARMS
6 From Station Alarm and Control Points menu, select 2) Station Alarms (J305 Input
Points).
7 From Station Alarm Input Points menu, select desired parameters and insert values.
put Points).
9 From Station Controls Output Points menu, select desired parameters and insert
values.
Change User Labels: Name
Change Polarity: Active Low/Active High
Change External State: on/off
TO MODIFY SNMP CONFIGURATION
6-26
3EM20188AAAA
Initial Turnup Section
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
For this selection follow actions described below in Configuring for SNMPv2 Operation.
12)Enable automatic Engine ID generation
(This is the recommended operating mode. When this mode is selected, any
defined SNMP user accounts will be deleted, and only the default admin account
will remain. Convert the module to this mode only after all other provisioning
using the TUI is complete. Once this mode is selected, the TUI will NOT be able to
perform any additional provisioning through SNMP until a system administrator
creates a new craft level account for TUI users).
13)Commit Custom SNMP Config
14)Get Current SNMP Operating Configuration File
15)Help
TO CONFIGURING FOR SNMPV2 OPERATION
1 From Main Menu, select 5) Other Operations.
2 From Other Operations menu, select 2) SNMP Communities (This is recommended to pre-
vent unauthorized users from accessing or changing settings using the SNMP interface).
3 Enter the new read Community string (max of 40 characters), or press ENTER to
6-27
6-28
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Operation Section
OPERATION
7.1
GENERAL
This section contains turn-on, normal operation, turn-off, and emergency operating procedures plus a description of controls. indicators, test points, and connectors for the MDR-8000
Series Microwave Digital Radios.
Note
Before performing any procedures, operating personnel should become
familiar with the locations of power distribution units and circuit breakers.
If an equipment performance problem occurs during the following procedures, refer to the Maintenance section.
7.2
TURN-ON
The radio is designed to operate continuously without operator intervention. After initial
installation and power turn-on, operating procedures are limited to periodic visual lamp
checks, alarm checks, and answering or initiating orderwire service calls. Turn-on procedures
are needed only if the system has been turned off due to a malfunction or during maintenance.
The following turn-on procedures apply to both the terminal and repeater configurations.
WARNING
Possibility of
Damage
to Equipment
Exposure to energy radiated at microwave frequencies can cause eye damage and eventual blindness. Do not operate the system with either the
transmit or the receive waveguide por t unterminated. Do not look into the
waveguide run or the antenna of an operating radio.
Note
Until all radios in the transmission link are interconnected, turned on, and
operating properly, alarm conditions may exist.
Perform the following procedure to turn on the MDR-8000 series radios:
1
Verify that power distribution unit rack alarm indicator (if any) is not lighted. If
indicator is lighted, troubleshoot as described in the Maintenance section.
Verify that no red indicators are lighted. If a red indicator is lit, troubleshoot as
described in the Maintenance section.
7-1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Operation Section
3EM20188AAAA
7.3
USER SYSTEM INTERFACE (USI) PROVISIONING FUNCTION/OPERATION
The User System Interface (USI) software is used for maintenance and support of the radio
including fault and status reporting. Refer to the Initial Turn-Up section for instructions on
loading and running the software. Refer to the Users Guide section for descriptions and functions of the menus.
Note
Refer to the Software Release Notes before performing any operating, provisioning, or maintenance function on this equipment. The Software Release
Notes may contain information affecting these functions that is not contained in this instruction manual.
7.4
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Note
The USI computer is the main control for the radio. If instructions for setting
up the USI computer are needed, refer to Initial Turn-Up section.
After installation and turn-on, operating procedures are limited to periodic alarm checks and,
when necessary, answering or initiating orderwire calls. Automatic and manual switching are
provided for equipment protection. Manual switching may be accomplished using the Control
screen on the USI computer or the switches on the front panel of the controller module. The
following paragraphs provide operating procedures for manual switchover of protected radio
systems.
7.4.1
Note
When used in conjunction with a RCVR manual switch, press the OVRD
switch to lock the receiver on line regardless of alarms. Press again to
unlock.
7-2
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Operation Section
Controller Switch
Perform RCVR manual switch (Figure 7 - 1) using controls on front panel of controller
module.
ALM
OFF
NORM
SHLF
ALM
ALM
ON
LINE
TX
L
A
B
ALM
ON
LINE
RX
L
A
B
ALM
ON
LINE
I/O
L
A
NOTE
OVERRIDE (OVRD) LOCKS XMTR, RCVR, OR
I/O MODULE, SELECTED ABOVE IN-SERVICE,
REGARDLESS OF ALARMS.
POLL
LCL
RMT
A
C
O
/
L
T
TO ENABLE OVERRIDE:
1. PRESS AND HOLD TX A/B ON LINE,
RX A/B ON LINE, OR I/O A/B ON LINE
SWITCH.
2. TOGGLE ACO/LT OVRD SWITCH TO OVRD
POSITION.
3. RELEASE A/B ON LINE SWITCH.
RSP
RSP
O
V
R
D
CMD
RF
RPTR
IDLE
TO DISABLE OVERRIDE:
TOGGLE ACO/LT OVRD SWITCH TO OVRD
POSITION.
T
E
L
U
S
I
LMW-5078
08/15/02
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Operation Section
3EM20188AAAA
USI Switch
Perform RCVR manual switch (Figure 7 - 2) using the USI control screen.
F5
F6
Analog Monitor
F7
Performance
F8
Station Alarm
User Control
F9
Provisioning
LOCAL CONTROLS
ELMC Address:
J7915
Description:
SILVERTON
Communicating*
IN-SERVICE
A Transmitter On Line
A Receiver On Line
Line 1 loopback
2. SELECT RCVR TO PUT IN-SERVICE.
Line 2 loopback
SYSTEM LOOP-BACK
3. SELECT YES ON CONFIRMATION
MESSAGE
Line 3 loopback
CONTROLS
AUSER
I/O LOOPBACK
TO
ENABLE FUNCTION.
B Receiver On Line
Control
#1
B I/O
4. LOOPBACK
VERIFY
GREEN IN-SERVICE STATUS CIRCLE DISPLAYS.
A I/O On Line
Control #2
B I/O On Line
Control #3
Control #4
Control #5
Control #6
B Transmitter On Line
1:44:19 PM
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
7.4.2
3EM20188AAAA
Operation Section
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
Switching the radio transmitter may momentarily interrupt traf fic. Before switching the transmitter, obtain permission from the
proper authority.
Note
When used in conjunction with a XMTR manual switch, press the OVRD
switch to lock the XMTR on line regardless of alarms. Press again to unlock.
Controller Switch
Perform XMTR manual switch (Figure 7 - 1) using controls on front panel of controller
module.
USI Switch
Perform XMTR manual switch (Figure 7 - 3) using the USI control screen.
7.4.3
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
Traffic and auxiliary channel service will be momentarily interrupted. Obtain proper authorization before making this switch.
Note
When used in conjunction with an I/O interface manual switch, press the
OVRD switch to lock the I/O interface on line regardless of alarms. Press
again to unlock.
7-5
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Operation Section
3EM20188AAAA
F5
Alarm Status
F6
Analog Monitor
F7
Performance
F8
Station Alarm
User Control
F9
Provisioning
LOCAL CONTROLS
ELMC Address:
J7915
Description:
SILVERTON
Communicating*
IN-SERVICE
SYSTEM LOOP-BACK
A Transmitter On Line
B Transmitter On Line
A Receiver On Line
Line STATUS
2 loopback
B I/O
LOOPBACK
3. VERIFY
GREEN IN-SERVICE
CIRCLE DISPLAYS.
Line 3 loopback
USER CONTROLS
B Receiver On Line
Control #1
A I/O On Line
Control #2
B I/O On Line
Control #3
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
Control #4
Switching the radio transmitter may momentarily interrupt
Control
#5 Switching I/Os will momentarily interrupt traffic and
traffic.
B ATPC HIGH Power Lock
Control
#6
auxiliary
channel service. Before switching, obtain permission
A
ATPC
LOW
Power
Lock
B
ATPC
LOW
Power
Lock
Thursday, November 30, 2000 1:44:19 PM USI Version R1.02
Controller Version R1.02
from the proper authority.
A ATPC HIGH Power Lock
LMW-5076-SM
06/12/04
7-6
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Operation Section
F5
F6
Analog Monitor
F7
Performance
F8
Station Alarm
F9
User Control
Provisioning
LOCAL CONTROLS
ELMC Address:
J7915
Description:
SILVERTON
Communicating*
IN-SERVICE
SYSTEM LOOP-BACK
A Transmitter On Line
A I/O LOOPBACK
Line 1 loopback
B Transmitter On Line
B I/O LOOPBACK
Line 2 loopback
A Receiver On Line
USER
CONTROLS
2. SELECT
I/O INTERFACE MODULE TO PUT IN-SERVICE.
B Receiver On Line
A I/O On Line
Control #1
3. SELECT YES ON CONFIRMATION MESSAGE
TO#2
ENABLE FUNCTION.
Control
B I/O On Line
Control
#3 GREEN IN-SERVICE STATUS CIRCLE DISPLAYS.
4. VERIFY
Control #4
Control #5
Control #6
Line 3 loopback
1:44:19 PM
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
7.4.4
Operation Section
3EM20188AAAA
MCS-11 Operation
An Operational Support System (OSS) provides a means to remotely monitor and control an
MDR-8000 radio via an MCS-11 Monitor and Control System polling master. A Remote Station Summary (RSS), a Remote Detail Scanner (RDS), a Remote Analog Scanner (RAS), and a
Remote Control Decoder (RCD) are available at the polling master for each radio network element. The remote station OSS addresses are programmed during radio provisioning using the
USI laptop computer. (Refer to radio provisioning in the Initial Turn-Up section.) Refer to
Appendix B at the end of this instruction book for MCS-11 details, including alarm/status
mapping and connector information.
7.4.5
Lamp Tests
Perform lamp tests by pressing and holding ACO/LT OVRD switch on controller front panel in
ACO/LT position. All indicators on controller and indicators on all equipped modules should
light. Release ACO/LT OVRD switch.
7.4.6
Alarm Checks
The USI Alarm and Status screens provide alarms and status for the radio. Refer to description of alarms and status in the Maintenance Section.
7.4.7
Orderwire Operation
These operating procedures describe use of the orderwire system to answer incoming calls and
initiate outgoing calls. The DTMF function allows the user to ring the dialed station.
7.4.8
7.4.9
Dial the 3-digit DTMF extension on the telephone keypad to call specific party or
press the * key on keypad to initiate CALL signaling to all stations.
Note
Call can be heard by all stations.
1
When the buzzer sounds, alerting the operator there is an incoming call, connect
telephone to J302 TEL jack on front panel of AE-37( ) Controller and turn ONHOOK/OFF-HOOK switch to OFF-Hook position.
Note
During the DTMF dialing process, if an incorrect number sequence has been
dialed, press # to reset DTMF digit accumulator to zero. A redial can then be
initiated.
7-8
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Operation Section
Note
If 1.5 seconds elapse between dialed digits, the DTMF digit accumulator
resets to zero, and a redial must be initiated.
Note
Caller can press # to clear all flashing CALL indicators at all DTMF sites
equipped with the DTMF signaling option (a tone is transmitted).
7.5
TURN-OFF PROCEDURE
The radio is designed for continuous operation. If power must be removed while performing
maintenance on a particular cabinet or shelf, power can be removed by turning off associated
power supplies.
Note
Normally, the turn-off procedures are not used. System design allows maintenance of the rack without interrupting service. It is recommended that
turn-off be performed only in an emergency.
7.6
EMERGENCY OPERATION
If an emergency occurs, such as a short circuit or a fire, turn off all MDR-8000 Microwave Digital Radio power supplies as quickly as possible.
7.7
MODEM OPERATION
Refer to Appendix F for modem connection and setup procedures.
7.8
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
7-9
7-10
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
User Guide Section
USER GUIDE
8.1
GENERAL
This section contains general system description information, basic screen access information,
and detailed descriptions of screens not used or described in other sections. Detailed descriptions of screens used in other sections are not repeated in this section. For example, refer to
Initial Turnup for provisioning screen functions. Refer to troubleshooting in Maintenance for
detailed alarm information. Where there are operational differences, DS1/E1, DS3, and OC3/
STM-1 screens are shown separately.
8.2
MDR-8000 SOFTWARE
The MDR-8000 software operates under a Windows 98, NT, 2000 or XP environment on an
IBM-compatible Pentium-based PC/laptop. See Figure 8 - 1. MDR-8000 software consists of
applications interface or User System Interface (USI) software and embedded software in the
controller.
8.2.1
USI Software
USI software resides on the users PC/laptop and provides the interface (APPS INTFC) with
the controller software that resides on the radio controller module. This interface allows the
user to view radio functions and parameters on screens and control some functions/parameters via provisioning and control screens.
8.2.2
Controller Software
Controller Version Controller software resides on the microcontroller registers on the radio
controller module. Controller software is protected by storing the same code in redundant primary and secondary registers. The controller software consists of Application (APPS) code and
boot codes.
Boot Code Initializes microcontroller registers, checks boot and APPS checksums, and
performs RAM test.
APPS Code Interfaces with the USI software files and MCS-11 ports. The APPS code
also initializes provisioning.
8-1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
PLATFORM
WINDOWS 98, NT, 2000, XP
APPS
INTFC
EMBEDDED
SOFTWARE
USI
SOFTWARE
CONTROLLER
SOFTWARE
(PRIMARY)
DNLD
FILES
PROV
DATA
ALM
DATA
PERF
DATA
APPS
CODE
BOOT
CODE
(SECONDARY
REDUNDANT
SOFTWARE)
CTRL
DATA
LMW-7230
02/02/04
LOCAL/NETWORK MANAGEMENT
Note
At initial turnup, the MDR-8000 radios at each site must be provisioned onsite using local provisioning menus on the USI computer. Radio configuration, mode of operation, equipment configuration provisioning, and entering/changing remote addresses can only be performed locally. After the
remote address has been set locally, and if the ELMC option key with remote
provisioning is installed on the AE-37Y Controller, the user can change
transmit switching and receive switching functions, DS1, E1, DS3, and
OC3/STM-1 functions, and fault alarm provisioning remotely.
Local communication is achieved by connecting an RS-232 cable from the RS-232 port on the
USI terminal to the 9-pin (female) DB connector mounted on the front panel of the AE-37 ( )
controller module located on the MDR-8000 shelf. Communication between the MDR-8000
software application and the MDR-8000 shelf is via ASCII bit stream protocols over an RS232 connection. The RS-232 connection may or may not involve a modem. Radio overhead
channels are used to communicate with remote addressable radios in a common network.
The Extended Link Monitor Control (ELMC) function allows the customer to monitor and
control multiple addressable radios (one radio at a time) from one location. The ELMC monitor and control data is carried in the overhead, separate from traffic.
8-2
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
User Guide Section
8.4
PC HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Customer preferences and site requirements determine whether the PC is a desktop or laptop
machine. The MDR-8000 software application requires one of the PC-based hardware platforms from Table 8 - 1.
Characteristics
CPU
Clock Speed
Graphics
VGA
Display
Color
Hard Disk
Required
Mouse
Required
CD ROM Drive
Required
Software Platform
8.5
PC SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
The system application requires the following software:
A completely installed and operational Windows 98, NT, 2000 or XP software
platform
Downloadable shelf software for MDR-8000.
Note
Microsoft Windows and MDR-8000 application software must be installed
on the same disk drive and within the same sub-directory to ensure proper
operation.
8.6
SOFTWARE PACKAGING
The CD ROM supplied with the equipment contains USI and download software, release
notes, and up-grade procedure
8.7
MODEM
A modem is required to communicate between a PC and a radio over telephone lines. Refer to
Appendix F for details.
8-3
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
8.8
PRINTERS
A printer is optional, but recommended. A printer is beneficial for the following reasons:
To print actual software screens
To print lists of current alarms and conditions
To print alarm log.
Any printers compatible with Windows and the PC can be used for printing. If a printer is
added to the PC configuration, a parallel port must be available.
To establish port location and set up characteristics of the printer, use the Windows Control
Panel to display the printer dialog box. For additional information on printer setup, refer to
Windows documentation.
8.9
SECURITY MANAGEMENT
Note
A password is not required to operate the MDR-8000. The radio is shipped
without a password and if a password is desired, it must be entered using
the Change Password screen. Once entered initially, the password must be
entered each time the user wants to view screens (level 1 password required)
or download software (level 2 password required).
The MDR-8000 application software offers user password security management using two different levels of passwords. User security deals with access level assigned to specific users. The
level of user security affects the type and number of commands an individual user may execute. This prevents an unqualified users access to high-level commands.
Level 1 password allows the user to view screens. Level 2 password allows access to all functions and is the highest level. A level 2 password is required anytime a change to the software
is saved (downloaded).
8.9.1
Enter/Change Password
The Change Password screen is used to initially enter passwords or change existing passwords. Passwords can be up to 5 characters long and have the following characteristics:
Case sensitive
Special characters ok
Alphanumeric.
8-4
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
User Guide Section
Change Password --
Save Password
Cancel
Forgot Password
MDR-1033
09/02/04
OK
Forgot Password
Cancel
MDR-1032
09/02/04
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
8.10
Note
All users must have a basic working knowledge of the Windows environment. If Windows experience is lacking, it would be beneficial to learn the
basics. Windows 98/NT/2000 provides a tutorial for this purpose. Practice
using the mouse, opening and closing menus, and become familiar with
Windows workspaces.
To launch MDR-8000 from Windows 98/NT/2000/XP, do the following:
1
8.11
MAIN WINDOW
See Figure 8 - 3 for main window details. The main window includes a title bar, menu bar, tool
bar, and frame. The frame is hereafter referred to as application window. Double click on the
radio icon to establish communication. The COM 1-4 icon will display and the radio and COM
icons are joined by a line, indicating communication is established. If not, change COM port.
Refer to the Initial Turnup section.
8-6
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
User Guide Section
Setup
Options
F4
F5
Analog Monitor
Alarm Status
ELMC Address:
F6
R103
LCL
F7
Performance
FAR RMT
F8
Station Alarm
F9
User Control
Provisioning
LOCAL MAIN
Communicating***
INDICATES LAPTOP IS
COMMUNICATING WITH
RADIO CONTROLLER
Com 1
INDICATES LAPTOP
IS CONNECTED TO
RADIO CONTROLLER
R101
1:33:34 AM
ELMC
ADDRESS
VERSION OF SOFTWARE
LOADED ON PC/LAPTOP
LMW-7231
10/16/05
VERSION OF SOFTWARE
DOWNLOADED TO RADIO
CONTROLLER
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
8.12
APPLICATION WINDOW
See Figure 8 - 4. Each application window includes a title bar, menu bar, tool bar, and application workspace. The following paragraphs describe application window components.
ELMC ADDRESS
AND DESCRIPTION
MINIMIZE BUTTON
TITLE BAR
WINDOW TITLE
MAXIMIZE BUTTON
CLOSE BUTTON
Sample Application
MENU BAR
TOOL BAR
Application Workspace
Status Bar
MOUSE POINTER
WINDOW BORDER
LMW-1024-sm
10/27/99
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
User Guide Section
F4
Acknowledge
F5
Alarm Status
F6
F7
Analog Monitor
Communicating***
RECEIVER
TRANSMITER
A
F9
Performance
STATUS
F8
CLICK HERE
TO OPEN User
ELMC
ADDRESS
LIST SCREEN
Station Alarm
Control
Provisioning
XMT On Line
COMMON
A
STATUS
RCV ON LINE
COMMON LOSS
CHANNEL FAIL
PA TEMP
PA POWER
Double
EYE
CLOSUREClick
TRANSMIT
RSL STATUS
ATPC HIGH
PATH DISTORTION
ELMC's
Power Regulator
COMMAND PATH
on the Elmc to
OFFSelect
NORMAL Address:
CONTROLLER
Descriptions
INVENTORY
[LOCAL]
SYNC LOSS
RADIO ID
[FAREND]
RING BROKEN
DS3 Frame Loss
<NEW>
DS3 Degraded
R101
-- OC3 South Middle Top DS1 Input Loss
DS1 XMT ALARM
DS3 AIS Det.
R102
-- OC3 South Middle Bottom
DS1 AIS INSERT
DS3 AIS Ins.
R103
-- OC3 South West Top
DS1 RCV ALARM
R104
-- OC3 South West Bottom
R105
-- OC3 South East Top
R106
-- OC3 South East Bottom
R107
-- DS1 North West Top
DS3 Degraded
DS3 AIS Detect
1:44:19 PM
DSI Provisioning
ATPC TIMEOUT
DS3 Frame Loss
I/O On Line
PROVISIONINGLIST
ELMCRCV
ADDRESS
XMT Provisioning
STATUS
PROV. MISMATCH
Exit
LMW-7232
09/06/05
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
8.13
FILE DROP-DOWN MENU
See Figure 8 - 6 for the file drop-down menu. Refer to the following paragraphs for details.
Ctrl+N
Open ELMC
Ctrl+O
Save ELMC
Ctrl+S
Save ELMC As
Exit
LMW-1000-SM
01/29/04
8-10
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
User Guide Section
Ctrl+N
ELMC Address
Ctrl+0
Open ELMC
Ctrl+5
Save ELMC
Save ELMC As
Exit
Ctrl+X
DESCRIPTION
Add Elmc=>
Delete Elmc
Save
Cancel
4. CLICK HERE
TO SAVE ELMC
ADDRESS ON
LIST
3. CLICK HERE
TO ADD ADDRESS
TO LIST
2. TYPE IN DESCRIPTION IF DESIRED (OPTIONAL)
1. TYPE IN UNIQUE ADDRESS
5 CHARACTERS
CASE SENSITIVE
ALPHANUMERIC NO SPACE, COMMAS,
SPECIAL CHARACTERS
UNIQUE TO RADIO, NOT REPEATABLE
LMW-7233
01/29/04
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Ctrl+N
Open ELMC
Ctrl+0
Save ELMC
Ctrl+S
Save ELMC As
Exit
Ctrl+X
Open ELMC
Look in:
History
Winusi13
East_elmc.dat - List of ELMC Addresses #1
West_lab_elmc.dat - List of ELMC Addresses #2
Mid_elmc.dat - List of ELMC Addresses #3
Desktop
My Computer
My Network P...
File name:
File of type:
Open
Data Files (*.dat)
Cancel
LMW-7234
02/04/04
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
User Guide Section
Ctrl+N
Open ELMC
Ctrl+0
Save ELMC
Ctrl+S
Save ELMC As
Exit
Ctrl+X
Save As
Save in:
History
Winusi13
East_elmc.dat - List of ELMC Addresses #1
West_lab_elmc.dat - List of ELMC Addresses #2
Mid_elmc.dat - List of ELMC Addresses #3
Desktop
My Computer
My Network P...
File name:
test_elmc.dat
File of type:
Save
Cancel
Note
Saving ELMC means saving the ELMC Address action (e.g.: added to list, deleted from list,
new) plus saving names assigned to the Setup Station Alarm Names screen and Setup
LMW-7235
Control Names screen.
02/04/04
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Setup
Options
Communication Options
Modem Dial-Up
Connect
New Controller
Disconnect
Firmware Upgrade
OPEN MODEM
DIAL-UP SCREEN
DISCONNECT MODEM
Download
LMW-3135-SM
01/29/04
Communications Options
This option opens the modem dial-up screen to connect to modem or disconnect modem. See
Figure 8 - 11 for modem dial-up screen.
Modem Dial-Up
Initialization String
ATDT
Phone Number
2010
Setting
2400,N,8,1
Com-Port
COM 1
Exit
Save Phone
Number
DialUp
LMW-5031-SM
06/23/01
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
8.13.5.2
3EM20188AAAA
User Guide Section
New Controller
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
Prevents radio from operating on wrong firmware. The controller will automatically re-boot if the firmware is correct. If an attempt is made to install a controller
with firmware from a different type radio (i.e.; DS3 versus DS1 or OC3/STM-1),
the controller will not re-boot. Correct firmware will first have to be installed.
Prevents radio from operating on wrong provisioning. This function gives the user
time to reprovision a replacement controller module while the radio continues to
operate on the provisioning stored in the controller module being replaced. A provisioning hold message is displayed while the function is active. When provisioning is saved, the radio will return to normal operation and use the provisioning
stored in the replacement controller.
8-15
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Firmware Upgrade
8.13.5.3
This function is designed to support the new controller function and provides access to the
download screen for upgrading/changing software. See Figure 8 - 12 for the Firmware
Upgrade Download Screen.
F4
Prov. Save
ELMC Address:
F5
Alarm Status
F6
Analog Monitor
R101
F7
Performance
Station Alarm
F8
F9
User Control
Provisioning
REMOTE DOWNLOAD
Communicating
c:
C:\
windnld
8000 OC3
css13_19 dat
css13_20 dat
css13_21 dat
Details
CSS 11 _xx.dat =
DS1/E1 Files
_xx.dat
DS3 Files
5:28:23 CSS
PM 12 USI
Version=R1.01
MDR-8000 OC3
CSS 13 _xx.dat =
OC3 Files
LMW-7062-SM
01/29/04
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
9
3EM20188
Maintenance Section
MAINTENANCE
INTRODUCTION
This section contains information and procedures to aid in restoring the equipment to
its proper operating condition after it has been determined that a problem exists.
9.1
The following warnings and cautions apply while operating, performance testing, troubleshooting, or repairing the MDR-8000 series radios.
DANGER
Possibility of
Injury
to Personnel
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
9-1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
3EM20188
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
Note
Ensure that all antennas are properly aligned and waveguide is in good
physical condition.
Note
Before performing procedures that might in any way affect transmission, it
is recommended that the person performing the procedure understand the
FCC Rules and Regulations pertaining to the equipment and be properly
authorized to operate the equipment.
MAINTENANCE PHILOSOPHY
This section provides information and procedures for equipment maintenance down to the
module level. Module repair is not covered in this manual. A replacement procedure for the
crystal oscillator subboard on the transmitter and receiver modules is provided to enable
future use of the local oscillator at a different frequency in another application or at another
location. Use the drawings in the appendix and those in the station drawing package to support the procedures in this section
9.2
The use of maintenance procedures in this section may result from failure of a periodic check,
an alarm indication, or unacceptable performance. These problems should normally be
resolved as shown in the maintenance philosophy flow chart (Figure 9 - 1).
9-2
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188
Maintenance Section
Alarm
Indication
Para. 9.6
Periodic Check
Failure*
Para. 9.7
Performance
Screen Errors
Para. 9.9.3
Perform
Trouble Analysis
Para. 9.9 thru Para. 9.10
Cause
of
Alarm
Module Replacement
Required
Refer to Module
Replacement Table
Table 9 - 3
Module
Adjustment
Required
No
Yes
Maintenance
Complete
Yes
Problem
Resolved
No
Perform Additional
Troubleshooting Using Theory
and Diagrams Sections as
Required to Resolve Problem
*If Applicable
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
3EM20188
Essential Characteristics
Used On
Chart 12, XMTR Carrier Null Adjustment
Using DVM
PN 695-0675-003
As Required
9-4
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188
Maintenance Section
Essential
Characteristics
Adapter
Type N Male Interface Adapter
(Qty. 2 Required)
Tyco Electronics 1048789-1
Attenuator
Narda 768-30
Bit Error Rate Test Set
Acterna ANT-5
Data Rate
Modulation Scheme
Communications Analyzer w/DS1
Package
Acterna TB 2310-P4
D1 Data Rate
DS1 Modulation Scheme
Communications Analyzer w/DS3
Package
Acterna TB 2310-P5
DS3 Data Rate
DS3 Modulation Scheme
Communications Analyzer w/OC3
Package
Acterna TB 2310-P2
Used On
Flexible RF Test Cable
30 dB, 50 Ohms,
20 Watts
2.048 Mb/s,
HDB3
Over-The-Hop DS1 BER Threshold Test
1.544 Mb/s,
B8ZS or AMI
Over-The-Hop DS3 BER Threshold Test
44.736 Mb/s,
64 QAM
Over-The-Hop OC3/STM-1 BER Threshold Test
155.52 Mb/s
Spectrum Analyzer
-8 to -28 dBM,
1310/1550 nm
9-5
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
3EM20188
MDR-8000 ALARMS
MDR-8000 Alarms are displayed on:
9.6
Alarm names are radio/alarm equipment dependent. The Alarm List identifies every alarm
name indicated by the above alarm display equipment, in alphabetic order. By clicking on the
alarm name, the user can go straight to the description, cause, effect, and action for that
alarm, regardless of where the alarm is displayed. The alarm list is a summary of alarms
designed for use by NOC personnel. Refer to the detail troubleshooting later in this section for
more information.
ALARM MONITORING AND INSPECTION
Perform the following checks whenever a station is entered:
9.7
1 Verify that no alarms are lighted; only the green status indicators should be lighted.
2 Momentarily press LAMP TEST switch. Verify all indicators light.
Note
Keeping records of errors and alarm history can be an aid to system troubleshooting.
Note
The local status alarms screen displays the alarms of the radio to which the
USI is connected, either physically or addressed via the ELMC.
3 Using the USI computer, check local alarms on the Local Status Alarms screen.
9-6
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188
Maintenance Section
AE37( )
CNTLR
C1
MDR8000
SHELF
TO CONNECTOR J301
(CONNECTS TO
AE37 CONTROLLER)
RS232C
INTERFACE CABLE
USI
TERMINAL
RS232C PORT
MW21100661
101598
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
3EM20188
RADIO TROUBLESHOOTING
The digital radio system is equipped with alarm circuitry and automatic switching (in hotstandby, frequency diversity, and space diversity configurations) to provide protection against
loss of traffic. This automatic switching, coupled with adaptive equalization of multipath distortion, provides protection against equipment outage and propagation variations. Because of
the finite life of electronic equipment, failures occur.
9.9
alarm. Status Alarm screen for the radio selected will display.
3 Click on the alarm name on the Status Alarm screen for description and procedure.
9.9.2.1
Slow lockup at initial turnup is defined as lockup occurring five minutes or more after powerup. If the radio is non-standby/no space diversity (one RCVR in A side), replace the RCVR.
If radio is non-standby space diversity or hot-standby (two RCVRs, A and B sides) problem is
probably the XMTR at the farend of the hop. The most common cause of slow lockup is incorrect carrier null. First try switching XMTRs. If this clears the problem, perform carrier null
(Chart 10, Chart 11 or Chart 12) and XMTR/PA calibration procedure (Chart 13 or
Chart 17) on the off-line XMTR. If the problem is not cleared, replace the XMTR.
9.9.2.2 Slow Lockup During Normal Operation
Slow lockup after a bad fade or other temporary interruption is defined as lockup occurring
less than a second after RSL is restored. Troubleshooting this type of slow lockup requires
knowing what the RSL is. Check RSL using the procedure in Appendix G.
9-8
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188
Maintenance Section
If the RSL is at least 4 to 5 dB above RCV threshold, the two most probable causes are carrier
leakage and the RCVR local oscillator. Perform carrier null test (Chart 9/10) on the farend
XMTR. If slow lockup continues, remove and replace the RCVR crystal oscillator subboard.
If the RSL is below or 1 to 3 dB above RCVR threshold, wait until RSL improves to at least 4
to 5 dB above RCVR threshold before starting troubleshooting.
Troubleshooting Performance Screen Errors
Path and intermod problems can occur that cause errors to be indicated on the Performance
monitor screens that are not severe enough to generate an alarm on the USI Alarm and Status
screen. Errors of this type fall into two categories: burst and dribbling errors.
9.9.3
The performance screens can be a useful tool in troubleshooting a radio with and without
alarms being indicated on the Status Alarm screen.
To use the Performance screens for troubleshooting:
1. Enter the troubleshooting guide. Main screen will open.
2. On the Main screen, click on the type radio (DS1, DS3, OC3/STM-1, or ETH). Status
Alarm screen for the radio type selected will display.
3. Click on Performance on the toolbar (or click on View and then Performance on the
dropdown list). The performance screen for the radio type will be displayed.
4. Scroll the curser over the screen searching for active buttons.
5. Click on the active button to view that functions description.
9.9.3.1
Burst errors are defined as multiple errors in a very short time. Burst errors can be caused
by many things, including loose connections on cable or waveguide at either end of the hop.
A popping oscillator can cause burst type errors. Burst errors can be identified by a high
number of Errors and low number of Error Seconds on the Performance screens. The most
probable cause of burst errors is a loose connection. Check/repair all shelf and external
cables and check all waveguide connections The next most probable cause is the crystal on
the crystal oscillator subboard at either end of the hop.If the radio has both A and B XMTRS
and RCVRS and both A and B are indicating burst errors, the fault is at the XMT end of the
hop. If only A is equipped and indicates burst errors, remove and replace the crystal oscillator subboard on the on-line RCVR.
9.9.3.2
Dribbling errors are defined as small number of errors over long period of time (no frame
errors). Dribbling errors can be caused by a path problem, such as interference or fading, or
by a hardware problem such as a XMTR or PA that is being over driven, or high phase noise
in the XMTR or RCVR oscillator. Dribbling errors can be identified by observing the Radio
CRC Errors (DS1), Radio Errors (DS3), Receiver Errors (OC3), or RF Receiver Errors (ETH) fields on the
radio Performance screen. Typically, less than five Errors to one Error Second identifies the
fault as dribbling errors. Try isolating the transmitter by switching transmitters in a pro-
9-9
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
3EM20188
tected system. You can further isolate a transmitter by changing output levels using ATPC
and or dropping the output power out of the XMTR to the PA by one or two dB.
The DS1 radio performance screen has a Repeater CRC Error Sec field that indicates errors
over the repeater cable.
Two troubleshooting tips: 1) errors are displayed on the USI at the receive end in which they
are detected, and 2) these specific type of radio errors are not propagated down the path.
Troubleshooting Using the USI RSL Screens
The RSL screens can be useful tools in troubleshooting a radio with and without alarms being
indicated on the Status Alarm screen.
9.9.4
9-10
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188
Maintenance Section
Indication
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
ALM
Steady
Red LED
1. Module failure
WYSD ALM
Yellow LED
Lit
ETH IN
Green LED
Not Lit
Connect/repair cable.
9-11
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
3EM20188
Indication
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
ETH ALM
Yellow LED
Lit
ETH OUT
Green LED
Not Lit
9-12
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188
Maintenance Section
TMN-SPECIFIC TROUBLESHOOTING
Refer to Table 9 - 4. The red ALM LED on the front panel of the TMN Interface module and the
alarm on the radio USI status and alarm screen are the first indication of a fault. The ALM
LED on the front panel of the TMN Interface module lights for any module fault. The LED
remains lit during module reboot and also after reboot if reboot is not completed satisfactorily.
9.11
Indication
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
ALM
Steady Red
1. Module failure
2. Module reboot in progress
(several seconds to reboot)
3. Module reboot failed.
1. Replace module
2. Wait several seconds for reboot
to complete.
3. Attempt reboot. What next?
Ethernet
1, 2,
and/or 3
Blinking Yellow
Ethernet
1, 2,
and/or 3
Not Steady
Green When
First Connected
1. Cable is disconnected/
broken
1. Connect/repair cable.
2. Cable/port mismatch
1. Cable is disconnected/
broken.
1. Connect/repair cable.
2. Cable/port mismatch
PPP
PPP
Not Steady
Green When
First Connected
Yellow
9-13
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
3EM20188
Possible Cause
Possible Solution
9-14
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188
Maintenance Section
Possible Cause
Possible Solution
Unable to communicate
with the NE through the
radio network (unable to
ping the NE)
9-15
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
9.12
Maintenance Section
3EM20188
MODULE REPLACEMENT
WARNING
Possibility of
Damage
to Equipment
WARNING
Possibility of
Damage
to Equipment
WARNING
Possibility of
Damage
to Equipment
9-16
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
XMTR Crystals are soldered and tuned up in an oscillator assembly board at the factory.
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
Before replacing any module, refer to Table 9 - 6 to determine the actions, other than physical
replacement, required. If the module has any options (switches, subboards, etc.), refer to the
removed module so that the replacement module can be set up the same way.
Any module installed in the card cage, except those having front-panel cable connections, can
be removed by grasping the module handle(s) and pulling firmly outward. Modules with frontpanel interconnects can be removed in the same manner after disconnecting the cable from the
module being removed and moving the cable out of the way.
To install a module in the card cage, insert the module card connector edge into the appropriate card slot. Engage module handles in card cage and press on module handles until they are
latched and the card is fully seated. After installing a module with front-panel interconnections, reconnect the cable(s) to the front-panel connector(s).
9-17
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
3EM20188
REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT
PROCEDURE
CHECKS/ADJUSTMENTS PROCEDURE
No Special Procedure
Required
None Required
AE-37Y Controller
*Chart 2
None Required
Chart 1
None Required
Fuse
No Special Procedure
Required.
Refer to Figure H - 7 in
Appendix F for Location.
No Special Procedure
Required.
Chart 3
Chart 6
None Required
Chart 6
None Required
Chart 6
None Required
UD-35( ) Transmitter
Chart 7
Figure 9 - 10
Capacity Key
Figure 9 - 11
UD-36( ) Receiver
Chart 14
**Chart 15
Figure 9 - 22
Capacity Key
Figure 9 - 23
Chart 16
Appendix H
Chart 17
LBO/AUX Interface
Hot-Standby Shelf
Compact Indoor Shelf
Chart 18
Appendix H
RF Switch
Chart 19
None Required
Chart 3, Table 9 - 7
* If ATPC is in use, it must be provisioned disabled or locked high before removing controller.
**Applicable to older version of RCVR with FREQ CONT on front panel.
9-18
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
9.13
Maintenance Section
CHANGING FREQUENCY
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
Crystals are soldered and tuned up in a crystal oscillator subboard at the factory.
Changing frequencies requires changing the crystal on the crystal oscillator subboard in the
transmitter and receiver modules. Changing out the crystal requires tuning the crystal oscillator subboard. Tuning the crystal oscillator subboard is a factory procedure.
An RF frequency change may require re-tuning the diplexer. Re-tuning the diplexer is a factory procedure.
9.14
CLEANING
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
Do not use acid, alcohol, or brushes to clean modules because damage to the silkscreen labeling and antistatic coating can result.
Cleaning should be confined to the removal of dust and dirt using
a damp cloth.
Cleaning should normally be confined to the removal of dust and dirt using a soft bristled (natural fiber) brush and a low velocity blower (such as a vacuum cleaner with a plastic blower
nozzle). Do not use acid or synthetic bristled brushes to clean modules that contain electrostatic-sensitive components.
9-19
9-20
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Chart 1
Maintenance Section
PURPOSE
Use this procedure to remove and replace CE-16BB Power Supply.
SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED
Torque Screwdriver
STEP
PROCEDURE
WARNING
Possibility of
Damage
to Equipment
WARNING
Possibility of
Damage
to Equipment
WARNING
Possibility of
Damage
to Equipment
9-21
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
STEP
PROCEDURE, CONTINUED
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
This is an out-of-service procedure when on a nonstandby (unprotected) system. On a hot-standby or frequency diversity system,
switch traffic on the channel under test to protect.
1
Use front panel OVRD controls on AE-37() Controller to switch and lock online opposite side XMTR, RCVR, and I/O to opposite side from failed power
supply.
9-22
On AE-37() Controller, toggle OVRD switch to disable override (unlocks online XMTR, RCVR, and I/O and restores automatic switching functions).
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
STEP
Maintenance Section
PROCEDURE, CONTINUED
Note
If radio is not equipped with power amplifiers and the PA ON/OFF switch
on the power supply is accidently turned on, the OFF NORM alarm on the
power supply and the Off Normal alarm on the USI Status Alarm screen
will light. The off normal message on the USI Status Alarm screen will be
blank.
10
11
Note
Radios have provisioning data stored on both the controller and A-side
power supply. When provisioning is saved through downloading, the provisioning data is stored on both modules. If the radio is non-standby and the
A-side power supply fails, the radio must be reprovisioned after the module
is replaced and the reprovisioned data downloaded and saved. If the radio
is hot-standby, the provisioning data stored on the controller is automatically copied to the replacement A-side power supply when provisioning is
saved.
12
Is radio non-standby?
If yes, go to Step 13.
If no, go to Step 16.
13
Note
A mismatch between software revisions on the controller and the replacement A-side power supply causes a flashing controller fail alarm when the
spare power supply is plugged in.
9-23
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
STEP
PROCEDURE, CONTINUED
14
15
16
P/O SHELF
INSTALL:
(INSTALL STEPS ARE
PREFIXED BY LETTER "I").
REMOVE:
(REMOVE STEPS ARE PREFIXED
BY LETTER "R").
ALARM
OFF
NORM
I1.
I2.
I3.
I4.
ON 1
POWER
OFF 0
+10.5V
+12V
5V
12V
NOTE
GND
ON
PA
IF PA IS NOT EQUIPPED,
SETTING PA POWER SWITCH
TO ON WILL TURN ON OFF
NORM ALARM.
OFF
CAUTION:
TIGHTEN MOUNTING
SCREWS BEFORE
APPLYING POWER
2 PLACES
MARKED
I5.
LMW-6092-SM
04/07/05
P/O SHELF
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Chart 2
Maintenance Section
PURPOSE
Use this procedure to remove and replace AE-37Y Controller.
SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED
None
STEP
PROCEDURE
WARNING
Possibility of
Damage
to Equipment
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
On front panel of controller module, press and hold ACO LT/OVRD switch in
ACO LT (lamp test) position until TX, RX, and I/O ON LINE LEDs on front of
controller flash (approximately 5 seconds wait).
9-25
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
STEP
PROCEDURE, CONTINUED
INSTALL:
See Figure 9 - 4 and follow step-by step procedure to install controller module.
1 REMOVE FAILED
CONTROLLER
J2
2 REMOVE
ELMC
OPTION
KEY
(IF EQUIPPED)
9-26
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
Note
A replacement controller that is loaded with the same firmware load as the controller that is
being replaced (i.e.: controller for DS3 radio is replacing a DS3 radio controller) is
automatically rebooted and provisioned to match the module it is replacing. If the
replacement controller is for a different type of radio (i.e.; controller for a DS3 radio is
being used to replace a controller in a DS1 or OC3 radio), the controller alarm will flash
when the replacement module is installed in the shelf. The flashing alarm prompts the user
that the wrong firmware is installed.
LMW-5063F
04/12/05
9-27
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
6 CLICK HERE
PROVISIONING HOLD
MESSAGE DISPLAYS.
7 CLICK HERE
Communication
Options F6
F5
New Controller
Alarm Status
F7
Performance
Station Alarm
F8
F9
User Control
Provisioning
Firmware Upgrade
LOCAL MAIN
ELMC Address
Prov. Hold
Communicating***
ELMC Descriptions
NOTE
PROVISIONING HOLD MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED
ON ALL SCREENS. THE MESSAGE IS REMOVED
WHEN PROVISIONING IS SAVED.
LMW-5065F
11/21/06
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
8 CLICK HERE
10 CLICK HERE
9 CLICK HERE
Alcatel User Interface
File
F4
New Controller
Alarm Status
Performance
Firmware Upgrade
11-DS1
12-DS3
13-OC3
14-ETH
RADIO
F8
Station Alarm
F9
User Control
Provisioning
Download
ELMC Address
LOCAL MAIN
L
ELMC Descriptions
Communicating***
o
Prov. Hold
c:
11 SELECT
F7
12
c:\
Windnld
8000 DS1
8000 DS3
8000 OC3
8000 ETH
0%
CLICK ON
LATEST FILE
(HIGHEST NUMBER
FOR RADIO TYPE)
13 CLICK HERE
Start Down Load
100%
0%
100%
NOTE
AFTER AUTOMATICALLY REBOOTING, THE CONTROLLER WILL START
RUNNING, PROVISIONING PREVIOUSLY STORED IN THE CONTROLLER
WILL BE LEFT UNCHANGED BY THE DOWNLOAD PROGRAM.
14 GO TO THE INITIAL TURNUP SECTION AND CHECK PROVISIONING/REPROVISIONING AS REQUIRED.
NOTE
AFTER PROVISIONING IS SAVED, THE CONTROLLER WILL BOOT UP
WITHIN 20 SECONDS.
15 STOP. THIS PROCEDURE IS COMPLETE.
LMW-5064F
11/21/06
9-29
9-30
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Chart 3
Maintenance Section
PURPOSE
Use this procedure to remove and replace DX-35N DS3 I/O Interface module. Refer to
Table 9 - 7 and Table 9 - 8 for configuration functions.
System
Application
AA
Linear/Ring
AB
Ring
AG
Linear/Ring
AH
Linear/Ring
AK
Linear/Ring
AM
Linear/Ring
Auto Radio
DADE
Auto Line
DADE
Front Panel
Controls
Note:
X indicates function is applicable.
System
Application
Auto Radio
DADE
Auto Line
DADE
Front Panel
Controls
AJ
Linear/Ring
AN
Linear/Ring
Note:
X indicates function is applicable.
9-31
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
STEP
PROCEDURE
WARNING
Possibility of
Damage
to Equipment
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
This is an out-of-service procedure when on a nonstandby (unprotected) system. On a hot-standby or frequency diversity system,
switch traffic on the channel under test to protect.
1
Use front panel OVRD controls on AE-37( ) Controller to lock on-line XMTR,
RCVR, and I/O (opposite side from failed I/O) on line.
9-32
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
STEP
Maintenance Section
PROCEDURE, CONTINUED
On AE-37( ) Controller, toggle OVRD switch to disable override (unlocks online XMTR and restores automatic switching functions).
Radio
Configuration
Chart 4
Radio DADE
Chart 5
Line DADE
AA
AA
HS, FD, SD
AA
AB
HS, FD, SD
AA
AG
HS, FD, SD
AA
AH
HS, FD, SD
AA
AK
HS, FD, SD
AB
AB
HS, FD, SD
AB
AG
HS, FD, SD
AB
AH
HS, FD, SD
AB
AK
HS, FD, SD
AG
AG
HS, FD, SD
AG
AH
HS, FD, SD
AG
AK
HS, FD, SD
AH
AH
HS, FD, SD
AH
AK
HS, FD, SD
AK
AK
HS, FD
AK
AK
SD
AK
AM
HS, FD, SD
AM
AM
HS, FD, SD
Chart 4
Figure 9 - 5
X
X
Notes:
1.Module locations are reversible.
2.Perform procedure indicated by X for specific module and radio configuration.
9-33
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
Radio
Configuration
Chart 4
Radio DADE
AJ
AJ
HS, FD, SD
AJ
AL
HS, FD, SD
AL
AL
HS, FD
AL
AL
SD
AL
AN
HS, FD, SD
AN
AN
HS, FD, SD
Chart 5
Line DADE
Chart 4
Figure 9 - 5
X
X
Notes:
1. Module locations are reversible.
2. Perform procedure indicated by X for specific module and radio configuration.
9-34
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Chart 4
Maintenance Section
PURPOSE
Provides procedures to check, and if necessary adjust the differential absolute delay between
the main and diversity paths to the antennas in a space diversity configuration. Also, this
procedure must be performed following the replacement of a DS3 I/O Interface module in a
protected system.
TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
Oscilloscope, Tektronix TDS3052B (or equivalent)
GENERAL
Radio Differential Absolute Delay Equalization (DADE) is performed during initial turn-up
to equalize path delays in the A and B radios, and it should be rechecked any time the main
or diversity I/O Interface modules are replaced.
STEP
PROCEDURE
Note
If the A pulse trails the B pulse, the A-side of the radio has more delay than
the B-side. If the B pulse trails the A pulse, the B-side of the radio has more
delay than the A-side.
1
9-35
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
RADIO DADE
SETTING
VOLTS/DIV
2V
TIME/DIV
20 ns
TRIG SLOPE
INT TRIG
LBO CARD
A SIDE
XMT
AUX
B SIDE
HINT
EXACT ALIGNMENT MAY NOT
BE POSSIBLE SINCE EACH SWITCH
INCREMENT SHIFTS THE PULSE APPROX
41 ns. ALIGN AS CLOSE AS POSSIBLE.
XMT
AUX
SC
ALM
SC
ALM
RCVR
ON
RCVR
ON
20 ns/DIV
RAD
LOF
RAD
LOF
WYSD
DS1
WYSD
DS1
WYSD
ALM
WYSD
ALM
CHANNEL 1
RAD DADE
3. SET TO
POSITION 3
Note
Increasing numbers on
RAD DADE switch result in
decreasing delay.
RAD DADE
DS3
AUGN
DS3
AUGN
CHANNEL 2
4. SET TO
POSITION 3
5. ADJUST TO ALIGN
LEADING EDGE
OF PULSE WITH
CHANNEL 1
CONNECT TO
DS3 ALIGN
TEST POINT
OSCILLOSCOPE
CH1
CH2
CONNECT TO
DS3 ALIGN
TEST POINT
LMW-4003F
09/06/05
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Chart 5
Maintenance Section
PURPOSE
Provides procedures to check, and if necessary adjust the differential absolute delay between
A and B frame sync pulses. Perform this procedure for protected RCVR configurations.
PREREQUISITES
DS3 Radio DADE
TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
Oscilloscope, Tektronix TDS3052B (or equivalent)
Test Lead and Tool Kit
STEP
PROCEDURE
Note
DS3 Radio DADE must have been properly set before starting this DS3 Line
DADE procedure.
Note
If the A pulse trails the B pulse, the A-side of the radio has more delay than
the B-side. If the B pulse trails the A pulse, the B-side of the radio has more
delay than the A-side.
1
9-37
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
SETTING
VOLTS/DIV
2V
TIME/DIV
20 ns
TRIG SLOPE
INT TRIG
SET TO TRIGGER ON
ON-LINE SIDE.
LBO CARD
A SIDE
B SIDE
I/O INTFC
(ON LINE)
I/O INTFC
(OFF LINE)
XMT
AUX
XMT
AUX
SC
ALM
SC
ALM
RCVR
ON
RCVR
ON
20 ns/DIV
RAD
LOF
RAD
LOF
WYSD
DS1
WYSD
DS1
WYSD
ALM
RAD DADE
LINE 1
WYSD
ALM
A FRAME
SYNC PULSE
CHANNEL 1
RAD DADE
LINE 1
DS3
AUGN
1
DS3
AUGN
1
LINE 2
LINE 2
2
LINE 3
B FRAME
SYNC PULSE
CHANNEL 2
LINE 3
3
c. ADJUSTMENT FOR
ALIGNING LEADING
EDGE OF FRAME
SYNC PULSE ON
CHANNEL 2 WITH
FRAME SYNC PULSE
ON CHANNEL 1.
ADJUST DS3 ALIGN ( )
CONTROL TO MOVE
FRAME SYNC PULSE
ON CHANNEL 2
AS FOLLOWS:
CW
CONNECT TO
DS3 ALIGN 1
CONNECT TO
DS3 ALIGN 1
CCW
OSCILLOSCOPE
CH1
CH2
LMW-4004F
03/08/01
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
STEP
Maintenance Section
PROCEDURE, CONTINUED
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN
LEADING EDGES = 5 ns
CHANNEL 1
ON-LINE SIDE
5 ns
OSCILLOSCOPE
SET TO INT TRIG
CHANNEL 1
CHANNEL 2
OFF-LINE SIDE
TYPICAL
TRANSITION
JITTER
5 ns/div
LMW-7204
09/28/02
9-39
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
STEP
4
PROCEDURE, CONTINUED
Raise channel 2 frame sync pulse so that the 0-level trace lines for channel 2
are superimposed on the 0-level trace lines for channel 1. See Figure 9 - 8 for a
typical display. The difference in amplitude between the pulses (if any) can be
disregarded.
CHANNEL 2 LEADS
SYNC PULSE (CHANNEL 1)
By 5 ns
5 ns
DISREGARD DIFFERENCE
IN AMPLITUDE PULSE
CHANNEL 1
(ON LINE)
CHANNEL 2
(OFF LINE)
LINE UP
0 LEVEL
TRACE LINES
5 ns/div
LMW-7205
09/28/02
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
STEP
Maintenance Section
PROCEDURE, CONTINUED
With a-side RCVR on line, on B-side DX-35N (off-line side) adjust DS3 ALIGN1
control to align the leading edges of the channel 1 and 2 frame sync pulses. If
the channel 1 frame sync pulse is to the left of (leads) the channel 2 frame
sync pulse, adjust the DS3 ALIGN1 control clockwise to move the channel 2
frame sync pulse from right to left. If the channel 1 frame sync pulse is to the
right of (trails) the channel 2 frame sync pulse, adjust the DS3 ALIGN1 control
counterclockwise to move the channel 2 frame sync pulse from left to right.
In the scenario shown on Figure 9 - 8, the channel 1 (on-line) frame sync pulse
is leading the channel 2 (off-line) frame sync pulse by 5 ns or less. Adjusting
the DS3 ALIGN1 control clockwise will move the channel 2 frame sync pulse to
the left to align the pulses. See Figure 9 - 9 for a display of the pulses after
adjustment. In this typical scenario, the transition jitter on Channel 2 makes
it difficult to find a main trace to line up with the leading edge on Channel 1.
In this case, center the leading edge of the on-line pulse in the transition jitter
traces.
5 ns
ADJUST UNTIL
JITTER IS
EQUALLY SPREAD
OVER SYNC TRACE.
5 ns/div
LMW-7206
09/28/02
9-41
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
STEP
PROCEDURE, CONTINUED
Repeat step 2. On oscilloscope change INT trigger to Channel 2 (now on-line side).
Note
There is no interaction between A and B DS3 ALIGN controls. The A and B
frame sync pulses are adjusted independently. Since there is no interaction
between adjustments, there is no need to switch back to the A side and check
the previous alignment.
8
Repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 using A-side (off line) DX-35N DS3 ALIGN1 control to
align the channel 1 and 2 frame sync pulses.
For second DS3 line, repeat steps 1 through 8, observing frame sync pulses
from DS3 ALIGN 2 test points and adjusting DS3 ALIGN 2 controls.
10
For third DS3 line, repeat steps 1 through 8, observing frame sync pulses from
DS3 ALIGN 3 test points and adjusting DS3 ALIGN 3 controls.
11
9-42
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Chart 6
Maintenance Section
PURPOSE
Use this procedure to remove and replace DX-35P OC3/STM-1 I/O Interface module and/or
DX-35R Ethernet I/O Interface module.
SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED
None
STEP
PROCEDURE
WARNING
Possibility of
Damage
to Equipment
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
This is an out-of-service procedure when on a nonstandby (unprotected) system. On a hot-standby or frequency diversity system,
switch traffic on the channel under test to protect.
1
Use front panel OVRD controls on AE-37( ) Controller to lock on-line XMTR,
RCVR, and I/O (opposite side from failed I/O) on line.
On front panel of controller module, press and hold ACO LT/OVRD switch in ACO LT
(lamp test) position until TX, RX, and I/O On LINE LEDs on front of controller flash
(approximately 5 seconds wait).
9-43
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
STEP
PROCEDURE, CONTINUED
INSTALL
On front panel of controller module, press and hold ACO LT/OVRD switch in ACO LT
(lamp test) position until TX, RX, and I/O On LINE LEDs on front of controller flash
(approximately 5 seconds wait).
10
11
12
On AE-37( ) Controller, toggle OVRD switch to disable override (unlocks online XMTR and restores automatic switching functions).
13
9-44
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Chart 7
Maintenance Section
Note
Spare XMTRs and XMTRs repaired at the factory normally do not contain
Crystal Oscillator Subboards or Capacity Keys. The user must retain the
crystal Oscillator Subboard and the Capacity Key from the module being
replaced before sending the module back to the factory for repair.
PURPOSE
Use this procedure to remove and replace UD-35() XMTR and/or:
1 to replace a faulty crystal oscillator subboard
2 to change out the crystal oscillator subboard to change frequency
3 to replace a faulty XMTR
4 to replace a faulty capacity key
5 to change DS1/E1, DS3 or OC3/STM-1 capacity
PROCEDURE
WARNING
Possibility of
Damage
to Equipment
9-45
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
STEP
PROCEDURE, CONTINUED
WARNING
Possibility of
Damage
to Equipment
Use front panel OVRD controls on AE-37() Controller to lock on-line XMTR
(opposite side from failed XMTR) on line.
On power supply, on same side as failed XMTR, set PA ON/OFF switch to OFF
(if shelf is equipped with PA on that side).
On XMTR module being replaced, remove XMTR capacity key. Retain for
installation on replacement module.
INSTALL:
10
On replacement XMTR module, install XMTR capacity key. See Figure 9 - 11.
11
12
13
On power supply, set PA ON/OFF switch to ON (if turned off in step 4).
9-46
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
STEP
14
Maintenance Section
PROCEDURE, CONTINUED
Note
Output level calibration is required for the last amplification stage in the
chain of XMT amplifiers leading to the antenna, only. If the radio is
equipped with a PA and a transmitter fails, the replacement transmitter
must be adjusted to return the radio to the original PA output power. It is
not necessary to calibrate the transmitter.
15
Note
Carrier leakage can be nulled in the MDR-8000 using any one of three methods. Method 1 (the preferred method) uses a spectrum analyzer to determine
if carrier leakage is present while a modulated signal is being transmitted
(in service) and then nulling any carrier present. Methods 2 and 3 require
that modulation be removed and the carrier is nulled while the transmitter
is out of service. Method 2 uses a DVM to measure carrier leakage. Method 3
uses a spectrum analyzer.
16
17
18
On AE-37() Controller, toggle OVRD switch to disable override (unlocks online XMTR and restores automatic switching functions).
19
9-47
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
Remove:
a
Disconnect ribbon
cable from J8.
Install:
J8
CRYSTAL OSC
SUBBOARD
Note
Ensure board edge does not make
contact with chassis wall.
MDR-1021
09/08/05
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
REMOVE:
INSTALL:
LMW-6016F
09/21/05
9-49
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
NTFC
XMT LVL
ADJ
PWR MON
FREQ CONT
XMT PWR
ALM
DC
MON
GND
PWR ALM
TEMP ALM
DC MON ADJ
ON LINE
I CARR NULL
Q CARR NULL
TRANSMITTER
10.5V DC
POWER AMPLIFIER
XTAL
MON
POWER
METER
RF
MON
POWER
SENSOR
50 OHM
RF
MON
RF
IN
RF
OUT
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
TFC
DC MON
XMT LVL
ADJ
c
PWR MON
FREQ CONT
XMT PWR
ALM
GND
PWR ALM
TEMP ALM
DC MONITOR CALIBRATION
READ
[X.XADJ
Vdc]
DC
MON
FOR [XX.X dBm]
ON LINE
DC MONITOR CALIBRATION
READ [X.X Vdc]
FOR [XX.X dBm]
I CARR NULL
Q CARR NULL
TRANSMITTER
10.5V DC
POWER AMPLIFIER
DVM
XTAL
MON
READ [X.X dBm]
FOR [XX.X dBm]
AT TOP OF RACK
RF
MON
RF
OUT
RF
IN
9-51
9-52
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Chart 8
Maintenance Section
PURPOSE
Provides procedures to correct the transmit frequency of the crystal oscillator on the UD-35()
Transmitter module.
For a list of crystal frequencies, refer to the appropriate application drawing in the
Diagrams section.
TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
Frequency Counter HP-53151A
Test Lead and Tool Kit
Allow a 1-hour warm-up period for radio and test equipment before starting applicable tests
or improper frequency adjustment can result. If waiting for initial alignment is impractical,
it may be performed after a warm-up period of 5 minutes minimum; however, crystal
frequency should be rechecked after full warmup.
STEP
PROCEDURE
9-53
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
XMT LVL
ADJ
PWR MON
FREQ CONT
XMT PWR
ALM
ON LINE
I CARR NULL
Q CARR NULL
TRANSMITTER
XTAL
MON
FREQ
COUNTER
RF
MON
RF
OUT
LMW-3104
05/08/03
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Chart 9
Maintenance Section
PURPOSE
Use this procedure to check the RF output of the UD-35() Transmitter in radio configuration
that is not equipped with the optional PA.
TOOLS REQUIRED
Power Meter with Medium Power Sensor
Adapter, SMA-M to Type N-F
Test Lead and Tool Kit
STEP
PROCEDURE
DANGER
Possibility of
Injury
to Personnel
WARNING
Possibility of
Damage
to Equipment
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
This is an out-of-service procedure when on a nonstandby (unprotected) system. On a hot-standby or frequency diversity system,
switch traffic on the channel under test off line.
Note
If ATPC is enabled, disable (XMTR will go to high power).
9-55
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
STEP
1
PROCEDURE, CONTINUED
Note
If ATPC was enabled prior to performing this procedure, re-enable.
2
XMT LVL
ADJ
PWR MON
FREQ CONT
XMT PWR
ALM
ON LINE
IF NOT
I CARR NULL
Q CARR NULL
TRANSMITTER
XTAL
MON
RF
MON
MEDIUM
POWER
SENSOR
POWER
METER
RF
OUT
MDR-1145
10/16/05
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Chart 10
Maintenance Section
Note
Carrier leakage can be nulled in the MDR-8000 using any one of three methods. Method 1 (the preferred method) uses a spectrum analyzer to determine
if carrier leakage is present while a modulated signal is being transmitted
(in service) and then nulling any carrier present. Methods 2 and 3 require
that modulation be removed and the carrier is nulled while the transmitter
is out of service. Method 2 uses a DVM to measure carrier leakage. Method 3
uses a spectrum analyzer.
PURPOSE
Use this procedure to adjust carrier null on the UD-35A() Transmitter, in service.
OBJECTIVE
Using the spectrum analyzer Span controls, reduce the frequency span until the Resolution
Bandwidth (Res BW) reaches the value defined as the Res BW for measuring carrier. At this Res
BW, observe the spectrum trace for a carrier signal. If a carrier signal, rising above the
spectrum floor, 3 dB or more is visible, use the procedure to null the carrier. If no carrier is
visible, the carrier is sufficiently nulled.
TOOLS REQUIRED
Spectrum Analyzer
Adapter, SMA-M to Type N-F
Test Lead and Tool Kit
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
9-57
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
PO SHELF
a.
SETTING
10 dB
CHAN FREQ
(SEE FREQ LABEL
ON XMTR OR PA).
FREQ SPAN
VALUE APPROXIMATELY
TWICE THE WIDTH OF
THE RF CHANNEL
BANDWIDTH
RESOLUTION BW
AUTO
VIDEO BW
AUTO
REFERENCE LEVEL O dBm
SWEEP TIME
AUTO
AMPLITUDE SCALE 10 dB/DIV
SPECTRUM
ANALYZER
PWR MON
FREQ CONT
XMT PWR
ALM
ON LINE
I CARR NULL
Q CARR NULL
TRANSMITTER
RF
MON
RF
OUT
PO SHELF
9-58
MDR-1209
10/07/05
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
c
Maintenance Section
Note
As the spectrum analyzers frequency span is reduced and the flat top of the
spectrum fills the spectrum analyzer display, it is extremely important to
keep the spectrum display (with carrier signal if any) centered so that the
carrier signal (if any) will remain visible as the span is reduced.
d
Reduce the frequency span on the spectrum analyzer display while keeping
the spectrum centered on the spectrum analyzer display.
Continue to reduce the spectrum analyzer span while observing the Res BW
field in the bottom left corner of the spectrum analyzer display.
Continue reducing the frequency span until the correct Res BW for measuring
carrier for the Radio Capacity/Modulation is displayed. Refer to the following
table for the Res BW for measuring carrier required for the radio under test.
Carrier Threshold Resolution Bandwidth
Radio Capacity/
Modulation
OC3/128 TCM
30 kHz
1 STS-1/128 TCM
10 kHz
3 DS3/64 QAM
100 kHz
3 kHz
2 DS3/32 TCM
100 kHz
3 kHz
1 DS3/64 QAM
30 kHz
1 kHz
16 DS1/32 TCM
10 kHz
1 kHz
16 DS1/128 TCM
3 kHz
100 Hz
10 kHz
300 Hz
3 kHz
100 Hz
10 kHz
300 Hz
8 DS1/128 TCM
1 kHz
100 Hz
4 DS1/32 TCM
3 kHz
100 Hz
4 DS1/128 TCM
1 kHz
30 Hz
2 DS1/32 TCM
3 kHz
100 Hz
12 DS1/32 TCM
12 DS1/128 TCM
8 DS1/32 TCM
2 DS1/128 TCM
300 Hz
30 Hz
9-59
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
Adjustment of the carrier signal for minimum amplitude is critical. Do not attempt to null the carrier signal until the correct Res
BW is reached. Incorrect adjustment can result in loss of traffic
due to slow RCVR lock.
g
Observe the display at the correct Res BW for measuring carrier for a carrier
signal rising above the floor of the spectrum. Is a carrier signal rising 3 dB or
more above the spectrum visible?
No. STOP. This procedure is complete. Carrier is nulled to an
acceptable level.
Yes.
1) Continue to reduce the frequency span until the spectrum analyzer shows a Res BW equal to or lower than the Res BW For
Nulling Carrier value shown in the table.
2) Alternately adjust the I Carr and Q Carr controls on the XMTR
module for minimum carrier amplitude. Refer to the following
typical scenario for adjustment tips/problems.
9-60
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
a. Center carrier
on screen.
Note
It is extremely important to keep the
carrier signal centered in the display
so that the carrier will become visible
as the span is reduced.
b. Reduce Span
to 30 mHz.
10 dB above
spectrum floor
c. Center carrier
on screen.
d. Reduce Span
to 5 mHz.
Res BW for
measuring carrier
Note
Res BW automatically decreases
as Span decreases.
MDR-1216
09/20/05
9-61
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
e. Center carrier
on screen.
f. Reduce Span
to 1 mHz.
g. Center carrier
on screen.
h. Observe
Res BW
i. Reduce Span
to 500 kHz.
MDR-1217
09/20/05
9-62
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
Note
XMT LVL
ADJ
PWR MON
FREQ CONT
XMT PWR
ALM
You must watch the trace carefully on the spectrum analyzer when adjusting
the I and Q carrier controls on the XMTR module. the I and Q carrier controls
are interactive and the slightest change on one control causes a change on the
other. You must alternate between controls until carrier null is obtained. The
direction to turn the controls is not defined. If for example, the carrier level is
dropping as you are turning the I CARR control counterclockwise, continue to
turn counterclockwise until the carrier level on the trace stops dropping and
then starts to go up. Then turn the Q CARR control counterclockwise or
clockwise until downward movement is seen on the trace and continue to turn
in that direction. Watch for the slightest change in direction and then move to
the other control.
ON LINE
Carrier peak at
start of procedure
I CARR NULL
Q CARR NULL
TRANSMITTER
j. Center
carrier
on screen.
XTAL
MON
RF
MON
RF
OUT
MDR-1211
09/20/05
9-63
Maintenance Section
9-64
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
PROCEDURE
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
This is an out-of-service procedure when on a nonstandby (unprotected) system. On a hot-standby or frequency diversity system,
switch traffic on the channel under test to protect.
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
9-65
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
STEP
1
PROCEDURE, CONTINUED
Use front panel OVRD controls on AE-37() Controller to lock on-line XMTR
(opposite side from failed XMTR) on line.
Note
If ATPC is enabled, disable (XMTR will go to high power).
2
Note
If ATPC was enabled prior to performing this procedure, re-enable.
5
Calibrate B-side
Carrier Null A
Carrier Null B
3Abort
AFTER APPROX. 20 SEC, OK TO NULL
CARRIER
Next
MESSAGE DISPLAYS.
(Note: A Spectrum Analyzer is required for
this procedure). Remove the A side I/O
interface module. Adjust the (I CARR Null
and Q CARR Null) potentiometers located
on TRANSMITTER module to minimum
carrier. Click on Next when you are done.
Abort
Back
Next
LMW-5079-SM
08/28/02
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3.
Maintenance Section
CONT.
SETTING
10 dB
CHAN FREQ
(SEE FREQ LABEL
ON XMTR OR PA).
FREQ SPAN
50 MHz or 5 MHz/Div
RESOLUTION BW
100 kHz
VIDEO FILTER
100 KHZ
REFERENCE LEVEL OdBm
SWEEP TIME
AUTO
AMPLITUDE SCALE AUTO
PO SHELF
XMT LVL
ADJ
PWR MON
FREQ CONT
XMT PWR
ALM
ON LINE
I CARR NULL
Q CARR NULL
TRANSMITTER
SPECTRUM
ANALYZER
RF
MON
RF
OUT
PO SHELF
LMW-3106A-SM
01/24/05
9-67
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
Note
Variations in time and temperature can cause variations in carrier
null. Over time, carrier null 30 dB down from reference is acceptable
and readjustment is not required.
REF 0 dBm
ATTEN 10 dB
10 dB
CARRIER PEAK
AT START OF
PROCEDURE
10
20
MARKER
6.685 010 GHz
54.00 dBm
30
DASHED LINES
ARE USED TO
SHOW CHANGES
IN AMPLITUDE.
40
50
NOISE
FLOOR
60
70
80
MODULATION REMOVED
90
100
LMW-3106-SM
01/25/02
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
PROCEDURE
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
This is an out-of-service procedure when on a nonstandby (unprotected system). On a hot-standby or frequency diversity system,
switch traffic on the channel under test off line.
Note
If ATPC is enabled, disable (XMTR will go to high power).
1
Note
If ATPC was enabled prior to performing this procedure, re-enable.
2
9-69
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
XMT LVL
ADJ
PWR MON
FREQ CONT
XMT PWR
ALM
DVM
ON LINE
I CARR NULL
Q CARR NULL
TRANSMITTER
XTAL
MON
RF
MON
RF
OUT
LMW-9045
06/17/03
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
Calibrate B-side
Carrier Null A
Carrier Null B
CAbort
AFTER APPROX. 20 SEC, OK TO NULL
CARRIER
Next
MESSAGE DISPLAYS.
(Note: A Spectrum Analyzer is required for
this procedure). Remove the A side I/O
interface module. Adjust the (I CARR Null
and Q CARR Null) potentiometers located
on TRANSMITTER module to minimum
carrier. Click on Next when you are done.
Abort
Back
Note
Disregard step C
which appears on
computer screen.
Instead, perform
step C-1 as shown
below.
Next
XMT LVL
ADJ
PWR MON
FREQ CONT
XMT PWR
ALM
ON LINE
I CARR NULL
Q CARR NULL
TRANSMITTER
Abort
Back
Next
9-71
9-72
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
PROCEDURE
DANGER
Possibility of
Injury
to Personnel
WARNING
Possibility of
Damage
to Equipment
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
This is an out-of-service procedure when on a nonstandby (unprotected) system. On a hot-standby or frequency diversity system,
switch traffic on the channel under test to protect.
9-73
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
STEP
1
PROCEDURE, CONTINUED
Note
If ATPC is enabled, disable (XMTR will go to high power).
FREQ CONT
XMT PWR
ALM
ON LINE
I CARR NULL
Q CARR NULL
TRANSMITTER
XTAL
MON
RF
MON
MEDIUM
POWER
SENSOR
RF
OUT
POWER
METER
SMA to N
Adapter
LMW-7041
11/21/06
9-74
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
ELMC Address:
RACK6
Description:
MDR-8000
Communicating*
12:17:01 PM
10-May-99
LABEL ON FILTER).
XMTR NOMINAL LOW OUTPUT
LEVEL = XMTR NOMINAL HIGH
OUTPUT LEVEL 10 dB.
Calibrate A Side
Calibrate B-side
Carrier Null A
Carrier Null B
XMT LVL
ADJ
4
PWR MON
Abort
Next
FREQ CONT
XMT PWR
ALM
ON LINE
I CARR NULL
Q CARR NULL
TRANSMITTER
6
Abort
Back
Next
EXAMPLE:
EXPECTED OUTPUT LEVEL AT TOP OF STACK = 14 dBm.
LABEL ON DIPLEXER FILTER/XMT FILTER SHOWS INSERTION
LOSS IS 2 dB.
NOMINAL HIGH POWER OUT OF XMTR = 16 dBm
(14 dBm + 2 dBm = 16 dBm).
SET NOMINAL LOW POWER LEVEL FOR 6 dBm
(10 dB DOWN FROM 16 dBm).
PROCEED TO
SHEET 2
LMW-7040-SM
05/17/03
9-75
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
Note
After nominal high and low output levels have been calibrated and saved,
the XMTR output power alarm point is automatically calculated and set by
software 5 dB down from the nominal output power.
8
Abort
Back
Next
Abort
CLICK NEXT.
Back
Next
CLICK NEXT.
9
Back
Finish
CLICK Finish.
CALIBRATION IS
COMPLETE.
LMW-7043-SM
02/23/04
4) BELOW.
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
STEP
4
Maintenance Section
PROCEDURE, CONTINUED
Note
Ensure ATPC is disabled.
PWR MON
FREQ CONT
XMT PWR
ALM
ON LINE
I CARR NULL
Q CARR NULL
TRANSMITTER
POWER
SENSOR
50 OHM
POWER
METER
RF
OUT
9-77
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
STEP
PROCEDURE, CONTINUED
+
DVM
PWR MON
FREQ CONT
XMT PWR
ALM
DC MONITOR CALIBRATION
READ [X.X Vdc]
FOR [XX.X dBm]
ON LINE
MEASURED LEVEL
(STEP 2).
I CARR NULL
Q CARR NULL
DC MONITOR CALIBRATION
READ [X.X Vdc]
FOR [XX.X dBm]
TRANSMITTER
6. GO TO CHART STEP 5 (
RF
MON
RF
OUT
5) BELOW.
Note
If ATPC is enabled, disable (XMTR will
go to high power).
LMW-7236-SM
02/23/04
Re-check carrier null (Chart 10, Chart 11, or Chart 12, this section).
Note
If ATPC was enabled prior to performance of this procedure, re-enable.
7
9-78
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
Note
Spare RCVRs and RCVRs repaired at the factory normally do not contain
Crystal Oscillator Subboards or Capacity Keys. The user must retain the
Crystal Oscillator Subboard and the Capacity Key from the module being
replaced before sending the module back to the factory for repair.
PURPOSE
Use this procedure to remove and replace UD-36() RCVR and/or:
1 to replace a faulty crystal oscillator subboard
2 to change out the crystal oscillator subboard to change frequency
3 to move oscillator to a replacement RCVR
4 to replace a faulty capacity key
5 to change DS1/E1, DS3 or OC3/STM-1 capacity
6 to move capacity key to a replacement RCVR
PROCEDURE
DANGER
Possibility of
Injury
to Personnel
9-79
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
STEP
PROCEDURE, CONTINUED
WARNING
Possibility of
Damage
to Equipment
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
This is an out-of-service procedure when on a nonstandby (unprotected) system. On a hot-standby, space diversity, or frequency
diversity system, switch traffic on the channel under test to protect.
1
Use front panel OVRD controls on AE-37() Controller to switch and lock
opposite side RCVR (opposite side from failed RCVR) on line.
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
9-80
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
STEP
Maintenance Section
PROCEDURE, CONTINUED
On RCVR module being replaced, remove RCVR crystal oscillator subboard. See
Figure 9 - 22. Retain for installation on replacement module.
On RCVR module being replaced, remove RCVR capacity key. See Figure 9 23. Retain for installation on replacement module.
INSTALL:
On replacement RCVR module, install RCVR capacity key. See Figure 9 - 23.
10
11
12
Note
Optional performance checks, including RSL, BER and RCVR Threshold
are provided in Appendix G.
13
14
On AE-37() Controller, toggle OVRD switch to disable override (unlocks online RCVR and restores automatic switching functions).
15
16
17
9-81
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
REMOVE:
(REMOVE STEPS ARE PREFIXED
BY LETTER R).
R1. REMOVE RECEIVER FROM CARD CAGE.
R2. REMOVE 8 SCREWS FROM CR YSTAL OSC SUBBOARD COVER, AND REMOVE COVER.
Note
Ensure board edge does not make
contact with chassis wall.
I2. INSTALL 3 MOUNTING SCREWS.
I3. CONNECT RIBBON CABLE TO
CONNECTOR J8.
I4. INSTALL COVER WITH 8 SCREWS.
I5. INSTALL RECEIVER IN CARD CAGE.
MDR-1022
06/08/04
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
REMOVE:
(REMOVE STEPS ARE PREFIXED
BY LETTER R).
R1. REMOVE RCVR FROM CARD CAGE.
R2. REMOVE SCREWS FROM CAPACITY KEY
AND REMOVE CAPACITY KEY.
INSTALL:
(INSTALL STEPS ARE
PREFIXED BY LETTER I).
MW21100691
101598
9-83
9-84
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
PROCEDURE
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
Note
Allow a 1-hour warmup period for radio and test equipment before starting
applicable tests or improper frequency adjustment can result. If waiting for
initial alignment is impractical, it may be performed after a warmup period
of 5 minutes minimum; however, crystal frequency should be rechecked after
full warmup.
Note
Ensure that far-end transmitter frequency and carrier null has been set correctly before adjusting the receiver local oscillator frequency. Proper reception of an incoming signal from the far end is required before starting this
procedure.
1
9-85
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
CHAN ALM
EYE
CLOSURE
PED
1. SET TO PED.
AFC
NORM
AFC MON
EYE MON
RSL MON
GND
FREQ
CONT
XTAL
MON
FREQ
COUNTER
RF
IN
LABEL
10.650 GHz
142.0000 MHz
RF FREQ
CRYSTAL FREQ
LMW-6090-SM
05/27/02
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
PROCEDURE
DANGER
Possibility of
Injury
to Personnel
WARNING
Possibility of
Damage
to Equipment
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
This is an out-of-service procedure when on a nonstandby (unprotected) system. On a hot-standby or frequency diversity system,
switch traffic on the channel under test to protect.
1
Use front panel OVRD controls on AE-37() Controller to lock on-line XMTR
(opposite side from failed XMTR) on line.
9-87
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
STEP
PROCEDURE, CONTINUED
REMOVE:
WARNING
Possibility of
Damage
to Equipment
WARNING
Possibility of
Damage
to Equipment
WARNING
Possibility of
Damage
to Equipment
9-88
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
STEP
PROCEDURE, CONTINUED
On AE-37() Controller, toggle OVRD switch to disable override (unlocks online XMTR and restores automatic switching functions).
FRONT PANEL
P/O SHELF
REMOVE:
(REMOVE STEPS ARE
PREFIXED BY LETTER 'R').
INSTALL:
(INSTALL STEPS
ARE PREFIXED BY
LETTER 'I').
DC MON
GND
PWR ALM
R3. LOOSEN
MOUNTING
SCREWS AND
SLIDE PA TOWARD FRONT OF
CARD CAGE TO
ACCESS RF OUT
CONNECTOR
TEMP ALM
DC MON ADJ
PWR ALM ADJ
10.5V DC
POWER AMPLIFIER
I2 CONNECT
RF OUT CABLE.
R1. DISCONNECT
CABLE FROM
XMTR RF OUT
CONNECTOR.
I3. CONNECT
RF IN CABLE
TO XMTR RF OUT
CONNECTOR.
RF
MON
RF
IN
P/O SHELF
RF OUT
R4. DISCONNECT
RF OUT CABLE.
R5. TILT TOP OF PA
FORWARD APPROX 45
TO CLEAR RF OUT
CONNECTOR.
R6. REMOVE PA FROM
CARD CAGE.
LMW-7099-SM
04/29/03
9-90
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
PROCEDURE
DANGER
Possibility of
Injury
to Personnel
WARNING
Possibility of
Damage
to Equipment
9-91
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
STEP
PROCEDURE, CONTINUED
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
This is an out-of-service procedure when on a nonstandby (unprotected) system. On a hot-standby or frequency diversity system,
switch traffic on the channel under test to protect.
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
Do not operate a power amplifier unterminated. Set power supply PA POWER switch to DISABLE before connecting/disconnecting
power meter.
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
Note
If ATPC is enabled, disable (XMTR will go to high power).
9-92
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
DC MON
GND
PWR ALM
TEMP ALM
DC MON ADJ
PWR ALM ADJ
10.5V DC
POWER AMPLIFIER
RF
MON
RF
IN
RF OUT
30 DB
PAD*
HIGH
POWER
SENSOR*
POWER
METER
LMW-3012
06/28/05
9-93
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
ELMC Address:
RACK6
Description:
MDR-8000
12:17:01 PM
10-May-99
Communicating*
LABEL ON FILTER).
Calibrate A Side
Calibrate B-side
Carrier Null A
Carrier Null B
XMT LVL
ADJ
4
PWR MON
Abort
Next
FREQ CONT
XMT PWR
ALM
ON LINE
I CARR NULL
Q CARR NULL
TRANSMITTER
6
Abort
Back
Next
EXAMPLE:
EXPECTED OUTPUT LEVEL AT TOP OF STACK = 29 dBm.
LABEL ON DIPLEXER FILTER/XMT FILTER SHOWS INSERTION
LOSS IS 2 dB.
NOMINAL HIGH POWER OUT OF PA = 31 dBm
(29 dBm + 2 dBm = 31 dBm).
SET NOMINAL LOW POWER LEVEL FOR 21 dBm
(10 dB DOWN FROM 31 dBm).
PROCEED TO
LMW-7040A-SM
05/17/03
SHEET 2
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
7
Save your calibrated values. Click next
Abort
Back
Next
8
Abort
Back
CLICK NEXT.
Next
9
Back
10
11
12
GO TO CHART STEP 4 (
Finish
LMW-5087-SM
02/23/04
9-95
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
STEP
4
PROCEDURE, CONTINUED
GND
PWR ALM
TEMP ALM
OBSERVED LEVEL
(STEP 1).
DC MON ADJ
POWER AMPLIFIER
READ [X.X Vdc]
FOR [XX.X dBm]
AT TOP OF RACK
4. GO TO CHART STEP 5 (
MDR-1147F
04/14/05
Note
If ATPC was enabled prior to performance of this procedure,
re-enable.
9-96
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
STEP
Maintenance Section
PROCEDURE, CONTINUED
+
DVM
DC MON
GND
PWR ALM
EXAMPLE:
EXPECTED LEVEL AT TOP OF STACK = 29 dBm
29 dBm X 0.1 (VOLTS DC/dBm) = 2.9 VOLTS DC
TEMP ALM
DC MONITOR CALIBRATION
READ
[X.XADJ
Vdc]
DC
MON
FOR [XX.X dBm]
DC MONITOR CALIBRATION
READ [X.X Vdc]
FOR [XX.X dBm]
POWER AMPLIFIER
MEASURED LEVEL
(STEP 2).
RF
IN
6. GO TO CHART STEP 5 (
5) BELOW.
LMW-7239F
02/23/04
9-97
9-98
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
PROCEDURE
WARNING
Possibility of
Damage
to Equipment
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
9-99
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
REMOVE:
(REMOVE STEPS ARE PREFIXED
BY LETTER R).
LBO
DS1 IN J303
RPTR J314
DS1 IN
P303
RPTR IN
P314
DS1 OUT
P304
FRONT VIEW
(FULLY EQUIPPED SHELF)
MW21100651A
090398
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
LMW-6018
11/12/01
9-101
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
LBO
DS1 IN J303
RPTR J314
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
PROCEDURE
WARNING
Possibility of
Damage
to Equipment
WARNING
Possibility of
Damage
to Equipment
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
9-103
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
REMOVE:
(REMOVE STEPS ARE PREFIXED
BY LETTER 'R').
R2. DISCONNECT CABLES TO
A AND B XMTRs.
FROM
B XMTR
FROM
A XMTR
LMW-7042F
7/16/02
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
STEP
PROCEDURE
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
When upgrading system software, the load must be for the specific
radio type, e.g., DS1 for a DS1 radio, DS3 for a DS3 radio, and
OC3/STM-1 for an OC3/STM-1 radio. Use of incorrect software will
result in a controller alarm and a software types mismatch message on the computer screen (see Figure 9 - 32). The mismatch message asks Do you want to continue with the download? Click
Cancel and load the correct software.
9-105
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
STEP
PROCEDURE, CONTINUED
OK
Cancel
LMW-7049
07/20/02
9-106
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
020604_0736 (Z:)
File
File Edit View Help
STEP
Release
Docume...
setup.exe
Setup.lst
DOUBLE CLICK
(WILL LOAD FILES)
CLICK OK
(COPYING FILES)
winuniversal_xx.cab
Setup cannot install system files or update shared files if they are in use.
Before proceeding, we recommend that you close any applications you may
be running.
MDR-8000 Universal USI Setup
Begin the installation by clicking the button below.
OK
Exit Setup
Click this button to install MDR-8000 Universal USI software to the specified
destination directory.
Directory:
c:\Winuniversal\
Change Directory
Exit Setup
C:\Winuniversal_xx.exe
99%
Cancel
MDR-8000 Universal USI Setup
MDR-8000 Universal USI Setup was completed successfully.
OK
4
LMW-7044-SM
10/16/05
9-107
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
STEP
PROCEDURE, CONTINUED
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
Connect RS-232 interface cable between USI port on controller and laptop
computer.
Is the remote controller equipped with ELMC option key with provisioning?
If yes, go to step 10.
If no, stop. Remote downloading requires that the ELMC option key with
provisioning be installed on controller module.
10
9-108
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Maintenance Section
New
Controller
Alarm
Status
Analog Monitor
Firmware Upgrade
ELMC Address:
200R2
Description:
LCL
FAR
RMT
F7
Performance
F8
Station Alarm
F9
User Control
Provisioning
Download
LOCAL MAIN
Communicating***
COM 1
200R2
F6
Alarm Status
ELMC Address:
Description:
F6
Analog Monitor
Performance
F7
F8
Station Alarm
F9
User Control
Provisioning
200R2
MDR-8000 3DS3
STEP
c:\
windnld
8000 Universal USI
css12_12.dat
css12_14.dat
css12_15.dat
css12_16.dat
Start Download
Stop Download
Click Options/Firmware
Upgrade/Download
MDR-8000 3DS3
Note
After automatically re-booting, the controller will start running, provisioning
previously stored in the controller will be left unchanged by the download program.
LMW-7045-SM
10/16/05
9-109
9-110
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Diagrams Section
DIAGRAMS
10
GENERAL
This section contains engineering drawings to support the equipment configurations and
interconnections as described in this manual. Drawings are arranged in numerical order by
drawing number under each heading (identified by a tab). Drawings designated Hot-Standby
or Compact are unique for that product. Drawings not specifically identified pertain to all
MDR-8000 series radios.
10.1
Cable assembly drawings are listed by titles and part numbers identifying specific functions/
applications for the MDR-8000 radio. Some cable assemblies are used by multiple products,
not just the MDR-8000 series radios. The last three digits of the part number identify the specific usage. When the cable assembly is used for more than one application, only MDR-8000
applications (signified by the last three digits of the part number) are listed.
10.2
LIST OF DRAWINGS
Title
Drawing No.
10-1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Diagrams Section
3EM20188AAAA
INTERCONNECT/POWER DISTRIBUTION
Hot-Standby Shelf Interconnect/Power Distribution............ 3DH031770000EJZZA
Compact Radio Interconnect/Power Distribution ................. 3EM142470000EJZZA
MCS-11/TBOS MAPPING DIAGRAM ....................................... 3DH031770000PJZZA
MANUFACTURING/INSTALLATION DIAGRAMS
Hot-Standby Shelf Manufacturing/Installation.................... 3DH031770000RJZZA
Compact Radio Manufacturing/Installation ......................... 3EM142470000RJZZA
Compact Outdoor Unit Manufacturing/Installation............. 3EM142470001RJZZA
FILTER/DIPLEXER KITS
DS1/E1 Filter Kits .................................................................. 3DH041220000UDZZA
DS3/OC3/STM-1 Filter Kits ................................................... 3EM041580000UDZZA
DS3/OC3/STM-1 Stacking Filters.......................................... 3EM044480000UDZZA
Filter Kit Contents (High Cap) .............................................. 3DH031770003RJZZA
Filter Kit Contents, Stacking and Quad Diversity ............... 3DH031770004RJZZA
WAVEGUIDE RELATED KITS
Waveguide Interface (Transition) Kits
(For Add-on Shelf Solutions) .................................................. 967-1665
Waveguide Kits (for Full 3-Shelf Rack Solutions)................. 967-1634
CABLE ASSEMBLIES
Customer Status Alarm Cable (J305).................................... 695-4121-001/003
Cable Assembly DS1 Interface............................................... 695-4125
OC3/STM-1 Repeater Cable (J203) ................................... 695-4125-007/013
ELMC 1/2 Cable (J315/J318)............................................. 695-4125-007/013
Wayside DS1 Stub Cable (J201/J202) ............................... 695-4125-041
Wayside DS1 Cable (J201/J302)........................................ 695-4125-051/055
RS-232 1/2 Cable (J312/J313)............................................ 695-4125-021/025
Audio Port 1/2 Cable (J316/J317)...................................... 695-4125-026/030
MCS-11 Master (J307)............................................................ 695-4126-006/009/012
MCS-11 Master (J307)............................................................ 695-4147-001/003
DS1/E1 Input/Output Cable (J303/J304) .............................. 695-7806-001/005/021*/025*
ELMC 1/2 Stub (J315/J318) ................................................... 695-7814-003
DS1/DS3 Repeater Cable (J314/J401) ................................... 695-7836-001/005/031*/036*
J307/J308/J309/J310 XMT/RCV Data 15 Pin
Cable Assembly ....................................................................... 695-7837
MCS-11 (J308 to J308) Crosswired................................... 695-7837-001/005
10-2
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Diagrams Section
10-3
10-4
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
A
3EM20188
Rack Installation
RACK INSTALLATION
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
A-2
Rack Installation
3EM20188
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Char t 1
3EM20188
Rack Installation
Floor Preparation
PURPOSE
This chart details the standard procedure for rack installation floor preparation. The two
types of racks that can be installed are the standard rack and the seismic. These racks are
described in the rack installation chart (Chart 2).
PREREQUISITE
None
EQUIPMENT/TOOLS REQUIRED
Anchor setting tool (Redhead RT58 or equivalent)
Chalk line with chalk
Extension cord (50-foot)
Felt marking pens
Hammer, claw (24 to 40 ounces)
Roll of cellophane tape
Rotary impact drill and associated drill bits
Steel tape measure (25-foot)
Trouble lamp, insulated (Duralamp)
Vacuum cleaner, High Efficiency Particulate Arrester (HEPA)
STEP
1
PROCEDURE
Note
When the shelf assembly is mounted in a rack next to a wall, clearance from
the backplane requires a minimum of 6 inches.
2
Follow job floor plan and mark equipment locations on floor with chalk. See
Figure A - 1.
A-3
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Rack Installation
3EM20188
EXISTING EQUIPMENT
FRONT
2.5 FT
EXISTING EQUIPMENT
1.0 FT
RACK
FRONT
RACK
END
RACK
BASE LINE
2.5 FT
EXISTING EQUIPMENT
FRONT
LW403-0224-1
062992
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
STEP
3EM20188
Rack Installation
PROCEDURE, CONTINUED
Use felt marking pen to mark anchor points for each rack. Figure A - 2 shows
floor mounting diagram for standard rack and Figure A - 3 shows floor
mounting diagram for seismic rack.
16.38
8.19
0.25 REF
6.00
4.26
2.94
9.39
2.75
REF
5.25
0.562 DIA HOLE
4 PLACES
CL
ALL DIMENSIONS
SHOWN IN INCHES
20.50
MW12601571
041095
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Rack Installation
3EM20188
16.00
BEAD WELD
4 PLACES
8.00
CL
6.375
6.00
4.875
13.00
3.00
REF
6.00
CL
20.50
ALL DIMENSIONS
SHOWN IN INCHES
TOP VIEW
MW20501091
091895
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
STEP
5
3EM20188
Rack Installation
PROCEDURE, CONTINUED
Determine rack type (Table A - 1). Figure A - 4 shows standard rack assembly
mounting dimensions and Figure A - 5 shows seismic rack assembly mounting
dimensions.
Height
Type
694-9000-006
7-ft
Standard
019-0429-010
7-ft
Seismic *
019-0429-020
9-ft
Seismic *
019-0429-030
11-ft 6-in
Seismic *
019-0429-040
11-ft 8-in
Seismic *
019-0429-080
7-ft 6-in
Seismic *
019-0429-090
8-ft
Seismic *
Note
Seismic rack installation is effective only on concrete flooring that has a
minimum thickness of 6 inches, a minimum strength of 3000 psi, and is
reinforced with 0.5 percent steel rebar.
6
A-7
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Rack Installation
3EM20188
0.62 X 1.25
RND END SLOT
4 PLACES
20.50
17.74
1.38 REF
84.00
FRONT OF
RACK
FLOOR
ALL DIMENSIONS
IN INCHES
FLOOR
FIXED RACK
1.73
MW12200441A
041896
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188
Rack Installation
12.39
6.20
CL
MOUNTING
HOLE
CENTERLINE
20.50
84.00
80.00
83.00
0.562 DIA
2 PL
FRONT OF
RACK
FLOOR
2.00
ALL DIMENSIONS
IN INCHES
FLOOR
1.37
1.73
MW12600631A
041095
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Rack Installation
3EM20188
5.00
84.00
73.50
0.21624 X 0.56
SCREW
FRONT OF
RACK
20.50
15.00
ALL DIMENSIONS
IN INCHES
MW20501081
091795
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
STEP
3EM20188
Rack Installation
PROCEDURE, CONTINUED
Note
Let the tool do the work. Apply only enough pressure to control the tool. Vertical force in excess of the weight of the tool reduces the impact force, which
defeats the drilling process for the self-drill anchors.
9
To position anchor, operate drill in impact mode. Use impact action until teeth
are embedded just below concrete surface.
10
Engage drill rotation action, and drill until chuck is within 1/16-inch above
concrete surface as shown in Figure A - 6.
11
Stop tool and lift approximately 1 inch to disengage impact action. Then start
tool and withdraw anchor.
12
Disengage rotation action. While anchor is still attached, start tool to expel
concrete cuttings from anchor.
DANGER
Possibility of
Injury
to Personnel
Never use an air hose to clean dust from a hole, as dust may be
blown into the eyes and the equipment. For the same reason,
dust should not be flicked out. Spoon out carefully.
13
Use HEPA vacuum cleaner to completely remove concrete cuttings from hole.
Inspect hole for concrete chips. Hole must be completely clear for proper
seating of anchor.
A-11
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
STEP
Rack Installation
3EM20188
PROCEDURE, CONTINUED
14
15
Verify that tool is in impact position. Insert anchor in hole, and set with
impact action of tool until chuck is 1/16-inch above concrete as shown in
Figure A - 7.
16
Break off chucking cone. A hard push of tool is sufficient to break off cone.
17
18
19
Note
To install standard rack on other than concrete floor, ensure that floor can
To mount standard rack on a wood or steel floor, use 3/8-inch lag bolts on wood
floor or 1/2-inch screws or studs on steel floor.
21
Mark position for four lag bolt pilot holes or four clearance holes for machine
screws.
22
Drill a 3/16-inch pilot hole for lag bolts or a 9/16-inch clearance hole for
machine screws.
23
A-12
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188
Rack Installation
CHUCK
CHUCKING CONE
ANCHOR
(SELF-DRILLING)
CONCRETE
LW403-0225-1
062992
SHANK
CHUCK
CHUCKING CONE
EXPANSION PLUG
LW403-0226-1
062992
A-14
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Chart 2
3EM20188
Rack Installation
Rack Installation
PURPOSE
This chart provides instructions for physically installing a rack. The two types of racks that
can be installed are described in the following paragraphs. Refer to Chart 1, Floor
Preparation, for rack illustrations and to Table A - 1 in Chart 1 for rack part numbers.
RACK DESCRIPTIONS
Standard Rack
The standard rack uses extruded aluminum channels with 12-24 tapped mounting holes
vertically spaced at EIA increments. The tapped-hole pattern provides for mounting the
modular subsystems on the front of the channels, and the waveguide and rack rear cover on
the back. The bottom of the rack is held together by steel angles mounted to the front and
back of the rack channels. As an option, the rear angle can be turned in toward the rack
channel or toward the rear (normal position) to increase the base dimensions and provide a
more stable footing. If the rear angle is turned in, the front angle must be removed during
installation for access to the holes in the rear-mounting angle. Two optional snap-on front
covers are available. Side covers are provided for the rack. The side covers protect the cable
runs and are secured to the card cages and to slots located on the main rack channels.
Retaining screws are used at the top and bottom of each side cover.
Seismic Rack
A seismic rack, designed to withstand seismic anomalies, such as earthquakes, is available.
The rack frame is steel and consists of the rack top support and front and rear baseplates
welded to the rack channels. The rack frame is painted and so requires a special ground
cable for a proper common ground between the side panel, the installed equipment shelves,
the power distribution panel, and the back mounted ground bar. Seismic accessory kit (PN
695-10001-000) consists of the ground cable, the ground bar, ground lugs, left and right side
covers, six side panel holders, and mounting screws. Side covers fit only the seismic rack
and are not interchangeable with side covers on the standard extruded aluminum racks. The
side covers protect the cable runs and are secured to the card cages and the rack channels by
the side holders. The side covers (left and right) slide onto the side panel holders. Three
holders are attached to each rack channel with screws.
PREREQUISITE
Complete Chart 1, Floor Preparation
EQUIPMENT/TOOLS REQUIRED
Hammer
Level (3-foot)
Pinch bar
Shims (0.06-, 0.09-, and 0.12-inch)
Socket set (3/8-inch drive)
Straps (heavy duty) or rope, as required
Torque wrench (3/8-inch drive) (80 foot-pound capability)
A-15
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Rack Installation
3EM20188
PROCEDURE
DANGER
Possibility of
Injury
to Personnel
Note
Use a positioning dolly to move equipment to permanent location in equipment room or vault. If a dolly is not available, use a piece of canvas placed
under the rack footing to prevent marring of floor.
2
Carefully position rack over mounting anchors. Line up and plumb rack.
Use level to check leveling and alignment of rack at base, top, and both sides.
When necessary, insert shim under base to assure correct leveling.
To secure rack to concrete floor, install anchor, stud, washers, and nut, and
then tighten. Figure A - 8 shows a typical method of securing rack to floor. To
secure on other than concrete floor, install 3/8 in. diameter bolts, flat washers,
and lock washers.
A-16
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
STEP
3EM20188
Rack Installation
PROCEDURE, CONTINUED
Rack Top Support
Note
Ensure that rack is properly aligned. If rack is twisted, covers may not fit or
may bind.
9
Note
The extendable rack can rise to any height from 7 ft 3 in. (2210 mm) to 11 ft
6 in. (3505 mm). These extensions provide upper rack support only.
10
On extendable rack, loosen setscrews one turn, and extend rack to desired
height.
11
Tighten front setscrews (four places) securely, then tighten rear setscrews
(four places).
Guardrail Installation
Note
Front and rear guardrails provide additional equipment protection. An ac
outlet assembly can be installed on the base plate at the front rail. Side rails
are mounted to the front or rear of the rack channel using 0.250-20 hardware.
12
13
A-17
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Rack Installation
3EM20188
CONE REMOVED
AT INSTALLATION
ANCHOR
NOTE:
IN A STANDARD RACK
1/213 X 1 1/2 IN. BOLTS (PN 3261455000)
CAN BE USED IN PLACE OF STUDS AND
NUTS TO SECURE RACK.
MW20504631
080497
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188
Rack Installation
20.50 REF
16.38
12.74
8.19
2.06
1.19
3.63
0.562 DIA
3 HOLES
0.62 X 1.25
RND END SLOT, 2 PL
TOP VIEW
4.06
12.38
1.00
0.62 X 1.25
RND END SLOT, 2 PL
ALL DIMENSIONS
SHOWN IN INCHES
REAR VIEW
MW12200451
041095
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Rack Installation
3EM20188
9.111
1.75
REF
0.562 DIA
3 HOLES
4.555
0.21624 X 0.56
SCREW
EXTENSION
CHANNEL
EXTENSION
BAR
CABLE
BRACKET
EXTENSION
CHANNEL
12.38
GND
LUG
0.19024 X 0.375
SELF-LOCKING
SETSCREW
0.21624 X 0.56
SCREW
STANDARD RACK
WITH EXTENSION KIT
MW10505872A
041095
ALL DIMENSIONS
SHOWN IN INCHES
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188
Rack Installation
BEAD WELD
4 PLACES
20.50
1.19
3.00
2.00
7.25
1.25
7.25
TOP VIEW
BEAD WELD
3.00
2.00
1.937
3.00
2.75
1.75
GND LUG
2 PLACES
0.21624 X 0.56
SCREW
4 PLACES
ALL DIMENSIONS
SHOWN IN INCHES
SIDE VIEW
MW20501101
091995
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Rack Installation
3EM20188
MW20504501
080497
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188
Rack Installation
GUARD RAIL
MTG FLANGE
FLAT WASHER
LOCKWASHER
BOLT
BASEPLATE
(FRONT OR REAR)
RACK CHANNEL
DETAIL
GUARD RAIL MOUNTING
REAR
BASE ANGLE
REAR
GUARD RAIL
SEE DETAIL
RACK
CHANNEL
FRONT
GUARD RAIL
SEE DETAIL
AC OUTLET ASSY
(IF USED)
SHORT
SIDE RAIL
FRONT
BASE ANGLE
LONG
SIDE RAIL
MW122-0047-1A
120892
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Rack Installation
3EM20188
ATTACHMENT PLATE
PN 6901676001
SEE
DETAIL A
DETAIL A
0.21624 X 0.56
SCREW ASSEMBLY
NOTE:
WHEN BOLTING RACKS TOGETHER, INTERFERENCE MAY
OCCUR BETWEEN SIDE PANELS, MAKING THEM DIFFICULT
TO REMOVE (LIFT OFF). IF THIS CONDITION OCCURS,
INSERT 0.06 SPACER (PN 6905371001) BETWEEN RACK
CHANNELS PRIOR TO TIGHTENING BOLT. BOLT RUNS
THROUGH SLOT IN SPACER.
EXTENDABLE RACK
SEE
DETAIL B
SPACER
(IF REQUIRED)
RACK CHANNEL
REFERENCE
DETAIL B
TOP VIEW
ALL DIMENSIONS
SHOWN IN INCHES
FIXED RACK
MW12600681
010996
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Chart 3
3EM20188
Rack Installation
PURPOSE
This procedure provides instructions to route and connect the station ground cable to a
standard or seismic rack, and to route and connect office battery power to the Power
Distribution Unit (PDU).
PREREQUISITES
All power must be off.
Rack must be installed.
GENERAL
Establish equipment or station ground in accordance with your company grounding
requirements for all installations.
The MDR-800/i/s radio operates on either -24 or -48 V DC input power. Office power is
connected to the (PDU) which in turn connects to the backplane of the shelf assembly. The
PDU provides the transition from the large cables that run from the office power board to
the smaller cables that provide power to the shelf assemblies.
EQUIPMENT/TOOLS REQUIRED
Itemized list is generic. Refer to procedure for specific items required for particular
circumstance.
Thomas & Betts TBM2, 5, 8, or Hydraulic Tool No. 13642 or TBM15
T&B PN 256-30695-1158 (6 gauge) ground lugs
T&B PN 256-30695-1159 (4 gauge) ground lugs
T&B PN 256-30695-1160 (2 gauge) ground lugs
T&B PN 256-30695-1162 (1/0 gauge) ground lugs
Ring terminal for 1/4-20 stud
STEP
Wire Size
Alcatel PN
Amp Inc PN
8 AWG
304-0472-000
322049
6 AWG
304-0749-000
322051
4 AWG
304-0756-000
322053
PROCEDURE
Station Ground Cable
Route station ground cable from overhead cable tray to radio rack per cable
run list. Station ground cable connects to ground lug terminal at top side of
standard rack. On seismic rack, ground connection is to ground bar at rear of
rack (Figure A - 14). On standard rack, preferred method is to insert ground
cable directly into pressure-type ground lug terminal. Optional method uses
special crimp lug on cable (used on seismic rack). See Figure A - 15 and
Figure A - 16.
A-25
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Rack Installation
3EM20188
Note
The special lug can be used only with 6 gauge stranded cable, and a separate ground wire must be run to each rack. The special lug (PN 690-6281001) is not furnished with the standard rack and must be ordered separately
(on the seismic rack the lug comes as part of the accessory kit). A Thomas &
Betts TBM2, TBM5(S), TBM8(S), or a Hydraulic Tool No. 13642 or TBM15
is required for installation. The side-oriented pressure-type lug terminal
allows for removal of the pressure-type lug terminals. The threaded mounting holes accommodate lugs with either 0.625 or 1 in. spacing. Thomas &
Betts part numbers for ground lugs with 1 in. spacing are as follows:
T&B PN 256-30695-1158 (6 gauge)
T&B PN 256-30695-1159 (4 gauge)
T&B PN 256-30695-1160 (2 gauge)
T&B PN 256-30695-1162 (1/0 gauge)
Note
Since the seismic rack frame is painted, it requires a special ground cable
(PN 695-0998-001) for a proper common ground between the side panels, the
installed equipment shelves, the power distribution panel, and the ground
bar, which mounts to the back of the rack frame. See Figure A - 14. The
ground cable, ground bar, and ground lugs are part of the seismic accessory
kit (PN 695-1001-000).
A-26
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188
Rack Installation
NOTE:
STATION GROUND CAN BE CONNECTED TO
GROUND LUG ON EITHER LEFT OR RIGHT
SIDE OF RACK.
STANDARD RACK
(FRONT VIEW)
NOTE:
ROUTE STATION GROUND TO SPECIAL GROUND BAR
AT TOP REAR OF SEISMIC RACK.
SEISMIC RACK
(REAR VIEW)
MW20504581
080197
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Rack Installation
3EM20188
A-28
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
STEP
3EM20188
Rack Installation
PROCEDURE, CONTINUED
Battery Power Cables
DANGER
Possibility of
Injury
to Personnel
See Figure A - 17 for wire size/wire length/current drain relationship. Use the
following between the office battery power source and the power distribution unit:
Ring terminal for 1/4-20 Stud
Wire Size
Alcatel PN
Amp Inc PN
8 AWG
304-0472-000
322049
6 AWG
304-0749-000
322051
4 AWG
304-0756-000
322053
On all power supplies, verify that power switches are set to OFF.
DANGER
Possibility of
Injury
to Personnel
A-29
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
STEP
Rack Installation
3EM20188
PROCEDURE, CONTINUED
Note
When changing battery polarity inputs on the MDR-8000 Power Distribution Unit, PN 695-6200-001/002, E7, E8, and E15 strapping must be done.
See application drawing 3DH03170000EJZZA. Failure to strap properly
will prevent the rack alarm indicator from lighting.
Note
Steps 6, 7, and 8 apply only to PDU 695-6200-001/002.
6
For positive ground system, ensure positive (+) voltage is chassis ground. On
PDU, strap E2 to E3, E5 to E6, and E15 to E8.
For negative ground system, ensure negative (-) voltage is chassis ground. On
PDU, strap E2 to E1, E5 to E4, and E15 to E7.
Note
Steps 9 and 10 apply to PDU 3EM 13317 AA.
9
A-30
For positive ground system strap E39 to E38 and E42 to E41.
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
STEP
10
3EM20188
Rack Installation
PROCEDURE, CONTINUED
For negative ground system strap E37 to E38 and E40 to E41.
WARNING
Possibility of
Damage
to Equipment
Route power cables (-) from office battery source and connect to NEG A and
NEG B BATTERY studs at power distribution unit in rack. See Figure A - 18,
Figure A - 19, and Figure A - 20.
12
Route return cables (+) from battery source and connect to POS A and POS B
BATTERY studs at power distribution unit. See Figure A - 18, Figure A - 19,
and Figure A - 20.
Note
For PDU 695-6200-01/001 if there is no B battery power source, connect
jumper between NEG A and NEG B battery terminals on PDU. Also jumper
between POS A and POS B battery terminals in PDU. See Figure A - 21.
13
14
15
A-31
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Rack Installation
3EM20188
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
4 GA
6 GA
TYPICAL
24 V
8 GA
10 GA
10
9
8
7
TYPICAL
48 V
6
5
4
3
12 GA
14 GA
2
16 GA
18 GA
1
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188
Rack Installation
BATTERY INPUT
WIRE SIZE NO. 4 (MAX)
+
A BATT
+
B BATT
TOP VIEW
NEG
POS
'B' BATTERY 'B' BATTERY
-24/-48
+24/+48
R3
E1
E3
TB3
TB4
TB1
TB2
E7 E15
E4 E6
E8
2C
2B
E2
E5
2D
2A
LMW-7029
02/06/03
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Rack Installation
3EM20188
BATTERY INPUT
WIRE SIZE NO. 4 (MAX)
A+ A-
BATTERY
B+ B-
BATTERY
BATTERY
E38
E39
FUSES
3 4 5
FUSESFUSES
35 4 3 2
FUSES
4 3 2
E37
E42
E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6
BATTERY
E40
E41
CIRCUIT BOARD
LOCATED INSIDE PDU
JUMPER E39 TO E38 AND E42 TO E41 FOR
POSITIVE RACK GND (AS SHOWN ABOVE).
JUMPER E37 TO E38 AND E40 TO E41 FOR
NEGATIVE RACK GND. FOR DETAILED WIRING
INFORMATION, SEE APPLICATION DWG
3DH031770000 EJZZA.
LMW-9001
04/22/03
B BTTY PWR
+ B BTTY RTN
B BTTY RTN
AMP INC.
TERMINAL PN
322049
322051
322053
A BTTY RTN
ALCATEL
TERMINAL PN
304-0742-000
304-0749-000
304-0756-000
+ A BTTY PWR
WIRE
SIZE
8 AWG
6 AWG
4 AWG
+ B BTTY RTN
NOTE:
+ A BTTY RTN
3EM20188
Rack Installation
A BTTY PWR
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
MDR-8000 SHELF
FAN ASSY
HEAT DEFLECTOR
MDR-8000 SHELF
FAN ASSY
LMW-9002
02/06/03
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Rack Installation
3EM20188
E30
E31
E32
E33
E15
R3
E7
E8
E34
E29
E6
F4
TB4
E17
E4
E5
E18
E22
F3
E19
E24
E27
E21
E23
E26
E20
E25
E3
E28
E9
E1
F2
TB3
TB2
E10
E14
E2
E11
E12
E13
F1
TB1
R1
POS
A BATTERY
+24/+48
R2
NEG
A BATTERY
24/48
J2C
J2B
J2D
J2A
MW20504591
073197
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
B
3EM20188AAAA
Monitor and Control Systems
GENERAL
This section provides information on the monitor and control systems available to interface
the MDR-8000/i/s series radios. These systems include the Telemetry Byte Oriented Serial
(TBOS) protocol foreign alarm system, the ALCATEL MCS-11 Monitor and Control System,
controller relay outputs, and discrete alarms, status, and controls. Every effort has been made
to avoid duplication of information found on the attached, released, engineering drawings and
information in the text in this appendix. If there is a discrepancy between documents, the
information on the attached engineering drawings takes precedence.
B.1
The MCS-11 Monitor-Control System provides local and remote alarm, status, and performance data. Polling procedures and local display options provide data to and from any MCS11 equipped site in the MDR-8000 system. Refer to Diagrams section for detailed MCS-11
fault reporting information.
When an MCS-11 is used, the Office Switching System (OSS) circuit in the AE-37( ) Controller
reads and stores alarm and status information. MCS-11 data occupies one 64 kb/s channel in
the 256 kb/s service channel.
MCS-11 ALARMS, STATUS, AND CONTROLS
The MCS-11 Monitor-Control System consists of a master station and one or more remote stations. See Figure B - 1 for a typical polling/response flow. Refer to the Diagrams section for the
complete polling/reporting word.
B.4
The master station polls each remote station and, in turn, receives a response or a no-report
indication before polling the next station. Upon being polled, the remote station transmits the
requested information for display. The master station can also initiate controls to be performed
at the remote stations. As an option, an additional slave master station can exist, which operates receive only. Normal operation is to set the polling to look only at the station alarms. A
summary alarm from each detail address is normally connected to the station alarms. When
that station alarm indicates a Change of State (COS), the master station polls the specified
detail address and records the results.
B-1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Within a given station, one station address with the subaddress containing the first two digits
of the station address and an appropriate letter to define the individual function is used. The
following list provides a valid address:
Rack 1
Rack 2
Rack 3
B-2
RSS = A1
Station
RDS = A1A
Detail
RAS = A1A
Analog
RCD = A1A
Remote Control
RDS = A1B
Detail
RAS = A1B
Analog
RCD = A1B
Remote Control
RDS = A1D
Detail
RAS = A1D
Analog
RCD = A1D
Remote Control
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Monitor and Control Systems
MCS11 SYSTEM
LEVEL1
AUTOMATIC POLL/RESPONSE
A1
LEVEL2
POLL/RESPONSE
STATION 1
RSS
ADDRESS
H16
A
RACK 1
RDS
ADDRESS
A
SUB SYS 1
RAS
ADDRESS
A
RMT CTRL 1
RCD
ADDRESS
R
RACK 15
RDS
ADDRESS
M
SUB SYS 12
RAS
ADDRESS
F
RMT CTRL 6
RCD
ADDRESS
STATION 128
RSS
ADDRESS
MW226-0018-1
112492
Level-2 poll/response for detail alarms and status (RDS) analog functions (RAS) and controls
(RCD) are on a manual (demand) basis.
Table B - 1 Remote Station Scanner
Scan Point
01
02
03
04
05
06
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Scan Point
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
DS1 Description
DS3 Description
OC3 Description
ETH Description
A Side CLA
A Side CLA
A Side CLA
A Side CLA
A Side
Power Supply Alarm
A Side
Power Supply Alarm
A Side
Power Supply Alarm
A Side
Power Supply Alarm
A Side
PA Power Alarm
A Side
PA Power Alarm
A Side
PA Power Alarm
A Side
PA Power Alarm
A Side
Tx Power Alarm
A Side
PA Power Supply Alarm
A Side
PA Power Supply Alarm
A Side
PA Power Supply Alarm
A Side PA
Power Supply Alarm
A Side
ATPC Timeout Alarm
A Side
ATPC Timeout Alarm
A Side
ATPC Timeout Alarm
A Side
ATPC Timeout Alarm
B-4
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Monitor and Control Systems
Table B - 2 (Cont.) TBOS and MCS-11 Remote Detail Scanner Points
RDS
POINT
DS1 Description
DS3 Description
OC3 Description
ETH Description
A Side DS1 Tx
Loss Of Input Alarm
A Side DS1 Tx
Loss Of Input Alarm
B Side CLA
B Side CLA
B Side CLA
B Side CLA
10
B Side
Power Supply Alarm
B Side
Power Supply Alarm
B Side
Power Supply Alarm
B Side
Power Supply Alarm
11
12
13
B Side
PA Power Supply Alarm
B Side
PA Power Supply Alarm
B Side
PA Power Supply Alarm
B Side
PA Power Supply Alarm
14
B Side
ATPC Timeout Alarm
B Side
ATPC Timeout Alarm
B Side
ATPC Timeout Alarm
B Side
ATPC Timeout Alarm
15
16
B Side DS1 Tx
Loss Of Input Alarm
B Side DS1 Tx
Loss Of Input Alarm
*17
A Side Tx On
A Side Tx On
A Side Tx On
A Side Tx On
18
A Side
PA Temperature Alarm
A Side
PA Temperature Alarm
A Side
PA Temperature Alarm
A Side
PA Temperature Alarm
19
Tx Override
Tx Override
Tx Override
Tx Override
20
A Side
ATPC High Power Status
A Side
ATPC High Power Status
A Side
ATPC High Power Status
A Side
ATPC High Power Status
21
A DS3 In AIS
A Side
OC3 In AIS Detect
A Side ETH In
Remote Fail Alarm
22
Off Normal/Inventory
Off Normal/Inventory
Off Normal/Inventory
Off Normal/Inventory
23
RF
Command Path Alarm
RF
Command Path Alarm
RF
Command Path Alarm
RF
Command Path Alarm
24
Controller
Power On Reset
Controller
Power On Reset
Controller
Power On Reset
Controller
Power On Reset
*25
B Side Tx On
B Side Tx On
B Side Tx On
B Side Tx On
26
B Side
PA Temperature Alarm
B Side
PA Temperature Alarm
B Side
PA Temperature Alarm
B Side
PA Temperature Alarm
27
28
DADE Alarm
B DS3 In AIS
B Side OC3 In
AIS Detect
B Side ETH In
Remote Fail Alarm
*29
*30
OC3
Equipment Loopback
ETH
Equipment Loopback
B-5
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
RDS
POINT
DS1 Description
DS3 Description
OC3 Description
ETH Description
*31
*32
Undefined
DS1
Equipment Loopback
DS1
Equipment Loopback
33
34
35
36
37
A Side
Terminal Sync Alarm
38
39
40
A Side
Repeater/Sync Alarm
A Side
Repeater/Sync Alarm
A Side
Repeater/Sync Alarm
A Side
Repeater/Sync Alarm
41
42
43
44
45
B Side
Terminal Sync Alarm
46
47
48
B Side
Repeater/Sync Alarm
B Side
Repeater/Sync Alarm
B Side
Repeater/SyncAlarm
B Side
Repeater/SyncAlarm
*49
A Side Rx On
A Side Rx On
A Side Rx On
A Side Rx On
50
Not Used
A Side Rx SC On
A Side Rx SC On
A Side Rx SC On
*51
A Side I/O On
A Side I/O On
A Side I/O On
A Side I/O On
52
Rx Override
Rx Override
Rx Override
Rx Override
53
Not Used
54
Fan Alarm
Fan Alarm
Fan Alarm
Fan Alarm
55
*56
A Side
APC Locked High
A Side
APC Locked High
A Side
APC Locked High
A Side
APC Locked High
*57
B Side Rx On
B Side Rx On
B Side Rx On
B Side Rx On
B-6
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Monitor and Control Systems
Table B - 2 (Cont.) TBOS and MCS-11 Remote Detail Scanner Points
RDS
POINT
DS1 Description
DS3 Description
OC3 Description
ETH Description
58
Not Used
B Side Rx SC On
B Side Rx SC On
B Side Rx SC On
*59
B Side I/O On
B Side I/O On
B Side I/O On
B Side I/O On
60
I/O Override
I/O Override
I/O Override
I/O Override
61
Not Used
62
*63
B Side
APC Locked High
B Side
APC Locked High
B Side
APC Locked High
B Side
APC Locked High
64
Not Used
Not Used
Reserved
Reserved
Scan Point
A & B Sides
A-Side
B-Side
01
02
PA Power Voltage
03
04
05
06
ATPC Voltage
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Battery Voltage
17
18
Radio Errors
19
20
21
22
23
Outage Seconds
24
B-7
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
RCD
POINT
DS1 Description
DS3 Description
OC3 Description
ETH Description
Switch A Tx On
Switch A Tx On
Switch A Tx On
Switch A Tx On
Switch B Tx On
Switch B Tx On
Switch B Tx On
Switch B Tx On
Switch A Rx On
Switch A Rx On
Switch A Rx On
Switch A Rx On
Switch B Rx On
Switch B Rx On
Switch B Rx On
Switch B Rx On
Switch A I/O On
Switch A I/O On
Switch A I/O On
Switch A I/O On
Switch B I/O On
Switch B I/O On
Switch B I/O On
Switch B I/O On
Line 1 LPBK
Line 1 LPBK
Wayside DS1
Line 1 LPBK
Wayside DS1
Line 1 LPBK
10
Line 2 LPBK
Line 2 LPBK
Wayside DS1
Line 2 LPBK
11
Line 3 LPBK
Line 3 LPBK
Wayside DS1
Line 3 LPBK
Wayside DS1
Line 3 LPBK
12
Line 4 LPBK
Not Used
Not Used
Wayside DS1
Line 4 LPBK
13
User Control #1
User Control #1
User Control #1
User Control #1
14
User Control #2
User Control #2
User Control #2
User Control #2
15
User Control #3
User Control #3
User Control #3
User Control #3
B-8
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Monitor and Control Systems
RCD
POINT
DS1 Description
DS3 Description
OC3 Description
ETH Description
16
17
Line 5 LPBK
Not Used
Switch A OC3 In On
Not Used
18
Line 6 LPBK
Not Used
Switch B OC3 In On
Not Used
19
Line 7 LPBK
Not Used
Not Used
20
Line 8 LPBK
Not Used
Not Used
21
Line 9 LPBK
Not Used
Switch A Wayside On
Switch A Wayside On
22
Line 10 LPBK
Not Used
Switch B Wayside On
Switch B Wayside On
23
Line 11 LPBK
Not Used
Not Used
Switch A ETH On
24
Line 12 LPBK
Not Used
Not Used
Switch B ETH On
25
Line 13 LPBK
Not Used
OC3 A
Facility Loopback
ETH A
Facility Loopback
26
Line 14 LPBK
Not Used
OC3 B
Facility Loopback
ETH B
Facility Loopback
27
Line 15 LPBK
Not Used
OC3 A
Equipment Loopback
ETH A
Equipment Loopback
28
Line 16 LPBK
Not Used
OC3 B
Equipment Loopback
ETH B
Equipment Loopback
29
User Control #4
User Control #4
User Control #4
User Control #4
30
User Control #5
User Control #5
User Control #5
User Control #5
31
User Control #6
User Control #6
User Control #6
User Control #6
32
B-9
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
J308PIN #
Function
Characteristics
*RCV CLK +
RCV DATA +
Positive going 64 kb/s RS-422 output data. Bit cells defined by positive
going transitions of RCV CLK +
*XMT CLK +
CLK OUT +
Positive going 64 kb/s RS-422 output return clock, same as and alternate for RCV CLK + and XMT CLK +. Used in place of RCV CLK + and
XMT CLK + in applications where long cables introduce significant
round trip delays between clock output and data inputs.
XMT DATA +
Positive going 64 kb/s RS-422 input data. Bit cells defined by positive
going transitions of XMT CLK +
OFF HOOK +
Positive going RS-422 Ready To Send (RTS) signal. Active for at least
one clock period prior to data transmission and remains active for at
least one clock period after last bit transmitted
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
*RCV CLK -
10
RCV DATA -
Negative going 64 kb/s RS-422 output data. (inverted RCV CLK +) Bit
cells defined by negative going transitions of RCV CLK -
11
*XMT CLK -
12
CLK OUT -
Negative going 64 kb/s RS-422 output return clock, same as and alternate for RCV CLK - and XMT CLK -. Used in place of RCV CLK - and
XMT CLK - in applications where long cables introduce significant round
trip delays between clock output and data inputs
13
XMT DATA -
Negative going 64 kb/s RS-422 input data (inverted RCV CLK +). Bit
cells defined by negative going transitions of XMT CLK -
14
OFF HOOK -
15
N/C
N/C
*Direction determined by provisioning. Provision J308 Output CLK to provide RCV CLK and XMT CLK
outputs to other equipment. Provision J308 Input Clk to receive RCV CLK and XMT CLK from other
equipment. Refer to Functional Description and Interconnect sections for details.
B-10
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Monitor and Control Systems
PIN 8
PIN 15
PIN 1
PIN 9
MW21000801
101097
Table B - 6
J309PIN #
Function
Characteristics
RCV CLK +
RCV DATA +
Positive going 64 kb/s RS-422 output data. Bit cells defined by positive
going transitions of RCV CLK +
XMT CLK +
N/C
N/C
XMT DATA +
Positive going 64 kb/s RS-422 input data. Bit cells defined by positive
going transitions of XMT CLK +
OFF HOOK +
Positive going RS-422 Ready To Send (RTS) signal. Active for at least
one clock period prior to data transmission and remains active for at
least one clock period after last bit transmitted
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
RCV CLK -
10
RCV DATA -
Negative going 64 kb/s RS-422 output data. (inverted RCV CLK +) Bit
cells defined by negative going transitions of RCV CLK -
11
XMT CLK -
12
N/C
N/C
13
XMT DATA -
Negative going 64 kb/s RS-422 input data (inverted RCV CLK +). Bit
cells defined by negative going transitions of XMT CLK -
14
OFF HOOK -
15
N/C
N/C
B-11
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
J307PIN #
Function
Characteristics
RCV CLK +
RCV DATA +
Positive going 64 kb/s RS-422 output data. Bit cells defined by positive
going transitions of RCV CLK +
XMT CLK +
XMT DATA +
Positive going 64 kb/s RS-422 input data. Bit cells defined by positive
going transitions of 2 RCV CLK + or 2 RTN CLK +
RTN CLK +
Positive going 64 kb/s RS-422 output return clock, same as and alternate for 2 RCV CLK +. Used in place of 2 RCV CLK + in applications
where long cables introduce significant round trip delays between clock
output and data inputs. Function is software enabled.
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
RCV CLK -
10
RCV DATA -
Negative going 64 kb/s RS-422 output data. Bit cells defined by negative going transitions of RCV CLK -
11
XMT CLK -
12
2 RTN CLK -
Negative going 64 kb/s RS-422 output return clock, same as and alternate for RCV CLK - Used in place of RCV CLK - in applications where
long cables introduce significant round trip delays between clock output
and data inputs
13
XMT DATA -
Negative going 64 kb/s RS-422 input data (inverted RCV CLK +). Bit
cells defined by negative going transitions of XMT CLK -
14
Not Used
15
Not Used
DISCRETE ALARMS/STATUS/CONTROLS
When equipped with the AE-27( ) Relay Interface, the MDR-8000 series radio has the capability of receiving up to sixteen alarm/status inputs, nine buffered control inputs, and nine
buffered control status inputs and outputting up to eight alarm relay outputs, six control
relay outputs, and seven status relay outputs. The relay outputs provide relay closure to
ground when activated. Alarm, status, and control interface is provided by connector J305 on
the MDR-8000 backplane. See the Functional Description Section section for details. Refer to
drawing 3DH 03143 0000 ECZZA in the Diagrams section for interconnect information.
B.12
B-12
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Alarm and Control Reference Guide
GENERAL
This appendix describes the alarm/status points given in Appendix B. A-side and B-side MCS-11
scan points and TBOS display points are given as A/B. Scan and display points common to both
A- and B-sides are given as one number.
C.1
Control functions are described further in the Users Guide and Operation sections. Refer to
the Functional Description Section for control circuit descriptions.
C.3
MCS-11 REMOTE DETAIL SCANNER (RDS) SCAN POINTS AND TBOS DISPLAY POINTS
A-1/A-9
D-1/D-9
Name:
Function:
Alarm
NOTE: In order to clear a CLA, it must be acknowledged locally (at
DS1/E1, DS3 The common loss alarm is generated by the AE37( ) Controller. It is triggered when both A-side and B-side downstream receivers have a radio frame loss or channel failure alarm.
Loss of both receivers in a hot-standby hop initiates a request to
switch to the standby transmitter, even though no transmit alarms
are present. The transmitter switches in 5 seconds if the path is
nominal. If the path is in a fade (APC is in active range), the transmitter switches in 30 seconds. If the downstream alarms clear
within 10 seconds, a CLA is initiated on the off-line side to indicate
a silent transmit failure. If alarms still exist, the transmitter continues
to switch at the provisioned rate. This process continues until the
receive alarms clear, but no CLA is activated. Troubleshoot far-end
XMTR circuits.
OC3/STM-1 Triggers when both A and B RCVRs have LOF. This
initiates a request to switch XMTRs at FAREND. When RSL is more
positive than -50 dBm, FAREND XMTR switches in 5 seconds and
then switches ever y 30 seconds until alarm clears. After XMTR
switches 10 times, the I/O interface module switches. This
sequence of events continues until alarm clears. Troubleshoot
FAREND XMTRS.
C-1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
A-2/A-10
D-2/D-10
Name:
Function:
Alarm
Description:
This alarm is generated by the power supply. Itm indicates an internal failure or blown fuse. Troubleshoot/repair as follows:
a. Remove power supply and check/replace fuse.
b. Replace power supply.
c. Check power input.
NOTE: PA Power alarm is valid only if shelf is equipped with
optional PA.
A-3/A-11
D-3/D-11
Name:
PA Power Alarm
Function:
Alarm
Description:
C-2
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Alarm and Control Reference Guide
A-4/A-12
D-4/D-12
Name:
Function:
Alarm
Description:
A-5/A-13
D-5/D-13
Name:
Function:
Alarm
Description:
A-6/B-14
N/A
Name:
Function:
Alarm
Description:
If ATPC with time-out is enabled, this alarm indicates the radio has
been in high-power mode for over 5 minutes and has reverted to
low-power mode. If alarm persists, check RSL, antenna alignment,
and far-end transmitter; or check for a receiver failure.
C-3
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
A-7/A-15
D-7/D-15
Name:
Function:
Alarm
Description:
A-8/A-16
D-8/D-16
Name:
Function:
Alarm
Description:
A-17/B-25
A-17/B-25
Name:
XMT On Line
Function:
Status
Description:
C-4
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Alarm and Control Reference Guide
A-18/A-26
D-18/D-26
Name:
PA Temperature Alarm
Function:
Alarm
Description:
A-19
D-19
Name:
XMT Override
Function:
Status
Description:
A-20/A-27
D-20/D-27
Name:
Function:
Status
Description:
Indicates ATPC High Power Lock or ATPC Low Power Lock Control
on Control Screen is activated.
C-5
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
A-21
D-21
Name:
Function:
Alarm
Description:
A-22
D-22
Name:
Off-Normal
Function:
Status
Description:
C-6
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Alarm and Control Reference Guide
Radio
Meaning
Action
DS1/E1
DS1/E1, DS3
a. Replace RCVR
b. Replace I/O interface
c. Replace controller
DS1/E1, DS3
Fan Alarm
DS1/E1,
DS3, OC3/
STM-1
Loopback On
A/B High/Low Power Lock
A/B TX/RX or I/O Override
DS1/E1,
DS3, OC3/
STM-1
DS1/E1,
DS3, OC3/
STM-1
Provisioning on controller
does not match provisioning
screen.
Reprovision to match
proper system requirements.
A/B Side PA
DS1/E1,
DS3, OC3/
STM-1
N/A
DS1/E1,
DS3, OC3/
STM-1
DS1/E1,
DS3, OC3/
STM-1
DS1/E1,
DS3, OC3/
STM-1
XMTR calibration is in
progress
N/A
Controller/Power Supply
provisioning Mismatch
DS1/E1,
DS3, OC3/
STM-1
C-7
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
A-23
D-23
Name:
Function:
Alarm
Description:
This alarm indicates that the link that carries overhead data, such
as ATPC, between stations is down. The controller at this end of the
hop is unable to communicate with the far-end controller.
A-24
D-24
Name:
Function:
Alarm
Description:
A-28
D-28
Name:
DADE (DS1/E1)
Function:
Alarm
Description:
A-29
D-29
Name:
Function:
Status
Description:
C-8
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Alarm and Control Reference Guide
A-30
D-30
Name:
Function:
Status
Description:
A-31
D-31
Name:
Function:
Status
Description:
A-32
D-32
Name:
Function:
Status
Description:
A-33/A-41
D-33/D-41
Name:
Function:
Alarm
Description:
C-9
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
A-34/A-42
D-34/D-42
Name:
Channel Fail
Function:
Alarm
Description:
A-35/A-43
D-35/D-43
Name:
Radio Frame
Function:
Alarm
Description:
A-36/A-44
D-36/D-44
Name:
Function:
Alarm
Description:
C-10
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Alarm and Control Reference Guide
A-37/A-45
D-37/D-45
Name:
Function:
Alarm
Description:
A-38/A-46
D-38/D-46
Name:
Function:
Alarm
Description:
A-39/A-47
D-39/D-47
Name:
RSL Alarm
Function:
Status
Description:
C-11
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
A-40/A-48
D-40/D-48
Name:
Function:
Alarm
Description:
A-49/B-57
A-49/B-57
Name:
RCV On Line
Function:
Status
Description:
A-50/A-58
D-50/D-58
Name:
N/A
Function:
Description:
A-51/A-59
D-51/D-59
Name:
I/O On Line
Function:
Status
Description:
C-12
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Alarm and Control Reference Guide
A-52
D-52
Name:
RCV Override
Function:
Status
Description:
A-53/A61
D-53/D-61
Name:
AIS Detect
Function:
Description:
AIS (blue signal) has been detected at I/O interface input (output of
RCVR module). Troubleshoot (ups) upstream hops.
A-54
D-54
Name:
Fan Alarm
Function:
Alarm
Description:
A-55/A-62
D-55/D-62
Name:
Function:
Control
Description:
C-13
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
A-56/A-63
D-56/D-63
Name:
Function:
Control
Description:
A-60
D-60
Name:
I/O Override
Function:
Control
Description:
A-61
D-64
Name:
N/A
Function:
Not Used
Description:
N/A
A-64
D-64
Name:
N/A
Function:
Not Used
Description:
N/A
C-14
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
C.4
3EM20188AAAA
Alarm and Control Reference Guide
A01/B-02
Name:
PA Voltage
Function:
Status
Description:
A3/B4
Name:
Function:
Status
Description:
A5/B6
Name:
ATPC Voltage
Function:
Status
Description:
C-15
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
A7/B8
Name:
RSL1 Voltage
Function:
Status
Description:
A9/B10
Name:
RSL2 Voltage
Description:
A11/B12
Name:
Function:
Status
Description:
This status voltage is generated by the AE37( ) Controller. The voltage is developed from the eye monitor voltage from the single
RCVR or the main or diversity (whichever RCVR is active) eye monitor voltage if the radio is equipped wit the dual RCVR. The eye voltage is representative of the status of the eye which is used to
gauge RCV signal quality. Typical values follow:
< 0.8 V dc Eye full open
1.7 V dc BER 10E-6
> 3.0 V dc Eye closed
C-16
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Alarm and Control Reference Guide
A13/B14
Name:
RCV LO Voltage
Function:
Status
Description:
A15/B16
Name:
Battery Voltage
Function:
Status
Description:
A17/B18
Name:
Radio Errors
Function:
Status
Description:
Errors from the I/O interface module are sent to the AE-37 ( ) Controller module over the serial (DS1/E1, DS3) or parallel (OC3/
STM-1) bus. The errors are compiled by the controller and the
Radios Error count is generated. The Radio Errors count is representative of the total number of coding violations, slips, or frame
losses.
A19/B20
Name:
Function:
Status
Description:
Errors from the I/O interface module are compiled by the AE-37( )
Controller and when the criteria for a Radios Error Seconds is met,
the Radios Error Seconds count is generated. The Radio Errored
Seconds count increments for any second during which a code violation was detected. Count is initiated during any second that qualifies as an unavailable second.
C-17
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
A21/B22
Name:
Function:
Status
Description:
Errors from the I/O interface module are compiled by the AE-37( )
Controller and when the criteria for a Radio Severely Error Seconds
is met, the Radio Severely Error Seconds count is generated. OC3/
STM-1 - The Radio Severely Errored Seconds count increments for
any second during which there is a frame loss or the code violation
count exceeds the number of errors that could occur in one second
at 1 X 10E-6 error rate. C155 Errors - The count is inhibited during
any second that qualifies as an unavailable second.
A/B23
Name:
Unavailable Seconds
Function:
Status
Description:
A/B24
Name:
Function:
Status
Description:
C-18
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
ADDRESSING GUIDELINES
D.1
INTRODUCTION
3EM20188AAAA
Addressing Guidelines
This appendix provides general network and addressing guidelines for systems that use the
radio overhead to backhaul network management traffic (SNMP). Configurations that provide
external transport of network management, although mentioned, are beyond the scope of this
document. This appendix is not provided as a tutorial nor is the information meant to supersede Internet standards set in Request For Comment (RFC) documentation. If a conflict exists
between this document and RFC recommendations, the RFCs take precedence.
D.2
DOCUMENT DEFINITIONS
D.3
NETWORK EXAMPLES
Consider the network of Figure D - 1. It depicts a simple network of terminals and repeaters
with the radio management WAN arranged in a simple tree configuration. With more radios,
or with additional interconnections provided by external transport means, ring and mesh configurations could also be connected.
Radios with their internal router are designated by an 'R', and local LAN subnets are shown.
Interconnections between radios that are carried through the overhead service channel are
labeled as either RF or Rptr. Spurs are attached using the Front Access PPP interfaces. All
these links use the PPP protocol and together make up the radio WAN.
At the terminals where an external network is available, the radios are addressed as member
devices of the external LAN, and the radio is used as the gateway to the WAN. At all other
radios, each LAN subnet, if enabled, must be unique in the network. The subnet may be sized
as needed to support local ancillary IP equipment. Any local IP equipment will use the radio
as the default gateway to the WAN and other external networks. All IP traffic between subnets is routed across the WAN links.
In the example, access to an external network is shown from two terminal locations. Having
more than one access point helps prevent a failure in one of the links from preventing visibility of the remainder of the network. Note that communication to two of the radios in the WAN
of Figure D - 1 are each through a single RF link. If the associated RF link fails, the far end
radio will be isolated from the remainder of the WAN until the link is restored since there is no
alternate path to reach those radios.
D-1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Addressing Guidelines
3EM20188AAAA
RF
Subnet
Subnet
P PP
R ptr
Ex t ernal
N et w ork
Subnet
R
Subnet
RF
Subnet
RF
Subnet
Subnet
P PP
RF
R
Subnet
R p tr
RF
Subnet
R
Subnet
R p tr
R
Subnet
RF
R
Subnet
Note:
R
= R a d i o I nt er n a l R out er
Note:
R F, R p t r, a n d P P P l i nes ar e n o t d r aw n t o any s c ale.
T h e y a r e onl y t o d e p i c t c onnec t i v i t y bet w een radios .
TMN-10 6 8
05/23/05
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
D.4
3EM20188AAAA
Addressing Guidelines
ADDRESSING
All PPP WAN interfaces are unnumbered Point to Point interfaces. They share a single IP
address with fixed 32-bit (all ones) netmask as an endpoint identifier. The shared IP is
known as the Agent Host IP. These WAN interfaces are always active, and cannot be disabled. The Ethernet LAN interface is provisioned independently from the WAN interface
and, unlike the WAN interface, can be disabled if not needed. When addressing the LAN
interface, you may follow CIDR guidelines and use Variable Length Subnet Masks (VLSM)
as defined in RFC-1519 and in RFC-1878. The longest usable netmask for the LAN interface
is 30 bits (255.255.255.252). There are no special restrictions on the selection of an IP
address for either interface. If the LAN interface is enabled, it is recommended that it be
assigned the same IP as the WAN interface. This allows the radio to be known throughout
the network by only one IP address, and eliminates a potential problem of one radio appearing to be two different pieces of equipment to an SNMP manager.
It should be noted that the factory default IP address assigned to the TMN Interface is
10.0.0.1. Use of this IP address within the radio network should be avoided, since installing
a new TMN card could possibly cause a disruption of the network if that address is already
in use.
Figure D - 2 shows two different methods of addressing radios.
Figure D - 2, sheets 1 and 2 (the Ethernet Interconnect Method), shows an addressing
scheme using Ethernet to interconnect all radios at each site. Figure D - 2, sheets 3 and 4
(the PPP Interconnect Method), shows an addressing scheme using the Radio Repeater and
Front Access PPP interconnects to interconnect the radios.
Note the various subnet masks used. The use of VLSM allows subnets to be sized as appropriate for the amount of external equipment to be deployed. This helps minimize the number
of unused or unusable addresses.
Terminal radios are addressed as members of the external LAN available at the associated
sites (A and J), and function as gateway routers to the radio network. As recommended, the
terminal radios use a single IP address for both LAN and WAN interfaces.
The lines surrounding groups of radios show how the addressing plan allows for the aggregation of subnets. The entire radio network, with the exception of the terminal radios A and J,
can be referenced with a single network number and netmask pair. This simplifies routing.
OSPF is used in the example network, and static routing is used at the borders.
D-3
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Addressing Guidelines
3EM20188AAAA
Terminal Subnet 2
172.17.128.0/22
R2
SNMP
MANAGER
Site 6
CORPORATE
INTRANET
I
Site 5
H
K
L
Site 7
G
Terminal Subnet 1
172.17.16.0/22
R1
Radio Subnet 1
A
Site 1
Site 3
10.29.33.0/26
Site 2
F
Site 4
MDR-1286
12/14/06
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Addressing Guidelines
Mask 255.255.252.0
Router R2 172.17.128.1
Mask 255.255.252.0
10.29.33.9
10.29.33.2
10.29.33.4
10.29.33.5
10.29.33.10
10.29.33.11
10.29.33.12
10.29.33.6
10.29.33.7
10.29.33.13
10.29.33.14
255.255.255.250
255.255.255.250
255.255.255.250
255.255.255.250
255.255.255.252
255.255.255.250
10.29.33.8
MDR-1285
12/14/06
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Addressing Guidelines
3EM20188AAAA
Terminal Subnet 2
172.17.128.0/22
R2
SNMP
MANAGER
CORPORATE
INTRANET
I
Radio Subnet 3 10.29.33.96/27
H
K
G
Terminal Subnet 1
172.17.16.0/22
R1
Radio Subnet 1
10.29.33.0/26
TMN-1064B
12/14/06
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Addressing Guidelines
Terminal Subnet 1
Router R1 172.11.16.1
Mask 255.255.252.0
Gateway to 10.29.33.0/25 is 172.11.17.69
Radio A 172.11.17.69
Static Default Route to:
Mask 255.255.252.0
172.17.16.1
Terminal Subnet 2
Radio J 172.11.130.113
Static Default Route
Mask 255.255.252.0
set to 172.11.128.1
Router R2 172.17.128.1
Mask 255.255.252.0
10.29.33.9
10.29.33.10
10.29.33.11
10.29.33.5
10.29.33.6
10.29.33.12
10.29.33.13
10.29.33.7
10.29.33.8
10.29.33.14
255.255.255.252
255.255.255.252
255.255.255.248
255.255.255.248
255.255.255.252
TMN-1064A
11/16/04
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Addressing Guidelines
3EM20188AAAA
For external backhaul, address the Radio and Ethernet port as a member
device of the external LAN with a single address.
IF the Radio WAN will provide the backhaul for IP traffic, the recommended addressing scheme is to assign a small subnet to each radio. The
radio and its Ethernet port can share one IP address from the subnet and
the remaining address(es) of the subnet can then be used to address additional local equipment. The local equipment can then use the radio as the
default gateway for IP transport. To assign radio subnets, follow the general procedures shown in A.4.2.
D.4.1.1
Assumptions
OSPF will be enabled within the radio network.
The recommended configuration is such that the Ethernet port will have the
same IP address as the radio.
Radios that attach directly to external networks (Corporate LAN/WAN)
should be addressed as members of the subnet to which they attach.
D.4.1.2
IP Address Assignments
Since the size of the Static Routing table is limited, IP Address assignment should strive to
minimize the size of the Static Routing table.
In general, IP addresses should increase (or decrease) as distance increases
away from terminals or junction. This allows the use of route aggregation
when specifying static routes.
The static routing table size is inversely related to IP address efficiency.
Although there is less impact when used with OSPF, a side effect of minimizing the static routing table size can leave more unused/unusable addresses.
D.4.2
Radio Level Subnet Addressing
Assign Radio Level Subnets as follows:
1. Radios connected by RF, Repeater or front panel PPP links must each get their
own subnet.
2. Radios connected by Ethernet need to share a subnet. Each radio will use one
address from the Ethernet subnet.
3. Determine the radio and external equipment configuration at each site/radio.
4. Size the Ethernet subnet based on the number of devices that will be attached,
both known and anticipated.
5. Determine the number of required addresses at each radio, and round this number up to the next highest usable hosts number; see Table D - 1. From the usable
hosts number, select the size of the radio subnet. The minimum amount of
address space to assign to a radio subnet is 4 addresses (2 usable host addresses).
D-8
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Addressing Guidelines
Mask Bits
Host Bits
Total Number of
Addresses In Range*
Usable Host
Addresses*
255.255.255.254
31
0 (unusable)
255.255.255.252
30
255.255.255.248
29
255.255.255.240
28
16
14
255.255.255.224
27
32
30
255.255.255.192
26
64
62
255.255.255.128
25
128
126
255.255.255.0
24
256
254
* The first and last addresses of a subnet are reserved for the network number and broadcast address respectively.
This makes the number of usable host addresses two less than the total number of addresses in the subnet.
Example:
A radio will have a single SNMP managed mux attached via the Ethernet. Planned future
expansion will add two more muxes for a total of four devices (1 radio, 3 muxes). From
Table D - 1, the nearest usable subnet size provides for a total of 6 usable addresses. This correlates to a required radio subnet size of 8, and an Ethernet Subnet mask of 29 bits
(255.255.255.248).
Of the 6 usable addresses, one is for the radio, three are for the muxes, and the remaining two
unassigned addresses are for future expansion. See Figure D - 3 and Figure D - 5 for examples.
TYPICAL ADDRESSING
MINIMAL ADDRESSING
ADDRESS ASSIGNMENTS
NETWORK NUMBER:
RADIO ADDRESS:
SNMP DEVICE 1 ADDRESS:
SPARE ADDRESS
SPARE ADDRESS
SPARE ADDRESS
SPARE ADDRESS
BROADCAST ADDRESS
10.0.0.0
10.0.0.1
10.0.0.2
10.0.0.3
10.0.0.4
10.0.0.5
10.0.0.6
10.0.0.7
ADDRESS ASSIGNMENTS
NETWORK NUMBER:
RADIO ADDRESS:
SNMP DEVICE 1 ADDRESS:
BROADCAST ADDRESS
10.0.0.0
10.0.0.1
10.0.0.2
10.0.0.3
SNMP
DEVICE 1
TMN-1060
06/28/05
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
D.4.3
Addressing Guidelines
3EM20188AAAA
It is possible to disable the Ethernet interface of the TMN module, assign only one IP address
to the radio, and still use the radio WAN for IP transport. This method is discouraged because
it leaves no IP addresses available within the radio WAN for expansion or addition of new
Ethernet equipment at radio sites.
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
Obtaining additional address space in the future may require readdressing of the entire network. Readdressing of a radio network
requires a site visit for each radio affected and, until the process is
complete, radio WAN communications (SNMP management and WAN
IP transport) could possibly be unavailable.
D.5
ADDRESSING TERMINALS
a.
D-10
If external routers use OSPF, the radio network can be integrated with the
external OSPF design.
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Addressing Guidelines
b.
If the external routers use RIP, enable RIP in addition to OSPF on the LAN
interface. The router in the radio will perform a routing protocol translation
between RIP and OSPF.
c.
RADIO 1
ETHERNET ADDRESSES
RADIO 1 ADDRESS:
SNMP DEVICE 1 ADDRESS:
CORPORATE
LAN/WAN
192.168.1.35
192.167.1.36
NETWORK: 192.168.1.0
NETMASK: 255.255.252.0
DEFAULT ROUTER: 192.168.1.1
192.168.1.1
SNMP
DEVICE 1
R
TMN-1061
06/28/05
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
D.6
Addressing Guidelines
3EM20188AAAA
D-12
a.
b.
Set the default gateway to point to the radio to which the equipment is
attached.
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Addressing Guidelines
RADIO 1
ETHERNET
SNMP
DEVICE 1
ETH
10.0.0.0
10.0.0.1
10.0.0.2
10.0.0.3
10.0.0.4
10.0.0.5
10.0.0.6
10.0.0.7
ETH
NETWORK NUMBER:
RADIO 1 ADDRESS:
SNMP DEVICE 1 ADDRESS:
RADIO 2 ADDRESS:
SNMP DEVICE 2 ADDRESS:
SPARE ADDRESS
SPARE ADDRESS
BROADCAST ADDRESS
RADIO 2
SNMP
DEVICE 2
BACK-TO-BACK TERMINALS
OR ASYNCHRONOUS RADIOS
RADIO 1
RADIO 2
REPEATER
CABLE
10.0.0.0
ETHERNET
ETH
RADIO SUBNET
SUBNET SIZE OF 8 ADDRESSES
NETWORK NUMBER 10.0.0.0
NETMASK 255.255.255.248
RANGE 10.0.0.0 TO 10.0.0.7
ETH
RADIO 1
SUBNET
ADDRESSES
10.0.0.7
SNMP
DEVICE 1
SNMP
DEVICE 2
REPEATER CONFIGURATION
PREFERRED CONFIGURATION
TMN-1062A
08/05/06
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Addressing Guidelines
3EM20188AAAA
RADIO 2
NETWORK NUMBER:
RADIO 2 ADDRESS:
SNMP DEVICE 2 ADDRESS:
SPARE ADDRESS
SPARE ADDRESS
SPARE ADDRESS
SPARE ADDRESS
BROADCAST ADDRESS
10.0.0.8
10.0.0.9
10.0.0.10
10.0.0.11
10.0.0.12
10.0.0.13
10.0.0.14
10.0.0.15
RADIO 1
RADIO 2
PPP
SNMP
DEVICE 1
ETH
10.0.0.0
10.0.0.1
10.0.0.2
10.0.0.3
10.0.0.4
10.0.0.5
10.0.0.6
10.0.0.7
ETH
RADIO 1
NETWORK NUMBER:
RADIO 1 ADDRESS:
SNMP DEVICE 1 ADDRESS:
SPARE ADDRESS
SPARE ADDRESS
SPARE ADDRESS
SPARE ADDRESS
BROADCAST ADDRESS
SNMP
DEVICE 2
BACK-TO-BACK TERMINALS
OR ASYNCHRONOUS RADIOS
RADIO 1
10.0.0.0
10.0.0.15
ETH
RADIO 2
SUBNET
ADDRESSES
RADIO 2 SUBNET
SUBNET SIZE OF 8 ADDRESSES
NETWORK NUMBER 10.0.0.8
NETMASK 255.255.255.248
RANGE 10.0.0.8 TO 10.0.0.15
REPEATER
CABLE
ETH
RADIO 1
SUBNET
ADDRESSES
RADIO 1 SUBNET
SUBNET SIZE OF 8 ADDRESSES
NETWORK NUMBER 10.0.0.0
NETMASK 255.255.255.248
RANGE 10.0.0.0 TO 10.0.0.7
RADIO 2
SNMP
DEVICE 1
SNMP
DEVICE 2
REPEATER CONFIGURATION
ALTERNATE CONFIGURATION
TMN-1062B
10/26/05
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
D.7
D.7.1
3EM20188AAAA
Addressing Guidelines
ADDRESSING JUNCTIONS
Preferred Method (see Figure D - 6 Sheet 1).
1. All radios are members of a single subnet at the site.
2. Address each device as a member of the subnet and enable OSPF.
3. Interconnect radios using Ethernet. Also see the interconnect guidelines in
Figure 2-48 (Applications Section) to avoid loops or other problematic connections.
4. If any radios at the junction are connected as synchronous repeaters, they can use
the redundant PPP connection available through the repeater cable as a redundant backup provided the service channels in both radios are provisioned for
Insert Mode in the radio controllers (refer to Applications Section).
LEG 2
RADIO 1
OC3
RADIO 2
OC3
REPEATER
CABLE
FUTURE
SNMP
DEVICE 2
SNMP
MUX 1
ETHERNET
CABLE
ETH
ETH
ETH
RADIO ADDRESSING
SUBNET SIZE OF 16 ADDRESSES
NETWORK NUMBER 10.0.1.144
NETMASK
255.255.255.240
10.0.1.144 TO 10.01.1.175
ADDRESS RANGE
RADIO 1 ADDRESS
10.0.1.145
RADIO 2 ADDRESS
10.0.1.146
RADIO 3 ADDRESS
10.0.1.147
RADIO 4 ADDRESS
10.0.1.148
LEG 1 ADDRESSES 10.0.1.0 TO 10.0.1.143
LEG 2 ADDRESSES 10.0.1.176 TO 10.0.1.255
LEG 3 ADDRESSES 10.0.2.0 TO 10.0.2.16
LEG 4 ADDRESSES 10.0.3.0 TO 10.0.3.36
LEG 1
ETHERNET CABLE
SNMP
DEVICE 1
ETH
FUTURE
SNMP
MUX 2
ETHERNET
CABLE
RADIO 3
DS3
LEG 3
PREFERRED METHOD
RADIO 4
DS3
LEG 4
TMN-1063A
08/06/06
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
D.7.2
Addressing Guidelines
3EM20188AAAA
RADIO 2 ADDRESSING
SUBNET SIZE OF 16 ADDRESSES
NETWORK NUMBER 10.0.1.160
NETMASK
255.255.255.240
RADIO 2 ADDRESS
10.0.1.161
RANGE
10.0.1.160 TO 10.0.1.175
LEG 2 ADDRESSES
10.0.1.176 TO 10.0.1.255
LEG 2
RADIO 1
OC3
REPEATER
CABLE
FUTURE
SNMP
DEVICE 2
ETH
SNMP
MUX 1
SNMP
DEVICE 1
FUTURE
SNMP
MUX 2
PPP
OR
REPEATER
CABLE
RADIO 3
DS3
LEG 3
ALTERNATE METHOD
ETH
ETH
RADIO 3 ADDRESSING
SUBNET SIZE OF 8 ADDRESSES
NETWORK NUMBER 10.0.2.16
NETMASK
255.255.255.248
RADIO 3 ADDRESS
10.0.2.17
RANGE
10.0.2.16 TO 10.0.2.23
LEG 3 ADDRESSES
10.0.2.0 TO 10.0.2.16
RADIO 4 ADDRESSING
SUBNET SIZE OF 4 ADDRESSES
NETWORK NUMBER 10.0.2.32
NETMASK
255.255.255.252
RADIO 4 ADDRESS
10.0.2.33
RANGE
10.0.2.32 TO 10.0.3.35
LEG 4 ADDRESSES
10.0.2.32 TO 10.0.2.64
RADIO 2
OC3
ETH
RADIO 1 ADDRESSING
SUBNET SIZE OF 16 ADDRESSES
NETWORK NUMBER 10.0.1.144
NETMASK
255.255.255.240
RADIO 1 ADDRESS
10.0.1.145
RANGE
10.0.0.144 TO 10.0.0.159
LEG 1 ADDRESSES
10.0.1.0 TO 10.0.1.143
LEG 1
PPP
RADIO 4
DS3
LEG 4
TMN-1063B
10/25/05
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Addressing Guidelines
D.8
D.8.1
Dynamic Method
Procedure
Advantage
Disadvantage
Method 1
No reconfiguration of
LLMan is required
before connecting to a
radio.
No communication
beyond the directly connected radio.
Method 2 imposes no
communication restrictions within the network.
Method 2
Communicating beyond
the borders of the radio
network will require provisioning of an appropriate default route in
the LLMan VEA of the
Craft PC. The default
gateway must be a
radio or external router
accessible in the
broadcast area as
defined by the netmask
used on the LLMan VEA.
When in doubt, use the
local radio as the
default gateway.
Because of the way the
network is addressed
(see Figure D - 2), access
to the terminal radios
from a remote location
will require specifying a
default gateway in the
LLMan VEA configuration. This is necessary
because the terminal
radios may be outside
the radio subnet defined
by the netmask in the
VEA.
D-17
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
D.8.2
Addressing Guidelines
3EM20188AAAA
Static Method
Procedure
Advantage
Disadvantage
Method 1
No reconfiguration of
LLMan is required before
connecting to a radio.
No communication
beyond the directly connected radio.
Method 2
Borrow an unused IP
address from the local
Ethernet subnet to use
for the LLMan VEA.
Method 3
D-18
Method 3 imposes no
communication restrictions within the network.
Very inefficient on
addressing.
About half of the entire
IP address space for the
radio network is
reserved for craft connections.
LLMan must be reconfigured to use an appropriate IP address before
connecting to any radio.
Failure to reconfigure
LLMan prior to connecting to the radio will limit
communication as in
Method 1.
3EM20188AAAA
MDR-8000 SNMP Alarms
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
sysUpTimeInstance
Binding #2:
snmpTrapOID.0
(oid) opticsIMAlarmRxLOSRaise
Binding #3:
tsdimEventObjectClassIdentifier.0
(int32) 15
Binding #4:
tsdimEventObjectInstanceIdentifier.0
(oid) radioPDHTTPBidRadioChannelNumber.20100
Binding #5:
tsdimEventNotificationId.0
(cntr32) 330
Binding #6:
tsdimEventTime.0
Binding #7:
tsdimAlarmSeverity.0
(int32) minor(3)
Binding #8:
tsdimAlarmSpecProblem.0
(octets) Rcvr_LowRSL_A
In the example below, the Housekeeping alarm is identified in VARBIND field Binding #2
(HousekeepingAlarmRaise). Housekeeping refers to the MDR-8000 AE-27 Relay Interface.
This interface provides alarm, control, and status inputs; and alarm, status, and control
relay outputs. These specific alarms correspond to relay point numbers, Binding #4 (PointUserLabel.X), and are usually named by the user, Binding #8 (Door Open Alarm). For more
detailed information about Housekeeping Alarms, refer to MDR-8000 User Manual,
3EM11931AA, Section 3, Interconnect; and/or MDR-8000 Electronic Documentation,
3DH04187AAAA, Section 5, Interconnect.
SNMP Housekeeping Alarm VARBIND Example
Binding #1:
sysUpTimeInstance
Binding #2:
snmpTrapOID.0
(oid) opticsIMHousekeepingAlarmRaise
Binding #3:
tsdimEventObjectClassIdentifier.0
(int32) 15
Binding #4:
tsdimEventObjectInstanceIdentifier.0
(oid) inputPointUserLabel.4
Binding #5:
tsdimEventNotificationId.0
(cntr32) 85
Binding #6:
tsdimEventTime.0
Binding #7:
tsdimAlarmSeverity.0
(int32) minor(3)
Binding #8:
tsdimAlarmSpecProblem.0
E-1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
MDR-8000 SNMP Alarms
ALARMS GENERATED
The following tables identify the alarms generated by the MDR-8000 radio and the correlation
between the alarm names used on the USI and those used by the SNMP.
E.2
Note
The alarms listed are arranged by radio and/or carrier type
Description
Off IO Fault A
Off IO Fault B
I/O Interface
Fault
TBD
Power_A
Power_B
Power Supply
Inventor y
CommandPath
Command Path
Off Normal
Indicates OFF NORMAL (abnormal condition) message(s) present. See OFF NORMAL
message table.
Controller
Controller
RingBroke
Ring Broke
PreviousSection
Previous Section
E-2
3EM20188AAAA
MDR-8000 SNMP Alarms
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Description
Radio
Transmitter Fault
TBD
TBD
CLA_A
CLA_B
RF Common Loss
PA_Temperature_A
PA_Temperature_B
PA Temperature
PA_Low_A
PA_Low_B
PA RF Power
TX_Low_A
TX_Low_B
Transmitter RF
Power
ATPC_HighPwr_A
ATPC_HighPwr_B
ATPC_Timeout_A
ATPC_Timeout_B
ATPC Timeout
Sync_Loss_A
Sync_Loss_B
Sync Loss
E-3
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
MDR-8000 SNMP Alarms
USI Alarm
Name
Description
Radio
Receiver Fault
TBD
TBD
Rcvr_ChannelFail_A
Rcvr_ChannelFail_B
Channel Fail
Rcvr_EyeClosure_A
Rcvr_EyeClosure_B
Eye Closure
Rcvr_LowRSL_A
Rcvr_LowRSL_B
Low RSL
Rcvr_PathDistortion_A
Rcvr_PathDistortion_B
Path Distortion
RadioFrameLoss_A
RadioFrameLoss_B
Radio Frame
Loss
Rcvr_Dade_A
Rcvr_Dade_B
Radio DADE
DS3
E-4
3EM20188AAAA
MDR-8000 SNMP Alarms
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Description
OC3_LOS_A
OC3_LOS_B
OC3 LOS
OC3_LOF_A
OC3_LOF_B
OC3 LOF
This alarm indicates the Interface cannot recover framing from the incoming OC3/STM-1 signal or there is no
optical input signal.
OC3_AIS_L_A
OC3_AIS_L_B
OC3_Degraded_A
OC3_Degraded_B
OC3 Degrade
Description
OC3_CommonLoss_A
OC3_CommonLoss_B
OC3_OutputLOF_A
OC3_OutputLOF_B
OC3 LOF
This alarm indicates that the OC3 I/O Interface module cannot recover framing from the OC3 signal.
OC3_OutputAIS_L_A
OC3_OutputAIS_L_B
OC3_OutputDegraded_A
OC3_OutputDegraded_B
OC3 Degrade
E-5
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
MDR-8000 SNMP Alarms
Description
DS1_AIS_Detect_WSxx
DS1_InputAlarm_WSxx
DS1_OutputAlarm_WSxx
Description
DS3_LOF_Axx
DS3_LOF_Bxx
N/A
DS3_Degraded_Axx
DS3_Degraded_Bxx
DS3 Degraded
DS3_AISdetect_Axx
DS3_AISdetect_Bxx
DS3_OutputDegraded_Axx
DS3_OutputDegraded_Bxx
E-6
Description
DS3 Degraded
3EM20188AAAA
MDR-8000 SNMP Alarms
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Description
DS3_OutputAISdetect_Axx
DS3_OutputAISdetect_Bxx
DS3_OutputAISinsert_Axx
DS3_OutputAISinsert_Bxx
Description
DS1_InputAlarm_WSxx
DS1_OutputAlarm_WSxx
DS1_AIS_Detect_WSxx
Description
TX SIG
TX ALM
RX ALM
E_1_RX_ALM_xx_A
E_1_RX_ALM_xx_B
Note: xx = lines 01 16
E-7
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
MDR-8000 SNMP Alarms
Description
ETH_Out_Degrade_A1
ETH_Out_Degrade_B1
ETH Degrade
ETH_Out_Remote_Fail_A1
ETH_Out_Remote_Fail_B1
Description
ETH_In_Degrade_A1
ETH_In_Degrade_B1
ETH Degrade
ETH_In_Remote_Fail_A1
ETH_In_Remote_Fail_B1
Description
DS1_OutputAlarm_WSxx
DS1_AIS_Detect_WSxx
DS1_InputAlarm_WSxx
E-8
3EM20188AAAA
MDR-8000 SNMP Alarms
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
DESCRIPTION
Fan_Alarm
Fan Alarm
ATPC_High_Power_Lock_side_A
ATPC_High_Power_Lock_side_B
ATPC_Low_Power_Lock_side_A
ATPC_Low_Power_Lock_side_A
TX_Override_Side_A
A Tx Override
TX_Override_Side_B
B Tx Override
RX_Override_Side_A
A Rx Override
RX_Override_Side_B
B Rx Override
IO_Overide_Side_A
A I/O Override
IO_Overide_Side_B
B I/O Override
E-9
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
MDR-8000 SNMP Alarms
USI MESSAGE
NAME
DESCRIPTION
N/A
Calibrating A Side
N/A
Calibrating B Side
OFF_AB_PedestalSwActivated
Pedestal Switch
Activated
PED/AC/NORM
DS1_Line_xx_Loopback_On
E_1_Line_xx_Loopback_On
DS1 Loopback On
PA_Off_Side_A
A Side PA OFF
PA ON/OFF
to OFF
PA_Off_Side_B
B Side PA OFF
PA ON/OFF
to OFF
Provisioning_Mismatch
Prov. Mismatch
OFF_PWR_Provisioning_ Mismatch
Controller/Power
Supply Prov. Mismatch
Provisioning data stored in memory on the controller does not match provisioning data stored
in memory on the A-side power supply.
OFF_PWR_RW_Fail
Capacity_Key_Mismatch
Capkey Mismatch
Radio_ID
Radio ID Mismatch
Radio IDs provisioned on the radio configuration screen are not the same at both ends of the
hop.
Note: xx = lines 01 16
E-10
3EM20188AAAA
Modem Provisioning
F
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
MODEM PROVISIONING
GENERAL
This appendix provides procedures to provision modems when modems are used to communicate between a PC and a radio over telephone lines.
F.1
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
F-1
F-2
3EM20188AAAA
Modem Provisioning
Char t 1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
PURPOSE
Provides procedures to provision modem to communicate with radio controller. Refer to the
applicable modem technical reference manual for further information.
PREREQUISITES
Software loaded into radio.
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
USI Computer running Windows.
US Robotics Modem
Straight through DB25 to DB9 modem connecting cable
Null modem DB25 to DB9 modem connecting cable
STEP
PROCEDURE
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
The U.S. Robotics modem is the only modem compatible with the
USI software. Use of any other modem may give unpredictable and
undesirable results.
Note
The radio communication port is configured DCE (Data Communication
Equipment). The typical modem is configured DCE to make it compatible
with DTE (Data Termination Equipment) configured computers. A null
modem adapter is required to interface DCE to DCE equipment. Install a
null modem adapter between the radio and the modem if the modem is DCE
compatible.
1
F-3
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Modem Provisioning
STEP
SELECT PROGRAMS
TYPE NAME
CLICK OK
CLICK OK
COMM3 - HyperTerminal
File Edit View Call Transfer
Help
Connect To
COMM3
Connection Description
Enter details for the phone number that you want to dial:
Country/region:
New Connection
Area code:
Enter a name and choose an icon for the connection:
4 Name:
Phone number:
6
Connect using:
COM3
Icon:
OK
Disconnected
Auto detect
Auto detect
Cancel
SCROLL
CAPS
5
OK
Disconnected
Auto detect
Auto detect
Cancel
SCROLL
1. Standard Apps
1301 NMX Applications
Internet
Internet Explorer
Paint
Microsoft Word
Microsoft Visual Basic
Command Prompt
Shortcut to Win11_
Shortcut to sin00_
Disk cleanup
All Programs
Accessories
Accessibility
Administrative Tools
Communications
Adobe Acrobat
Entertainment
Alcatel
System Tools
ANSTORE
Calculator
Dell Accessories
11 12
10
9
8
7
6
1
2
3
4
5
HyperTerminal
HyperTerminal
MSN Messenger Service
NetMeeting
Clock
Diskeeper
Imaging
Notepad
Exceed
Lotus Applications
Microsoft Developer
Start
MS Hardware
LMW-7028
07/03/02
3EM20188AAAA
Modem Provisioning
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
COMM3 - HyperTerminal
File Edit View Call Transfer
Help
New Connection
Open . . .
Save
Save As . . .
Page Setup . . .
Print . . .
COMM3 Properties
Port Settings
Properties
Exit
Alt+F4
COMM3 Properties
?
Bits per second: 2400
10
Connect To Settings
Data bits: 8
Windows keys
Parity: None
Del
Emulation:
ASCII Setup
detectsession
Displays the properties of Auto
the current
ASCII Sending
terminal ID:
Send line ends with Telnet
line feeds
12
Character delay: 0
?
Terminal Setup...
ANSI
Stop bits: 1
Restore Defaults
500
milliseconds.
Play sound when connecting or disconnecting
milliseconds.
11
Input Translation...
OK
Cancel
Apply
ASCII Setup
ASCII Receiving
Append line feeds to incoming line ends
OK
Cancel
13
Edit
OK
View
Call
Transfer
Help
Cancel
14 ati4
STEP
8 SELECT PROPERTIES
9 CLICK OK
S00=001
S07=060
S15=000
S25=005
S33=000
S41=000
12 CHECK ECHO
CHARACTERS
13 CLICK OK
S01=000 S02=043
S08=002 S09=006
S16=000 S18=000
S27=000 S28=008
S34=000 S35=000
S42=000
S03=013
S10=014
S19=000
S29=020
S36=014
S04=010 S05=008
S11=070 S12=050
S21=010 S22=017
S30=000 S31=128
S38=000 S39=000
S06=004
S13=000
S23=019
S32=002
S40=001
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
STEP
3EM20188AAAA
Modem Provisioning
PROCEDURE, CONTINUED
Note
The modem is now ready to be configured to interface with the MDR radio
USI serial communications channel. AT commands are case sensitive and
must all be typed in the same case.
3
PARAMETER
AT&F0
ATB1
ATE0
ATF1
ATQ1
AT&C0
AT&D0
AT&G0
AT&H0
AT&I0
AT&K0
AT&R1
AT&S0
ATS0=1
ATY0
AT&W0
The MDR radio USI ports do not support hardware flow control
F-6
3EM20188AAAA
Modem Provisioning
STEP
4
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
PROCEDURE, CONTINUED
Power down the modem, disconnect it from the computer serial port, and set
the DIP switches according to Table F - 2.
Switch Position
DTR override
Smart mode
Replace the straight through connecting cable with the null modem DB25 to
DB9 connecting cable.
Connect the modem to the MDR radio USI port (see Figure F - 2).
F-7
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Modem Provisioning
MODEM
NULL MODEM
CABLE
9-TO-25 PIN
WALL
TELEPHONE
JACK
TELEPHONE
CABLE
MDR-1223
10/20/05
3EM20188AAAA
Modem Provisioning
Chart 2
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
PC Modem Provisioning
PURPOSE
Provides procedures to provision modem to communicate with PC. Refer to the applicable
modem technical reference manual for further information.
PREREQUISITES
Software loaded into radio.
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
USI Computer
US Robotics Modem (Internal or External)
Interface cable for external modem
Note
The U.S. Robotics modem is the only modem compatible with the USI software. Use of any other modem may give unpredictable and undesirable
results.
STEP
PROCEDURE
F-9
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Modem Provisioning
STEP
SELECT PROGRAMS
TYPE NAME
CLICK OK
CLICK OK
COMM3 - HyperTerminal
File Edit View Call Transfer
Help
Connect To
COMM3
Connection Description
Enter details for the phone number that you want to dial:
Country/region:
New Connection
Area code:
Enter a name and choose an icon for the connection:
4 Name:
Phone number:
6
Connect using:
COM3
Icon:
OK
Disconnected
Auto detect
Auto detect
Cancel
SCROLL
CAPS
5
OK
Disconnected
Auto detect
Auto detect
Cancel
SCROLL
1. Standard Apps
1301 NMX Applications
Internet
Internet Explorer
Paint
Microsoft Word
Microsoft Visual Basic
Command Prompt
Shortcut to Win11_
Shortcut to sin00_
Disk cleanup
All Programs
Accessories
Accessibility
Administrative Tools
Communications
Adobe Acrobat
Entertainment
Alcatel
System Tools
ANSTORE
Calculator
Dell Accessories
11 12
10
9
8
7
6
1
2
3
4
5
HyperTerminal
HyperTerminal
MSN Messenger Service
NetMeeting
Clock
Diskeeper
Imaging
Notepad
Exceed
Lotus Applications
Microsoft Developer
Start
MS Hardware
LMW-7028
07/03/02
3EM20188AAAA
Modem Provisioning
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
COMM3 - HyperTerminal
File Edit View Call Transfer
Help
New Connection
Open . . .
Save
Save As . . .
Page Setup . . .
Print . . .
COMM3 Properties
Properties
Exit
Port Settings
Alt+F4
COMM3 Properties
?
Bits per second: 2400
10
Connect To Settings
Data bits: 8
Windows keys
Parity: None
Del
Emulation:
ASCII Setup
?
Displays the properties of Auto
the current
detectsession
Terminal Setup...
Stop bits: 1
Flow control: Hardware
ASCII Sending
Telnet terminal ID:
Send line ends with line feeds
12
ANSI
Restore Defaults
500
milliseconds.
Play sound when connecting or disconnecting
milliseconds.
ASCII Setup
Input Translation...
9
OK
Cancel
Apply
11
ASCII Receiving
Append line feeds to incoming line ends
OK
Cancel
Cancel
ati4
U.S. Robotics 56k FAX INT Settings . . .
14
STEP
8
SELECT PROPERTIES
CLICK OK
10
B1 E0 F1 L1 M1 Q0 V1 X4 Y0
BAUD=2400 PARITY=N
WORDLEN=8
DIAL=TONE
ON HOOK
CID=0
&A1 &B0 &C1 &D0 &G0 &H0 &I0 &K0
&M4 &N0 &P1 &R1 &S0 &T5 &U0 &Y1
11
12
13
CLICK OK
14
15
TYPE IN COMMANDS
(CASE SENSITIVE)
S00=001
S07=060
S15=000
S25=005
S33=000
S41=000
S01=000 S02=043
S08=002 S09=006
S16=000 S18=000
S27=000 S28=008
S34=000 S35=000
S42=000
S03=013
S10=014
S19=000
S29=020
S36=014
S04=010 S05=008
S11=070 S12=050
S21=010 S22=017
S30=000 S31=128
S38=000 S39=000
S06=004
S13=000
S23=019
S32=002
S40=001
Connected 0:24:06 Auto detect 2400 8-N-1 SCROLL CAPS NUM Capture Print echo
LMW-7027A
07/03/02
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
STEP
3EM20188AAAA
Modem Provisioning
PROCEDURE, CONTINUED
Note
The modem is now ready to be configured to interface with the MDR radio
USI serial communications channel. AT commands are case sensitive and
must all be typed in the same case.
3
Is modem internal?
If no, go to step 18.
If yes, go to step 19.
PARAMETER
AT&F0
ATB1
ATE0
ATF1
ATQ0
AT&C1
AT&D0
AT&G0
AT&H0
AT&I0
AT&K0
AT&R1
AT&S0
ATS0=1
ATY0
AT&W0
F-12
3EM20188AAAA
Modem Provisioning
STEP
5
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
PROCEDURE, CONTINUED
For a US Robotics external modem, power down the modem and set the DIP
switches in accordance with Table F - 4.
Switch Position
DTR override
Smart mode
Note
The local modem is now ready to dial-up to the remote modem.
6
See Figure F - 4. In Modem Dial-Up box type in telephone number, use default
values for Setting (2400,N,8,1), and select COM port.
Click on DialUp
Modem Dial-Up
Initialization String
ATDT
Save Phone
Number
Phone Number
Setting
Com-Port
2400.N.8.1
COM 1
COM 1
COM 2
End Session
COM 3
COM 4
DialUp
LMW-7026
07/03/02
F-14
3EM20188AAAA
Over-The-Hop Test Procedures
G
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
This appendix contains optional test procedures that can be used to confirm radio performance
over-the-hop.
TEST EQUIPMENT
Refer to Table 9 - 2 for the list of test equipment for use with the test procedures in this appendix. Similar test equipment can be used.
G.1
G-1
G-2
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Char t 3
PURPOSE
Use this procedure to check XMTR output power and RCVR receive signal level (RSL) endto-end in both directions over the hop. Refer to the Maintenance Section for any alarms or
corrective maintenance.
TOOLS REQUIRED
Power Meter
Test Lead and Tool Kit
STEP
PROCEDURE
DANGER
Possibility of
Injury
to Personnel
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
G-3
G-4
MDR-8000 HOP
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
XMTR
RCVR
15. DISCONNECT
CABLE
3. DISCONNECT CABLE
Note
XMT
ANT
RCV
POWER
SENSOR
TYPE N-F TO SMA-M
ADAPTER
XMT
ANT
RCV
8481D
LOW
POWER
SENSOR
(-20 to -70 dBm)
POWER
METER
CLASS
TYPE
RANGE
MEDIUM POWER
8481A
HIGH POWER
8481H
LMW-3169
04/05/02
YES, GO TO STEP 6.
NO, GO TO STEP 7.
6. SET PA ON/OFF SWITCH ON
POWER SUPPLY TO ON
POWER
METER
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Char t 4
PURPOSE
Use this procedure to check optical input power to the radio and optical output power out of
the radio RCVR at the other end of the hop in both directions over the hop.
TOOLS REQUIRED
Optical Power Meter
Fiber Optic Test Cables (2)
Test Lead and Tool Kit
STEP
PROCEDURE
DANGER
Possibility of
Injury
to Personnel
This system normally operates as a Class I Laser Product (no hazard), however during ser vicing operations, when optical connectors are being connected, disconnected, or handled without dust
covers, it is possible to be exposed to Class IIIB laser radiation
which can cause eye damage.
WARNING
Possibility of
Damage
to Equipment
G-7
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
STEP
PROCEDURE, CONTINUED
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
This is an out-of-service procedure when on a nonstandby (unpro tected) system. On a hot-standby or frequency diversity system,
switch traffic on the channel under test to protect.
1
G-8
MDR-8000 HOP
XMTR
RCVR
DANGER
Possibility of
Injury
to Personnel
OT-1
OUT
OR-1
IN
OT-2
OUT
OR-2
IN
OT-1
OUT
OR-1
IN
7. DISCONNECT CABLE
FROM LC CABLE
ASSEMBLY.
OT-2
OUT
OR-2
IN
NOTE
LBO
SC TO SC
OR
FC TO FC
TEST CABLE
OPTICAL
POWER METER
OPTICAL
POWER METER
LBO
SC TO SC
OR
FC TO FC
TEST CABLE
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Char t 5
PURPOSE
Use this procedure to check RCVR threshold end-to-end in both directions over the hop.
TOOLS REQUIRED
BER Test Set/Communications Analyzer
Variable Attenuator
Test Lead and Tool Kit
STEP
PROCEDURE
DANGER
Possibility of
Injury
to Personnel
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
This is an out-of-service procedure when on a nonstandby (unpro tected) system. On a hot-standby or frequency diversity system,
switch traffic on the channel under test to protect.
1
G-11
G-12
MDR-8000 HOP
XMTR
RCVR
PAIR
LBO
DS1 IN
P303
DS1 OUT
P304
TIP
CROSS-CONNECT
(SIDE VIEW)
RING
BER
TEST SET
J303/J304
PIN NUMBER
WIRE COLOR
FUNCTION
1
20
WHITE/BLUE
BLUE/WHITE
CHAN 1 TIP
CHAN 1 RING
2
21
WHITE/ORANGE
ORANGE/WHITE
CHAN 2 TIP
CHAN 2 RING
3
22
WHITE/GREEN
GREEN/WHITE
CHAN 3 TIP
CHAN 3 RING
4
23
WHITE/BROWN
BROWN/WHITE
CHAN 4 TIP
CHAN 4 RING
5
24
WHITE/SLATE
SLATE/WHITE
CHAN 5 TIP
CHAN 5 RING
6
25
RED/BLUE
BLUE/RED
CHAN 6 TIP
CHAN 6 RING
7
26
RED/ORANGE
ORANGE/RED
CHAN 7 TIP
CHAN 7 RING
8
27
RED/GREEN
GREEN/RED
CHAN 8 TIP
CHAN 8 RING
9
28
RED/BROWN
BROWN/RED
CHAN 9 TIP
CHAN 9 RING
10
10
29
RED/SLATE
SLATE/RED
CHAN 10 TIP
CHAN 10 RING
11
11
30
BLACK/BLUE
BLUE/BLACK
CHAN 11 TIP
CHAN 11 RING
12
12
31
BLACK/ORANGE
ORANGE/BLACK
CHAN 12 TIP
CHAN 12 RING
13
13
32
BLACK/GREEN
GREEN/BLACK
CHAN 13 TIP
CHAN 13 RING
LBO
DS1 IN
P303
DS1 OUT
P304
14
14
33
BLACK/BROWN
BROWN/BLACK
CHAN 14 TIP
CHAN 14 RING
15
15
34
BLACK/SLATE
SLATE/BLACK
CHAN 15 TIP
CHAN 15 RING
16
16
35
YELLOW/BLUE
BLUE/YELLOW
CHAN 16 TIP
CHAN 16 RING
TIP
BER
TEST SET
RING
CROSS-CONNECT
(SIDE VIEW)
LMW-3170
04/24/00
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
RCVR
7. DISCONNECT CABLE
XMT
ANT
RCV
VARIABLE
ATTEN
LMW-3173
04/05/02
G-15
G-16
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Chart 6
PURPOSE
Use this procedure to check RCVR threshold end-to-end in both directions over the hop.
TOOLS REQUIRED
BER Test Set/Communications Analyzer
Variable Attenuator
Test Lead and Tool Kit
STEP
PROCEDURE
DANGER
Possibility of
Injury
to Personnel
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
This is an out-of-service procedure when on a nonstandby (unprotected) system. On a hot-standby or frequency diversity system,
switch traffic on the channel under test to protect.
1
G-17
G-18
MDR-8000 HOP
XMTR
RCVR
PAIR
LBO
DS1 IN
P303
DS1 OUT
P304
TIP
CROSS-CONNECT
(SIDE VIEW)
RING
BER
TEST SET
J303/J304
PIN NUMBER
WIRE COLOR
FUNCTION
1
20
WHITE/BLUE
BLUE/WHITE
CHAN 1 TIP
CHAN 1 RING
2
21
WHITE/ORANGE
ORANGE/WHITE
CHAN 2 TIP
CHAN 2 RING
3
22
WHITE/GREEN
GREEN/WHITE
CHAN 3 TIP
CHAN 3 RING
4
23
WHITE/BROWN
BROWN/WHITE
CHAN 4 TIP
CHAN 4 RING
5
24
WHITE/SLATE
SLATE/WHITE
CHAN 5 TIP
CHAN 5 RING
6
25
RED/BLUE
BLUE/RED
CHAN 6 TIP
CHAN 6 RING
7
26
RED/ORANGE
ORANGE/RED
CHAN 7 TIP
CHAN 7 RING
8
27
RED/GREEN
GREEN/RED
CHAN 8 TIP
CHAN 8 RING
9
28
RED/BROWN
BROWN/RED
CHAN 9 TIP
CHAN 9 RING
10
10
29
RED/SLATE
SLATE/RED
CHAN 10 TIP
CHAN 10 RING
11
11
30
BLACK/BLUE
BLUE/BLACK
CHAN 11 TIP
CHAN 11 RING
12
12
31
BLACK/ORANGE
ORANGE/BLACK
CHAN 12 TIP
CHAN 12 RING
13
13
32
BLACK/GREEN
GREEN/BLACK
CHAN 13 TIP
CHAN 13 RING
LBO
DS1 IN
P303
DS1 OUT
P304
14
14
33
BLACK/BROWN
BROWN/BLACK
CHAN 14 TIP
CHAN 14 RING
15
15
34
BLACK/SLATE
SLATE/BLACK
CHAN 15 TIP
CHAN 15 RING
16
16
35
YELLOW/BLUE
BLUE/YELLOW
CHAN 16 TIP
CHAN 16 RING
TIP
BER
TEST SET
RING
CROSS-CONNECT
(SIDE VIEW)
LMW-3170
04/24/00
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
RCVR
7. DISCONNECT CABLE
XMT
ANT
RCV
VARIABLE
ATTEN
LMW-3173
04/05/02
G-21
G-22
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Chart 7
PURPOSE
Use this procedure to check RCVR threshold end-to-end in both directions over the hop.
TOOLS REQUIRED
BER Test Set/Communications Analyzer
Test Lead and Tool Kit
STEP
PROCEDURE
DANGER
Possibility of
Injury
to Personnel
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
This is an out-of-service procedure when on a nonstandby (unprotected) system. On a hot-standby or frequency diversity system,
switch traffic on the channel under test to protect.
1
G-23
G-24
MDR-8000 HOP
XMTR
RCVR
4. DISCONNECT CABLE
1. DISCONNECT CABLE
DS3
CROSSCONNECT
BER
TEST SET
BER
TEST SET
(SIDE VIEW)
DS3
CROSSCONNECT
(SIDE VIEW)
LMW-3174
05/06/01
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
RCVR
7. DISCONNECT CABLE
XMT
ANT
RCV
VARIABLE
ATTEN
LMW-3175
04/05/02
G-27
G-28
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Chart 8
PURPOSE
Use this procedure to check RCVR threshold end-to-end in both directions over the hop.
TOOLS REQUIRED
BER Test Set/Communications Analyzer
Fiber Optic Test Cables (2)
Test Lead and Tool Kit
STEP
PROCEDURE
DANGER
Possibility of
Injury
to Personnel
This system normally operates as a Class I Laser Product (no hazard), however during servicing operations, when optical connectors are being connected, disconnected, or handled without dust
covers, it is possible to be exposed to Class IIIB laser radiation
which can cause eye damage.
WARNING
Possibility of
Damage
to Equipment
G-29
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
STEP
PROCEDURE, CONTINUED
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
This is an out-of-service procedure when on a nonstandby (unprotected) system. On a hot-standby or frequency diversity system,
switch traffic on the channel under test to protect.
1
G-30
MDR-8000 HOP
XMTR
RCVR
DANGER
Possibility of
Injury
to Personnel
OT-1
OUT
OR-1
IN
OT-2
OUT
OR-2
IN
OT-1
OUT
OR-1
IN
5. DISCONNECT CABLE
FROM LC CABLE
ASSEMBLY.
OT-2
OUT
OR-2
IN
NOTE
LBO
SC TO SC
OR
FC TO FC
TEST CABLE
BER
TEST SET
LBO
SC TO SC
OR
FC TO FC
TEST CABLE
BER
TEST SET
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
RCVR
7. DISCONNECT CABLE
XMT
ANT
RCV
VARIABLE
ATTEN
LMW-7036
07/08/02
G-33
G-34
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Over-The-Hop OC3/STM-1 Fade Margin Test (to the 10-6/10-3 BER Level)
Chart 9
Note
Before starting this procedure, you must be aware of the following calculated
values:
1Fade margin (the difference between normal RSL and the RCVR threshold)
2Expected RSL.
PURPOSE
Use this procedure to simulate fading conditions to ensure that the radio will operate
properly under faded path conditions.
PROCEDURE
Refer to Figure G - 7.
Note
For the results of this test to be valid, measured RSL must be above RCVR
threshold.
Over-The-Hop OC3/STM-1 Fade Margin Test (to the 10-6/10-3 BER Level)
G-35
G-36
MDR-8000 HOP
XMTR
RCVR
DANGER
Possibility of
Injury
to Personnel
OT-1
OUT
OR-1
IN
OT-2
OUT
OR-2
IN
OT-1
OUT
OR-1
IN
5. Disconnect cable
from LC Cable
Assembly.
OT-2
OUT
OR-2
IN
NOTE
LBO
SC TO SC
or
FC to FC
test cable
BER
TEST SET
LBO
SC to SC
or
FC to FC
test cable
BER
TEST SET
MDR-1128
OC3/STM-1 Fade Margin Test
(Sheet 1 of 3)
03/31/05
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
RCVR
XMT
ANT
RCV
8481D
LOW
POWER
SENSOR
(-20 to -70 dBm)
POWER
METER
8.
9.
MDR-1126
03/31/05
G-39
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
XMTR
12.
Disconnect
cable.
XMT
ANT
RCV
Variable
Atten
13. Connect variable attenuator between
cable and XMT connector on diplexer.
14. Attenuate the XMTR output while
observing the BER test set at the
farend RCVR.
Adjust the attenuator at the farend
XMTR until a 10-6, 10-3, or the
designed BER level is reached on the
BER test set at the farend RCVR. The
total amount of attenuation represents
the fade margin.
MDR-1127
03/31/05
Over-The-Hop OC3/STM-1 Fade Margin Test (to the 10-6/10-3 BER Level)
DATE:
TESTER:
RX FREQ:
CONTROLLER S/W:
TMN SOFTWARE:
DC POWER
(Ref. MDR-8000 TM, July 2004, Sec. 1.10)
Vdc
Vdc
Vdc
Vdc
Vdc
Vdc
Vdc
Vdc
Vdc
Vdc
Vdc
Vdc
TRANSMITTER TESTS
TRANSMITTER CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY (Ref. MDR-8000 TM, July 2004, Sec. E. Chart 1)
a.
b.
c.
d.
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
dbm
dbm
dbm
Vdc
Vdc
db
dbm
dbm
dbm
Vdc
Vdc
db
TDS-Page 1
06/06/07
DATE:
TESTER:
RX FREQ:
CONTROLLER S/W:
TMN SOFTWARE:
RECEIVER TESTS
RECEIVE SIGNAL LEVEL (Ref. MDR-8000 TM, July 2004, Sec E. Chart 11)
MAIN-A
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
0.2
dbm
db
db
dbm
dbm
Vdc
dbm
dbm
db
db
dbm
dbm
Vdc
dbm
DIVERSITY-B
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
0.2
RECEIVER THRESHOLD (1X10-6 BER) (Ref. MDR-8000 TM, July 2004, Sec E. Chart 13)
a.
b.
c.
d.
dbm
db
dbm
db
Typical*:
dbm
Typical*:
dbm
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Vdc
MHz
MHz
Vdc
MHz
MHz
RECEIVER SIGNAL QUALITY (Ref. MDR-8000 TM, July 2004, Sec. 7, 8, Fig. 7-13)
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Vdc
Vdc
(Switch A-B-A, 10x, zero errors)
TDS-Page 2
11/10/04
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
H
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
This appendix describes the differences between the MDR-8000 hot-standby shelf
and the Compact indoor shelf. Refer to the applicable sections in the Users Manual for descriptions of functions common to both types of shelves. Refer to the instruction book for details of
functions not covered in the Users Manual.
H-1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
FAN
ASSY
LBO/OC3/STM-1
AUX INTFC
UD-35A( ) XMTR
DX-35M
DS1/E1
I/O INTFC
ALM
ON
LINE
SYNC
ALM
ALM
ON
LINE
COMMON
LOSS
ALM
DX-35N
DS3
I/O INTFC
01
XMT
AUX
SC
ALM
RCVR
ON
RAD
LOF
WYSD
DS1
WYSD
ALM
56
RAD DADE
DS3
ALIGN
1
234
789
DX-35P
OC3/STM-1
I/O INTFC
ALM
WYSD
ON
INSVC
OC3
IN
WYSD
ALM
OC3
ALM
OC3
OUT
LMW-9080
05/18/05
Figure H - 2 Typical MDR-8000 Compact Indoor Shelf Component Locations and Options (Sheet 1 of 3)
H-2
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
FAN
ASSY
UD-35A( ) XMTR
CHAN ALM
ON LINE
EYE MON
AFC MON
RSL MON
GND
RECEIVER
XTAL
MON
RF
IN
SELECT
RVCR BY
FUNCTION
CHANNEL ALM
EYE CLOSURE
M AFC
A
I EYE
N RSL
MN DV
D
I
S
I
T
Y
AFC V
RSL
EYE R
GND
RF IN
DV
XTAL DV
RF IN
MN
XTAL MN
DUAL RECEIVER
PPP
E
T
H
E
R
N
E
T
SELECT
ONE OR
NONE
LMW-9079
08/29/03
C
R
A
F
T
Figure H - 2 Typical MDR-8000 Compact Indoor Shelf Component Locations and Options (Sheet 2 of 3)
H-3
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
DS1/E1 LBO
DS3 LBO
J21
J24
J23
J22
J25
J202
J202
J401
J305
J306
J303
J314
J304
J203
J201
J201
DX-35( )
I/O
INTFC
UD-35( ) XMTR
UD-51( ) PWR AMP
SELECT XTAL
OSCILLATOR
SUBBOARD BY
CRYSTAL
FREQUENCY.
SELECT CAPACITY
KEY BY DATA RATE.
OC 3 /
STM-1
DS3
DS1/E1
LMW-9078-SM
05/18/05
Figure H - 2 Typical MDR-8000 Compact Indoor Shelf Component Locations and Options (Sheet 3 of 3)
H-4
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
See Figure H - 3. The external fan assembly PN 3EM11901ABAA is required for cooling the
Compact indoor unit equipped with high-power amplifiers, for specific frequency bands, as
follows:
Radio
Output Power
MDR-8505u
+30 dBm
MDR-8506
MDR-8510/8511
+29 dBm
The external fan assembly is wired to the Compact indoor shelf internal fan assembly PN
3EM14510AAAA via cable. The internal fan assembly provides +12 Vdc operating power to the
external fan assembly. The internal fan assembly receives 12C and alarms from the external
fan assembly.
The external fan assembly mounts to the rack rails directly below the heatsink on the Compact indoor shelf with four screws. The external fan assembly cools by blowing air between the
vanes on the heatsink. Fan revolutions are monitored and an alarm occurs if any one or more
fans loses rpm.
MDR-1025
06/12/04
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
INTERCONNECT
This part of the section gives the location and describes strapping, power connections, signal
connections, status and alarm connections and service channel connections for
the Compact indoor shelf.
H.2
See Figure H - 4 for power cable assembly installation procedures. The MDR-8000 is internally
wired to accept 20.5 to 60 V dc input power with positive or negative ground. To protect maintenance personnel from lightning strikes, the ground system must be integrated by bonding
station ground and dc battery return together. The dc power connectors J1 and J2 are located
on the rear of the back panel. Install power cables as shown.
DANGER
Possibility of
Injury
to Personnel
DANGER
Possibility of
Injury
to Personnel
WARNING
Possibility of
Damage
to Equipment
Do not apply batter y power until it is deter mined that the batter y
cables (with isolated retur ns and power cable) are wired correctly. With power applied, reverse polarity on wiring (+batt
wired to -batt pin on connector) can cause power supply fuse to
blow.
Note
Grounding of pole, antenna, customer interfaces, and all entrances to the
building interior shall meet local electrical code and standard business
practices.
H-6
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
PIN 1
POS
PIN 2
GND
PIN 3
NEG
J1
Note
Spade type lugs are attached to the wires
on the PWR cable assembly to allow
direct connection to the PDU.
PWR CABLE ASSEMBLY
PN695-7845-005
RED
ORN
BLK
CONNECT + BATT WIRE
TO + RACK GND FOR
POS GND INSTALLATIONS
ORN
12 AWG
BLK
12 AWG
+ BATT
RED
12 AWG
CHASSIS
GND
BATT
LMW-7224
08/05/04
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
P105
J1
P1
P302
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
P302 J302
9
1
+12 VDC
GND
9
1
FAN
ALM
CARD
J1
P1
1
2
3
1
2
3
FAN
ALM
P105 J105
EXT
FAN
ASSY
PN 3EM11901ABAA
FAN CARD
(ON CommPak
INDOOR SHELF)
PN 3EM14508ABAA
J302
J305
WIRE
COLOR
RED
BLK
BLU
9
1
MDR-1024
06/09/04
Each MDR-8000 rack equipped with the Power Distribution Unit (PDU) 695-6200-001/002 has
a visual rack alarm indicator to report a shelf failure. In order to activate a rack alarm visual
indicator on the PDU, the shelf alarm output from each MDR-8000 shelf must be hardwired to
connector J1 on the PDU. The shelf alarm is provided on alarm connector J305 pin 24 (major/
visual alarm). A wire-wrap adapter (PN 695-4171-002) for connector J305 is available. Insulated 22-gauge solid copper wire is recommended for connecting to the wire-wrap adapter. To
attach to J1 (2-pin connector) on the PDU, use 2-position socket housing PN 372-0114-140 and
socket contact PN 372-0114-390. See Figure H - 6, for shelf-to-rack alarm wiring.
Each MDR-8000 rack equipped with PDU 3EM13317AA has a blown fuse alarm visual
indicator and a Form C relay alarm output (J4, J5, and J6) for connection to customer alarm
equipment.
An optional Fuse and Shelf alarm plug-in assembly is available to provide shelf alarm connections requiring Form C relays. The alarm inputs (major and minor) must be hard wired to J3
on the PDU. The alarms are provided on alarm connector J305 pin 24 (major/visual alarm) and
pin 50 (minor/audible alarm) of each shelf. A wire-wrap adapter (PN 695-4171-002) for connector J305 is available. Insulated 22-gauge solid copper wire is recommended for connecting to
the wire-adapter and also to J3 on the PDU. Alarm outputs are transmitted to customer equipment via Form C relay outputs (J4, J5, J6, relays 1 through 8). This option also includes the
blown fuse alarm indicator and Form C relay alarm output (J4, J5, and J6 relay 9). See
Figure H - 6, for typical shelf to PDU alarm wiring.
H-9
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
RACK GND
R
20 AMP
20 AMP
20 AMP
10 AMP
FUSES
20 AMP
10 AMP
E7 E8 E9 E1
E10 E11 E12
6
10 AMP
1 AMP
1 AMP
1 AMP
10 AMP
20 AMP
FUSES
20 AMP
20 AMP
1
20 AMP
RACK GND
WIRE WRAP
ALARM INPUT
ALARM OUTPUT
J4 J5 J6
1
2
3
CUSTOMER
4
OUTPUTS
5
6
7
8
FUSE ALM
J3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MAJOR 1
MINOR 1
MAJOR 2
MINOR 2
MAJOR 3
MINOR 3
MAJOR 4/AUX
MINOR 4/AUX
UNUSED
NC COM NO
PDU
24
CommPak 1
50
CommPak 2
50
24
PIN 1
WIRE WRAP ADAPTER
LMW-7225
01/22/04
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Recommended connectorized cable assembly PN 695-7806-021 through -025 (22 AWG 12 pair
shielded, jacketed cable with 25-pin D-type connector on one end). See Figure H - 7 for shelf connector location and pinout. Refer to Table H - 1 for mating cable wiring and color code.
J314
25
PIN 1
26
50
FRONT VIEW
J314
J314 REPEATER
J304
13
25
14
LMW-7223
01/21/04
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
WIRE COLOR
SIGNAL NAME
CABLE PAIR
NUMBER
WHITEBLUE
CHAN 1 TIP
14
BLUEWHITE
CHAN 1 RING
WHITEORANGE
CHAN 2 TIP
15
ORANGEWHITE
CHAN 2 RING
WHITEGREEN
CHAN 3 TIP
16
GREENWHITE
CHAN 3 RING
WHITEBROWN
CHAN 4 TIP
17
BROWNWHITE
CHAN 4 RING
WHITESLATE
CHAN 5 TIP
18
SLATEWHITE
CHAN 5 RING
REDBLUE
CHAN 6 TIP
19
BLUERED
CHAN 6 RING
REDORANGE
CHAN 7 TIP
20
ORANGERED
CHAN 7 RING
REDGREEN
CHAN 8 TIP
21
GREENRED
CHAN 8 RING
N/A
REDBROWN
CUTBACK
N/A
BROWNRED
CUTBACK
N/A
REDSLATE
CUTBACK
N/A
SLATERED
CUTBACK
N/A
BLACKBLUE
CUTBACK
N/A
BLUEBLACK
CUTBACK
N/A
BLACKORANGE
CUTBACK
N/A
ORANGEBLACK
CUTBACK
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Note: DS1 IN J304 and DS1 OUT J306 are the same as above for CHAN 9-16.
H.2.4.2
Note
The DS1 repeater cable carries clocks, DS1 data, and overhead for two directions. If the 314 cable is not used, the embedded data in the overhead must
be cabled individually. In this case, individual cables must be run for MCS
11, audio, RS-232, and ELMC.
Recommended connectorized cable assembly PN 6957836001/005 (25 pair shielded cable
with 50 pin Amp connectors) (SCSI). See Figure H - 7 for shelf connector location and pinout.
Refer to Table H - 2 for mating cable wiring and color code.
H-12
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Note
Use repeater cables for cabling repeater shelf 1 to repeater shelf 2 (eastbound/westbound data/clock)
Table H - 2 DS1 LBO Repeater Connector J314 Mating Cable Wiring and Pinout
FUNCTION
END 1
WIRE COLOR
PAIR
END 2
FUNCTION
RX-DX CLK T
26
WHT/TAN
25
NOT USED
RX-DX CLK F
01
TAN/WHT
50
NOT USED
RCV SYNC T
27
WHT/BRN
24
XMT SYNC T
RCV SYNC F
02
BRN/WHT
49
XMT SYNC F
NOT USED
28
WHT/PNK
23
NOT USED
NOT USED
03
PNK/WHT
48
NOT USED
RCV XID T
29
WHT/ORN
22
XMT XID T
RCV XID F
04
ORN/WHT
47
XMT XID F
RCV YID T
30
WHT/YEL
21
XMT YID T
RCV YID F
05
YEL/WHT
46
XMT YID F
RCV X2D T
31
WHT/GRN
20
XMT X2D T
RCV X2D F
06
GRN/WHT
45
XMT X2D F
RCV Y2D T
32
WHT/BLU
19
XMT Y2D T
RCV Y2D F
07
BLU/WHT
44
XMT Y2D F
RCV X3D T
33
WHT/VIO
18
XMT X3D T
RCV X3D F
08
VIO/WHT
43
XMT X3D F
RCV Y3D T
34
WHT/GRY
17
XMT Y3D T
RCV Y3D F
09
GRY/WHT
42
XMT Y3D F
RCV X4D T
35
TAN/BRN
10
16
XMT X4D T
RCV X4D F
10
BRN/TAN
10
41
XMT X4D F
RCV Y4D T
36
TAN/PNK
11
15
XMT Y4D T
RCV Y4D F
11
PNK/TAN
11
40
XMT Y4D F
NOT USED
37
TAN/ORN
12
14
NOT USED
NOT USED
12
ORN/TAN
12
39
NOT USED
H-13
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
Table H - 2 DS1 LBO Repeater Connector J314 Mating Cable Wiring and Pinout (Cont.)
H-14
FUNCTION
END 1
WIRE COLOR
PAIR
END 2
FUNCTION
NOT USED
38
TAN/YEL
13
13
NOT USED
NOT USED
13
YEL/TAN
13
38
NOT USED
NOT USED
39
TAN/GRN
14
12
NOT USED
NOT USED
14
GRN/TAN
14
37
NOT USED
XMT Y4D T
15
TAN/BLU
15
36
RCV Y4D T
XMT Y4D F
40
BLU/TAN
15
11
RCV Y4D F
XMT X4D T
16
TAN/VIO
16
35
RCV X4D T
XMT X4D F
41
VIO/TAN
16
10
RCV X4D F
XMT Y3D T
17
TAN/GRY
17
34
RCV Y3D T
XMT Y3D F
42
GRY/TAN
17
09
RCV Y3D F
XMT X3D T
18
BRN/PNK
18
33
RCV X3D T
XMT X3D F
43
PNK/BRN
18
08
RCV X3D F
XMT Y2D T
19
BRN/ORN
19
32
RCV Y2D T
XMT Y2D F
44
ORN/BRN
19
07
RCV Y2D F
XMT X2D T
20
BRN/YEL
20
31
RCV X2D T
XMT X2D F
45
YEL/BRN
20
06
RCV X2D F
XMT Y1D T
21
BRN/GRN
21
30
RCV Y1D T
XMT Y1D F
46
GRN/BRN
21
05
RCV Y1D F
XMT X1D T
22
BRN/BLU
22
29
RCV X1D T
XMT X1D F
47
BLU/BRN
22
04
RCV X1D F
NOT USED
23
BRN/VIO
23
28
NOT USED
NOT USED
48
VIO/BRN
23
03
NOT USED
RPTR SYNC T
24
BRN/GRY
24
27
RPTR SYN T
RPTR SYNC F
49
GRY/BRN
24
02
RPTR SYN F
TX-DX CLK T
25
PNK/ORN
25
26
NOT USED
TX-DX CLK F
50
ORN/PNK
25
01
NOT USED
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
The DS3 LBO compensates for the distance to the cross-connect for DS3 and wayside DS1 outputs. See Figure H - 8 for connector locations. Refer to Table H - 3 for repeater mating cable wiring and color codes.
LINE 3 IN TIP
GND
LINE 2 IN TIP
LINE 1 IN TIP
LINE 1 IN RING
LINE 2 IN RING
LINE 3 IN RING
J201
INPUT
TOP VIEW
J202
J201
J401
J401 REPEATER
25
J401
50
J2 LINE 1 DS3 IN
J4 LINE 2 DS3 IN
J3 LINE 2 DS3 OUT
J202
OUTPUT
J21
J23
J25
J26
J24
J22
J6 LINE 3 DS3 IN
TOP VIEW
PIN 1
26
FRONT VIEW
LMW-7221
01/21/04
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
H.2.5.1
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
Recommended connectorized cable assembly for all applications except repeaters, PN 6324429-096/180 (8/15 ft RG-59B/U coax cable with straight male BNC connector on one end and
right angle male BNC connector on other end). For repeater applications, recommend PN 6324288-096/180 (8/15 ft RG-59B/U coax cable with straight male BNC connector on each end).
See Figure H - 8 for locations.
H.2.5.2
Table H - 3 DS3 LBO Wayside DS1 Connector Mating Cable Wiring and Pinout
J201 (INPUTS)
202 (OUTPUTS)
FUNCTION
END 1
WIRE
COLOR
WIRE
COLOR
END 2
FUNCTION
LINE 1 TIP IN
01
BLACK
BLACK
01
LINE 1 RING IN
06
RED
RED
06
LINE 2 TIP IN
02
BLACK
BLACK
02
LINE 2 RING IN
07
WHITE
WHITE
07
LINE 3 TIP IN
04
BLACK
BLACK
04
LINE 3 RING IN
08
GREEN
GREEN
08
NOT USED
05
BLACK
BLACK
05
NOT USED
NOT USED
09
BLUE
BLUE
09
NOT USED
GND
03
BLACK
GND
03
NOT USED
NOT USED
10
YELLOW
YELLOW
10
NOT USED
H.2.5.3
Note
The DS3 repeater cable carries clocks, data, and overhead for two directions.
It does not carry DS3 or wayside DS1 traffic. DS3 and wayside DS1 cables
must be run separately. If the 401 cable is not used, the embedded data in
the overhead must be cabled individually. In this case, individual cables
must be run for MCS-11, audio, RS-232, and ELMC.
Recommended connectorized cable assembly PN 695-7836-001/005 (25 pair shielded cable
with 50 pin Amp connectors) (SCSI). See Figure H - 8 for shelf connector location and pinout.
Refer to Table H - 4 for mating cable wiring and color code.
H-16
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Note
Use repeater cables for cabling repeater shelf 1 to repeater shelf 2 (eastbound/westbound data/clock)
Table H - 4 DS3 LBO Repeater Connector J401 Mating Cable Wiring and Pinout
FUNCTION
END 1
WIRE
COLOR
PAIR
END 2
FUNCTION
GND
26
WHT/TAN
25
GND
C GND
01
TAN/WHT
50
C GND
27
WHT/BRN
24
02
BRN/WHT
49
28
WHT/PNK
23
03
PNK/WHT
48
NOT USED
29
WHT/ORN
22
NOT USED
NOT USED
04
ORN/WHT
47
NOT USED
RCV SYNC T
30
WHT/YEL
21
XMT SYNC T
RCV SYNC F
05
YEL/WHT
46
XMT SYNC F
31
WHT/GRN
20
06
GRN/WHT
45
32
WHT/BLU
19
07
BLU/WHT
44
33
WHT/VIO
18
08
VIO/WHT
43
34
WHT/GRY
17
09
GRY/WHT
42
35
TAN/BRN
10
16
10
BRN/TAN
10
41
NOT USED
36
TAN/PNK
11
15
NOT USED
11
PNK/TAN
11
40
NOT USED
37
TAN/ORN
12
14
NOT USED
NOT USED
12
ORN/TAN
12
39
NOT USED
H-17
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
Table H - 4 DS3 LBO Repeater Connector J401 Mating Cable Wiring and Pinout (Cont.)
FUNCTION
END 1
WIRE
COLOR
PAIR
END 2
FUNCTION
NOT USED
38
TAN/YEL
13
13
NOT USED
NOT USED
13
YEL/TAN
13
38
NOT USED
NOT USED
39
TAN/GRN
14
12
NOT USED
NOT USED
14
GRN/TAN
14
37
NOT USED
15
TAN/BLU
15
36
NOT USED
40
BLU/TAN
15
11
NOT USED
16
TAN/VIO
16
35
41
VIO/TAN
16
10
17
TAN/GRY
17
34
42
GRY/TAN
17
09
18
BRN/PNK
18
33
43
PNK/BRN
18
08
19
BRN/ORN
19
32
44
ORN/BRN
19
07
20
BRN/YEL
20
31
45
YEL/BRN
20
06
XMT SYNC T
21
BRN/GRN
21
30
RCV SYNC T
XMT SYNC F
46
GRN/BRN
21
05
RCV SYNC F
NOT USED
22
BRN/BLU
22
29
NOT USED
NOT USED
47
BLU/BRN
22
04
NOT USED
23
BRN/VIO
23
28
48
VIO/BRN
23
03
24
BRN/GRY
24
27
49
GRY/BRN
24
02
GND
25
PNK/ORN
25
26
GND
C GND
50
ORN/PNK
25
01
C GND
H-18
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
DANGER
Possibility of
Injury
to Personnel
WARNING
Possibility of
Damage
to Equipment
PART NO.
APPLICATION
FC to LC
3EM07651AA-AK
TERMINAL
SC TO LC
3EM07646AA-AK
TERMINAL
LC TO LC
3EM07641AA-AK
REPEATER
H-19
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
CONNECT OPTICAL
RCV (OR) CABLE TO
IN CONNECTOR
IN
OUT
VIEW OF
CONNECTOR
WITH FIBER
OPTIC CABLES
REMOVED
CONNECT OPTICAL
XMT (OT) CABLE TO
OUT CONNECTOR
OT-1
OR-1
IN
O
R-
IN
SHELF 2B
R-
IN
SHELF 2A
R-
IN
SHELF 1B
SHELF 1A
R-
IN
R-
IN
O
R-
IN
O
R-
IN
4
RO
OT-2 OUT
OT-1 OUT
OT-4 OUT
OT-3 OUT
ALM
OT-1 OUT
OT-2 OUT
WYSD
ON
OT-4 OUT
INSVC
OT-3 OUT
OC3
IN
WYSD
ALM
OUTPUTS
OC3
ALM
OC3
OUT
INPUTS
MDR-1019
05/07/04
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Table H - 6 OC3/STM-1 Aux Interface Wayside DS1Connector Mating Cable Wiring and Pinout
J201 (INPUTS)
J202 (OUTPUTS)
FUNCTION
END 1
WIRE COLOR
WIRE COLOR
END 2
FUNCTION
LINE 1 TIP IN
01
BLACK
BLACK
01
LINE 1 RING IN
06
RED
RED
06
LINE 2 TIP IN
02
BLACK
BLACK
02
LINE 2 RING IN
07
WHITE
WHITE
07
LINE 3 TIP IN
04
BLACK
BLACK
04
LINE 3 RING IN
08
GREEN
GREEN
08
NOT USED
05
BLACK
BLACK
05
NOT USED
NOT USED
09
BLUE
BLUE
09
NOT USED
GND
03
BLACK
BLACK
03
GND
NOT USED
10
YELLOW
YELLOW
10
NOT USED
H-21
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
GND
RPTR DS1 OUT TIP
RPTR DS1 IN TIP
J203
FRONT VIEW
J203 REPEATER
J203
J202
J201
FRONT VIEW
J202
OUTPUT
LINE 3 IN TIP
GND
LINE 2 IN TIP
LINE 1 IN TIP
LINE 1 IN RING
LINE 2 IN RING
LINE 3 IN RING
J201
INPUT
FRONT VIEW
LMW-7222
01/21/04
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
H.2.7.3
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Note
The OC3/STM-1 radio repeater cable carries clocks, data, and overhead for
two directions. It does not carry OC3/STM-1 or wayside DS1 traffic. OC3/
STM-1 fiber optic cables and wayside DS1 cable must be run separately. If
the repeater cable is not used, the embedded data in the overhead must be
cabled individually. In this case, separate cables must be run for MCS-11,
audio, RS-232, and ELMC.
Recommended connectorized cable assembly PN 695-4125-007/013 (26 AWG 5 pair shielded,
jacketed cable). See Figure H - 10 for shelf connector location and pinout. Refer to Table H - 7
for mating cable wiring and color code.
Note
Use repeater cables for cabling repeater shelf 1 to repeater shelf 2 (eastbound/westbound data/clock)
Table H - 7 OC3/STM-1 Aux Interface Repeater Connector J203 Mating Cable Wiring and Pinout
J203/J203 MDR-8000 OC3/STM-1
J203/
J203
FUNCTION
END 1
WIRE COLOR
PAIR
WIRE COLOR
END 2
FUNCTION
DS1 IN TIP
01
BLACK
BLACK
02
DS1 IN RING
06
RED
RED
07
02
BLACK
BLACK
01
DS1 IN TIP
07
WHITE
WHITE
06
DS1 IN RING
NOT USED
BLACK
GND
03
GREEN
NOT USED
04
BLACK
NOT USED
08
BLUE
NOT USED
05
BLACK
NOT USED
09
YELLOW
BLACK
NOT USED
GREEN
03
GND
BLACK
05
NOT USED
BLUE
09
NOT USED
BLACK
04
NOT USED
YELLOW
08
NOT USED
H-23
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
Recommended connectorized cable assembly PN 695-7848-001 through 004 (24 AWG 6 pair
shielded, jacketed cable with DEMM-9P connector on each end). See Figure H - 11 for controller connector location and pinout. Refer to Table H - 8 for mating cable pinout and color code.
USI
RI
CTS
RTS
DSR
J301
DCD
RxD
TxD
DTR
GND
J305
FRONT VIEW
J315
J1
J318
J307
J316
J308
J317
J309
J312
J310
J301
LMW-7214
01/21/04
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
J301/
LAPTOP
LAPTOP
FUNCTION
END 1
WIRE COLOR
PAIR
WIRE COLOR
END 2
FUNCTION
DCD
01
BLACK
BLACK
01
DCD
DSR
06
RED
RED
06
DSR
RXD
02
BLACK
BLACK
02
RXD
RTS
07
WHITE
WHITE
07
RTS
TXD
03
BLACK
BLACK
03
TXD
CTS
08
GREEN
GREEN
08
CTS
DTR
04
BLACK
BLACK
04
DTR
RI
09
BLUE
BLUE
09
RI
GND
05
BLACK
BLACK
05
GND
NOT USED
N/A
YELLOW
YELLOW
N/A
NOT USED
NOT USED
N/A
BLACK
BLACK
N/A
NOT USED
NOT USED
N/A
BROWN
BROWN
N/A
NOT USED
H-25
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
Recommended cable PN 424-0305-030 (26 AWG 5 pair shielded, jacketed cable with 9-pin Dtype connector on each end). See Figure H - 12 for pinout. Refer to Table H - 9 for mating cable
wiring and color code.
GND
CALL DETECT
AUDIO TIP OUT
M LEAD
AUDIO TIP IN
J316/J317
5
AUDIO RING IN
E LEAD
AUDIO RING OUT
CALL COMMON
J305
FRONT VIEW
J315
J1
J318
J307
J316
J308
J317
J309
J312
J310
J301
LMW-7215
01/21/04
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Table H - 9 Audio Connectors J316 and J317 Mating Cable Wiring and Pinout
FUNCTION
END 1
WIRE COLOR
PAIR
WIRE COLOR
END 2
FUNCTION
AUDIO TIP IN
01
BLACK
BLACK
03
AUDIO RING IN
06
RED
RED
08
AUDIO M LEAD
02
BLACK
BLACK
07
AUDIO E LEAD
AUDIO E LEAD
07
WHITE
WHITE
02
AUDIO M LEAD
03
BLACK
BLACK
01
AUDIO TIP IN
08
GREEN
GREEN
06
AUDIO RING IN
CALL DETECT
04
BLACK
BLACK
04
NOT USED
CALL COMMON
09
BLUE
BLUE
09
NOT USED
GND
05
BLACK
BLACK
05
GND
NOT USED
10
YELLOW
YELLOW
10
NOT USED
H-27
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
Recommended connectorized cable assembly PN 695-4125-021 through 025 (26 AWG 5 pair
shielded, jacketed cable with 9-pin D-type connector on each end). See Figure H - 13 for shelf
connector locations and pinout. Refer to Table H - 10 for mating cable wiring and color code.
GND
RS232-2 OUT
RS232-1 IN
RS232-1 OUT
J312
5
RS232-2 IN
J305
FRONT VIEW
J315
J1
J318
J307
J316
J308
J317
J309
J312
J310
J301
LMW-7216
01/21/04
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
J312
J312 MDR-8000
FUNCTION
END 1
WIRE COLOR
PAIR
WIRE COLOR
END 2
FUNCTION
NOT USED
01
BLACK
BLACK
01
NOT USED
NOT USED
06
RED
RED
06
NOT USED
RS-232-1 OUT
02
BLACK
BLACK
03
RS-232-1 IN
NOT USED
07
WHITE
WHITE
08
NOT USED
RS-232-1 IN
03
BLACK
BLACK
02
RS-232-1 OUT
NOT USED
08
GREEN
GREEN
07
NOT USED
RS-232-2 OUT
04
BLACK
BLACK
09
RS-232-2 IN
RS-232-2 IN
09
BLUE
BLUE
04
RS-232-2 OUT
GND
05
BLACK
BLACK
05
GND
NOT USED
10
YELLOW
YELLOW
10
NOT USED
When MCS is selected to be placed on one of the three service channels and then RSS is
enabled and properly addressed, applicable ports on the controller module are enabled. This
allows the user to interface external MCS-11 Monitor and Control System equipment at any
or all four connectors on the backplane (J307, J308, J309, and J310). Two connectors (J308
and J309) are synchronous, parallel, data ports and provide CLK outputs. Connectors J307
and J310 are asynchronous ports.
H.2.11.1 MCS-11 Master (J307) Cable Connection
Note
If the radio is provisioned Repeater, port 2 on the controller, that connects to
J307, is disabled. At a repeater, you can use J310 in lieu of J307 for connecting the TSM polling engine to the radio.
MCS-11 connector J307 is used to connect to a TSM (-2500, -3500, or -8000) polling engine at
a master terminal.
Recommended connectorized cable assembly PN 695-4126-007/009/012 (26 AWG 8 pair
shielded, jacketed cable). See Figure H - 14 for shelf connector location and pinout. Refer to
Table H - 11 for mating cable pinout and color code.
H-29
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
XMT DATA +
RTN CLK +
XMT CLK +
RCV DATA +
RCV CLK +
J307
8
15
RCV CLK RCV DATA XMT CLK RTN CLK XMT DATA -
J305
FRONT VIEW
J315
J1
J318
J307
J316
J308
J317
J309
J312
J310
J301
LMW-7218
01/21/04
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Table H - 11 MCS-11 Master Connector J307 Mating Cable Wiring and Color Codes
J307 MDR-8000
POLLING ENGINE
FUNCTION
END 1
WIRE COLOR
PAIR
WIRE COLOR
END 2
FUNCTION
RCV CLK +
01
BLACK
BLACK
01
RCV CLK +
RCV CLK-
09
RED
RED
09
RCV CLK-
RCV DATA +
02
BLACK
BLACK
02
RCV DATA +
RCV DATA -
10
WHITE
WHITE
10
RCV DATA -
XMT CLK +
03
BLACK
BLACK
03
XMT CLK +
XMT CLK -
11
GREEN
GREEN
11
XMT CLK -
RETURN CLK +
04
BLACK
BLACK
04
RETURN CLK +
RETURN CLK -
12
BLUE
BLUE
12
RETURN CLK -
XMT DATA +
05
BLACK
BLACK
05
XMT DATA +
XMT DATA -
13
YELLOW
YELLOW
13
XMT DATA -
NOT USED
06
BLACK
BLACK
06
OFF HOOK +
NOT USED
14
BROWN
BROWN
14
OFF HOOK -
NOT USED
07
BLACK
BLACK
07
RCV DATA
NOT USED
15
ORANGE
ORANGE
15
SIG GND
NOT USED
08
RED
RED
08
DTR
NOT USED
16
WHITE
WHITE
16
NOT USED
Note
MCS-11 must be provisioned MCS-11 J310 Master/Junction to enable XMT,
RCV, and OUTPUT clocks. If an external modem is being used, provision
MCS-11 for MCS-11 J310 Modem. This selection disables XMT, RCV,OUTPUT clocks and all MCS-11 clocks must now be provided by the external
modem.
MCS-11 connector J308/J309 is typically used to connect a repeater to a spur or multiple spurs
in a daisy chain system configuration. Either repeater shelf 1 or repeater shelf 2 may feed the
spur shelf. The first connection out of the repeater must be crosswired from J308 to J308.
Then, every shelf from the spur must be wired 1:1, J309 to J308, in a daisy-chain fashion.
H-31
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
OFF HOOK +
XMT DATA +
CLK OUT +
XMT CLK +
RCV DATA +
RCV CLK +
J308
8
15
RCV CLK RCV DATA XMT CLK RTN CLK XMT DATA OFF HOOK -
J305
FRONT VIEW
J315
J1
J318
J307
J316
J308
J317
J309
J312
J310
J301
LMW-7219
01/21/04
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
OFF HOOK +
XMT DATA +
XMT CLK +
RCV DATA +
RCV CLK +
J309
8
15
RCV CLK
RCV DATA
XMT CLK
J305
FRONT VIEW
J315
J1
J318
J307
J316
J308
J317
J309
J312
J310
XMT DATA
OFF HOOK
J301
LMW-7226
01/23/04
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
J308/J308
J308 MDR-8000
FUNCTION
END 1
WIRE COLOR
PAIR
WIRE COLOR
END 2
FUNCTION
RCV CLK +
01
BLACK
BLACK
03
XMT CLK +
RCV CLK-
09
RED
RED
11
XMT CLK-
RCV DATA +
02
BLACK
BLACK
05
XMT DATA +
RCV DATA -
10
WHITE
WHITE
13
XMT DATA -
XMT CLK +
03
BLACK
BLACK
01
RCV CLK +
XMT CLK -
11
GREEN
GREEN
09
RCV CLK -
04
BLACK
BLACK
04
NOT USED
CLK OUT -
12
BLUE
BLUE
12
NOT USED
XMT DATA +
05
BLACK
BLACK
02
RCV DATA +
XMT DATA -
13
YELLOW
YELLOW
10
RCV DATA -
OFF HOOK +
06
BLACK
BLACK
06
OFF HOOK +
OFF HOOK -
14
BROWN
BROWN
14
OFF HOOK -
NOT USED
07
BLACK
BLACK
07
NOT USED
NOT USED
15
ORANGE
ORANGE
15
NOT USED
NOT USED
08
RED
RED
08
NOT USED
CLK OUT+
NOT USED
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
WHITE
WHITE
NOT USED
J309/J308
J308 MDR-8000
FUNCTION
END 1
WIRE COLOR
PAIR
WIRE COLOR
END 2
FUNCTION
RCV CLK +
01
BLACK
BLACK
01
RCV CLK +
RCV CLK-
09
RED
RED
09
RCV CLK-
RCV DATA +
02
BLACK
BLACK
02
RCV DATA +
RCV DATA -
10
WHITE
WHITE
10
RCV DATA -
XMT CLK +
03
BLACK
BLACK
03
XMT CLK +
XMT CLK -
11
GREEN
GREEN
11
XMT CLK -
04
BLACK
BLACK
04
NOT USED
CLK OUT -
12
BLUE
BLUE
12
NOT USED
XMT DATA +
05
BLACK
BLACK
05
XMT DATA +
XMT DATA -
13
YELLOW
YELLOW
13
XMT DATA -
OFF HOOK +
06
BLACK
BLACK
06
OFF HOOK +
OFF HOOK -
14
BROWN
BROWN
14
OFF HOOK -
NOT USED
07
BLACK
BLACK
07
NOT USED
NOT USED
08
ORANGE
ORANGE
15
NOT USED
NOT USED
15
RED
RED
08
NOT USED
NOT USED
16
WHITE
WHITE
16
NOT USED
CLK OUT+
H-34
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
XMT DATA +
RTN CLK +
XMT CLK +
RCV DATA +
RCV CLK +
J310
8
15
RCV CLK RCV DATA XMT CLK RTN CLK XMT DATA -
J305
FRONT VIEW
J315
J1
J318
J307
J316
J308
J317
J309
J312
J310
J301
LMW-7220
01/21/04
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
Table H - 14 MCS-11 Spur Connector J310 Mating Cable Wiring and Pinout
J310 MDR-8000
J310/J310
J310 MDR-8000
FUNCTION
END 1
WIRE COLOR
PAIR
WIRE COLOR
END 2
FUNCTION
RCV CLK +
01
BLACK
BLACK
04
RETURN CLK +
RCV CLK-
09
RED
RED
12
RETURN CLK-
RCV DATA +
02
BLACK
BLACK
05
XMT DATA +
RCV DATA -
10
WHITE
WHITE
13
XMT DATA -
XMT CLK +
03
BLACK
BLACK
03
XMT CLK +
XMT CLK -
11
GREEN
GREEN
11
XMT CLK -
RETURN CLK +
04
BLACK
BLACK
01
RCV CLK +
RETURN CLK -
12
BLUE
BLUE
09
RCV CLK -
XMT DATA +
05
BLACK
BLACK
02
RCV DATA +
XMT DATA -
13
YELLOW
YELLOW
10
RCV DATA -
NOT USED
06
BLACK
BLACK
06
NOT USED
NOT USED
14
BROWN
BROWN
14
NOT USED
NOT USED
07
BLACK
BLACK
07
NOT USED
NOT USED
15
ORANGE
ORANGE
15
NOT USED
NOT USED
08
RED
RED
08
NOT USED
NOT USED
16
WHITE
WHITE
16
NOT USED
The Extended Link Monitor Channel (ELMC) function allows provisioning, alarms, status
information, and control commands for the local radio and, with the exception of wayside DS1,
alarms, status information, control commands for addressable remote radios as a standard
feature. For wayside DS1 status, the ELMC option key (695-5647-019 or -020) must be
installed on the AE-37Y Controller. For remote provisioning and downloading capability, the
ELMC option key (695-5647-018 or 695-5647-020) must be installed on the AE-37Y Controller.
Recommended connectorized cable assembly PN 695-4125-006/013 (26 AWG 5 pair shielded,
jacketed cable). See Figure H - 18 for shelf connectors locations and pinout. Refer to Table H - 15
for mating cable wiring and color code.
H-36
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Note
ELMC 1 connector J318 and ELMC 2 connector J315 are wired in parallel.
You can connect J315 to J315, J315 to J318, or J318 to J318.
J315/J318 MDR-8000
FUNCTION
END 1
WIRE COLOR
PAIR
WIRE COLOR
END 2
FUNCTION
RCV+
01
BLACK
BLACK
02
XMT+
RCV-
06
RED
RED
07
XMT-
XMT+
02
BLACK
BLACK
01
RCV+
XMT-
07
WHITE
WHITE
06
RCV-
NOT USED
BLACK
GND
03
GREEN
NOT USED
04
BLACK
NOT USED
08
BLUE
NOT USED
05
BLACK
NOT USED
09
YELLOW
BLACK
NOT USED
GREEN
03
GND
BLACK
05
NOT USED
BLUE
09
NOT USED
BLACK
04
NOT USED
YELLOW
08
NOT USED
H-37
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
GND
XMT +
RCV +
J315/J318
5
RCV XMT -
J305
FRONT VIEW
J315
J1
J318
J307
J316
J308
J317
J309
J312
J310
J301
LMW-7217
01/21/04
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Note
TBOS connections on J305 share pins with station alarms 13 through 16
and either TBOS or station alarms 13 through 16 is selected (provisioned)
on the USI Radio Configuration Provisioning screen.
J305
50
25
26
PIN 1
FRONT VIEW
LMW-7227-50pin
01/23/04
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
PIN
PR
WIRE COLOR
REMARKS
01
WHT/BLU
NOT USED*
26
BLU/WHT
N/A
02
WHT/ORN
NOT USED*
27
ORN/WHT
N/A
03
WHT/GRN
28
GRN/WHT
04
WHT/BRN
29
BRN/WHT
05
WHT/SLT
NOT USED*
30
SLT/WHT
N/A
06
RED/BLU
NOT USED*
31
BLU/RED
N/A
07
RED/ORN
NOT USED*
32
ORN/RED
N/A
08
RED/GRN
NOT USED*
33
GRN/RED
N/A
STATION ALM 9 IN
09
RED/BRN
STATION ALM 1 IN
34
BRN/RED
STATION ALM 10 IN
10
RED/SLT
STATION ALM 2 IN
35
SLT/RED
STATION ALM 11 IN
11
BLK/BLU
STATION ALM 3 IN
36
BLU/BLK
H-40
10
11
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Table H - 16 Alarm/Status Connector J305 Mating Cable Wiring and Pinout (Cont.)
ALM/STATUS/CONTROL
PIN
PR
WIRE COLOR
REMARKS
STATION ALM 12 IN
12
12
BLK/ORN
STATION ALM 4 IN
37
ORN/BLK
13
13
BLK/GRN
STATION ALM 5 IN
38
13
GRN/BLK
14
14
BLK/BRN
STATION ALM 6 IN
39
BRN/BLK
15
BLK/SLT
STATION ALM 7 IN
40
SLT/BLK
16
YEL/BLU
STATION ALM 8 IN
41
BLU/YEL
CONTROL 1 OUT
17
YEL/ORN
CONTROL STATUS 1 IN
42
ORN/YEL
CONTROL 2 OUT
18
YEL/GRN
CONTROL STATUS 2 IN
43
GRN/YEL
CONTROL 3 OUT
19
YEL/BRN
CONTROL STATUS 3 IN
44
BRN/YEL
15
16
17
18
19
H-41
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
Table H - 16 Alarm/Status Connector J305 Mating Cable Wiring and Pinout (Cont.)
ALM/STATUS/CONTROL
PIN
PR
WIRE COLOR
REMARKS
CONTROL 4 OUT
20
20
YEL/SLT
CONTROL STATUS 4 IN
45
SLTYEL
CONTROL 5 OUT
21
VIO/BLU
CONTROL STATUS 5 IN
46
BLU/VIO
CONTROL 6 OUT
22
VIO/ORN
CONTROL STATUS 6 IN
47
ORN/VIO
23
VIO/GRN
48
GRN/VIO
MAJOR ALM/VISUAL
ALM OUT
24
VIO/BRN
49
VIO/BRN
INPUT TO CONTROLLER
25
VIO/SLT
MINOR ALM/AUDIBLE
ALM OUT
50
SLT/VIO
H-42
21
22
23
24
25
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
See Figure H - 20. Use wire wrap adapter PN 695-4171-002 to connect station alarm inputs to
the AE-27A Relay Interface module, via connector J305, in each rack. A typical connection scenario is shown. The station/shelf alarm for MCS-11 address A1A (MCS-11 alarm point 1) is
connected by software. The station alarms for MCS-11 address A1B and A1C are assigned to
MCS-11 Alarm points 2 and 3, respectively.
RACK ALM
50
25
NOTE
SOFTWARE AUTOMATICALLY CONNECTS
RACK ALM OUTPUT FROM CONTROLLER
J305-25 TO #1 STATION ALM INPUT J305-34.
36
J305
PDU
P
35
34*
STATION
ALM
#2
50
PIN 25
RACK ALM
26
PIN 1
STATION
ALM
#3
J305
MCS-11
ADDRESS
A1A
CommPak 1
25
*STATION
ALM
#1
(SEE NOTE)
26
PIN 1
50
J305
MCS-11
ADDRESS
A1B
CommPak 2
26
MCS-11
ADDRESS
A1C
CommPak 3
PIN 1
LMW-7228
01/26/04
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
MAINTENANCE
This part of the appendix provides information and procedures that are different for the hotstandby shelf and the Compact indoor shelf.
H.3
All Warnings and Cautions outlined in the Maintenance section apply while operating, performance testing, troubleshooting, or repairing the MDR-8000 series radio.
H.3.2 Troubleshooting
Before replacing any module, refer to Table H - 17 to determine the actions, other than physical replacement, required. If the module has any options (switches, subboards, etc.), refer to
the removed module so that the replacement module can be set up the same way.
REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT
PROCEDURE
CHECKS/ADJUSTMENTS
PROCEDURE
None Required
AE-37Y Controller
None Required
None Required
Fuse
UD-35( ) Transmitter
Capacity Key
UD-36 ( ) Receiver
Capacity Key
DS1/E1 LBO
DS3 LBO
(1)
H-44
If ATPC is in use, it must be provisioned disabled or locked high before removing controller.
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
WARNING
Possibility of
Damage
to Equipment
Before starting removal procedure, loosen cable connected to RF OUT connector on PA.
Semirigid coaxial cable requires special consideration. The electrical characteristics of the
semirigid coax can be affected if it is accidentally twisted or bent. Provide mechanical
support to prevent any weight or strain to the coax and connector when connecting or
disconnecting equipment. Loosen the connectors at both ends of a semirigid coax section if
one end must be moved even slightly. SMA connectors should be secured in place fingertight,
and then gently tightened using a torque wrench with a 5/16 in. head set for 7 to 9
inch-pounds. The connectors should not be left fingertight.
FRONT
BOTTOM VIEW
H-45
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
MDR-1004
03/08/04
H-46
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
WARNING
Possibility of
Damage
to Equipment
Check to ensure that the three mounting screws securing the PA to the
heatsink are loose before attempting to remove the PA to prevent
damage to the module.
LEFT
BRACKET
6. ANGLE PA TO LEFT AND
PULL OUT ON RIGHT SIDE
OF PA UNTIL LEFT SIDE OF
CHASSIS COVER CLEARS
BRACKET.
2. DISCONNECT
CABLE FROM RF
OUT CONNECTOR
ON XMTR.
3. REMOVE PA FRONT PANEL AND
PLACE OUT OF THE WAY.
MDR-1002F
03/08/04
H-47
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
Note
You must continually feed RF cable through bottom entrance hole in cardcage
as you pull out PA, being cautious to not damage or overbend cable.
WARNING
Possibility of
Damage
to Equipment
To prevent monitor point errors, use caution to ensure that the front panel
removed from the PA is reinstalled on that same PA. No two monitor levels labeled
on PAs are the same. Erroneous output levels can result from installing the wrong
front panel and calibrating the PA to the level labeled on that front panel.
MDR-1003F
03/08/04
H-48
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
H.3.3.2
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Remove and replace the DS1/E1 LBO using the following procedure:
1. UNLOCK AND DISCONNECT CABLE FROM DS1/E1 LINES 1-8 OUT CONNECTOR J305.
2. UNLOCK AND DISCONNECT CABLE FROM DS1/E1 LINES 9-16 OUT CONNECTOR J306.
3. UNLOCK AND DISCONNECT CABLE FROM DS1/E1 LINES 1-8 IN CONNECTOR J303.
4. UNLOCK AND DISCONNECT CABLE FROM DS1/E1 LINES 9-16 IN CONNECTOR J304.
MDR-1005F
03/09/04
H-49
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
6. USING HANDLES ON MODULE, UNLATCH DS1/E1 LBO AND PULL OUT OF CARDCAGE TO FULLY EXTENDED
POSITION WITH EDGE OF LBO RESTING ON EDGE OF CARDCAGE.
7. WHILE HOLDING LBO, UNLOCK AND DISCONNECT CABLE FROM RPTR CONNECTOR J314.
PRESS
PRESS
MDR-1006
03/08/04
H-50
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
H.3.3.3
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Remove and replace the DS3 LBO using the following procedure:
2. DISCONNECT
DS3 CABLES.
3. UNLOCK AND
DISCONNECT
RPTR CABLE.
4. DISCONNECT WAYSIDE
DS1 CABLES.
MDR-1008
03/09/04
H-51
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
H.3.3.4
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
Remove and replace the OC3/STM-1 AUX interface board using the following procedure:
2. DISCONNECT
WAYSIDE DS1
CABLES.
H-52
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
1. REMOVE I/O
AND RCVR INTFC.
J315
J1
J318
J307
J316
J308
J317
J309
J312
J310
POWER SUPPLY
CONTROLLER
J315
I/O INTFC
LBO
FAN UNIT
RECEIVER
TMN / RELAY
SSPA
TRANSMITTER
P1
P2
P3
DS3
DS1/OC3
SHOWN IN DEFAULT POSITION FOR DS1/OC3
3. STRAP LBO
ADAPTER.
MDR-1015
06/15/04
H-53
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
H-54
3EM20188AAAA
COMPACT Indoor Shelf
3EM20188AAAA
Compact Outdoor Unit
I
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
The MDR-8000 Compact outdoor unit (Figure I - 1) is an outdoor enclosure configuration that
allows operators to setup a non-standby terminal or repeater (requires two enclosures) by
attaching the enclosures to a wall, pole, or tower.
I-1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Compact Outdoor Unit
MDR-1029
11/09/04
3EM20188AAAA
Compact Outdoor Unit
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
CUSTOMER
FURNISHED
ANTENNA
COAX OR WAVEGUIDE
GROUNDING CLAMP
GROUNDING CLAMP
(ENTRANCE TO BLDG)
ICE
BRIDGE
4.5 M
PIPE
TOWER
BOOT &
FEED THRU
PLATE
PWR
CABLE
SIGNAL
ALM
CABLES
COAX
CABLE
GROUNDING
CLAMP
MUX
EQUIPMENT
SHELTER
CommPak
OUTDOOR
UNIT
STATION
GROUNDING
STRAP
MDR-1040
11/09/04
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
I.2
3EM20188AAAA
Compact Outdoor Unit
INTERCONNECT
Note
DC power cable length is dependent on PA output, battery voltage, and distance from the outdoor enclosure to station ground. Determine power
requirements and power cable length before starting installation.
Except for physical routing of the cables, interconnecting the Compact outdoor unit is the same as interconnecting the Compact indoor shelf. Refer to
Appendix H for details. All cables enter the outdoor enclosure through the
conduit access plate. Power and signal cables must be run through separate
conduits. Refer to drawing 3EM14247001EJZZA for further details.
MAINTENANCE
Maintenance for the Compact outdoor unit is the same as maintenance for the Compact indoor
shelf. Refer to Appendix H for details.
I.3
I-4
3EM20188AAAA
Ring Radio Troubleshooting
J
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
The four ring status LEDS on the front panel of the controller module are useful in determining the status of the ring radios. The four LEDs are divided into two groups: Command LEDs
and Idle LEDs. Each group has an LED for the RF path and a LED for the repeater link. The
command LEDs use a flashing pattern to determine the status of the ring. The Idle leds are
used to determine if ring commands are being received on the corresponding port.
COMMAND LEDS
There is a protocol that is used to determine the status of the ring. This protocol consists of
three states: Ring Normal, Ring Fail, or Ring Restore. By using the command LEDs, the
user can determine what is being received on the RF and repeater ports. The following is a
summary of the command LED flashing sequences.
J.1
Ring Normal The green LED is on most of the time and flashes off and then back on very
quickly.
Ring Fail The green LED is off most of the time and flashes from off to on then off again
very quickly.
Ring Normal The green LED is on and off the same duration.
Refer to Figure J - 4 for details and a time representation of the states.
RING
RPTR
NORMAL
A
C
O
D
V
/
R
L
T CMD D
RF
INTFC
RF
RPTR
CABLE
TO/FROM
2ND/RADIO
RPTR
IDLE
T
E
L
RPTR
CABLE
TO/FROM
2ND/RADIO
RPTR
INTFC
RING
RPTR
NORMAL
IDLE LED LIGHTS WHEN INTFC IS IDLE (NO RING SIGNAL IS DETECTED)
CMD LED FLASHES TO INDICATE ONE OF THREE STATUS STATES
RING NORMAL, RING FAIL, OR RING RESTORE FOR THE RF OR
RPTR INTFC.
SEE FOLLOWING TIME REPRESENTATION OF THE STATES.
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
RING NORMAL
TIME
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
RING RESTORE
TIME
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
RING FAIL
ON
OFF
TIME
LMW-7075-SM
08/01/02
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Ring Radio Troubleshooting
RING
RPTR
NORMAL
7
RING
NORMAL
RING
RPTR
NORMAL
RING
NORMAL
RING
NORMAL
RING
NORMAL
RING
NORMAL
AE-37Y
CONTROLLER
RING
RPTR
NORMAL
6
RING
NORMAL
RING
NORMAL
OFF
RING
NORMAL
A
C
D
/
L
T CMD
RF
RING
RPTR
MASTER
1
FLASHES
ON-LONG
OFF-SHORT
O
V
R
D
RING
NORMAL
RING
NORMAL
RPTR
IDLE
RING
RPTR
NORMAL
5
T
E
L
OFF
RING
NORMAL
OFF
SAME INDICATION AT
ALL RADIOS 1-8
RING
NORMAL
RING
NORMAL
RING
NORMAL
RING
RPTR
NORMAL
4
RING
NORMAL
RING
NORMAL
RING
RPTR
NORMAL
3
NOTES: 1. RADIO NAMES RING RPTR NORMAL AND RING RPTR MASTER MATCH
THE WAY THEY ARE PROVISIONED.
2. RPTRS PROVISIONED NORMAL PASS WHATEVER PATTERN IS RECEIVED
TO THE OPPOSITE PORT.
3. RPTRS PROVISIONED MASTER RING NODE CREATE A BREAK. RF XMT AND
RCV SERVICE CHANNEL DATA IS FORCED TO IDLE.
RING
RPTR
NORMAL
2
LMW-7076F
12/14/04
3EM20188AAAA
Ring Radio Troubleshooting
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
A
C
D
/
L
T
FLASHES
ON-SHORT
OFF-LONG
RING
RPTR
NORMAL
7
RF
RING
RESTORE
RING
RPTR
NORMAL
RING
RESTORE
RING
RESTORE
RING
RESTORE
RING
FAIL
RF
RING
RPTR
NORMAL
5
OFF
RF
ON
(RF IS IDLE)
O
V
R
D
INDICATION AT RADIO 1
T
E
L
RING
RESTORE
RING
FAIL
RING
RPTR
NORMAL
2
OFF
INDICATION AT RADIOS
1-3 AND 5-8
RING
RESTORE
RING
RPTR
NORMAL
FLASHES
ON-OFF SAME
(RING
RESTORE)
RING
RPTR
MASTER
1
FLASHES
ON-OFF
SAME
RPTR
OFF
BREAK
A
C
D
/
L
T
AE-37Y
CONTROLLER
A
C
O
D
V
/
R
L
D
T
FLASHES
ON-OFF
SAME
RF IS IDLE
OFF
RING
FAIL
RING
FAIL
RING
RPTR
NORMAL
6
RPTR
T
E
L
OFF
RING
FAIL
FLASHES
ON-SHORT
OFF-LONG
O
V
R
D
RING
RESTORE
RING
FAIL
RING
FAIL
RING
RPTR
NORMAL
3
RPTR
T
E
L
OFF
(RPTR IS NOT IDLE)
INDICATION AT RADIO 4
LMW-7077F
7/31/02
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Ring Radio Troubleshooting
A
C
D
/
L
T
FLASHES
ON-LONG
OFF-SHORT
RF
RING
RPTR
NORMAL
RING
RPTR
MASTER
BREAK
RING
FAIL
RING
FAIL
ON
FLASHES
ON-SHORT
OFF-LONG
(RING FAIL)
OR ON AND
OFF SAME
(RING
RESTORE)
A
C
D
/
L
T
FLASHES
ON-SHORT
OFF-LONG
(RING FAIL)
OR ON AND
OFF SAME
(RING
RESTORE)
O
V
R
D
RF
RPTR
IDLE
T
E
L
OFF
RING
RPTR
NORMAL
2
RING
FAIL
RING
RESTORE
RING
RPTR
NORMAL
3
OFF
SAME INDICATION AT
ALL RADIOS 2-8
RING
FAIL
INDICATION AT FAILED
MASTER RADIO 1
RING
RESTORE
AE-37Y
CONTROLLER
RING
RPTR
NORMAL
6
RPTR
T
E
L
OFF
RING
FAIL
RING
RESTORE
RING
RESTORE
OFF
RING
RPTR
NORMAL
7
O
V
R
D
RING
RESTORE
RING
RESTORE
RING
FAIL
RING
RPTR
NORMAL
5
RING
RESTORE
RING
FAIL
RING
RPTR
NORMAL
4
LMW-7078F
7/31/02
Figure J - 7 DS3/OC3/STM-1 Ring Fault Scenario 2 Repeater Path Failure Between Repeater and Master
J-4
3EM20188AAAA
Ring Radio Troubleshooting
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
FLASHES
ON-SHORT
OFF-LONG
RING
RPTR
NORMAL
7
RF
RING
RESTORE
RING
RPTR
NORMAL
OFF
RING
RESTORE
RING
RPTR
NORMAL
6
BREAK
AE-37Y
CONTROLLER
A
FLASHES
C
O
ON-SHORT
D
V
/
OFF-LONG
R
L
D
CMD
(RING FAIL) OR T
ON AND OFF
RF
RPTR
SAME (RING
RESTORE)
IDLE
RING
RPTR
NORMAL
5
T
E
L
OFF
RING
RESTORE
A
C
D
/
L
T
RF
OFF
O
V
R
D
T
E
L
OFF
RING
RPTR
MASTER
1
FLASHES
ON-SHORT
OFF-LONG
(RING FAIL) OR
ON AND OFF
SAME (RING
RESTORE)
RING
RESTORE
RING
FAIL
RING
RPTR
NORMAL
2
OFF
RING
RPTR
NORMAL
OFF
RPTR
RING
FAIL
RING
FAIL
FLASHES
ON AND OFF
SAME
FLASHES
ON-SHORT
OFF-LONG
IDLE
RING
FAIL
RING
RESTORE
RING
FAIL
A
C
O
D
V
/
R
L
T CMD D
RING
RESTORE
RING
FAIL
RING
RPTR
NORMAL
3
RPTR
T
E
L
ON
INDICATION AT FAILED
RPTR RADIO 5
LMW-7079F
8/01/02
Figure J - 8 DS3/OC3/STM-1 Ring Fault Scenario 3 Repeater Path Failure Between Repeaters
J-5
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Ring Radio Troubleshooting
RING
RPTR
NORMAL
7
RING
RESTORE
RING
RESTORE
RING
RPTR
NORMAL
8
RING
NORMAL
RING
RESTORE
RING
RESTORE
RING
RESTORE
RING
RPTR
NORMAL
RING
RPTR
MASTER
1
BREAK
REPAIRED
RING
RESTORE
RING
RESTORE
RING
RESTORE
RING
NORMAL
RING
RPTR
NORMAL
RING
RPTR
NORMAL
RING
RESTORE
RING
RESTORE
RING
RESTORE
RING
RESTORE
RING
RPTR
NORMAL
4
RING
RESTORE
RING
RESTORE
RING
RPTR
NORMAL
3
LMW-7080F
8/01/02
Figure J - 9 Ring Fault Scenario 4 Repeater Path Failure Between Repeaters Repaired
J-6
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 4 DS1
K
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
This appendix provides the procedure to upgrade an 8 or 16 DS1, DS3, and/or OC3
MDR-8000 radio to Ethernet. Upgrade kits, containing the modules, subboards, and assemblies required to upgrade, are available. Refer to drawing 3EM176410000UDZZA.
WARNING
Possibility of
Damage
to Equipment
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
Note
This procedure requires a technician at each end of the hop and communication between ends.
CHANGING FROM DS1 TO ETHERNET RADIO
This procedure describes the modules, test equipment, and specific steps to be followed to
upgrade an 8 or 16 DS1 radio to an Ethernet radio in the field. Upgrading to Ethernet requires
the radio to be out of service.
K.1
K.1.1 Task
At each end of the hop, the DS1 LBO must be replaced with the OC3 Aux Interface. The DS1
I/O interface modules must be replaced with the Ethernet I/O interface modules. CAT5 UTP
cables have to be run, obsolete RCVRs (if any) have to be replaced with new preferred RCVRs,
and software has to be changed.
K.1.2 Time Estimate
K-1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 4 DS1
c. Check to make sure you have DS1/DS3/OC3 RCVR modules (refer to Table 1 - 1
in the General Section) to replace any obsolete DS1 RCVR modules.
d. Check to make sure you have Ethernet I/O Interface modules (PN 3EM16610AA)
to replace DS1 I/O interface modules.
e. Check for cable length problems. Be aware that the new OC3 Aux Interface has
a different connector configuration and may require additional cable length.
f. Check to make sure you have the correct OC3 repeater cable (PN 695-4125-007/
013) in the correct length, if the DS1 radio being changed to Ethernet is a
repeater.
g. Check to make sure you have the correct DS1 capacity keys (PN 967-1609-008 8
DS1 128 TCM or PN 967-1609-010 16 DS1 128 TCM) in the quantities required
(one for each XMTR and RCVR).
h. Check cable runs are complete and properly terminated.
i. Check to make sure you have the correct CAT5 UTP cables (refer to Para. 5.20.4)
in the quantities required.
j. Check to make sure you have the Ethernet software (PN 695-9406-024) required
to replace the DS1 software.
K.1.4 Tools and Test Equipment Required
None
K.1.5 Procedure
K-2
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 4 DS1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
4. Disconnect RF output
cable and remove XMTR
A4 and B4 (if equipped).
MDR8KE-001
01/12/06
K-3
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 4 DS1
01
01
RPT
R
P30
3
RPTR
P314
R
RPT
4
P30
K-4
789
2 34
56
789
2 34
56
MDR8KE-002
01/12/06
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 4 DS1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
d. Remove 4 screws.
MDR8K-003
01/10/06
K-5
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 4 DS1
d. Install 4 screws.
K-6
MDR8KE-004
01/10/06
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 4 DS1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
7. On RCVR module A2 and B2 (if equipped), verify capacity key part number is correct for required ETH
data capacity:
ETH Data
Capacity
Equivalent DS1
Capacity
MOD
Scheme
Cap Key
Part Number
12 Mb/s
24 Mb/s
8 DS1
16 DS1
128 TCM
128 TCM
967-1609-008
967-1609-010
If Part Number is correct go to step 9. If not, remove and replace capacity key. Refer to step 8.
8. On RCVR module A2 and B2 (if equipped), remove and replace DS1 capacity key:
MDR8KE-005
01/10/06
K-7
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
9.
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 4 DS1
On XMTR module A4 and B4 (if equipped), verify capacity key part number is correct for required ETH
data capacity:
ETH Data
Capacity
Equivalent DS1
Capacity
MOD
Scheme
Cap Key
Part Number
12 Mb/s
24 Mb/s
8 DS1
16 DS1
128 TCM
128 TCM
967-1609-008
967-1609-010
If part number is correct, go to step 11. If not, remove and replace capacity key. Refer to step 10.
10. On XMTR module A4 and B4 (if equipped), remove and replace XMTR DS1 capacity key as follows:
K-8
MDR8KE-006
01/10/06
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 4 DS1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
K-9
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 4 DS1
W
DS AYS
1 ID
P2 OU E
02 T
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
RPTR
P203
WAYSIDE
DS1 IN
P201
K-10
MDR8KE-008
01/10/06
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 4 DS1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Note
This procedure requires a technician at each end of the hop and communication between ends.
K.2.1 Task
At each end of the hop, the DS3 LBO must be replaced with the Ethernet I/O interface modules, CAT5 UTP cables have to be run and software has to be changed.
K.2.2 Time Estimate
K-11
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 4 DS1
None
K.2.5 Procedure
1.
SET PA ON/OFF
SWITCH TO OFF
2 34
01
01
DISCONNECT RF
INPUT CABLE AND
REMOVE RCVR A2 AND B2
(IF EQUIPPED).
3.
4.
K-12
DISCONNECT RF
OUTPUT CABLE AND
REMOVE XMTR A4 AND B4
(IF EQUIPPED).
789
2.
56
789
2 34
56
MDR-1150
04/18/05
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 4 DS1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
W
A
DS YS
I
P2 1 IN DE
01
DE
SI UT
Y
A O
W S1 02
D P2
LMW-8010
10/17/02
RPTR
P401
b.
DISCONNECT WAYSIDE
DS1 INPUT CABLE
(IF EQUIPPED)
d.
c.
DISCONNECT WAYSIDE
DS1 OUTPUT CABLE
(IF EQUIPPED)
K-13
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 4 DS1
e. REMOVE 4 SCREWS.
f.
LMW-8012
10/17/02
g.
K-14
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 4 DS1
6.
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
LMW-8013
10/17/02
K-15
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 4 DS1
7. ON RCVR MODULE A2 AND B2 (IF EQUIPPED), REMOVE AND REPLACE DS3 CAPACITY KEY WITH
OC3 CAPACITY KEY AS FOLLOWS:
a.
K-16
b.
c.
LMW-8014
05/25/05
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 4 DS1
8.
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
ON XMTR A4 AND B4 (IF EQUIPPED), REMOVE AND REPLACE XMTR DS3 CAPACITY KEY
WITH OC3 CAPACITY KEY:
a.
b.
c.
LMW-8015
05/25/05
K-17
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 4 DS1
9.
MDR-1152
04/18/05
K-18
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
W
DS AYS
1 ID
P2 OU E
02 T
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 4 DS1
RPTR
P203
WAYSIDE
DS1 IN
P201
MDR8KE-009
01/10/06
K-19
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
K.3
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 4 DS1
Note
This procedure requires a technician at each end of the hop and communication between ends.
K.3.1 Task
At each end of the hop, the OC3 I/O Interface modules must be replaced with the Ethernet I/O
Interface modules, CAT5 UTP cables have to be run and software has to be changed.
K.3.2 Time Estimate
None
K.3.5 Procedure
K-20
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 4 DS1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
MDR8KE-010
01/10/06
K-21
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 4 DS1
K.4
Edit
Back
Address
View
Go
Forward
Favorites
Up
Help
Cut
Copy
Paste
Undo
Delete
Properties
Views
C:\
1 DOUBLE CLICK
Release Docs
setup.exe
setup.1st
win12_12 CAB
Loading
Files
MDR-8000 OC3 USI Setup
Setup cannot install system files or update shared files if they are in use.
Before proceeding, we recommend that you close any application you may
be running.
2 CLICK HERE
OK
Exit Setup
3 CLICK HERE
Click this button to install MDR-8000 DS3 USI software to the specified
destination directory.
Copying
Files
Directory:
Change Directory
c:\winusi13\
Exit Setup
Downloading
4 CLICK HERE
MDR-1154
01/10/06
K-22
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 4 DS1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
F7
F8
F9
1
New
Controller
Alarm
Status
Analog Monitor
Performance
Firmware Upgrade
Station Alarm
User Control
Provisioning
Download
LOCAL MAIN
ELMC Address:
200R2
Description:
Communicating***
COM 1
200R2
F6
Alarm Status
ELMC Address:
Description:
F6
Analog Monitor
F7
Performance
F8
Station Alarm
F9
User Control
Provisioning
LOCAL DOWNLOAD
Tuesday, June 25, 2002 2:16:15 PM USI VersionR1.06
Communicating*
Rack-A - bottom radio
200R2
MDR-8000 3DS3
C:\windnld\8000 DS3\css12_16.dat
c:
STEP
4
c:\
windnld
8000 OC3
css13_12.dat
css13_14.dat
css13_15.dat
css13_16.dat
css14_R1_00_01.dat
css14_R1_01_01.dat
Start Download
Stop Download
Click Options/Firmware
Upgrade/Download
OK
Cancel
UserVersion
SystemR1.05
Interface
MDR-8000 OC3 Alcatel
Controller
Download Successful!
OK
MDR-1155
01/10/06
K-23
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 4 DS1
Note
The controller version display was changed from Rx.yy to Rx.yy.zz with the
release of R1.01.01.
Major Release
Minor Release
Maint. Release
The R1.00 and R1.01 controller software versions will only support downloads in which the x.yy number is different from the current software
installed on the controller. Therefore, two controller software versions are
included on the Cd-ROM: R1.01.01 and R1.00.01. The only difference
between these two versions is the version number. All changes referenced to
R1.01.01 in the Customer Release Notes are also included in R1.00.01.
K-24
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 32 DS1
L
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
This appendix provides the procedure to upgrade DS1, DS3, and/or OC3 MDR-8000 radio to
Ethernet with up to 32 DS1. Upgrade kits, containing the modules, subboards, and assemblies
required to upgrade, are available. Refer to drawing 3EM176410000UDZZA.
WARNING
Possibility of
Damage
to Equipment
CAUTION
Possibility of
Service
Interruption
Note
This procedure requires a technician at each end of the hop and communication between ends.
CHANGING FROM DS1 TO ETHERNET RADIO
This procedure describes the modules, test equipment, and specific steps to be followed to
upgrade a DS1 radio to an Ethernet radio with DS1 in the field. Upgrading to Ethernet
requires the radio to be out of service.
L.1
L.1.1 Task
Changing existing DS1 radio to Ethernet with up to 32 DS1 lines requires the following
actions:
1 Replacing existing software with Ethernet software PN 695-9406-024. Minimum
radio controller software requirements must be met before the new Ethernet software
can be loaded. The minimum DS1 radio controller software requirement is R2.00.
This software version contains Universal USI software version R3.0.
2 Replacing I/O interface modules with DX-35S ETH/T1 I/O interface modules
(PN 3EM16169AA).
3 Replacing capacity keys in XMTRs and RCVRs (data rate/bandwidth/modulation
dependent).
L-1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 32 DS1
sioning dependent).
5 Replacing DS1 LBO with ETH/T1 line interface board (PN 3EM16300AA).
6 Installing either optical or CAT5 UTP cable (electrical).
7 Installing DS1 cable.
None.
L.1.5 Procedure
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 32 DS1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
4. Disconnect RF output
cable and remove XMTR
A4 and B4 (if equipped).
MDR8KE-001
01/12/06
L-3
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 32 DS1
0 1
0 1
8 9
OUT
DS1 04
P3
L-4
8 9
RPTR
P314
DS1
IN
P30
3
MDR8KE-002
07/10/07
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 32 DS1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
d. Remove 4 screws.
MDR8K-003
01/10/06
L-5
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 32 DS1
d. Install 4 screws.
L-6
ETH-2000
07/10/07
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 32 DS1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
7. On RCVR module A2 and B2 (if equipped), verify capacity key part number is correct for required ETH
data capacity:
ETH Data
Capacity
Equivalent DS1
Capacity
MOD
Scheme
Cap Key
Part Number
8 Mb/s
12 Mb/s
12 Mb/s
16 Mb/s
24 Mb/s
24 Mb/s
5 DS1
8 DS1
8 DS1
11 DS1
16 DS1
16 DS1
32 TCM
32 TCM
128 TCM
32 TCM
128 TCM
32 TCM
967-1609-023
967-1609-003
967-1609-008
967-1609-025
967-1609-010
967-1609-005
If Part Number is correct go to step 9. If not, remove and replace capacity key. Refer to step 8.
8. On RCVR module A2 and B2 (if equipped), remove and replace capacity key:
ETH-2001
07/10/07
L-7
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
9.
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 32 DS1
On XMTR module A4 and B4 (if equipped), verify capacity key part number is correct for required ETH
data capacity:
ETH Data
Capacity
Equivalent DS1
Capacity
MOD
Scheme
Cap Key
Part Number
8 Mb/s
12 Mb/s
12 Mb/s
16 Mb/s
24 Mb/s
24 Mb/s
5 DS1
8 DS1
8 DS1
11 DS1
16 DS1
16 DS1
32 TCM
32 TCM
128 TCM
32 TCM
128 TCM
32 TCM
967-1609-023
967-1609-003
967-1609-008
967-1609-025
967-1609-010
967-1609-005
If part number is correct, go to step 11. If not, remove and replace capacity key. Refer to step 10.
10. On XMTR module A4 and B4 (if equipped), remove and replace XMTR capacity key as follows:
L-8
ETH-2002
07/10/07
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 32 DS1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
L-9
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 32 DS1
1- DS
32 1
P3 OU
04 T
1
DS 2 IN
-3 3
17 J32
WAYSIDE
UT
DS1 1-16 O
P304
DS1
1-16 IN
P203
RPTR
P203
16. Connect
RPTR cable.
18. Connect DS1 1-16
output cable.
19. Install Optical or CAT5(E) UTP cables
on Ethernet I/O Interface modules.
20. Install Ethernet software.
Refer to Paragraph L.1.1.
ETH-2004
07/10/07
L-10
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 32 DS1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
Note
This procedure requires a technician at each end of the hop and communication between ends.
L.2.1 Task
Changing existing DS3 radios to Ethernet with up to 32 DS1 lines requires the following
actions:
1 Replacing existing software with Ethernet software PN 695-9406-024. Minimum
radio controller software requirements must be met before the new Ethernet software
can be loaded. The minimum DS3 radio controller software requirement is R2.02.
This software version contains universal USI software version R3.0.
2 Replacing I/O interface modules with DX-35S ETH/T1 I/O interface modules (PN
3EM16169AA)
3 Replacing capacity keys in XMTRs and RCVRs (data rate/bandwidth/modulation
dependent)
4 Replacing option key in controllers (data rate/bandwidth/capacity/modulation/provi-
sioning dependent).
5 Replacing DS3 LBO with ETH/T1 line interface board (PN 3EM16300AA).
6 Installing either optical or CAT5 UTP cable (electrical).
7 Installing DS1 cable.
L-11
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 32 DS1
e. Check for DS1 cable length problems. Be aware that the new ETH/T1 Line
Interface has a different connector configuration and may require additional
cable length for the DS1 input connector.
f. Check to make sure you have the correct repeater cable (PN 695-4125-007/013)
in the correct length if the DS3 radio being changed to Ethernet is a repeater.
g. Check to make sure you have the correct OC3 capacity keys (1-line OC3 PN
3EM04177AA) in the quantities required (one for each XMTR and RCVR or
3-line OC3 PN 3EM04177AB).
h. Check cable runs are complete and properly terminated.
i. Check to make sure you have the correct optical or electrical CAT5 UTP cables
(refer to Paragraph 4.4) in the quantities required.
j. Check to make sure you have the Ethernet software (PN 695-9406-024) required
to replace the DS3 software.
L.2.4 Tools and Test Equipment Required
None.
L.2.5 Procedure
L-12
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 32 DS1
SET PA ON/OFF
SWITCH TO OFF
2 3
5 6
0 1
0 1
DISCONNECT RF
INPUT CABLE AND
REMOVE RCVR A2 AND B2
(IF EQUIPPED).
3.
4.
7 8
2.
7 8
2 3 4
5 6
1.
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
DISCONNECT RF
OUTPUT CABLE AND
REMOVE XMTR A4 AND B4
(IF EQUIPPED).
MDR-1150
07/13/07
L-13
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 32 DS1
W
A
DS YS
I
P2 1 IN DE
01
DE
SI UT
Y
A O
W S1 02
D P2
LMW-8010
10/17/02
RPTR
P401
b.
DISCONNECT WAYSIDE
DS1 INPUT CABLE
(IF EQUIPPED)
d.
c.
L-14
DISCONNECT WAYSIDE
DS1 OUTPUT CABLE
(IF EQUIPPED)
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 32 DS1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
e. REMOVE 4 SCREWS.
f.
LMW-8012
10/17/02
g.
L-15
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 32 DS1
d. Install 4 screws.
L-16
ETH-2000
07/10/07
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 32 DS1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
7. ON RCVR MODULE A2 AND B2 (IF EQUIPPED), REMOVE AND REPLACE DS3 CAPACITY KEY WITH
OC3 CAPACITY KEY AS FOLLOWS:
1 Line OC3 Capacity Key PN 3EM04177AA
a.
b.
c.
LMW-8014
07/13/07
L-17
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
8.
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 32 DS1
ON XMTR A4 AND B4 (IF EQUIPPED), REMOVE AND REPLACE XMTR DS3 CAPACITY KEY
WITH OC3 CAPACITY KEY AS FOLLOWS:
a.
L-18
b.
c.
LMW-8015
07/13/07
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 32 DS1
9.
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
ETH-2007
07/13/07
L-19
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 32 DS1
17
1
DS 2 IN
-3 3
17 P32
D
-3 S1
2
P3 OU
24 T
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
WAYSIDE
UT
DS1 1-16 O
P304
DS1
1-16 IN
P303
L-20
ETH-2008
07/13/07
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 32 DS1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
L.3
Note
This procedure requires a technician at each end of the hop and communication between ends.
L.3.1 Task
Changing existing OC3 radios to Ethernet with up to 32 DS1 lines requires the following
actions:
1 Replacing existing software with Ethernet software PN 695-9406-024. Minimum
radio controller software requirements must be met before the new Ethernet software
can be loaded. The minimum OC3 radio controller software requirement is R2.03.
This software version contains universal USI software version R3.0.
2 Replacing I/O interface modules with DX-35S ETH/T1 I/O interface modules (PN
3EM16169AA)
3
sioning dependent).
5 Replacing DS1/DS3 LBO or OC3 AUX interface with ETH/T1 line interface board (PN
3EM16300AA)
6 Installing either optical or CAT5 UTP cable (electrical)
7 Installing DS1 cable.
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 32 DS1
f. Check to make sure you have the correct repeater cable (PN 695-4125-007/013)
in the correct length if the DS3 radio being changed to Ethernet is a repeater.
g. Check optical or electrical CAT5 UTP cable runs to Ethernet I/O Interface module are complete and properly terminated.
h. Check to make sure you have the Ethernet software (PN 695-9406-024)
required to replace the OC3 software.
L.3.4 Tools and Test Equipment Required
None
L.3.5 Procedure
L-22
MDR8KE-010
07/18/07
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 32 DS1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
4. Disconnect RF output
cable and remove
XMTR A4 and B4
(if equipped).
3. Remove OC3 I/O
INTFC A3 and B3
(if equipped).
2. Disconnect RF input
cable and remove
RCVR A2 and B2
(if equipped).
ETH-2009
07/18/07
L-23
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 32 DS1
8 9
DS
1
P2 OU
02 T
8 9
0 1
0 1
RPTR
P203
DS1 IN
P201
L-24
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 32 DS1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
d. Remove 4 screws.
ETH-2011
07/23/07
L-25
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 32 DS1
d. Install 4 screws.
L-26
ETH-2012
07/23/07
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 32 DS1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
7. On RCVR module A2 and B2 (if equipped), verify capacity key part number is correct for required
number of lines:
If Part Number is correct go to step 9. If not, remove and replace capacity key. Refer to step 8.
8. On RCVR module A2 and B2 (if equipped), remove and replace DS1 capacity key:
ETH-2013
07/23/07
L-27
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 32 DS1
9. On RCVR module A2 and B2 (if equipped), verify capacity key part number is correct for required
number of lines:
10. On XMTR module A4 and B4 (if equipped), remove and replace XMTR DS1 capacity key as follows:
L-28
ETH-2014
07/23/07
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 32 DS1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
L-29
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 32 DS1
DS
1
O 17P3 UT 32
24
2
-3
17
1
DS IN 23
P3
DS1 1-16
IN
P303
WAYSIDE
UT
DS1 1-16 O
P304
RPTR
P203
L-30
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 32 DS1
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
L.4
Edit
Back
Address
View
Go
Forward
Favorites
Up
Help
Cut
Copy
Paste
Undo
Delete
Properties
Views
C:\
1 DOUBLE CLICK
Release Docs
setup.exe
setup.1st
win12_12 CAB
Loading
Files
MDR-8000 OC3 USI Setup
Setup cannot install system files or update shared files if they are in use.
Before proceeding, we recommend that you close any application you may
be running.
2 CLICK HERE
OK
Exit Setup
3 CLICK HERE
Click this button to install MDR-8000 DS3 USI software to the specified
destination directory.
Copying
Files
Directory:
Change Directory
c:\winusi13\
Exit Setup
Downloading
4 CLICK HERE
MDR-1154
01/10/06
L-31
Issue 3
July 23, 2007
3EM20188AAAA
Ethernet Upgrade Procedure 32 DS1
F7
F8
F9
1
New
Controller
Alarm
Status
Analog Monitor
Performance
Firmware Upgrade
Station Alarm
User Control
Provisioning
Download
LOCAL MAIN
ELMC Address:
200R2
Description:
Communicating***
COM 1
200R2
F6
Alarm Status
ELMC Address:
Description:
F6
Analog Monitor
F7
Performance
F8
Station Alarm
F9
User Control
Provisioning
LOCAL DOWNLOAD
Tuesday, June 25, 2002 2:16:15 PM USI VersionR1.06
Communicating*
Rack-A - bottom radio
200R2
MDR-8000 3DS3
C:\windnld\8000 DS3\css12_16.dat
c:
STEP
4
c:\
windnld
8000 OC3
css13_12.dat
css13_14.dat
css13_15.dat
css13_16.dat
css14_R1_00_01.dat
css14_R1_01_01.dat
Start Download
Stop Download
Click Options/Firmware
Upgrade/Download
OK
Cancel
UserVersion
SystemR1.05
Interface
MDR-8000 OC3 Alcatel
Controller
Download Successful!
L-32
OK
MDR-1155
01/10/06